Page 1

ACADEMIC CATALOGUE 2017–2018

INNOVATION AND BEST PRACTICE FOR BUSINESS SUCCESS


About Us Kogan Page is the leading independent global publisher of specialist content, from books and supporting resources to toolkits and case study libraries. Founded in 1967, our award-winning work offers solutions for achievement in the following areas: Business, Finance, Risk & Information Management Human Resources, L&D, Coaching & CIPD Marketing & Public Relations Logistics, Operations & Supply Chain Management Employability, Careers & Entrepreneurship

Corporate Solutions Discover our bespoke solutions for businesses, including bulk sales and custom publishing opportunities, at www.koganpage.com/corporate

Ebooks All Kogan Page books are available as ebooks from major ebook retailers and our website. We can also offer multiple access for students through digital textbook platforms such as Kortext and VitalSource.

Inspection Copies Our books are available to lecturers through our inspection copy service. We will consider requests from any instructor with a registered academic address, teaching a class of 12 or more students. You can request an inspection copy by registering for an academic account at www.koganpage.com/inspectioncopies

Stay Informed Join your peers and subscribe to our newsletters for expert articles, free downloads and special offers. Sign up today at www.koganpage.com/newsletters

Connect with Us: Kogan Page: @KoganPage Accounting & Finance: @KPAcctFinance Business, Risk & Information Management: @KPMgmtLeaders Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship: @KPEmployability HR, L&D, Coaching & CIPD: @KPCoachHR Logistics, Operations & Supply Chain Management: @KPLogistics Marketing & Public Relations: @KPMktng Rights and Licensing: @KPRights You can also find us on:

Contact Customer Services T: +44 (0) 20 7278 0433 | E: kpinfo@koganpage.com


Get the latest on business, employability, HR, marketing, logistics & supply chain and accounting & finance delivered straight to your inbox. Every week, we’ll send you valuable content by our author experts based on your areas of interest. And if your students sign up, they can keep up with the latest thinking to help inform classroom discussion, boost their grades and improve their career prospects. By becoming newsletter subscribers, you and your students will receive: • Videos and articles filled with tips, trends and discussion topics • Excerpts from our cutting-edge books • Updates about new textbooks and supporting resources, alongside special offers

Subscribe to our newsletters today at www.koganpage.com/newsletter


G IN M N CO SOO

READ ANYTIME, ANYWHERE WITH OUR NEW PRINT AND EBOOK BUNDLES With our print and ebook bundles available at www.koganpage.com you and your students can read Kogan Page and CIPD textbooks anytime, anywhere. For only a few pounds more than the print book, you can have the printed copy for your desk plus access to the ebook through the Kogan Page Bookshelf®. Powered by VitalSource®, Bookshelf provides an optimized reading experience for you and your students. You can: • • • • •

Read books offline on iOS, Android, Mac and PC Bookmark, highlight and search for easy navigation Adjust the font size to suit your preferences Cite content correctly in a variety of citation styles Learn collaboratively by sharing notes

We offer bulk discounts on print books, ebooks and bundles to academic institutions – contact us at corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com


Table of Contents by Subject Marketing, PR and Sales

Advertising B2B Marketing Branding Consumer Behaviour Digital Marketing Event Management Key Account Management Luxury Marketing Market Research Marketing Communications Marketing Fundamentals Marketing Science Marketing Strategy Product Design Public Relations Retail Studies Sales

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Accounting & Finance Banking Business & Management Skills Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility Information & Data Management International Business Leadership Professional Services Risk Management Strategy

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching Change Management Coaching Employee Engagement Employment Law / Relations Human Resources Management International Human Resource Management Leadership Learning and Development Organizations Performance Management Project Management Reward Management Talent Management

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Logistics Operations Management Procurement Supply Chain Management Transport

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

5

Business Skills Employability Entrepreneurship

www.koganpage.com


Table of Contents by Title Marketing, PR and Sales

Advertising Essential Advertising Native Advertising Persuasive Copywriting B2B Marketing Innovative B2B Marketing B2B Marketing Strategy B2B Customer Experience Branding The New Strategic Brand Management Digital Branding Audio Branding The Escape Industry Branding Inside Out How Cool Brands Stay Hot The TV Brand Builders Brands with a Conscience On Purpose Paid Attention What is a 21st Century Brand? Brand Psychology Fashion Brands Branded Beauty Consumer Behaviour Decoding the Irrational Consumer Digital Marketing Digital Marketing Strategy Understanding Digital Marketing Leading Digital Strategy Mobile Marketing The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing Video Marketing Strategy Understanding Social Media Social Media Risk and Governance Event Management Event Planning and Management Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management Key Account Management Key Account Management Implementing Key Account Management A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing Luxury Marketing The Luxury Strategy The Management of Luxury Kapferer on Luxury Rethinking Prestige Branding Market Research in Practice Market Research Questionnaire Design User Research Neuro Design Marketing Communications Marketing Communications Experiential Marketing Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing Valuable Content Marketing Marketing Fundamentals Customer-Centric Marketing Marketing Science Marketing Analytics Marketing Value Metrics Geodemographics for Marketers Predictive Analytics for Marketers Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice Practical Text Analytics Marketing Strategy Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning How to Write a Marketing Plan Product Design Design Management Public Relations Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns Myths of PR Ethics in Public Relations Media Interview Techniques Chartered Public Relations Evaluating Public Relations The PR Professional’s Handbook Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management Retail Studies Retail Marketing Strategy Category Management in Purchasing Sales Sales and Marketing Channels

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management Accounting & Finance International Finance The Handbook of International Trade and Finance Accounting and Finance for Managers Accounting for Non-Accountants Forensic Accounting and Finance Understanding Islamic Financial Services Economics for Business Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups Banking Investment and Portfolio Management Relationship Management in Banking Retail and Digital Banking Commercial Lending Anti-Money Laundering Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking Business & Management Skills The Business Skills Handbook Myths of Management Contract Management Continuing Professional Development Researching and Writing Dissertations Business Research Business Research Methods Practical Statistics

6

www.koganpage.com

77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98

Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility Corporate Governance Ethics and CSR Business Ethics in Practice Responsible Business Global Business Ethics Information & Data Management IT Governance International Business Cross-Cultural Management in Work Organisations Emerging Markets International Management Leadership Essential Leadership Myths of Leadership Professional Services Leadership Handbook The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills The Leadership Skills Handbook Professional Services Practical Consultancy Ethics Strategic Tendering for Professional Services Risk Management Fundamentals of Risk Management Risk Management Cyber Risk Management Rethinking Reputational Risk The Risk Management Handbook People Risk Management Strategy Strategic Decision Making Radical Business Model Transformation

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121

Change Management Making Sense of Change Management 123 Managing Change 124 Organizational Change Explained 125 Neuroscience for Organizational Change 126 Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change 127 Leading Cultural Change 128 The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook 129 Leading Change 130 Coaching Excellence in Coaching 131 50 Top Tools for Coaching 132 Leadership Team Coaching 133 Coaching and Mentoring 134 Employee Engagement Employee Engagement 135 50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement 136 Employment Law / Relations Employment Law 137 Introduction To Employment Law 138 Employment Law 139 Managing Employment Relations 140 Employment Relations 141 Employee Relations 142 50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing 143 Human Resources Management Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 144 Introduction to Human Resource Management 145 Human Resource Management at Work 146 Human Resource Practice 147 Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters 148 Human Resource Management in a Business Context 149 Studying Human Resource Management 150 Human Resource Management 151 Human Resource Management in Context 152 Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management 153 Strategic Internal Communication 154 Effective HR Communication 155 Internal Communications 156 Predictive HR Analytics 157 Data-driven Organization Design 158 Data-Driven HR 159 The Psychology of Work 160 Myths of Work 161 Research Methods in Human Resource Management 162 International Human Resource Management International Human Resource Management 163 International Human Resource Management 164 International Human Resource Management 165 International Human Resource Development 166 Leadership Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR 167 Leading, Managing and Developing People 168 Developing Skills for Business Leadership 169 Leadership and Management Development 170 Learning and Development Developing Leadership and Management Skills 171 Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 172 Studying Learning and Development 173 Learning and Talent Development 174 Professional Practice in Learning and Development 175 Learning for Organizational Development 176 Learning and Development 177 Developing People and Organisations 178 Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 179 Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions 180 Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process 181 Developing and Using Consultancy Skills 182 Facilitating Collective and Social Learning 183 Organizations Organization Development 184 Understanding Organisation Development 185 Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change 186 The Agile Organization 187 People and Organisational Development 188 Organizational Management 189

Organization Design Organizational Behaviour Introduction to Organisational Behaviour Performance Management Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management Performance Management Performance Management Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management Motivation and Performance Project Management Understanding Project Management Reward Management Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice Reward Management Reward Management Talent Management Resourcing and Talent Management Inclusive Talent Management

190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Logistics The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 205 Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection 206 Humanitarian Logistics 208 Introduction to Global Logistics 209 Green Logistics 210 Logistics and Retail Management 211 E-Logistics 212 Aviation Logistics 213 Fashion Logistics 214 Defence Logistics 215 Maritime Logistics 216 Marine Insurance 217 Port Management 218 Container Logistics 219 Packaging Logistics 220 Global Logistics 221 Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 222 Decarbonizing Logistics 223 Operations Management Warehouse Management 224 The Operations Advantage 225 Inventory Management 226 Business Operations Models 227 Procurement Strategic Sourcing Management 228 Strategic Sourcing and Category Management 229 Strategic Procurement 230 Leading Procurement Strategy 231 The Buyer’s Toolkit 232 Supplier Relationship Management 233 Supply Chain Management Managing the Retail Supply Chain 234 E-Business and Supply Chain Integration 235 Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain 236 Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics 237 Financing the End-to-end Supply Chain 238 Global Supply Chain Ecosystems 239 Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management 240 Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 241 A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains 242 Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 243 Supply Chain Ethics 244 Understanding Planned Obsolescence 245 The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit 246 The Lean Supply Chain 247 Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction 248 Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics 249 Supply Chain Risk Management 250 Transport Warehousing and Transportation Logistics 251 International Freight Transport 252 Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018 253

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Business Skills How to Write Effective Business English 255 Improve Your Global Business English 256 Decision Making and Problem Solving 257 How to Organize Yourself 258 Develop Your Presentation Skills 259 Essay Writing Skills 260 Confident Coding 261 Confident Data Skills 262 Confident Digital Content 263 Confident Web Design 264 Employability The A-Z of Careers and Jobs 265 Ultimate Cover Letters 266 Ultimate CV 267 Ultimate New Job 268 Ultimate Job Search 269 Ultimate Interview 270 Ultimate IQ Tests 271 Ultimate Aptitude Tests 272 Ultimate Psychometric Tests 273 Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 274 Readymade CVs 275 Superconductors 276 Knockout Job Interview Presentations 277 Preparing the Perfect Job Application 278 Assessment Centre Success 279 Developing Employability and Enterprise 280 Entrepreneurship Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation 281 A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship 282 Growing Business Handbook 283 Innovation 284 The Business Plan Workbook 285 Starting a Successful Business 286 Starting a Business From Home 287 How to Prepare a Business Plan 288


Marketing & Public Relations Innovation and Best Practice in Advertising B2B Marketing Branding Consumer Behaviour CRM Digital Marketing Key Account Management Luxury Marketing Market Research Marketing Communications Marketing Fundamentals Marketing Science Marketing Strategy Public Relations Retail Studies Sales

www.koganpage.com

7


Essentials of Advertising Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478391 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478407 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Advertising

This book

<< Takes a cross-disciplinary approach, explores the diverse ways advertising is interpreted by

psychologists, sociologists, economists, historians, marketers, and media researchers - giving students the skills to respond sensitively to any advertising challenge << Brings big picture, theoretical concepts down to earth, linking them to everyday practice with thought-provoking examples from international companies << Builds awareness of the different ways advertising is interpreted across industries, enabling students to develop careers aligned with their abilities and interests, both client and agency side << Includes in-depth coverage of ethics, encouraging students to think critically about advertising in different contexts, and respond appropriately when faced with ethically subjective situations throughout their careers << Online resources: Lecture slides, self-test questions, group activities, case studies, figures, and web-links to industry body research, magazines, relevant research, blogs, podcasts, videos and documentaries

Description Essentials of Advertising is designed to help students navigate their way through the field of advertising. As a subject, advertising affects us all - it surrounds us every day. Yet there is a great deal of variety in the way advertising is interpreted, and practitioners and academics from different backgrounds and disciplines study advertising in vastly different ways. For example, psychologists try to understand what happens to our brains when we see adverts, while economists try to understand whether money spent on advertising is worth it. Essentials of Advertising will introduce readers to the key concepts of advertising as they have been developed not only by psychologists and economists, but also by sociologists, historians, marketers and media researchers - not to mention advertising practitioners themselves. Meticulously researched, Essentials of Advertising will allow readers to understand not just what different research traditions say about advertising, but why they say it. This will help students develop key analytic skills, and to critically evaluate and exploit the existing research into advertising, based on a greater understanding of where it comes from. This allows them to develop greater perception and awareness professionally, and acts as a springboard for students to jump into the wider area of advertising studies and develop their careers according to their own interests. Online resources include lecture slides, self-test questions, group activities, figures, and case studies for specific chapters, plus web links to industry body research and relevant further reading.

Author Information Dr Robert Cluley is assistant professor at Nottingham University Business School. He has contributed to a range of texts on branding and advertising, along with a plethora of research publications and edited collections. He teaches in the fields of branding, advertising and marketing communications.

8

Marketing, PR and Sales

Table of Contents 1

The Essentials of Advertising – What Are Adverts and Why Study Them? 2 Big Questions – Advertising, Communication, Rhetoric and Persuasion 3 Art or Science – What do Legendary Advertisers Think about Advertising? 4 Ad Work – Management and Organizational Perspectives on Advertising 5 Information and Value – The Economics of Advertising 6 The Hierarchy of Effects – The Psychology of Advertising 7 The Society of the Spectacle – The Sociology of Advertising 8 The Magic System – Cultural Studies of Advertising 9 The Medium is the Message – Media Studies and Advertising 10 The Distorted Mirror – Advertising and Ethics 11 Next Steps – The New Essentials of Advertising

Advertising


Native Advertising The Essential Guide

This book

<< Authored by the Chief Digital Officer of Adyoulike, the foremost native advertising platform << Offers practical advice and straightforward explanations on key topics that marketers need to

Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481162 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481179 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Advertising

consider when embracing native advertising, including content marketing, ad-blocking, social media and publisher monetization << Features real world examples, interviews and case studies, from big brands down to solo enterprises

Author Information

Table of Contents

Dale Lovell’s career at the forefront of digital advertising spans editorial, publishing, marketing and advertising technology. He is Chief Digital Officer at ADYOULIKE and a member of the Internet Advertising Bureau (IAB) Native and Content Council, UK. In 2015 Dale Lovell was named one of the British Interactive Media Association’s Hot 100.

9

Marketing, PR and Sales

Description Native advertising: paid-for media that looks and behaves like the content around it. It affects us all. If you own a smartphone, use social media or read content online, you will have been exposed to it - often without realizing. Influenced by digital trends such as mobile advertising, programmatic advertising, ad-blocking, fake news and artificial intelligence, native advertising is a multibillion-dollar industry. It is central to the digital success of many leading brands and companies. This comprehensive study by one of the industry’s foremost authorities explores the rise of this exhilarating new channel - its impact on the digital media space, and what marketers and businesses need to know about it. This book explores the future of digital advertising and explains why its growth is inevitable, using real-life examples and interviews from marketing leaders around the world and a range of case studies including The New York Times and The Independent. Native Advertising goes beyond sponsored posts on Facebook, promoted tweets and BuzzFeed branded articles. It looks at the heart of the matter: audience, budget, content and success measurement. It is full of first-hand advice for any marketer wanting to make the most of digital innovation.

1 2 3

Introduction How Did We Get Here? Why Native Advertising Really Matters: It’s Not Another Buzzword 4 Who Can Benefit From Native Advertising? 5 Getting Started With Native Advertising – What You Need to Know 6 The Different Types of Native Advertising – Which is Right for You? 7 Creating Native Advertising – What You Need to Know 8 Is It Working? 9 Questions to Ask about Native Advertising 10 The Future

Advertising


Persuasive Copywriting Using Psychology to Engage, Influence and Sell Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2015 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473990 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474003 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Advertising

Author Information Andy Maslen is Managing Director of Sunfish, a writing agency specialising in corporate communications and digital content. A lifetime Fellow of the Institute of Direct Marketing, Andy has worked with The NHS, The Prudential, The Economist, Emap, the DTI, BBC Worldwide, Hamleys, The London Stock Exchange, The British Standards Institution, the RSPB, Time Out, The New York Times Company and PricewaterhouseCoopers. He writes and speaks regularly on copywriting and is a best-selling author.

10

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Demonstrates how to write enjoyable, compelling copy which stands out in today’s cluttered marketplace << Demystifies advanced copywriting skills with examples, exercises and tips << Helps copywriters hone their skills with easy-to-use tools included in the book

Description “We ordered coffee, cut open a human brain and discovered the secret of persuasive copywriting.” A chance encounter with a neuroscientist showed Andy Maslen that his belief in the power of emotion was founded on hard science. Over coffee, the two discussed brain anatomy and the reason-defying power of human emotions. Andy’s subsequent research led him to realise that how people think and feel haven’t changed since the time of cavemen. We make decisions on emotional grounds and rationalise them later. Persuasive Copywriting: takes you deep inside customers’ brains. You’ll learn the relationship between selling and storytelling. And the market-tested techniques that get people to engage with, and be persuaded by, your copy. Use it to modify people’s behaviour by tapping into their deepest psychological drives. Gain copywriting confidence: This course-in-a-book explains the neuroscience behind our appetite for stories. It demystifies advanced copywriting skills with examples, exercises and tips. And it helps you hone your skills with easy-to-use tools included in the book, and online... Features 13 real-world case studies; 25 psychological copywriting techniques; 75 practical exercises;125 words and phrases that trigger emotions ;125-question copywriting quiz All help you improve your copywriting skills and perfect the emotion-driven sale. Who should buy Persuasive Copywriting? Junior copywriters can use it to catch up with their more experienced peers. Senior copywriters can use it to stay ahead of the game. Now you can employ this powerful psychological approach. This enjoyable book helps you find the right tone of voice, avoid common copywriting traps and tap into customers’ deepest drives. You’ll find yourself writing enjoyable, compelling copy that stands out in today’s cluttered marketplace. Andy has achieved amazing results for his clients by focusing on stories and their deep connection to customers’ needs and wants. With this book by your side, you can too.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction: how to write like an angel and sell like a demon 2 Emotion matters more than reason: tapping into your customer’s deepest drives 2.1 Harnessing the power of emotional copywriting to persuade your prospects 2.2 Three big ideas you should use before benefits 2.3 A powerful process for developing customer empathy 2.4 Flattery will get you everywhere 2.5 The Ancient Greek secret of emotionally engaging copy 2.6 Copywriting and connecting on social media 2.7 Yes! I want your tips on the best way to ask for the order 3 The pleasure principle: making your writing more enjoyable and compelling 3.1 Five pleasure-inducing techniques for copywriters 3.2 How to engage your imagination and free your creativity 3.3 Finding your voice (and that of others) 3.4 The definitive way to judge when grammar matters in copywriting 3.5 An age-old method of injecting life into your sales pitch

Advertising


Innovative B2B Marketing New Models, Processes and Theory Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480806 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480813 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: B2B Marketing

Author Information Simon Hall is a marketing innovator with over 20 years’ experience in Technology and Services Marketing. He has served as UK Chief Marketing Officer for Dell as well as senior roles at Acer, Microsoft and Toshiba. In 2016 Simon founded NextGen Marketing Solutions. Simon is a Course Director with the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM), a B2B council member with The Institute of Direct and Digital Marketing (IDM), the Internal Consulting Group’s (ICG) Global Thought Leader for B2B Marketing, and a member of the European CMO Council.

11

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Authored by one of the Chartered Institute of Marketing’s leading professional trainers, who has

designed and currently directs a multitude of relevant professional courses << Demonstrates how the modern B2B marketing landscape has changed, with traditional marketing methods (such as funnels and swim lane advertising) being replaced by innovative new models and processes (such as lead nurturing and modern events marketing) << Cuts through the inundation of noise surrounding B2B marketing to provide clear, comprehensive coverage of all of the most recent developments, including social marketing, B2B-specific brand building, channel strategy, and much more << Online resources: include case studies, web links to insightful videos and articles, and lecture slides with practical models and templates

Description Innovative B2B Marketing is a clear, practical guide that demystifies modern aspects of B2B marketing, including marketing models, processes and thought leadership pieces. New customer buying habits, the digital era and the new industry landscape (influenced by the application economy) have all had a great impact, with marketing professionals consequently facing a shift away from traditional practices. The focus of Innovative B2B Marketing is to cut through the noise and make sense of the new models, methods and processes that have recently emerged in the B2B marketing sphere. Authored by Simon Hall, an ex-CMO who brings over 20 years’ senior level experience as one of the leading voices in the B2B sphere actively working with the CIM, the IDM, and other major associations, Innovative B2B Marketing brings together a wealth of insight and information sourced from the author’s own first-hand experience. Featuring real-life examples from diverse sectors, plus topical discussion points and problems from key B2B marketing forums and associations, marketers will find new approaches, models and solutions to help deal with any B2B marketing challenge.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction to Innovative B2B Marketing 2 Developing Your Marketing Strategy 2.1 The New Marketing Mix 2.2 B2B Strategy & Planning 3 Improve B2B Customer Centric Marketing 3.1 B2B Buyers and Their Changing Behaviours 3.2 Acquisition Marketing 3.3 Customer Loyalty & Retention – the Stickiness Factor 3.4 Understanding C-suite Marketing 3.5 B2B Product & Solutions Marketing 3.6 B2B Influencer Marketing 4 ‘Transform’ Through Content and Digital Marketing 4.1 B2B Digital and Content Marketing Landscape 4.2 B2B Digital Marketing Channels 4.3 B2B Digital Marketing Planning and Strategy 4.4 B2B Content Marketing 4.5 B2B Social Marketing 4.6 B2B Brand Building 5 ‘Collaborate’ with Channel Partners 5.1 The Channel Landscape 5.2 Marketing to Channel Partners and Enabling Them 5.3 How to Market Through Channel Partners 5.4 Channel Strategy, Planning and Control

B2B Marketing

6 Optimizing Marketing Performance and Execution 6.1 Sales and Marketing Alignment 6.2 Account Based Marketing 6.3 Lead Generation and Nurturing 6.4 Modern Events Marketing 6.5 Marketing Performance Management


B2B Marketing Strategy Differentiate, Develop and Deliver Lasting Customer Engagement Edition: 1 Date: 12/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481063 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481070 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: B2B Marketing

Author Information Heidi Taylor is a consultant, speaker and prolific blogger with a significant global following. Her expertise is in strategy and creating powerful multi-channel, multiformat marketing campaigns. In 2015 Heidi Taylor was named a top 25 UK B2B Marketing Influencer by Onalytica. She has won two awards at the Chartered Institute of Marketing’s prestigious annual Marketing Excellence Awards, including the coveted overall Marketer of the Year.

12

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Refocus on the outcome of marketing, rather than the tactics used in marketing, as the only way to win ongoing customer engagement << Confronts and refutes widely accepted, but misguided, beliefs that are currently dominating the B2B marketing realm, and uses case studies and evidence to prove how they are misleading << Features practical advice and real-world case studies including Apple, Volvo & NHS, to identify the model’s effectiveness in real-world B2B marketing environments << Presents a completely original model - the 3D Marketing Strategy - to shift focus from continually changing technologies and channels to lasting customer engagement and measurable results

Description B2B marketing is functioning in an increasingly fast-paced and complex business landscape, with a wealth of new technologies, tools and channels, and where customers are more in control of the buying process than ever before. With the imperative to become ‘digital’, B2B marketers have become consumed by the marketing activity itself - the tactics - instead of the outcomes marketers want and need to achieve for customers and businesses. B2B Marketing Strategy provides fresh insight into the challenges marketers are facing in such an environment and offers a new framework for developing B2B marketing strategy and plans. Written by an internationally recognised and award winning senior marketing strategist, B2B Marketing Strategy is a thought-provoking and comprehensive exploration of the state of B2B marketing. Expertly examined, it changes the perspective of B2B marketers by taking the unique approach of confronting and refuting many of the fallacies that are dominating the current state of B2B marketing. Filled with real-world case studies and practical, actionable insights, B2B Marketing Strategy takes the reader through three phases of thinking, doing and being different in order to make B2B marketing memorable in the hearts and minds of customers, creating lasting customer engagement.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Think Different - Fallacy #1; Marketing Has Forever and Fundamentally Changed 2.1 Change Happens – The Seismic Shift in Our B2B Marketing Environment 2.2 All That Glitters – B2B Marketing’s Obsession With the Latest Tools and Tactics 2.3 5 Essential Steps to Think Different 3 Do Different - Fallacy #2; The Marketing Plan is The Marketing Strategy 3.1 Getting Back to Basics – Brand, Strategy, Customers and Measurement 3.2 An Introduction to 3D Marketing - Differentiate, Develop and Deliver 3.3 5 Essential Steps to Do Different 4 Be Different - Fallacy #3; The Purpose of Marketing is Lead Generation 4.1 What is the Purpose of Marketing? 4.2 7 rules of Engagement For The Social Era 4.3 Taking a Big Idea to Market – 5 Lessons 4.4 5 Essential Steps to Be Different 5 Conclusion 5.1 Tactics are For The Moment, Ideas are Forever

B2B Marketing


B2B Customer Experience A Practical Guide to Delivering Exceptional CX Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2018 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481858 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481865 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: B2B Marketing

Author Information Paul Hague is a founder of B2B International. With 35 years of experience running market research agencies, his clients include some of the largest corporations in Europe and the United States. He has written, co-authored and contributed to numerous publications on market research tools and techniques. Nick Hague is also a founder of B2B International. Over the last two decades, Hague has made his name as an expert in customer experience market research. He is chairman of B2B International and has co-authored the bestselling book on market research - Market Research In Practice.

This book

<< Shows readers how to deliver against the six pillars of customer experience - commitment,

fulfilment, seamlessness, responsiveness, proactivity and evolution << Features case studies and examples from leading companies such as Zappos, Nordstrom and John Lewis << Is specifically written for B2B companies, with bespoke journey plans and strategies for the B2B realm

Description B2B Customer Experience shows readers how to deliver the very best customer experience (often referred to as CX), within the business-to-business realm. Marketers have long known that emotions are important in driving our experiences, and the subject is now high on the agenda of B2B companies who want to deliver a ‘wow’ to their customers. Achieving this ‘wow’ factor helps organizations distinguish themselves from their competition, while simultaneously winning new business and retaining existing clients. B2B Customer Experience is the essential handbook that guides the reader through the process of creating an exceptional customer experience. Intensely practical in its approach, B2B Customer Experience is divided into five parts to walk readers through the journey of planning, mapping, structuring, implementing and controlling an effective customer experience, all bespoke for the B2B environment. Clearly argued and supported by realworld examples, this text will help readers understand critical features including the difference between customer experience, loyalty and inertia; how to use journey maps to establish strengths and weaknesses in an organization, and how to ensure that sales teams are engaged in the customer experience programme. Discussing some of the best known examples of consumer-focused customer experiences, B2B Customer Experience is the must-have text for any marketing professional working within a B2B environment.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

13

Marketing, PR and Sales

Customer Experience in Business to Business Markets Exploring Customer Experience, Loyalty and Inertia Understanding Customer Experience and Profitability The Six Key Pillars of Customer Experience Essential Metrics for Measuring Customer Experience How to Benchmark Customer Experience What are the Key Drivers of Customer Experience? Customer Journey Mapping and How to Apply It Developing a Customer Experience Strategy Securing Buy-In at all Levels of Customer Experience Working with the Sales and Marketing Teams to Streamline Customer Experience How to Create an Internal Service Culture Using Segmentation to Deliver Better Customer Experience The Role of Brands in Creating a Better Customer Experience The Role of Products in Creating Better Customer Experiences Price and its Role in Creating Better Customer Experiences Place and its Role in Creating Better Customer Experiences Promotion and its Role in Creating Better Customer

B2B Marketing

19 Experiences 20 The Role of People in Creating a Better Customer Experience 21 Measuring Performance of Customer Experience Initiatives 22 The Challenge of Continuous Improvement in Customer Experience


The New Strategic Brand Management Advanced Insights and Strategic Thinking Edition: 5 Date: 01/28/2012 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749465155 ISBN Ebook: 9780749465162 Pages: 512 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Branding

Author Information Jean-Noël Kapferer is one of the world’s foremost thought leaders on luxury brands. An active researcher, he is an HEC Paris graduate and holds a PhD from Northwestern University’s Kellogg Business School. Kapferer is author of Kapferer on Luxury and co-author of The Luxury Strategy (both published by Kogan Page) and has written many seminal articles. He is a sought after speaker, leading seminars on luxury worldwide at institutions including HEC Paris, Tsing Hua University Beijing, Seoul Luxury Business Institute and LBI Shanghai. He is also advisor to the president of Inseec Business School (Paris).

14

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Reveals and explains the latest branding techniques used by companies worldwide << Includes expert advice on best practice for adding culture and content into brands << Enables students and practitioners to stay up to date with targeting, adding recent research and market knowledge to the discipline

<< Contains a section on brand valuation which illuminates the complex strategies behind how brands are ranked in the media

Description Adopted internationally by business schools and MBA programmes, The New Strategic Brand Management is simply the reference source for senior strategists, positioning professionals and postgraduate students. Over the years it has not only established a reputation as one of the leading works on brand strategy, but also has become synonymous with the topic itself. Using an array of international case studies, Jean-Noël Kapferer covers all the leading issues faced by brand strategists today. With both gravitas and intelligent insight, the book reveals new thinking on topics such as putting culture and content into brands, the impact of private labels and the comeback of local brands. This updated fifth edition of The New Strategic Brand Management builds on its impressive reputation, including new information to enable students and practitioners to stay up to date with targeting, adding recent research and market knowledge to the discipline. With dedicated sections for specific types of brands (luxury, corporate and retail), international examples and case studies from companies such as Audi, Nivea, Toyota and Absolut Vodka; plus models and frameworks such as the Brand Identity Prism; it remains at the forefront of strategic brand thinking.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction - Building the Brand when the Clients Are Empowered 2 Why is Branding So Strategic? 2.1 Brand Equity in Question 2.2 Strategic Implications of Branding 2.3 Brand and Business Models 2.4 Brand Diversity - How Specific Are Different Sectors? 2.5 Managing Retail Brands 3 The Challenges of Modern Markets 3.1 The New Brand Management 3.2 Brand Identity and Positioning 4 Creating and Sustaining Brand Equity 4.1 Launching the Brand 4.2 Growing the Brand 4.3 Sustaining a Brand Long Term 4.4 Brand and Products - Identity and Change 4.5 Growth Through Brand Extensions 4.6 Brand Architecture 4.7 Multi-Brand Portfolios 4.8 Handling Name Changes and Brand Transfers 4.9 Brand Turnaround and Rejuvenation 4.10 Managing Global Brands 5 Brand Valuation 5.1 Financial Valuation and Accounting for Brands

Branding


Digital Branding A Complete Step-by-Step Guide to Strategy, Tactics, Tools and Measurement Edition: 2 Date: 12/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481698 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481681 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Branding

Author Information Daniel Rowles has more than 20 years of digital marketing experience on both client and agency sides. A CIM fellow and course director, he is lead judge for their CIM Marketing Excellence award. Rowles also lectures at Imperial College London and Cranfield School of Management, and co-hosts the Digital Marketing Podcast, a global top-ten business podcast on iTunes. His digital marketing company TargetInternet.com supports clients such as the BBC, Vodafone, Sony, Oracle and Tesco.

15

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Frames a process to plan, analyze, optimize and measure tangible results on brand campaigns << Includes a practical checklist for the digital branding process and tools to implement it << New to this edition: Advances in mobile marketing, augmented/virtual reality, mobile payments and a full overhaul of industry tools, models and case studies

<< Simplifies complex terms and techniques for straightforward understanding and application << Written by a highly respected industry expert at the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) Description Digital Branding second edition, provides step-by-step, practical guidance on how to build a brand online and quantify it through tangible results. It draws together each of the core marketing avenues such as content marketing, social media, search engine optimization and web analytics, to deliver a robust framework for brand planning, identity, channel selection and measuring the effectiveness of campaigns. The second edition of Digital Branding contains a complete overhaul of tools and techniques for straightforward application, plus new high profile case studies including Accenture, Tesco and Imperial College London. Important updates are made on social media guidelines and policy, how to tackle advancements in mobile marketing and mobile payments, as well as augmented and virtual reality. The book features a toolkit of free and paid tools, including a valuable checklist, outlining the digital branding process from start to finish, and measurement devices for multiple channels and purposes. Written by a respected CIM fellow and course leader, this succinct handbook is ideal for any marketer or brand strategist to enhance their online brand identity.

Table of Contents 1

Digital Branding in Perspective 1.1 What Digital Branding Really Means 1.2 Focusing on Value 1.3 Considering the User Journey 1.4 Objectives and Authenticity 2 The Digital Toolkit 2.1 Social Media 2.2 Search 2.3 Mobile 2.4 Online Advertising 2.5 E-mail Marketing 2.6 CRM and Marketing Automation 2.7 From Integration to Transmedia Campaigns 3 Digital Brand Strategy and Measurement 3.1 Measuring Digital Branding 3.2 Primaries and Indicators 3.3 The Role of Analytics 3.4 Bridging the Gaps 3.5 The Importance of Asking Questions

Branding


Audio Branding Using Sound to Build Your Brand Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478575 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478582 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Branding

This book

<< Features a foreword by Dr Philip Kotler << Explains why audio branding (examples of which include the Skype intake of breath, the noise an

iPod wheel makes as it clicks, and the sound a particular brand of car makes when a key is inserted in the ignition) is a crucial element of brand development << Explores immediate and upcoming topics such as audio-enabled devices, digital touch points, and continuous partial attention. << Provides practical, step-by-step instructions to enable readers to build an audio language to enhance their brand. << Draws real life relevance with insightful case studies on companies which have developed successful audio brands in differing ways, including Peugeot, Atlanta Convention & Tourism Bureau, and Michelin. << Written by authors with unique insider knowledge, having worked at the forefront of the audio branding industry and been involved with some of the world’s leading audio branding campaigns.

Description Audio Branding is a concise, practical guide on the influential world of audio branding - what it is, why it’s important, and how it can be used to enhance a brand. Consider the familiar tune of a branded ringtone, the bubbly sounds of Skype, and even the chosen sound bite for a branded car unlocking as the driver presses the key. How do these choices tie into a wider brand identity? Which emotions do they spark, and most importantly, how do these choices enhance brand association with the consumer? Audio Branding delivers fascinating insights into this area of marketing, underpinned by practical step-by-step guidance and cutting-edge research to enhance brand loyalty through user experience. Written by authors who have contributed directly to the development of this field, the book contains an enlightening set of case studies, including companies such as Renault (a surprisingly emotional audio brand) Atlanta Convention & Visitors Bureau (a warm, energetic audio brand), and Michelin (a globally coherent audio brand). Covering issues such as the dominance of audio-enabled devices and the phenomenon of continuous partial attention, Audio Branding demonstrates how brands can infuse sound into so many different aspects of their identity, building in a subtle longevity of brand presence through daily user experience.

Author Information Laurence Minsky is associate professor in Communication & Media Innovation at Columbia College Chicago, and author of many books on advertising and marketing. He is also an award-winning marketing strategist, creative director, and copywriter focused on creating innovative and effective branding and cross-discipline marketing solutions for many leading brands.

Table of Contents

Colleen Fahey is US Managing Director of Sixième Son, the world’s leading audio branding and sound design agency. Throughout her career, Colleen has worked for major marketing organizations on some of the leading brands in the US, Europe, Latin America and Asia.

Wake up to the Power of Audio Branding 2 Audio Branding in the Digital Age 3 It’s Time We Came to our Sensory Marketing 4 Welcome to the World of Audio Branding 5 The Search for your Sound 6 What Gets Measured 7 The Audio Branding Process 8 How to Launch your Audio Brand 9 Maintaining and Evolving your Audio Brand 10 Music and Sound Design in Environments 11 Glossary

16

Branding

Marketing, PR and Sales

1


The Escape Industry How Iconic and Innovative Brands Built the Travel Business Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473501 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473518 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Branding

Author Information Mark Tungate is a British journalist based in Paris. He is the author of several books, including Fashion Brands and Adland. His articles have appeared in publications including Campaign, Advertising Age, The Financial Times and The Daily Telegraph. He is a regular contributor to the ad industry intelligence site AdForum. Tungate is also editorial director of the Epica Awards, where journalists who are specialists in their field celebrate excellence in design, advertising, PR and branded content. He lectures on advertising and branding at universities and conferences globally.

This book

<< Reveals the branding secrets of travel’s legendary players and new digital innovators << Explains how online booking, user-generated review sites, CRM, ebooks and other digital

developments have transformed the industry << Features fascinating discussion of some of the most iconic and best known travel brands, including Thomas Cook, Pan Am, the Orient Express, the Ritz, AirBnB, Couchsurfing, TripAdvisor and many more << Explores the final frontier of travel - space tourism - with lively discussion of brands like Virgin Galactic, SpaceX and Space Adventures, and the inroads that individuals like Richard Branson and Elon Musk are making in “the new space race”

Description Travel as a concept is universally attractive and the opportunities for fun, engaging branding and marketing in this sector are arguably limitless. Glamour and appeal aside, travel is a hugely competitive, multi-million pound industry and marketers of all sectors can learn important lessons from it. Catering for mass consumer travel, from business travel and adventure travel, to specialist and niche interests, the providers of escape have been impacted as much by technology as they have by the changing habits and desires of travellers themselves. The Escape Industry presents an expert view of travel marketing and branding, focusing particularly on how travel has been utterly transformed for both consumers and providers since the beginning of the 21st century. Mark Tungate focuses on some of the travel industry’s most famous brands and shares how all marketers can learn from the industry’s rich experience of digital transition. Tungate traces the evolution of this fascinating industry, from nineteenth century trailblazers such as Thomas Cook and The Ritz, to today’s innovations such as TripAdvisor, Couchsurfing and Airbnb, and explores the branding secrets that have enabled them to survive. A lively read full of incidents, anecdotes, unexpected encounters and a ground-breaking report from the final frontier and space tourism, The Escape Industry is at the cutting edge of this attractive sector, examining some of the biggest names in the industry. It will take travel and tourism students, as well as marketing and branding practitioners, on a journey to the heart of a rapidly changing business.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

17

Marketing, PR and Sales

Introduction Grand Tourists The Enterprising Mr Cook Legendary Havens: The Rise of the Grand Hotel From Rags to Ritz The Return of the Orient Express The Battle for High Seas The Airline Pioneers Pan Am: From Seaplanes to the Jet Age Business or Pleasure? How Boutique Became Chic Rivals in the Sky Flying for Less Lastminute and Other Dot Coms Mobile and Social Explorers Special Agents The World Between Two Covers Rise of the ‘Poshtel’ Airbnb and the Sharing Economy The Only Way is Ethics The Final Frontier Conclusions

Branding


Branding Inside Out Internal Branding in Theory and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478902 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478919 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Branding

Author Information Nicholas Ind is an associate professor at Kristiania University College, Oslo, and a partner in Equilibrium Consulting. He is a former director of the Design Business Association (UK), a member of the editorial board of the Journal of Brand Management. He was a founding member of the Medinge Group, an international branding think tank. Nicholas is the author of eleven books including Beyond Branding, Living the Brand and Brand Together (all published by Kogan Page). He also co-edited Brands with a Conscience.

18

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Inspires readers to implement their own internal branding strategies, improving the power and

reach of their external brand messages << Features chapters written by a range of relevant academics and professionals, edited by renowned branding expert Nicholas Ind, who has authored more than 11 books including the bestselling Living the Brand << Demonstrates the effective use of internal branding in real world contexts through detailed case studies from companies such as DNV GL, Adidas and Patagonia

Description Internal branding is the cultural shift that occurs within an organization when employees become more customer-focused. By getting employees to truly commit to a brand’s ideology internally, companies will find that their brand messages are conveyed externally much more effectively. Branding Inside Out is a multi-contributor text containing chapters from an array of senior professionals and academics, edited by the renowned branding expert and prolific author Nicholas Ind. Branding Inside Out contains both new thinking and new practice on internal branding. The new thinking chapters in the book feature original research on the principles that underpin effective internal branding programmes, while the new practice chapters provide examples of how such companies as Patagonia, NN Group and Adidas both attract new employees and build employee engagement. Taken together, these contributions and case studies form a vital book to help any marketer understand and implement successful internal branding programmes, and win the active involvement of their people.

Table of Contents 1

The Changing World of Internal Branding [Nicholas Ind] 2 Living Brand Orientation: How a Brand-Oriented Culture Supports Employees to Live the Brand [Holger J Schmidt] 3 Unleashing the Internal Fan Community through BrandOriented Leadership [Felicitas Morhart] 4 Bond Dickinson: Leading by Example [Erika Uffindell] 5 Internal Branding: A Roadmap to Brand Value Co-Creation [Fathima Saleem and Oriol Inglesias] 6 Transforming Brand and Culture at NN Group [Marije Scholma, Remco Barbier and Chris Kersbergen] 7 ‘Living the CSR Brand’: Model, Best Practices and Recommendations [Carsten Baumgarth] 8 Participation Builds the Brands: VSO’s People Brand [Nick Pullan and Hannah Gilman] 9 Living Brands: The Characteristics of Living Brand Companies [Rik Riezebos] 10 How adidas Attracts and Retains Talent [Steve Fogarty] 11 Internal Brand Management: Employees as a Target Group for Brand Management [Christoph Burmann and Rico Piehler]

Branding


How Cool Brands Stay Hot Branding to Generations Y and Z Edition: 3 Date: 04/28/2016 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477172 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477219 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Branding

Author Information Joeri Van den Bergh is the co-founder of InSites Consulting, a global new generation research agency with offices in Belgium, the UK, France, Switzerland and the Netherlands. His clients include global customers such as Lego, Nokia, Sony, MTV Networks, Danone, Unilever and Coca-Cola.

19

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Includes an entirely new chapter on Generation Z based on detailed new research << Reveals what drives Generations Y and Z, and how these groups have been impacted by recent

events like the recession along with the rise of social media and mobile marketing << Features interviews with global marketing executives of successful brands such as Converse, Heineken, DIESEL, Coca-Cola, MasterCard, eBay and the BBC << Offers tools and guidance for developing brand strategies that effectively target Generations Y and Z, as well as a critical comparison of Generation X and Baby Boomers

Description How Cool Brands Stay Hot analyses Generations Y and Z, the most marketing savvy and advertisingcritical generations yet. It reveals how millennials think, feel and behave, offering proven strategies to market to these groups more effectively and remain a relevant, appealing brand. Featuring interviews with global marketing executives of successful brands such as the BBC, Converse, Coca-Cola, eBay and MasterCard along with case studies from companies including H&M, MTV and Diesel, it guides readers in developing the right strategies to leave a lasting business impact. Previous editions of How Cool Brands Stay Hot have won the prestigious 2012 Berry-AMA Book Prize for the best book in marketing and the 2011 Expert Marketing Magazine’s Marketing Book of the Year award. This fully revised 3rd edition of How Cool Brands Stay Hot goes beyond the discussion of Generation Y, expanding its reach with an entirely new chapter on Generation Z and a detailed analysis of the impact that issues such as recession, social media and mobile marketing have had on these consumers. Based on new figures, case studies and interviews, it provides a fresh take on what remain critical issues for anyone hoping to market to those who come after Generation X.

Table of Contents 1 2

Defining Generation Y Developing a Brand Model for the New Consumer 3 What Cool Means to Brands 4 The Real Thing: Brand Authenticity 5 We All Want Unique Brands 6 Self-Identification with the Brand 7 Happiness: Gen Y’s Adoration for Branded Emotions 8 Who’s Next? Generation Z

Branding


The TV Brand Builders How to Win Audiences and Influence Viewers Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2016 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476687 ISBN Ebook: 9780749476700 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Branding

Author Information Andy Bryant is Managing Director of Red Bee, a London-based, internationally acclaimed creative agency. He is a recognised thought leader and frequent speaker at leading industry conferences globally on TV brand strategy, marketing and creativity. He is Honorary Professor in Film and Media at the University of Nottingham. Charlie Mawer is Executive Creative Director of Red Bee, responsible for their global creative output. A BAFTA nominee and former Promax UK chairman, Charlie has lectured around the world including for a number of universities, TEDx, the BFI and D&AD.

20

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Uses a wide range of examples from major broadcasters around the world to expertly illustrate the marketing, advertising and design approaches that work best in television << Includes 50 interviews with leading practitioners in global TV brands, providing the insider perspective on the challenges and opportunities of marketing television programmes << Includes examples drawn from globally recognised channels and networks, Sky TV, BBC, Fox, ITV, NBCU, AMC, Comedy Central, HBO, UKTV etc. It also includes examples drawn from universally loved television shows including Doctor Who, Mad Men, Game of Thrones, American Horror Story, and major sporting events such as the Olympics and Paralympics.

Description The TV Brand Builders is the definitive account of how the biggest television networks, channels and programmes are created as brands, with rare privileged access to the marketing strategies and creative thinking behind culturally defining TV promos, digital and social media campaigns and design identities. Practical advice and strategic insight is blended with insightful stories from the ratings front line. Written by two leading practitioners responsible for work as famous as the BBC One hippos, the creation of a TV channel called Dave and the re-launch of Doctor Who, and featuring interviews with 50 leading industry experts from 8 countries, from HBO to ESPN, from DreamWorks to CANAL+.

Table of Contents 1 The context 1.1 Marketing in the world of television 2 Building tv channel brands 2.1 Whatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s the point of a tv channel brand? 2.2 Relaunching a tv channel: waving a flag on the horizon 2.3 The 800lb gorillas: building a big broadcast brand 2.4 The risk takers: building a TV channel brand with attitude 2.5 Idents: giving a channel a personality 3 Building and promoting tv programme brands 3.1 Marketing drama: glimpsing the future, unravelling the helix and speed dating 3.2 Timing and other secrets: a guide to promoting TV comedy 3.3 Selling the news 3.4 Promoting entertainment shows: scrubbing the shiny floors 3.5 Documentaries and reality: stories and storytellers 3.6 Faster, higher, stronger, longer: the hyperbolic world of TV sports promotion 3.7 Marketing to children: nailing jelly to a moving train 4 Building brands in the age of online tv 4.1 Storyworlds: blurring the lines between content and marketing

Branding

4.2 Social media: from viewers to fans to friends 4.3 The future of tv marketing: seismic change, timeless principles 4.4 TV channel design in a multiscreen world (online-only chapter at www.koganpage. com/TheTVBrandBuilders please scroll to bottom of page and complete form to access)


Brands with a Conscience How to Build a Successful and Responsible Brand Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475444 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475451 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Branding

This book

<< Provides exemplary guidance on building a conscientious brand strategy, underpinned with not just stories of success, but also caveats based on real world challenges and failures << Allows you to place responsible practice at the heart of your organization with numerous inspirational case studies including Adidas, H&M, Tata Steel, Dilmah Tea and the John Lewis Partnership << Illustrates how to create and sustain a culture that meets the needs of internal and external stakeholders

Description The definitive expert guide to ethical brand practice from the prestigious Medinge Group, Brands with a Conscience dissects the philosophies underpinning sustainable brands to arrive at a set of eight clear guiding attributes which can be used as the foundation of a strategy for responsible growth. These attributes span the public persona of an organization, the actions to take when things go wrong, the effort invested in developing relationships, the promotion of core values and balancing measures of success across economic, human, social and environmental factors. They are then used as the criteria to assess twelve carefully selected case studies, which include Dilmah Tea, H&M, Dr. Hauschka, Merci and the John Lewis Partnership, amongst other leading international brands. Because the potential to have bad practice unmasked or to have successes amplified online is greater than ever, it pays to adopt a strategy that builds customer loyalty and trust. Brands with a Conscience inspires via examples of brands which not only exhibit a genuine desire to operate ethically, but also have seen impressive success in terms of engagement with consumers, reputation, and return on investment. The book includes a range of practical tools to bring together the main concepts in an easy-to-adopt framework for building a brand strategy based upon real world experience. If you are a brand manager or marketing professional seeking a conscientious approach to consumer engagement, then Brands with a Conscience will support you every step of the way.

Author Information Nicholas Ind is an associate professor at Oslo School of Management and a partner in Equilibrium Consulting. Previously he ran Icon Medialab’s brand consultancy arm in Sweden. He is former director of the Design Business Association (UK), a member of the advisory board of Corporate Reputation Review and the editorial board of the Journal of Brand Management. He was a founder member of the Medinge Group, an international branding think tank. Nicholas is the author of eleven books including Beyond Branding, Living the Brand and Brand Together, all published by Kogan Page. Sandra Horlings is a branding and marketing consultant specializing in sustainable business development in a circular economy. Before she founded Wonderwings in 2008, she was a member of the BBDO board in the Netherlands and responsible for Proximity in Amsterdam. Sandra is a guest lecturer and corporate trainer. She is a member of Medinge and a founder of Wereldmarketeers, a Dutch knowledge and inspiration platform for marketers and entrepreneurs on sustainable innovation, endorsed by NIMA, the Dutch Marketing Association.

21

Marketing, PR and Sales

Table of Contents 1 Introduction, by Ava Hakim 1.1 Case Study 1: Dilmah Tea, by Jack Yan 1.2 Case Study 2: John Lewis Partnership, by Erika Uffindell & Simon Paterson 1.3 Case Study 3: Dr. Hauschka by Brigitte Stepputtis 1.4 Case Study 4: Merci by Philippe Mihailovich 1.5 Case Study 5: Tony’s Chocolonely by Sandra Horlings 1.6 Case Study 6: Slow Food by Peter Brown 1.7 Case Study 7: DNV GL by Nicholas Ind 1.8 Case Study 8: Cosentino by Cristián Saracco 1.9 Case Study 9: TATA Steel by Horo Sudhir 1.10 Case Study 10: Placebranding by Nikolaj Stagis 1.11 Case Study 11: Leadership by Enric Bernal

Branding


On Purpose Delivering a Branded Customer Experience People Love Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2015 Price: $26.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471910 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471927 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: TRADE/Professional HYBRID Subject: Branding

Author Information Shaun Smith is founder and partner of the customer experience consultancy Smith+Co, working with leading brands. A thought leader on customer experience strategy, he has featured many times on CNBC’s Ask the Expert. He is the co-author of Bold (Kogan Page), Uncommon Practice and Managing the Customer Experience. Andy Milligan is a leading consultant on brand culture. He has worked for almost 20 years advising major organizations on brand building, customer experience and internal culture. Andy appears regularly in the media. He is the author of Brand it Like Beckham and co-author of Bold (Kogan Page), Uncommon Practice and Don’t Mess with the Logo.

22

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Provides advice and techniques for applying customer experience management principles to your

company based on case studies and examples from leading brands, including Best Western, giffgaff, LEGO, IKEA and many more << Demonstrates clearly how to achieve brand differentiation and customer loyalty with real world interviews and anecdotes << Shows how to ensure authenticity flows through each touchpoint of your brand << Complemented by an online toolkit to help you define and communicate your business purpose throughout the organization and externally

Description Brands growing rapidly have a clear sense of purpose and the value they bring to their customers and employees. On Purpose is a practical guide to executing business purpose successfully by delivering a branded customer experience people love. It presents a framework for success based on being clear about your brand purpose and promise so you can achieve exceptional results through exceptional experiences. It provides the tools for brands to stand out by defining, designing and delivering distinctive, valuable customer experiences across multiple channels. Because purpose is what you do, not what you claim, On Purpose helps you act on your business purpose by showing you how to make your brand stand out. Each chapter illustrates how to succeed in a specific channel by presenting interviews with purpose-driven leaders such as Vernon Hill (Metro Bank), John Forrest (Premier Inn) and Gav Thompson (giffgaff) and case studies of companies including: - Altro - London 2012 Olympics - Barclays Bank - Lush - Best Western - Nissan - citizenM - O2 - IKEA - Timpson - LEGO - Zappos - Liberty Global Business Services

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6

Stand Up Purpose Driven Purposeful Leadership Stand Out Infectious Communication Distinctive Customer Experience Continuous Innovation Stand Firm Cult-Like Culture Distinctive Employee Experience Experience Measurement Never Stand Still On Purpose Profile How to Implement – Successfully 3.7 Putting the Principles into Practice

Branding


Paid Attention Innovative Advertising for a Digital World Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2015 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473600 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473617 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Branding

Author Information Faris Yakob is the founder of Genius Steals LLC, an ideas and innovation consultancy. Previously he was Chief Innovation Officer at MDC Partners and Executive Vice President, Chief Technology Strategist at McCann Erickson. He regularly writes about brands, media, communications and technology in publications such as the Financial Times, Forbes, Advertising Age and Media Week. He is a frequent speaker at international conferences and lectures at MIT and USC. He is also a contributor to What is a 21st Century Brand?, also published by Kogan Page.

23

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Discusses the shifts due to rapid changes in communication technologies and proposes new

commercial advertising models << Provides tools for working in the new media environment, with handy tips and case studies throughout << Helps readers generate new ideas and package them using a creativity toolkit in Chapter 8 inspired by the author’s own practice

Description As ever, the onus is on brands to find compelling ways to earn the attention of the consumer. Yet content scarcity has given way to overload, fixed channels have dissolved into fluid networks, and audiences have become participants in consumer-driven conversations. This shift requires a new course of action for brands; it demands new marketing imperatives. Paid Attention is a guide to modern advertising ideas: what they are, why they are evolving and how to have them. Spanning communication theory, neuroscience, creativity and innovation, media history, branding and emerging technologies, it explores the strategic creation process and how to package ideas to attract the most attention in the advertising industry. Packed with real-world examples of advertising campaigns for companies including Sony, Red Bull, HP and many more, Paid Attention provides a robust model for influencing human behaviour. Referencing a wide body of theory and praxis, from behavioural economics and sociology to technology and even science fiction, Faris Yakob maps advertising onto a wider analysis of culture. Containing practical advertising and branding templates, including a new advertising planning toolkit, it is ideal for students and practitioners looking to get noticed in today’s cluttered marketplace.

Table of Contents 1 Paid attention 1.1 Introduction: Paid attention – how much is it worth? 1.2 Logocentrism: What’s in a name? 2 Attention deficit disorders 2.1 Uncovering hidden persuaders: Why all market research is wrong 2.2 Advertising works in mysterious ways: Modern theories of communication 2.3 Is all advertising spam? Communication planning in an on-demand world 2.4 The spaces between: The vanishing difference between content, media and advertising 3 Attention arts and sciences 3.1 Do things, tell people: How to behave in a world of infinite content 3.2 Recombinant culture: Talent imitates, genius steals 3.3 Combination tools: How to have ideas: a genius steals process 3.4 Advertising for advertising: Is the industry paying attention? 3.5 Integrative strategy and social brands: Be nice or leave! 3.6 Prospection: Planning for the future we want

Branding


What is a 21st Century Brand? New Thinking from the Next Generation of Agency Leaders Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2015 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472627 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472634 Pages: 432 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Branding

Author Information Nick Kendall is an award-winning brand and advertising specialist with over 25 years’ experience. He has worked on famous global accounts such as Johnnie Walker and Unilever’s ‘Dirt is Good’ laundry brand. Nick is a founding partner of Bro-Ken and member of The Garage, which helps start-ups build brands. He designed and created the IPA Excellence Diploma, which is described as ‘the MBA of brands’ for the advertising industry, and is its Chief Examiner. He received the IPA President’s Medal for his services to the industry and is the author of Advertising Works 10.

24

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Covers all areas of modern advertising from multiple points of view to help professionals put their fingers on the pulse of best practice << Teaches how to build a great brand and how it can add value to a business << Enables readers to think more broadly about brands and to better serve their clients

Description What is a 21st Century Brand? How is it changing? What is critical now? What are the new mantras and principles? What are the new ideas for how to do it? What do you believe and what would you do therefore? This book features 20 of the best papers produced during the 10 years of The IPA Excellence Diploma. Each is a fresh, original and uniquely personal perspective from the new generation of leaders across creative, media and digital agencies. Produced in partnership with internationally recognised advertising body, the IPA, they are accompanied by commentary from leading industry thinkers including Stephen Woodford, Mark Earls, David Wilding and Ian Priest, and edited by Nick Kendall. Together they offer you multiple perspectives and the opportunity for you to challenge yourself to consider what you believe. Structured as 20 provocations written in the form of ‘I believe... and therefore...’, the essays are organised into three sections: - What is a brand? - How should we engage to build them? - How should we organise to deliver? Highlighting that today’s most successful agencies are those which are embracing the new ways in which we consume content, What is a 21st Century Brand? delivers cutting-edge thinking across all areas of advertising practice. If you want to take time to think about the real fundamentals of what we do as a business -create and build brands- this book will be all the stimulation you would want.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction: How to read this book and some observations – Nick Kendall 2 What is a brand? 2.1 I believe brand is a word that has outlived its usefulness – Nick Docherty 2.2 I believe in the Darwinian evolution of brands – Ian Edwards 2.3 We believe the people should control the means of branding – David Bonney 2.4 I believe in gaming your brand – Tim Jones 2.5 I believe in a brand new religion – Graeme Douglas 2.6 I believe communities are the future of brand communications – John V Willshire 2.7 I believe brands should go supergnova – James Borrodell Brown 3 What is a brand idea? 3.1 I believe the children are our future – Faris Yakob 3.2 I believe in the power of the self-fulfilling prophecy – David Young 3.3 I believe in the age of osmosis – Alex Dunsdon 3.4 I believe it’s what brands don’t say that matters – Pete Buckley 3.5 I believe brands must be superhuman – Emily FairheadKeen

Branding

3.6 I believe that brands should embrace the dark side – Simon Robertson 3.7 Hey, what’s the long idea? I believe it’s time the big idea had a counterpart – Sarah Morning 4 How should we organize to deliver? 4.1 I believe that the future of brands depends on confronting complexity – Gethin James 4.2 Data is our future: Welcome to the age of infomagination – Matt Sadler 4.3 I believe brands need to adopt an outside-in brand management approach – Sam D’Amato 4.4 I believe we must manage brand ideas from the bottom up – Tom Roach 4.5 I believe it’s time for a new system for leading beliefs – Ross Farquhar 4.6 I believe brands must shift from vanity to value – Matthew Philip


Brand Psychology Consumer Perceptions, Corporate Reputations Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471736 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471743 Pages: 440 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Branding

Author Information Jonathan Gabay is a creative strategist, educator and writer. His career spans three decades, during which time he has held several major advertising and marketing roles, including that of Group Creative Head at Saatchi and Saatchi Direct. He has worked with some of the most respected names in the world of creative advertising, marketing, PR, the media and education. Jonathan’s books are featured throughout academia and his business insights are regularly sought by news media including CNN, ABC, BBC and Bloomberg.

This book

<< Combines practical ‘how to’ advice in areas such as media relationships, crisis management and

more with an exploration of reputation psychology and consumer motivation << Provides tools and techniques to internally and externally deal with a crisis situation that affects a brand’s reputation << Presents a robust vision for modern brand reputation strategy

Description Why do we trust some brands more than others? How important is integrity for a brand’s survival? How can brand confidence be rebuilt during a crisis? Using both new and classic insights from social psychology, cognitive psychology and neuroscience, Brand Psychology reveals the hidden processes behind why certain brands command our loyalty, trust and - most importantly - disposable income. Reputation management authority Jonathan Gabay takes readers on a tour of the corporate, political, and personal brands whose understanding of consumer psychology has either built or broken them. Suitable for marketing, branding and PR professionals, reputation management specialists and students, Brand Psychology takes examples from e-cigarette legislation, the iPhone 5S’s fingerprint ID technology, Barclays’ branded bikes and the London 2012 Olympics, Miley Cyrus and the UK National Health Service’s big data to reveal how to build a meaningful brand that resonates with the public.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

25

Marketing, PR and Sales

Introduction Believing is not seeing. Seeing is believing Lies, excuses and further justifications for inconvenient truths Brains, brands, bytes, Bolshevik brawls and teenage tantrums Cloud-high reputations, big media personalities and bigger data Smoke and mirroring Rings of confidence Egg whites, whitewash and snowflakes Flattered trusted minds and fluttery trusting hearts Under the influence From addictive self-interests to interesting selves Brand me Maslow: misunderstood? The church of brand ideology. Open for redemption 24/7 In the spotlight Can we still be friends? IDs and CEGOs You don’t have to be mad to work here: brand leadership and psychosis Big boys don’t cry The authentic employer brand Brand stories: tell – don’t yell Rhetoric, rules, reasoning The final question first

Branding


Fashion Brands Branding Style from Armani to Zara Edition: 3 Date: 10/28/2012 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749464462 ISBN Ebook: 9780749464479 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Branding

Author Information Mark Tungate is a British journalist based in Paris. He is the author of six books about branding and marketing including Adland and The Escape Industry, both published by Kogan Page. His articles have appeared in publications ranging from Campaign and Advertising Age to the Financial Times. He also has a weekly column in the French marketing journal Strategies. Alongside his writing, he heads the jury of the Epica Awards.

26

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Inspires readers to look at their brands more critically to see what’s missing << Addresses the rise of celebrity-endorsed products and fashion ranges << Looks at the impact of blogging on fashion brands Description Once a luxury that only the elite could afford, fashion is now accessible to all. High street brands such as Zara, Topshop and H&M have put fashion within the reach of anyone, whilst massive media attention has turned designers such as Tom Ford, Alexander McQueen and Stella McCartney into brands in their own right. Fashion Brands takes you ‘behind the seams’, so to speak, exposing how the use of advertising, store design and the media has altered our fashion ‘sense’ and how a mere piece of clothing can be transformed into something with mystical allure. Packed with first-hand interviews with fashion brand gurus and industry insiders, this fully updated 3rd edition of the international bestselling Fashion Brands has its finger on the fashion pulse more firmly than ever. It now includes more on celebrity fashion brands and the rise of the ‘It’ girls and their influence to further analyse every aspect of fashion from a marketing perspective.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Introduction A history of seduction Fashioning an identity When haute couture meets high street The designer as brand The store is the star Anatomy of a trend The image-makers They shoot dresses, don’t they? This year’s model Celebrity sells Press to impress The collections Accessorize all areas Retro brands retooled Targeted male Urban athletes Virtually dressed Rise of the bloggers The faking game Trendy toddlers Style goes back to the future Behind the seams

Branding


Branded Beauty How Marketing Changed the Way We Look Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2011 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749461812 ISBN Ebook: 9780749461829 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Branding

This book

<< The beauty sector is worth £16.3bn to the UK economy << Full of first hand interviews with senior figures in the beauty industry and in advertising << Describes how brands are using the internet to get closer to their customers Description Beauty is a multi-billion dollar global industry embracing make-up, skincare, hair care, fragrances, cosmetic surgery - even tattooing and piercing. Over the years it has used flattery, seduction, science and shame to persuade consumers that they’ll have to invest if they want to look their best. In Branded Beauty, Mark Tungate delves into the history and evolution of the beauty business. From luxury boutiques in Paris to tattoo parlours in Brooklyn, he talks to the people who’ve made skin their trade. He analyses the marketing strategies used by those who create and sell beauty products. He visits the labs where researchers seek the key to eternal youth. He compares attitudes to beauty around the world and examines the rise of organic beauty products. Full of fascinating detail on great names such as Rubinstein and Arden, Revlon, Estée Lauder, L’Oréal and Max Factor, Branded Beauty also considers the future of the beauty business.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Mark Tungate is a British writer and branding specialist based in Paris. His best-selling book Fashion Brands has been translated into a dozen languages. As a journalist Mark has written for publications such as The Times, The Telegraph and The Independent. He has a weekly column in the French media magazine Stratégies and writes about marketing, fashion and design for the website Stylus. com. Alongside his writing, he lectures at Parsons Paris School of Art and Design and at conferences around the world. www.tungateinparis.com

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

27

Marketing, PR and Sales

Introduction Chasing Cleopatra The glamour professionals Out come the talons The beauty queen of Corona The French beauty factory Giants in the bathroom The stardust factor The 5 per cent solution The lure of luxury How to launch a cream The quest for eternal youth Beauty goes global A face in the crowd: finding a niche Beauty from shelf to street Digital beauty Under the knife The new male order Ethical, organic and sustainable The needle artists The future of beauty

Branding


Decoding the Irrational Consumer How to Commission, Run and Generate Insights from Neuromarketing Research Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2015 Price: $34.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473846 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473853 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Consumer Behaviour

Author Information Darren Bridger works as a consultant to marketers, advising on using and analysing data that tap into consumersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; non-conscious thinking and motivations. He was one of the original pioneers of the consumer neuroscience industry, co-founding both the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s first full-service agency, Neuroco, and the first agency dedicated to serving the public relations industry, MindLab International, then joining the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s largest agency, Neurofocus, as its second employee outside of the US.

28

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Endows practitioners with all the key conceptual and theoretical tools to take control of

understanding subconscious responses and become neuro-literate << Covers behavioural economics, eye-tracking, implicit response measures, facial coding and other research tools which can measure and illuminate the irrational drives of consumers << Aligns with new understandings in behavioural science and developments in data-processing technology to meet the demand for new insights into decision making << Online resources: Online guide for students and lecturers with helpful chapter summaries

Description Decoding the Irrational Consumer is written to help marketing practitioners demystify neuromarketing, a relatively new field of marketing research used to understand consumer response to marketing stimuli. Decoding the Irrational Consumer presents in plain terms the key theoretical tools required to implement neuromarketing studies and achieve desired research outcomes. Marketers and researchers will learn how to effectively and confidently brief data processors, and confer with neuroscientists and technicians. They will gain keen understanding of recent developments in behavioural science and data-processing technology, as well as sophisticated neuromarketing tools used to understand subconscious responses including behavioural economics, eye-tracking, implicit response measures, and facial coding. The author discusses when to apply these techniques and others, how to combine them effectively and how to correctly interpret resulting data to generate valuable insights that aid in decision making. The book is also suppotrted by an online guide for students and lecturers with helpful chapter summaries.

Table of Contents 1 Theoretical insights 1.1 The irrational consumer: introduction 1.2 The brain: attention, memory and emotion 1.3 Neuroaesthetics 1.4 Behavioural economics 2 The new research tools 2.1 Guidelines for experiments 2.2 Eye-tracking 2.3 Implicit response measures 2.4 Facial action coding 2.5 Biometrics 2.6 Neuro-measures 3 Putting it all together 3.1 Computational neuroscience 3.2 Smarter survey design 3.3 Combining techniques 3.4 Conclusions

Consumer Behaviour


Digital Marketing Strategy An Integrated Approach to Online Marketing Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2016 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474706 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474713 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Simon Kingsnorth is a senior digital leader and strategist with a core skillset in digital marketing, digital transformation and user experience. His specialities include paid search, SEO, social media, affiliate and email marketing, as well as website design and development, acquisition, CRM, analytics, targeting and personalization.

This book

<< Walks readers through every step of creating a digital marketing strategy,

from analyzing the essential digital platforms, through to planning, implementation and success measurement << Shows you how to integrate digital marketing techniques into an overall coherent business strategy and how to present your strategy to obtain approval from decision-markers << Includes real-world case studies including Hertz, Adidas, Google, Amazon, Bitcoin and more so you can view best-practice examples and improve your own digital marketing strategy << Contains practical templates and tips, including vision-based and real-time planning models, content marketing planning frameworks and presentation structures, which will enable businesses to implement strategies and techniques to fit specific business needs << Supported by a wealth of online resources, including budget and strategy templates, lecture slides and a bonus chapter

Description The modern marketer needs to learn how to employ strategic thinking alongside the use of digital media to deliver measurable and accountable business success. Digital Marketing Strategy covers the essential elements of achieving exactly this by guiding you through every step of creating your perfect digital marketing strategy. It contains analysis of the essential techniques and platforms of digital marketing including social media, content marketing, SEO, user experience, personalization, display advertising and CRM, as well as the broader aspects of implementation including planning, integration with overall company aims and presenting to decision makers. Simon Kingsnorth brings digital marketing strategy to life through best practice case studies, illustrations, checklists and summaries, to give you insightful and practical guidance. Rather than presenting a restrictive â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;one size fits allâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; model, this book gives you the tools to tailor-make your own strategy according to your unique business needs and demonstrates how an integrated and holistic approach to marketing leads to greater success. Digital Marketing Strategy is also supported by a wealth of online resources, including budget and strategy templates, lecture slides and a bonus chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

29

Marketing, PR and Sales

What is Digital Marketing? Aligning With Your Business Strategy Barriers and Considerations Planning Search Engine Optimization Paid Search Display Social Media User Experience and Transformation CRM and Retention True Personalization Customer Service Content Strategy Analytics and Reporting Presenting Your Strategy

Digital Marketing


Understanding Digital Marketing Marketing Strategies for Engaging the Digital Generation Edition: 4 Date: 11/28/2016 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478438 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478445 Pages: 464 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Damian Ryan is an advisory partner for Moore Stephens UK (one of the UK’s largest independent accounting and consulting networks) and a partner with Mediaventura, the UK’s leading corporate finance firm for the TIME (Technology, Internet, Media and Entertainment) sector. He is also author of Understanding Social Media and The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World, both published by Kogan Page.

This book

<< Explains how to choose appropriate online marketing channels << Provides tips on how to connect with customers and give them the engagement and interaction

they require << Looks to the future and the trends which are shaping those opportunities, such as media sharing, ongoing interactive refinement, and co-creation content marketing << Contains new chapters on Native Advertising (such as bespoke Facebook sponsored posts and promoted tweets), the Internet of Things, and Video Marketing << Online resources: Bonus chapters, contributor views, and additional case studies on Kwik Fit, Battersea Dogs Home, and Yves Saint Laurent.

Description The world of digital media is changing at a phenomenal pace. Constantly evolving technologies are transforming not just how we access our information but how we interact and communicate with one another on a global scale. Understanding Digital Marketing is a practical, no-nonsense guide to webmarketing, the rules of new media and researching the new generation of digital consumers. Clear, informative and entertaining, it covers key topics such as search marketing, social media, Google, mobile marketing, affiliate marketing, email marketing, performance marketing, customer engagement and digital marketing strategies. One of the best-selling books in the industry, this fourth edition of Understanding Digital Marketing has been thoroughly revised with more information, fresh examples and case studies, and the latest developments in the industry. Complete with in-depth insider accounts of digital marketing successes from internationally recognised brands and digital marketing campaigns, it is essential reading for both practitioners and students alike. Understanding Digital Marketing is now required reading for more than 100 universities and colleges, including Harvard University and the Chartered Institute of Marketing. Online resources include bonus chapters, contributor views, and case studies on Kwik Fit, Battersea Dogs Home and Yves Saint Laurent.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

30

Marketing, PR and Sales

Digital Marketing… The Origin of… Have a Plan and Stick to it… Strategy! Crouch, Touch, Pause… Engage… Search – Being Found Online Understanding Social Media Understanding E-Mail Marketing Understanding Mobile Marketing Content Marketing and Native Advertising Understanding Programmatic All About Video Understanding Online PR Understanding Performance Marketing Understanding The IoT Optimizing The Customer and User Experience The Future of Digital Marketing Three Online-Only Bonus Chapters and Three Online-Only Contributor Views

Digital Marketing


Leading Digital Strategy Driving Business Growth Through Effective E-commerce Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2015 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473099 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473105 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Professor Christopher Bones is an established thought leader in people, organization strategy and change and a widely acclaimed, award-winning author. He has over 30 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience in senior leadership positions, working with companies such as Diageo, Cadbury Schweppes and Shell. Appointed the first non-academic Principal of Henley Business School in 2004, he is now Dean Emeritus at Henley and Professor of Creativity and Leadership at Manchester Business School.

This book

<< Provides practical tools and models to support a customer-centric digital strategy << Explains how to gather and use real data in real time to inform strategy and improve performance << Shows how to successfully build a multichannel mindset through interviews with e-commerce pioneers from O2, Barclays, Sky and Fitness First, and a case study of the Open University

Description For a business to thrive competitively in todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s marketplace, it needs to have an effective e-commerce channel. Getting it right opens up new markets and opportunities; getting it wrong leads to declining revenues and profitability. To ensure effectiveness, business leaders and decision-makers must understand how e-commerce channels work to make the best strategic choices for their business. Drawing on experience in consulting to large complex organisations and ground-breaking primary research with senior executives from leading corporations, Leading Digital Strategy creates a convincing case for action and offers practical strategies, methodologies and models to improve the effectiveness of a companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s online offering. It explores how to align organisational structure with wider goals and implement a customer-centric culture. With coverage of the key digital trends, tools and technologies affecting business today, it provides a practical framework for multi-channel success. This book challenges leaders to become as fluent and creative in digital as they are in finance, sales and marketing, and equips them to choose the right strategy and the right people to make it happen. With strategies for improved operational performance and enhanced engagement from senior management, Leading Digital Strategy gives readers the power to drive forward effective digital initiatives and realise rewarding opportunities for change.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

Introduction 21st-century markets Identifying the e-commerce opportunity 4 Putting customers first 5 The new marketing model 6 The business of e-commerce 7 The growth organization 8 Leadership in change 9 Digital leadership in practice 10 The e-commerce leadership model

James Hammersley founded Good Growth with Christopher Bones, an innovative digital change consultancy, whose clients have included Bupa, The Open University, Barclays Connector and O2 among others. Having worked on introducing digital performance to large organizations as a sales specialist he has witnessed first-hand the potential of digital to transform how we listen to and respond to customers.

31

Marketing, PR and Sales

Digital Marketing


Mobile Marketing How Mobile Technology is Revolutionizing Marketing, Communications and Advertising Edition: 2 Date: 02/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479794 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479800 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

This book

<< Is a clear-cut guide on how to structure mobile marketing in a planned and coordinated way << Demystifies terms, tools and techniques, helping readers connect and coordinate the different

dynamics across their business << Includes high-profile case studies including Heineken, Nike Training Club, Google Play and MailChimp << Changes since the last edition include two new chapters (Mobile & Email, Location-Based Devices and Beacons), plus cutting edge updates on wearable technology, mobile payments, virtual reality and understanding the multi-screen journey << Checklists chapter and practical frameworks such as how to create a mobile marketing strategy and how to develop an app << Online resources: digital marketing instructors manual, lecture slides, example exam and self-test questions, and a content calendar template

Description Mobile Marketing is a clear, practical guide to harnessing the mobile consumer and tackling the rising challenges of divided user attention across multiple screens at the same time. It demystifies the vast spectrum of tools and techniques now available and explains how to optimize these dynamics into an innovative and effective mobile marketing strategy. Now that website search rankings take into account mobile optimization, no serious marketer can do without a thorough understanding of mobile. The first edition of Mobile Marketing won the Judgeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Choice Award in Social Media at the Small Business Trendâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s 2014 Book Awards. This fully revised 2nd edition includes straightforward explanations on mobile optimized content, app development, social media and proximity based marketing. It has also expanded to include two brand new chapters on mobile and email and on location-based devices, plus cutting-edge updates on advances in wearable technology, mobile payments, virtual reality and strategies for the changing user journey. Integrated with tactical checklists, easy application frameworks and powerful case study insights such as Heineken, WordPress, MailChimp, Nike Training Club (NTC), Google Play and Moz, it provides a full overview from service provision and technology integration to content strategy, ready to capture fast-moving consumers on the go. Online resources include a digital marketing instructors manual, supporting lecture slides, example exam and self-test questions, and a content calendar template.

Author Information Daniel Rowles has worked in digital marketing for almost 20 years on both the client and agency sides. He is a Course Director for the CIM, lecturer at Imperial College London and Cranfield School of Management and lead judge of the CIM Marketing Excellence awards. He is also the host of the Digital Marketing Podcast, a global top-ten business podcast on iTunes. His company TargetInternet.com has helped clients of all types to use digital marketing more effectively, including the BBC, Vodafone, Sony, Oracle and Tesco.

32

Marketing, PR and Sales

Table of Contents 1

Mobile Marketing in Perspective 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Understanding the User Journey 1.3 Technology Change and Adoption 1.4 Disruption and Integration 1.5 Devices, Platforms and Technology 1.6 The Future of Mobile Marketing 2 The Tactical Toolkit 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Mobile Sites and Responsive Design 2.3 Mobile and E-mail 2.4 How to Build an App 2.5 Social Media and Mobile 2.6 Mobile Search 2.7 Mobile Advertising 2.8 Augmented Reality (AR) and Virtual Reality (VR) 2.9 Quick Response (QR) Codes 2.10 Location-based Devices and Beacons 2.11 Near Field Communication (NFC) and Mobile Payments 2.12 Instant Messenger (IM) Apps and Short Messaging Service (SMS) 2.13 Mobile Analytics 3 Mobile Marketing Checklists 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Checklists 3.3 Conclusions

Digital Marketing


The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing Perspectives, Issues, Challenges and Solutions Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2018 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482220 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482237 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Lazar Dzamic is the former Google ZOO Head of Brand Planning for North and Central Europe (NACE), a creative strategist, writer and academic. He is an award-winning Planning Director in several integrated agencies, and lectures at the Faculty for Media & Communications at the Singidunum University in Belgrade. Justin Kirby is a consultant, educator and thought leader with a 20+ year career in industry as a digital strategist, producer and entrepreneur. He chairs and speaks at conferences around the globe, judges industry awards, and advises brands and agencies

33

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Features contributions from leading academics, industry experts, thought leaders and influencers

around the globe << Presents a wealth of varying perspectives on content marketing grouped into key subject areas, allowing the reader to move through the book according to their interests and absorb the most useful aspects of each discussion << Includes coverage of core subjects including media publishing, text vs visuals vs gaming, the ethics of native advertising, content marketing measurement, content blockers, storytelling through data, and much more << Brings together numerous, and often opposing, perspectives to present a unified, definitive appraisal of content marketing as a whole

Description Marketers everywhere are talking about content, but not everyone is saying the same thing. Some professionals love content and believe it has revolutionized the practice of marketing. To others, it’s mere hype: a new name for what marketers have always done. The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing brings together all of these diverse perspectives, structuring them around useful key topics that provide insight into the multi-faceted nature of content marketing. The editors of The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing weave different voices together to present a balanced view of content marketing, grouping the discussion around relevant subjects such as content monetization, native advertising, visuals vs video, and the challenge of measuring results. This structure allows readers to move through the book according to their interests, and cherry-pick the most useful aspects of each discussion to apply to their own marketing initiatives. Containing contributions from, and interviews with, leading academics, industry experts, thought leaders and influencers, this book is a truly unique resource.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction – Mapping the Content Marketing Territory 2 Content Marketing – A New and Better Promise? 2.1 Why Content is Seen as the Solution to Current Marketing Challenges 2.2 Experience Economy – Brand and Customer Experience as Content Enablers 2.3 How Content can Help Build Sustainable Brands with Better Purposes 3 How Content Changes the Way We All do Business 3.1 Client Perspective – How Content Impacts Creativity, Process and Revenue 3.2 Creative Agency Perspective – How Content Impacts Creativity, Process and Revenue 3.3 Media Agency Perspective – How Content Impacts Creativity, Process and Revenue 3.4 Publisher Perspective – How Content Impacts Creativity, Process and Revenue 4 Creativity, Media Planning and the Role of Content in the Consumer Journey 4.1 Content Distribution and its Role in the Consumer Journey 4.2 Content’s Melting Pot of Skills – A New Challenge for Creative Teams 4.3 Content and Storytelling in the Age of User Data Abundance

Digital Marketing

4.4 The Evolution of Content Formats – From Text to Video to AR/VR to AI… 4.5 Have We Reached the End of the User Generated Content? 5 How to Measure and Evaluate Content Marketing 5.1 Key Measurement Issues Relating to Content Marketing 5.2 Key Tools, KPIs and Frameworks to Measure the Effects of Content Marketing 6 Content Marketing – Not Such a New and Better Promise? 6.1 The Rejecter’s Manifesto – Key Arguments against the Content Marketing ‘Mirage’ 6.2 Content Marketing and Ethics – Challenges, Threats and Balancing Acts 6.3 Conclusion – Top Ten Insights into the Present and Future of Strategic Content Marketing


Video Marketing Strategy Harness the Power of Online Video to Drive Brand Growth Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2018 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481599 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481582 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Jon Mowat is an award winning content creator and video strategy expert. Since 2005 he has been Managing Director at Hurricane Media, the UK’s foremost video marketing agency, and previously spent 15 years at the BBC as producer and director on documentaries screened internationally on BBC 1, BBC2, Channel 4 and Discovery. He has won numerous industry awards, including three from the Royal Television Society.

34

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Reveals the formula for success in video marketing and the psychology behind it, made accessible

through clearly explained practical tips and frameworks << Features interviews with high profile practitioners showing how they have effectively incorporated video marketing within their own organizations << Contains a wealth of fascinating examples and case studies that showcase the best in video marketing around the world, making it extremely international in scope << Online resources: Links to relevant videos, practical planning aids and helpful, digital learning tools << Shows how to harness the psychology behind video on mobile

Description Video is the single most effective tool that marketers have to raise brand awareness, increase sales, drive website traffic and deliver ROI on marketing budgets. Driven by consumer demand and with the backing of the largest social media platforms, our world is becoming ‘video first’. Video Marketing Strategy allows marketers to harness the power of video and create effective video campaigns. This in-depth look at the world’s most powerful medium helps brands to radically magnify their voice by tapping into a level of emotional engagement that can’t be achieved any other way. The book explores both theory (why are humans so affected by video on mobile devices?) and practice (what’s the key to making videos that deliver results?). It looks at how multiple videos form wider campaigns and covers content hubs, activation strategies and testing. It is filled with invaluable advice, tips and strategies for incorporating video into a wider content marketing plan. Written by an award-winning video marketer with decades of experience, Video Marketing Strategy gives readers the magic formula to create engaging, effective content. Truly global in scope, it features case studies from around the world, and shows how marketers from all sectors and industries have used video campaigns successfully. Featuring insights from prominent industry practitioners Video Marketing Strategy is jam-packed with guidance on how to make videos that cut through the market place and deliver measurable results.

Table of Contents 1

Video Marketing Strategy: An Introduction 2 What Is Video Marketing? 2.1 The Growth of Video Marketing 2.2 Why Video Marketing Works 2.3 Video Types and Approaches 2.4 Which Online Video Platforms (OVP) Should Brands Use? 2.5 Conclusion to Section 1 3 Creating Great Videos 4 Creating Great Videos: An Introduction 4.1 The Basics of Video Marketing 4.2 The Magic Formula for Great Video: An Introduction 4.3 The Magic Formula: Planning Effective Video Campaigns 4.4 The Magic Formula: Storytelling and Creative That Changes Behaviour 4.5 The Magic Formula: Activation, Measurement and Testing 4.6 The Dark Underbelly of Video Advertising: How To Avoid Losing Money 5 DIY Video Projects 5.1 DIY Video: An Introduction 5.2 DIY Video: Filming On A Smartphone 5.3 DIY Video: Filming On DSLRs 5.4 DIY Video: Advanced Filming Tips 5.5 DIY Video: Editing

Digital Marketing

6 Creating Effective Video Campaigns 6.1 Multi-Video Campaigns: An Introduction 6.2 Steps 1 and 2: Where Your Brand Content Is Now and Setting Goals 6.3 Step 3: Content Planning and Programming Strategy 6.4 Step 4: Building the Perfect Content Hub 6.5 Step 5: Creating High-Volume Video Content - and Making It Easy 6.6 Step 6: Multi-Video Campaign Activation and Testing (How To Grow ROI) 6.7 Adding Live Video To Your Campaign 6.8 Multi-Video Campaigns: A Summary


Understanding Social Media How to Create a Plan for Your Business that Works Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2015 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473563 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473570 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Damian Ryan is founder and chairman of The Global Academy of Digital Marketing, a collaborative movement comprised of digital marketers seeking knowledge, case studies, contacts and credible data to help them prosper. He is also a partner with Mediaventura, the UK’s leading corporate finance firm for the TIME (Technology, Internet, Media and Entertainment) sector. He is also the author ofUnderstanding Digital Marketingand The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World.

35

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Covers topics such as how to develop a strategy and programme, budget for activities, set KPIs, determine ROI, create a dashboard and build a team << Addresses the relationship between search and social, analytics, customer experience and risk assessment and management in social media << Helps readers gauge their own social media score with crib notes and practical exercises << Serves as both a reference guide for professionals and study guide for marketing students

Description Understanding Social Media is the essential guide to social media for students and professionals alike. Drawing on the experience, advice and tips from dozens of digital marketers and social media superstars, it is an extensive crowd-sourced guide to social media platforms. Illustrated throughout with case studies from both successful and failed campaigns, Understanding Social Media democratizes knowledge of social media and promotes best practice, answering questions such as ‘How do you create a compelling social media campaign?’, ‘How do you build and engage with an audience?’ and ‘Where is the line between online PR and social media drawn?’ It is the most comprehensive and practical reference guide to social media available.

Table of Contents 1

Getting started – how to create a compelling social media programme 2 Rules governing the relationship between search and social 3 How to budget for social media activities 4 Setting KPIs and measuring success 5 Understanding social media ROI – what matters and what doesn’t 6 Why social media is central to customer experience 7 How to build a social media team – how to pick the right suppliers 8 Understanding the relationship between online PR and social media 9 The future for social media and the vastly changing landscape 10 Risk assessment and risk management in social media

Digital Marketing


Social Media Risk and Governance Managing Enterprise Risk Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2015 Price: $37.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474577 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474584 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Digital Marketing

Author Information Phil Mennie is PwCâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s global social media risk and governance leader, helping clients harness the power of social media. His expertise stems from experience using web technology to better manage financial and operational data. He has led engagements across a broad range of industries, including banking and finance, where he steered the development of a secure web-based payment system and a large scale customer-facing web application to capture trade data. Phil speaks at a range of social media and data conferences across the UK and Europe.

36

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Covers both outward-facing social media as well as enterprise social networks, ensuring that

business communications can be conducted in a safe and compliant manner << Balances the benefits of social media use with the underlying risks it presents, showing how good governance can help to navigate these challenges successfully << Includes diagrams and practical tips that can be incorporated into a risk strategy to add value immediately << Features chapter overviews, lists, key terms, checklists and chapter summaries to make understanding key concepts and implementing a strategy easy << Takes examples from BP, MasterCard, Netflix, PwC, Silk Road, UBS, Yelp and other well-known businesses

Description Few topics are as pressing to policy makers, business leaders and the risk management community as the secure and compliant management of social media. Social Media Risk and Governance is a practical guide to the components and considerations which make up a good social media governance strategy, spanning both external communications channels such as Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn, as well as enterprise social networks within an organization. Written by social media risk and governance expert Phil Mennie, Social Media Risk and Governance addresses the concepts which professionals in information security, marketing, compliance and risk management need to take into account in their daily practice, guiding us through policy evaluation, planning on social media, information security and fraud risks, how to respond to a crisis or to archive data and more. Featuring examples from companies such as BP, MasterCard, Netflix, PwC, Silk Road, UBS and Yelp, the book is designed to promote cross-functional working between professional users of social media, acknowledging the impact of these technologies across the business and the interaction of the various stakeholders when planning new activities to effectively harness the power of social media safely and successfully for their organization.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Introduction to social media Risk Strategy Data privacy and control Governance Policy, training and awareness Crisis management Cyber security Regulation The future and its opportunities

Digital Marketing


Event Planning and Management A Practical Handbook for PR and Events Professionals Edition: 1 Date: 09/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471392 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471408 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Event Management

Author Information Ruth Dowson has over 30 years’ experience in strategic development, management and delivery of events, conferences, seminars and exhibitions, in both the public and private sectors. She is a senior lecturer and course leader in events management at the UK Centre for Events Management at Leeds Beckett University. David Bassett is an experienced event organizer and educator in events management, leisure, sport and tourism. As Senior Lecturer at the UK Centre for Events Management, he educates and trains aspiring events managers, as well as industry practitioners, to deliver successful events in the UK and overseas.

37

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Takes readers through the entire process of planning and managing a successful event << Provides the underpinning theories of general events management, along with useful tips and

strategies, that can be applied to all forms of events management (including corporate, volunteer, etc.) << Includes access to supporting online resources such as templates and discussion questions << Features real cases throughout including the Variety Club, London 2012 Olympics and the Prince’s Trust << Each stage of the process is fully supported with a bundle of 57 online resources, including templates, forms and discussion questions to make up a complete event planner’s toolkit.

Description The events industry is an exciting, innovative, diverse and highly challenging environment in which to work. Event Planning and Management offers a structured, practical approach to all types of events, from the initial planning, to final evaluating stages. It introduces the key models and theories but focuses on the practical side of building and working with a team, choosing a location, creating a programme, dealing with stakeholders and sponsors, promoting the event, essential financial and procurement considerations and finally evaluating the event. Each stage of the process is fully supported with online resources including templates and discussion questions to make up a complete event planner’s toolkit. Balancing coverage of the key theory and models with essential practical guidance, tools and case studies from organizations such as London 2012 and the Prince’s Trust, Event Planning and Management is an ideal handbook for students and practitioners alike. About the PR in Practice series: Published in collaboration with the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR), the PR in Practice series comprises accessible, practical introductions to day-today issues of public relations practice and management. The series’ action-oriented approach keeps knowledge and skills up to date.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Introduction to events Event Planning Location, Location, Location Content is King Site Planning and Logistics Building the Event Team Promoting the Event Finance Evaluation Future proofing your events

Event Management


Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480776 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480790 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Key Account Management

Author Information Professor Malcolm McDonald was formerly a Professor of Marketing and Deputy Director at Cranfield University School of Management and is now an Emeritus Professor. Based in the UK, he is also an Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School and the author of Malcolm MacDonald on Marketing Planning, also published by Kogan Page. Dr Beth Rogers was formerly a Business Development Manager at Portsmouth Business School and chaired project board developing National Occupational Standards for UK professional sales. Based in the UK, she is now the Director of two organisations and writes articles for business publications.

38

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Understand the balance between achieving growth through the development of key accounts and

serving key accounts, without letting costs become prohibitive << Implement best practice in key account management in a confident and successful manner through a highly practical, step-by-step approach << Benefit from rich learning features, including mini-cases, narratives, examples, diagrams, and visually represented models << Online resources: include a bonus chapter, case studies, self-test questions, figures and tables, a template for creating your own KAM plan and suggested further reading << Written by authors with over 20 years experience researching, teaching and consulting on key account management

Description Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management explores the challenges of winning, retaining and developing key accounts. Key accounts are customers who help their suppliers grow, and consequently, they wield significant power. Although they are the key to market share and revenue growth, the costs of serving key accounts can erode profitability unless they are thoroughly understood and managed. Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management takes a step-by-step approach to presenting best practice in key account management. Whether your business is starting up or well-established, there is always more to discover about improving the way value is created between you and your most important customers. Malcolm McDonald and Beth Rogers have spent over twenty years researching, teaching and consulting on key account management, and have condensed their knowledge into this book, focusing on making it clear, concise and easy to use.

Table of Contents 1

Introducing Key Account Management 2 The Role of Key Accounts in Achieving Business Growth 3 Selecting the Right Key Accounts 4 Understanding Buying Decisions 5 Key Account Plans 6 Understanding Account-Based Marketing 7 People and Skills for Key Account Management 8 Going Global with Key Accounts 9 The Risks of Key Account Management 10 The Future of Key Account Management

Key Account Management


Key Account Management Tools and Techniques for Achieving Profitable Key Supplier Status Edition: 6 Date: 02/28/2015 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469405 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469412 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Key Account Management

Author Information Peter Cheverton is Director of Insight Marketing & People, now established as the leading international training and consultancy firm in KAM implementation, working in more than thirty countries including Australia, Austria, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, China, Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Hong Kong, India, Italy, Korea, Malaysia, Mexico, Poland, Singapore, South Africa, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, the United Kingdom and the United States, with a client list that includes some of the world’s major blue chip companies. He is also the author of Understanding the Professional Buyer and Global Account Management (both published by Kogan Page).

39

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Focuses on practical implementation rather than the theory of account management << Helps boost account management effectiveness with practical tools including new and updated

online resources << Brings the elements of key account management together to help practitioners form and implement their own strategy << Supported by a number of online resources, including helpful templates, guides for students and lecturers, and self tests

Description An organization’s key accounts are its lifeblood. Key account management focuses on the long-term investment of resources in customers that can offer an exceptional return on resources. But which are the key accounts? Are they the ones growing the fastest? The ones that are most financially secure? Or are they the ones that shout the loudest? Key Account Management puts forward a straightforward and effective planning methodology. This fully updated 6th edition of Key Account Management takes a long-term, team-selling strategic view of the whole process, from defining the customer, to managing the relationship and achieving key supplier status. With coverage of latest best practice including IT’s role in account management, plus new case studies, online supporting resources and a new section comparing how different industries/ markets approach key account management, it stands alone as the premier book on managing key customers. Key Account Management is also supported by a number of online resources, including helpful templates, guides for students and lecturers, and self tests to ensure that best practice is being followed.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

Definitions and purpose The key account approach Why Key Account Management? The spectrum of KAM ambition What is a key account? What is Key Account Management? 2 Analysis: opportunity and value 2.1 Knowing the market, knowing your value 2.2 Knowing the people, knowing your value 3 Relationship management 3.1 From ‘bow-ties’ to ‘diamonds’ 3.2 Decision mapping and contact strategies 3.3 The good, the bad, the sad and the ugly 4 Achieving key supplier status 4.1 The purchasing revolution 4.2 Supply chain management: seeking value 4.3 Purchasing organization: rationalization and centralization 4.4 Supplier positioning: managing suppliers 5 Achieving strategic supplier status 5.1 Being of strategic value 5.2 How do they plan to grow? 5.3 How do they aim to win? 5.4 What drives them? 5.5 A shared future?

Key Account Management

6 The value proposition 6.1 The customer’s total business experience 6.2 The customer’s activity cycle 6.3 Measuring the value – securing the reward 6.4 Making the proposal 7 Planning and joint planning 7.1 The key account plan 7.2 Joint planning 8 Targeting 8.1 Customer classification 8.2 Customer distinction 8.3 Global Account Management 9 Making it happen 9.1 Sins and requirements 9.2 Leadership and organization 9.3 Skills, attitudes and behaviours 9.4 The role of information technology 9.5 Measuring customer profitability 9.6 The implementation plan 9.7 Training and further help


Implementing Key Account Management Designing Customer-Centric Processes for Mutual Growth Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482756 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482763 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Key Account Management

Author Information Mark Davies acts as Visiting Fellow for Cranfield School of Management and facilitates the Cranfield KAM Best Practice Research Club. Rodrigo Guesalaga is senior lecturer at Cranfield School of Management. He is a member of the editorial board for the Journal of Business and Industrial Marketing and Journal of Business Market Management, and counsels the Circle of Marketing at Icare, Chile. Sue Holt is Director of the Cranfield School of Managementâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s flagship Open Programme on KAM. Javier Marcos has designed and delivered programmes globally for clients such as Barclays, Cap Gemini, GKN Aerospace, RollsRoyce and Unilever.

40

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Features case studies from diverse sectors including professional services (Ernst & Young), financial

services (FM), manufacturing (Rolls-Royce), services (EMCOR, FM Global), pharmaceuticals (Pfizer), and engineering (AMEY) << Combines ground-breaking research with experience from recognized thought leaders of Cranfield School of Management << Offers an integrative Key Account Management framework that senior executives can use to design or further develop strategic customer management programmes

Description Implementing Key Account Management is a highly practical handbook that guides readers through the realities of rolling out a functional key account management programme. The book offers an integrated framework for key account management (KAM) that businesses can use to design or further develop strategic customer management programmes, enabling them to overcome the obstacles that organizations often face when rolling out their strategies. Bringing together the experiences of leading experts within this field, Implementing Key Account Management draws on two decades of research and best practice from Cranfield University School of Management, one of the foremost centres for researcher and thought leadership in KAM. Between them, the authors have designed and delivered programmes globally for clients such as Rolls-Royce, Unilever, Vodafone, The Economist and many more. Rigorously researched, well-grounded and practical, this book is - quite simply - the definitive, go-to resource for implementing key account management programmes.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction to Implementing Key Account Management 2 Re-engaging Strategic Customers 2.1 Adopting Key Account Management 2.2 Building Customer Understanding and Value Planning 2.3 Measuring KAM Performance and Developing Customer Relations 3 Developing Winning Offerings 3.1 Creating Compelling Value Propositions for Customers 3.2 Co-Creating Value with Strategic Customers 4 Designing Customer-Centric Approaches and Processes 4.1 The Role of Key Account Managers and Key Account Teams 4.2 Determining KAM Structures, Policies & Processes 4.3 Measuring and Incentivising KAM 4.4 KAM and Procurement 4.5 International Key Account Management 5 Assessing Your KAM Program â&#x20AC;&#x201C; A Framework 5.1 The KAM Implementation Framework

Key Account Management


A Practitioner’s Guide to AccountBased Marketing Accelerating Growth in Strategic Accounts Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479893 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479909 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Key Account Management

Author Information Bev Burgess is Senior Vice President at ITSMA, leading its Global Account-Based Marketing Practice and delivering consultancy and training on the design, development, and implementation of ABM programmes. She has personally helped companies around the world to accelerate account growth using ABM techniques. Dave Munn has been the President and CEO of ITSMA since 2001, having led ITSMA’s global expansion to become the leading B2B marketing association for technology, professional services, and telecom companies. Prior to joining ITSMA in 1995, Dave held senior field positions with Oracle and Apple.

41

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Includes case studies from practising professionals who are working in account-based marketing,

including pioneering companies such as BT, Cisco, Cognizant, Fujitsu, Hewlett-Packard and more << Explores the development of account-based marketing as a business practice, including the lessons learned by the pioneers of the approach, and the pitfalls that those implementing it should avoid << Gives a step-by-step process for those wishing to set up an account-based marketing programme, and use it strategically to accelerate growth in strategic accounts << Provides an emphasis on practicality and is an accessible and pragmatic tool for those who want a holistic guidebook to dip in and out of as they develop careers in ABM

Description Account-based marketing, also known as client-centric marketing, is in the process of transforming modern marketing practice. It involves taking a strategic approach to business to business marketing, whereby important individual accounts are treated as markets in their own right. After all, many of the world’s leading companies have annual revenues the size of some countries’ GDP, so for the businesses that provide services and solutions to these companies, such key accounts truly do represent a global market. A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing explores the development of account-based marketing (ABM) as a business practice, and outlines a clear, step-bystep process for readers who wish to set up an ABM programme to accelerate growth. Rich with fascinating case studies and personal stories, A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing offers readers privileged access to lessons learned by pioneering companies in the field, including BT, Fujitsu, IBM, Juniper Networks, Microsoft, SAP, and many more. The text is fully endorsed by the Information Technology Services Marketing Association (ITSMA), who run the only formally recognized qualification in the sector: the Account-Based Marketing Certification Programme. Meticulously researched and highly practical, A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing will help all marketers strengthen relationships, build reputation, and increase revenues in their most important accounts.

Table of Contents 1

Setting up an Account-Based Marketing Programme 1.1 The Essentials of Account-Based Marketing 1.2 Building the Right Foundations for Account-Based Marketing 1.3 Investing in the Right Tools and Technologies 1.4 Deciding Which Accounts to Focus On 1.5 The ABM Adoption Model 2 Account-Based Marketing Step-By-Step 2.1 Knowing What is Driving the Account 2.2 Playing to the Client’s Needs 2.3 Mapping and Profiling Stakeholders 2.4 Developing Targeted Value Propositions 2.5 Planning Integrated Sales and Marketing Campaigns 2.6 Executing Integrated Campaigns 2.7 Evaluating Results and Updating Plans 3 Developing your Career as an Account-Based Marketer 3.1 The Competencies You Need to do Account-Based Marketing 3.2 Managing your ABM Career

Key Account Management


The Luxury Strategy Break the Rules of Marketing to Build Luxury Brands Edition: 2 Date: 09/28/2012 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749464912 ISBN Ebook: 9780749464929 Pages: 408 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Luxury Marketing

Author Information Jean-Noël Kapferer is a worldwide thought leader and expert on brand management. A Professor of marketing strategy at HEC Graduate School of Management in France and is also a corporate branding consultant. His other popular titles include Kapferer on Luxury and The New Strategic Brand Management.

This book

<< Identifies the rules for marketing luxury products and implementing a luxury strategy Description The Luxury Strategy, written by two world experts on luxury branding, provides the first rigorous blueprint for the effective management of luxury brands and companies at the highest level. It rationalizes those business models that have achieved profitability and unveils the original methods that were used to transform small family businesses such as Ferrari, Louis Vuitton, Cartier, Chanel, Armani, Gucci, and Ralph Lauren into profitable global brands. By defining the differences between premium and luxury brands and products, analysing the nature of true luxury brands and turning established marketing ‘rules’ upside down, The Luxury Strategy has established itself as the definitive work on the essence of a luxury brand strategy. This fully revised second edition of The Luxury Strategy explores the diversity of meanings of ‘luxury’ across different markets. It also includes a new section on marketing and selling luxury goods online and the impact of social networks and digital developments, cementing its position as the authority on luxury strategy.

Table of Contents

Vincent Bastien is one of the most experienced senior managers in the luxury business. Formerly MD of Louis Vuitton Malletier and CEO of Yves Saint Laurent Parfums, he has held senior posts at some of the world’s most prestigious luxury brands. He is now Affiliate Professor at HEC Paris, teaching Strategy in Luxury.

1 Back to luxury fundamentals 1.1 In the beginning there was luxury 1.2 The end of a confusion: premium is not luxury 1.3 Anti-laws of marketing 1.4 Facets of luxury today 2 Luxury brands need specific management 2.1 Customer attitudes vis-à-vis luxury 2.2 Developing brand equity 2.3 Luxury brand stretching 2.4 Qualifying a product or service as luxury 2.5 Pricing luxury 2.6 Distribution and the internet dilemma 2.7 Communicating luxury 2.8 Financial and HR management of a luxury company 3 Strategic perspectives 3.1 Luxury business models 3.2 Entering luxury and leaving it 3.3 Learning from luxury 3.4 Luxury and sustainable development: convergences and divergences

42

Luxury Marketing

Marketing, PR and Sales


The Management of Luxury An International Guide Edition: 2 Date: 06/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481827 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481810 Pages: 456 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Luxury Marketing

Author Information Benjamin Berghaus is Head of the Competence Center for Luxury Management at the Institute of Marketing of University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland. Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor of Management and Organization at the University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland, and Director of its Institute of Management. Sven Reinecke is Associate Professor of Business Administration, specialized in Marketing, and Director of the Institute of Marketing at the University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland.

43

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Explains how to streamline marketing and management processes across a luxury business << Contributes unique strategies from more than fifty luxury thought leaders across Europe, Asia, Australia and the Americas << New to this edition: how to manage the changing Asian markets, the digitalization of sales, communication and product, new strategies for the evolving market and business of luxury << Shares high profile insights to case studies such as Louis Vuitton, Leica and Moët-Hennessy

Description The Management of Luxury, second edition, presents a unique snapshot of best practice insights into the increasing challenges faced in luxury business, with contributions shared by more than fifty global leaders on luxury management. The highly renowned editors draw these together into one essential handbook, ranging from luxury brand strategy, luxury consumer behaviour and market positioning, through to management succession, heritage, counterfeiting and competing effectively as a luxury SME. Fully updated in its second edition, The Management of Luxury explores the newly evolving direction of Asian market trends and how to integrate digitalization into sales and product strategies. Both are crucial for competitive advantage in the luxury market, featured alongside iconic case studies such as Burberry, Louis Vuitton and Leica. The book’s value is not only in streamlining management processes and return on investment; but equally for those who marvel at an industry unlike any other, striving to trust both in the conventional and innovate new paths towards the extraordinary. Highly influential, applicable and enlightening, it is a vital addition to every luxury business manager’s collection.

Table of Contents 1 The Luxury Market 1.1 The Market and Business of Luxury – An Introduction [Günter Müller-Stewens, Benjamin Berghaus] 1.2 Classifying Luxury and Prodigality [Michael Jäckel] 1.3 Exploring Luxury Consumer Behaviour [Prokopis Theodoridis, Sofia Vassou] 1.4 Identity-Driven Luxury Brand Management [Klaus Heine] 2 Luxury Brand Strategy 2.1 Public Luxury Representatives [Michael Breazeale, Christopher R Long, Daniela Ott] 2.2 Curating the Creative Genius in Luxury Firms [Charles Aaron Lawry, Sabrina Helm] 2.3 Arts Meet Luxury Brands [Carsten Baumgarth, Nicole Lohrisch, Olga Louisa Kastner] 2.4 Luxury as a Societal Mentor [George Panigyrakis, Eirini Koronaki] 2.5 Preserving Luxury Exclusivity Through Arts [Claude Chailan, Ivan Valek] 2.6 Brand Charismatic Legitimacy and Marketing of Adoration [Delphine Dion, Eric Arnould] 2.7 Digital Media in Monobrand Stores [Marcus Schögel, Timo Tischer]

Luxury Marketing

3 Luxury Business Strategy 3.1 The Chinese Market – Entry Modes [Rui Wang, Kaibin He, Yue Wen] 3.2 Entering the Chinese Market [Rui Wang, Kaibin He, Yue Wen] 3.3 Managing Brand Extensions in the Luxury Industry [KlausPeter Wiedmann, Christiane Klarmann, Nadine Hennigs, Stefan Behrens, Alexander Stigelski] 3.4 Managing Luxury Brands in the Digital Environment [Elisa Arrigo] 3.5 Competing as a Luxury SME [France Riguelle, Didier Van Caillie] 3.6 Insisting on Luxury to Survive [Michael Reinhold, Emil Annen] 3.7 Managing Price Fluctuations of Raw Materials through Innovation [Anne-Flore Maman] 3.8 The Counterfeit Timer© [AnneFlore Maman, Camille Depigny] 3.9 Acting on Luxury Counterfeiting [Ludovica Cesareo, Alberto Pastore] 3.10 Luxury Brands as Employers [Verena Batt, Benjamin Berghaus] 3.11 The Impact of Luxury Brands on Employees [Benjamin Berghaus, Sven Reinecke]

4 Luxury Responsibility 4.1 Heritage of Luxury and Responsibility [Duane Windsor] 4.2 Luxury Organizations and Responsibility – A Toolbox [Farah Montesa, René Rohrbeck] 4.3 Luxury Organizations and Social Responsibility – A Case Study [David S. Waller, Anurag G. Hingorani]


Kapferer on Luxury How Luxury Brands Can Grow Yet Remain Rare Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474362 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474379 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Luxury Marketing

Author Information Jean-Noël Kapferer is one of world’s foremost thought leaders on luxury and its brands. An active researcher, HEC Paris graduate and PhD-holder from Northwestern University’s Kellogg Business School (USA), Kapferer is co-author of The Luxury Strategy and The New Strategic Brand Management and has written many seminal articles. He is a sought after speaker, leading seminars on luxury all around the world at institutions such as HEC Paris, Tsing Hua University Beijing, Seoul Luxury Business Institute and LBI Shanghai. He is also advisor to the president of Inseec Business School (Paris).

44

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Addresses the need to demonstrate growth in the face of the many unique challenges to the luxury sector << Offers expert strategies that help sustain luxury growth at higher volumes without risking dilution << Includes recent and authoritative international research into the basis of the luxury dream and a fresh approach to the specific obstacles to perceived exclusivity posed by the Internet

Description Kapferer on Luxury addresses the No 1 challenge of all major luxury brands today: How can these brands pursue their growth yet remain luxury? How do you reconcile growth and rarity? Kapferer on Luxury offers a selection of the most recent and insightful articles and original essays on the luxury growth challenge from Jean-Noël Kapferer, a world-renowned luxury analyst and co-author of the reference book The Luxury Strategy. Each chapter addresses a specific issue relating to the luxury growth challenge such as sustaining the ‘luxury dream’, adapting the internet to luxury demands, re-widening the gap with premium brands’ competition, facing the demand of the Chinese clients, the importance of non-delocalization, rising sustainable quality and experiential standards, developing real luxury services and managing luxury brands within groups without diluting their equity and more. As such, Kapferer on Luxury is the perfect and timely resource for luxury executives, communication managers, luxury observers and advanced students willing to deepen their understanding of this major luxury challenge.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction: Growth issues for luxury 2 How luxury is changing 2.1 Sustaining the luxury dream: challenges and insights 2.2 Abundant rarity: the key to luxury growth 2.3 The artification of luxury: from artisans to artists 3 Specific issues and challenges 3.1 Luxury after the crisis: pro logo or no logo? 3.2 Why luxury should not delocalize: a critique of a growing tendency 3.3 Internet and luxury: underadopted or ill-adapted? 3.4 Does luxury have a minimum price?: an exploratory study into consumers’ psychology of luxury prices 3.5 All that glitters is not green: the challenge of sustainable luxury 4 The business side of luxury brands’ growth 4.1 Not all luxuries act alike: the distinct business models of luxury brands 4.2 The LVMH–Bulgari agreement: what changes in the luxury market lead family companies to sell up? 4.3 Developing luxury brands within luxury groups: synergies without dilution?

Luxury Marketing


Rethinking Prestige Branding Secrets of the Ueber-Brands Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749470036 ISBN Ebook: 9780749470043 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Luxury Marketing

Author Information Wolfgang Schaefer is Chief Strategic Officer at SelectNY, one of the world’s leading premium brand building networks. Wolf has been building global brand strategies for over 20 years in Europe, the US and Asia Pacific for companies as diverse as PepsiCo, P&G, Unilever, Coty and Nestle. His main expertise lies in prestige brands such as Davidoff, Chopard, Swarovski, Lancaster amongst many others. Holding an MA from the University of the Arts Berlin, Wolf is co-located between NYC and Berlin and is a frequent lecturer at universities and conferences in the US as well as Europe. JP Kuehlwein is Executive Vice President at Frédéric Fekkai, a New York-based prestige salon operator and hair care brand and an Outside Director of Smith & Norbu, a luxury optical frame maker in Hong Kong. He draws on over twenty years of hands-on experience in managing brands at Procter & Gamble across markets in Europe, North America and Asia. JP holds degrees in international management and business analysis from the universities of Reutlingen (Germany), Reims (France) and Lancaster (UK) and enjoys sharing his business and branding insights with students and marketers across the globe.

45

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Hones premium marketing skills by helping readers understand how the prestige marketing model

seeks to attract the media, analysts and consumers << Provides insight into both the practical marketing of prestige brands and how consumers respond to them psychologically and emotionally << Shows how to upgrade brands facing the ‘squeeze in the middle’, a polarization to high-end/lifestyle or commoditized retailer brands

Description What makes someone covet a Kelly bag? Why are Cirque Du Soleil or Grey Goose so successful despite breaking all the conventions of their categories? What does Gucci’s approach to marketing have in common with Nespresso’s? And why do some people pay a relative fortune for Renova toilet paper or Aesop detergent even though they hardly ever ‘advertise’ and seem to have none of the ‘functional performance advantages’ conventional marketers would seek to demonstrate? Prestige brand experts JP Kuehlwein and Wolfgang Schaefer have dedicated themselves to studying what drives the success of prestige brands. Rethinking Prestige Branding collects their insights. Uncovering the secrets of why and how some brands are created more equal than others, Rethinking Prestige Branding includes over 100 case studies from Apple and Abercrombie & Fitch to Tate Modern and Tesla. Rather than re-telling brand success stories or re-hashing long-standing marketing principles, it takes readers on a colourful journey behind the scenes of today’s marketing pros. This book will fascinate the marketing professional just as much as those who are simply curious as to how premium brands tick.

Table of Contents 1 Rethinking prestige branding 1.1 The times they are a-changing 1.2 From marker to myth – a brief history of branding 1.3 A new kind of prestige – or what we mean by Ueber-Brands™ 2 The seven secrets of UeberBrands 2.1 Principle 1: Mission incomparable – the first rule is to make your own 2.2 Principle 2: Longing versus belonging – the challenge is both 2.3 Principle 3: Un-selling – the superiority of seduction 2.4 Principle 4: From myth to meaning – the best way up is to go deep 2.5 Principle 5: Behold! – the product as manifestation 2.6 Principle 6: Living the dream – the bubble shall never burst 2.7 Principle 7: Growth without end – the ultimate balancing act

Luxury Marketing


Statistics for Market Research Online Course Do your students need some extra help with developing their skills? Created in collaboration with the Market Research Society (MRS), our new course covers the fundamentals of market research, theory and practice. Designed to provide students with a better appreciation of the key statistical concepts that underpin the business of market research, this interactive course offers market research students the opportunity to develop their competence and skills set when working with statistics. By the end of this course, your students will be able to: • Understand different types of data and methods of summarizing • Test the accuracy of survey data • Calculate confidence intervals • Determine appropriate sample sizes • Understand how to test for real differences in the data using significance testing

Special offers to academic institutions are available: please contact corporate-enquiries@koganpage.com for more information


Market Research in Practice An Introduction to Gaining Greater Market Insight Edition: 3 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475857 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475864 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Market Research

Author Information Paul Hague is MD of B2B International. With 35 years of experience running market research agencies, his clients include some of the largest corporations in Europe and the United States. He has written, coauthored and contributed to numerous publications on market research, its tools and techniques. Matthew Harrison holds a degree in international management with French from the University of Bath. He is CEO of B2B International and previously set up and ran the companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s offices in Beijing and New York. He has 16 years of experience in businessto-business market research and intelligence. Julia Cupman is a global director of B2B International, where she has led market research projects for over 70 large companies across a variety of industry sectors. In 2011, Julia pioneered the Net Value Score - a tool used for assessing the perceived value of brands - which has since been incorporated into several hundred research studies to guide companies on their brand positioning and brand equity. Oliver Truman is a director of B2B International and has a responsibility for technical development. He is a graduate in linguistics from Manchester University and began life as a market research interviewer at B2B international eight years ago. He has moved through the ranks with various assignments as a research executive, website development, through to his board appointment. Oliver is a prolific contributor to the B2B website and blog. Oliverâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s clients include Samsung, E.ON, Kaspersky, Vocollect, Shell, Microsoft, Zurich Insurance.

47

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Explains how to use market research tools and methods to obtain the most reliable results, taking examples from companies including Adidas, Marks & Spencer, Grohe and General Motors << Helps readers negotiate the intricate bends of conducting effective market research << Shows anyone who commissions market research how to manage a project << Demonstrates the value of market intelligence in business strategy << Online Resources: accompanied by a range of tools, templates, surveys and guides.

Description Market research has never been more important. As organizations become increasingly sophisticated, the need to profile customers, deliver customer satisfaction, target certain audiences, develop their brands, optimize prices and more has grown. Lively and accessible, Market Research in Practice is a practical introduction to market research tools, approaches and issues. Providing a clear, step-bystep guide to the whole process - from planning and executing a project through to analysing and presenting the findings - it explains how to use tools and methods effectively to obtain reliable results. This fully updated third edition of Market Research in Practice has been revised to reflect the most recent trends in the industry. Ten new chapters cover topical issues such as ethics in market research and qualitative and quantitative research, plus key concepts such as international research, how to design and scope a survey, how to create a questionnaire, how to choose a sample and how to carry out interviews are covered in detail. Tips, and advice from the authorsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; own extensive experiences are included throughout to ground the concepts in business reality. Accompanied by a range of online tools, templates, surveys and guides, this is an invaluable guide for students of research methods, researchers, marketers and users of market research. Online resources include a range of tools, templates, surveys and guides.

Table of Contents 1

Planning a market research study 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Market research design 1.3 Uses of market research 2 Qualitative research 2.1 Qualitative research 2.2 Desk research 2.3 Focus groups 2.4 Depth interviewing 2.5 Observation and ethnography 3 Quantitative research 3.1 Quantitative research 3.2 Sampling and statistics 3.3 Questionnaire design 3.4 Face-to-face interviewing 3.5 Telephone interviewing 3.6 Self-completion questionnaires 3.7 Online surveys 3.8 Data analysis 4 Using market research 4.1 Using market research to segment markets 4.2 Using market research to improve a brand position 4.3 Using market research to improve customer satisfaction and loyalty 4.4 Using market research to achieve optimum pricing 4.5 Using market research to enter a new market 4.6 Using market research to test advertising effectiveness 4.7 Using market research to launch a new product 4.8 Reporting

Market Research

5 5.1 5.2 5.3

The market research industry International market research Research trends Ethics in market research


Questionnaire Design How to Plan, Structure and Write Survey Material for Effective Market Research

This book

<< Provides a toolkit to structure, compose and design questionnaires for business application << Addresses the rising challenge of mobile devices such as acquiring more data in less time and

decreasing attention spans, plus the new ways to measure and collect data << Examines the various software options available and how to select for different research purposes << New to this edition: advances in data privacy, how to increase engagement at planning stages, and optimizing new design and measurement tools for mobile devices

Edition: 4 Date: 04/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481971 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481988 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Market Research

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Ian Brace is a fellow of the Market Research Society (MRS), running training courses on Questionnaire Design and a member of the MRS Market Research Standards Board. He has previously been director of research methods at TNS UK, a visiting professor in market research at Bristol Business School and has worked for MAS Survey Research, NOP, Esso Petroleum, BJM Research and NFO WorldGroup. Ian Brace has earned industry awards from AMSO (Research Effectiveness Awards), the Academy of Marketing and ISBA.

Market research in business is changing. Questionnaire Design, fourth edition, delivers a complete handbook for the mounting challenge of acquiring more data in less time, generating an entire rethink on how data is collected. The growth in mobile devices is limiting the readability of traditional measurement tools, new consumer channels are altering access, whilst time spent answering questions is decreasing exponentially. This book provides practical guidelines to plan, structure and compose questionnaires across all industries and purposes, ensuring valuable data insights are captured with accuracy and efficiency. Fully updated, the fourth edition of Questionnaire Design includes a new chapter on how to navigate the multiple software options available, with guidance on how to engage and retain respondents earlier on at planning stage, using new mobile design approaches and measurement tools. Updates also cover advances in data privacy, maximizing international reach and managing the transition from face-to-face surveys towards soft launches online. Whether applying to business positioning, consumer insights, employee feedback or product analysis, the ability to gauge a market snapshot on a global scale is escalating the demand for online survey and questionnaire data, making this is an essential addition to every professionalâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s shelf.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

48

Marketing, PR and Sales

Objectives in Writing A Questionnaire The Data Collection Media Planning the Questionnaire Types of Questions Data Types Rating Scales Behavioural Questions Attitude and Image Measurement Writing the Questionnaire The Look of the Questionnaire Questionnaire Design Software Engaging the Respondent Online Piloting the Questionnaire Ethical Issues Social Desirability Bias International Surveys

Market Research


User Research A Practical Guide to Designing Better Products and Services Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481049 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481056 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Market Research

This book

<< Clearly explains all the key methods of user research, including face-to-face user testing, card

sorting, diary studies, ethnography, stakeholder workshops, surveys, A/B testing and many more << Enables readers to improve existing products and services, adapt to customers’ changing expectations, influence stakeholders’ decisions with evidence, and save money by getting things right the first time through user research methodologies << Allows readers to identify and engage the most appropriate users for their research, carry out the research effectively, and interpret the resulting data to glean evidence-backed business insights << Features helpful tools and frameworks that the readers can refer to when conducting their own user research

Description Many businesses are based on creating desirable experiences, products and services for users. However in spite of this, companies often fail to consider the end user - the customer - in their planning and development processes. As a result, organizations find themselves spending huge sums of money creating products and services that, quite simply, don’t work. User experience research, also known as UX research, focuses on understanding user behaviours, needs and motivations through a range of observational techniques, task analysis and other methodologies. User Research is a practical guide that shows readers how to use the vast array of user research methods available. Covering all the key research methods including face-to-face user testing, card sorting, surveys, A/B testing and many more, the book gives expert insight into the nuances, advantages and disadvantages of each, while also providing guidance on how to interpret, analyze and share the data once it has been obtained. Ultimately, User Research is about putting natural powers of observation and conversation to use in a specific way. The book isn’t bogged down with small, specific, technical detail - rather, it explores the fundamentals of user research, which remain true regardless of the context in which they are applied. As such, the tools and frameworks given here can be used in any sector or industry, to improve any part of the customer journey and experience; whether that means improving software, websites, customer services, products, packaging or more.

Author Information Dr Stephanie Marsh is one of the UK’s leading UX research professionals, and is currently a Lead User Researcher in the UK Government Digital Services. She was previously the Head of Digital Strategy for the UK Ministry of Defence and a user research consultant for Bunnyfoot (one of the UK’s foremost user research consultancy provider, with clients including BBC, Arsenal, easyJet, Boden and Oxfam).

49

Marketing, PR and Sales

Table of Contents 1

Introduction: Why is user research so important? 2 The fundamentals: What good research looks like 2.1 Planning, objectives and legalities in user research 2.2 Best practice in user research: Who, what, why and how 2.3 Managing user research logistics: Agencies, facilities and contracts 3 Selecting and using user research methods 3.1 Usability testing: Observing people doing things 3.2 Content testing: What do people think your content means? 3.3 Card sorting: Understanding how people group and relate things 3.4 Surveys: How to gauge a widespread user response 3.5 User interviews: Understanding people’s experience through talking to them 3.6 Diary studies: How to capture user research data over time 3.7 Information architecture validation: Does the structure of your information work for your users? 3.8 Ethnography: Observing how people behave in the real world 3.9 Contextual inquiry: Interviewing people in their own environment 3.10 A/B Testing: A technique to

Market Research

compare different options 3.11 Getting the best out of stakeholder workshops 3.12 Guerrilla research: Running fastpaced research in the real world 3.13 How to combine user research methodologies 4 Analyzing and presenting your data 4.1 Content analysis: A method of coding and making sense of your qualitative data 4.2 Affinity diagramming: Understand your data through identifying its themes Prioritizing issues and user needs: What’s important and what to work on next 4.3 Making recommendations: How to make your research findings actionable 4.4 Creating executive summaries and detailed reports to present results 4.5 Using video playback to present your research results 4.6 Using personas to communicate user characteristics and behaviours 4.7 Using mental models to visualize how users think and identify opportunities 4.8 Using journey and experience maps to visualize user research data 4.9 Using scenarios and storyboards to represent the user journey

4.10 Using infographics to translate numerical and statistical data 4.11 How to recommend changes to visual, interaction and information design 4.12 Conclusion


Neuro Design Neuromarketing Insights to Boost Engagement and Profitability Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478889 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478896 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Market Research

Author Information Darren Bridger works as a consultant to designers and marketers, advising on using and analyzing data that tap into consumersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; non-conscious thinking and motivations. He was one of the original pioneers of the Consumer Neuroscience industry, helping to pioneer two of the first companies in the field then joining the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s largest agency, Neurofocus (now part of the Nielsen company), as its second employee outside of the US. He currently works as head of insights at NeuroStrata.

50

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Enables those involved with the design and development of online content to increase the

credibility and persuasiveness of their work and turn website visitors into customers << Introduces readers to new, cutting-edge ideas from the academic literature as well as commercial research in relation to neuro design and neuroaesthetics << Explains high-level, complex neuro-research in plain English << Features many real-world case studies, including Coca-Cola, Procter & Gamble, Radware and Apple Watch << Online resources: web links to inspiring reading and further website resources

Description Today, businesses of all sizes generate a great deal of creative graphic media and content, including websites, presentations, videos and social media posts. Most big companies, including the likes of Procter & Gamble, Coca-Cola, Tesco and Google, now use neuroscience research and theories to optimize their digital content. Neuro Design opens up this new world of neuromarketing design theories and recommendations, and describes insights from the growing field of neuroaesthetics that will enable readers to enhance customer engagement through their website, and boost profitability. Neuro Design emphasizes the importance of understanding consumersâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; non-conscious reactions to design and how brands can use them to improve performance, and increase the credibility and persuasiveness of their content. Including practical methods such as neuro-research for testing websites, plus real world case studies from P&G, Coca-Cola, Google and neuroscientific advertising for Nielson, this is the essential handbook for any marketer looking to improve engagement with their creative graphic content. Also covering visuospatial resonance, banner blindness, visual saliency, the Gestalt Psychology Model, the halo effect and much more, Neuro Design will equip any marketer with the design techniques they need to engage with consumers. Online resources include web links to inspiring reading, and further website resources.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5

What is Neuro Design? Neuroaesthetics Processing Fluency How First Impressions Work Multisensory and Emotional Design 6 Visual Saliency Maps 7 Visual Persuasion and Behavioural Economics 8 Designing for Screens 9 Viral Designs 10 Designing Presentation Slides 11 Conducting Neuro Design Research 12 Conclusion

Market Research


Marketing Communications Offline and Online Integration, Engagement and Analytics Edition: 6 Date: 02/28/2016 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473402 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473419 Pages: 600 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Marketing Communications

Author Information PR Smith is a marketing consultant, bestselling business author and inspirational speaker. Paul has helped hundreds of businesses, from innovative start-ups to established blue-chip companies, boost their results with better marketing. Ze Zook is an integrated marketing author, lecturer, producer and consultant specializing in helping the creative industries fulfil both their missions and business goals. He has worked with the ballet, film and music industries and with sponsors such as Sainsbury’s and The Prince’s Trust. Ze is a visiting academic at Regent’s University London and he consults on digital marketing for private-sector disruptive start-ups.

51

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Features more underpinning theory to reflect the current state of play for marketing

communications experts, including mobile, marketing automation, location-based marketing, social media campaigns and audits, content marketing, split testing, new listening tools and analytics << Addresses the latest integrated offline and online with social media approach, with a particular emphasis on analytics, engagement and integration << Helps readers understand difficult concepts with jargon-free explanations and extensive realworld examples and case studies from companies such as Campbell’s Soup, Spotify, PayPal, Liberty Insurance, Kraft and Nike << Supported by a wealth of online resources, including lecture slides for every chapter and self-tests for students

Description Marketing Communications provides a comprehensive overview of every aspect of marketing communications, from social media, advertising, PR and sponsorship to direct selling and merchandizing. It presents modern marketing communications theories and tools in an accessible way so readers can fully understand the landscape and achieve better results. With a plethora of examples and case studies, as well as online support material for lecturers and students, this essential textbook will guide students and practitioners through everything they need to know about the changing face of marketing. This fully updated 6th edition of Marketing Communications features more of the underpinning theory whilst building on its impressive reputation as a leading practical textbook on the subject. Case studies and anecdotes from companies such as Campbell’s Soup, Spotify, Paypal, Kraft and Nike focus on recent digital developments to bring the latest marketing tools to life. With a particular emphasis on analytics, engagement and integration, it addresses the integrated offline and online with social media approach to reflect the current state of play for marketing communications experts. This edition is also supported by a wealth of online resources, including lecture slides for every chapter and selftests for students.

Table of Contents 1

COMMUNICATIONS BACKGROUND AND THEORIES 1.1 New marketing communications 1.2 Branding 1.3 Customer relationship management 1.4 Buyer behaviour 1.5 Communications theory 1.6 Marketing communications research 1.7 Media buying and planning 1.8 Marketing communications agencies 1.9 International marketing communications 1.10 The marketing communications plan 1.11 The changing communications environment 2 COMMUNICATIONS TOOLS 2.1 Selling, social selling, sales management and key account management 2.2 Advertising 2.3 Publicity and public relations 2.4 Sponsorship 2.5 Sales promotions, gaming and content marketing 2.6 Direct mail (including e-mail) 2.7 Exhibitions, conferences and events 2.8 Merchandising and point of sale 2.9 Packaging 2.10 Owned media – websites and social media

Marketing Communications


Experiential Marketing A Practical Guide to Interactive Brand Experiences Edition: 2 Date: 12/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480967 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480974 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Communications

Author Information Shirra Smilansky is CEO and Executive Creative Director of Electrify Worldwide Ltd, an international brand engagement agency working with clients such as L’Oreal Luxe, Carling, Selfridges, Harvey Nichols, Lancome and Yves Saint Laurent. She is the Co-founder of an MA degree ‘Experiential Meets Digital’ and former Visiting Professor at London Metropolitan University. With over 15 years in the industry, Shirra is an impactful thought-leader, entrepreneur and innovator in experiential marketing, co-founding her first company BlazinStar Experiential back in 2003.

52

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Explains how to integrate immersive brand experiences into marketing strategies, using targeted

outreach for a live social media domino effect << Provides practical steps to plan, inspire, activate and evaluate tangible results from experiential initiatives << New to this edition: four new chapters on digital experience and merged realities, the experience economy, customer experience and the ‘Pop-Up’ phenomenon << Online resources: practical checklists, workbooks and sector -focused content on drinks, cosmetics, FMCG, automotive, retail, fashion and technology

Description The immersive brand experience is revolutionizing brand engagement. Experiential Marketing, second edition, cuts through the jargon with clear practical guidelines on how to magnify marketing strategies to a powerful new level. This book emphasizes that experiential marketing is not just about creating a live event. A unique, immersive experience allows businesses to generate a surge of brand engagement, which is amplified immediately by a niche target of consumers through live content sharing and social media streams. This comprehensive second edition of Experiential Marketing pinpoints exactly where this innovative strategy fits in with the current marketing and events climate, including a step-by-step outline to plan, integrate and evaluate its game-changing results. The completely fresh content analyzes the latest industry advances and case studies, including four new chapters on the digital experience and merged realities, plus the experience economy and creative explosion of the ‘Pop-Up’ phenomenon. Accompanied with a digital toolkit of downloadable resources, this book is essential reading for marketing, business, media and events professionals alike, providing strategic decision makers with a unique competitive advantage in a vibrant new era of marketing strategy.

Table of Contents 1

An Experiential Revolution – The Accelerating Transformation of Business and Marketing 1.1 What is Experiential Marketing? 1.2 A Whole New World – Millennials, Brand Experiences and Social Media 1.3 The Experience Economy is Here 1.4 Concept Stores, the Future of Retail and Pop-Ups 1.5 Digital Experiences, Artificial Intelligence in Marketing and Merged Realities 1.6 The BETTER Creative Model – How to Create Unique Experiential Marketing Ideas 2 SET MESSAGE – An Activation Framework for Your Experiential Marketing Strategy 2.1 Situation and Background – Exploring the Business Context for Experiential Marketing 2.2 Experiential Objectives – How to Creatively Define and Set Your Goals 2.3 Target Audience – Gathering Holistic Insights and Understanding of Your Customers 2.4 Message - Key Communication of Your Brand Message using Experiential Marketing 2.5 Experiential Strategy – How to Develop Live Brand Experience Strategies and Frameworks

Marketing Communications

2.6 Selected Locations and Brand Ambassadors for Your Experiential Marketing Strategy 2.7 Systems and Mechanisms for Measurement for Experiential Marketing Planning 2.8 Action – How to Deliver and Project Manage Live Brand Experiences 2.9 Gauging Effectiveness – Creating a Real-World Test and Learn Approach for Experiential Marketing Environments 2.10 Evaluation – Interpreting and Monitoring Tangible Results from Experiential Marketing 3 What Next? Becoming an Experience Brand and Partnering with Specialists 3.1 Outsourcing Versus In-House Experiential Marketing Specialists 3.2 Planning for the Future of Experiential Marketing


Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing The Definitive Guide to Content Marketing Strategy Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479756 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479763 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Marketing Communications

Author Information Rebecca Lieb is a strategic advisor, research analyst, keynote speaker, author and columnist. She works with many of the world’s leading brands on digital marketing innovation. Clients range from start-ups to non-profits to Fortune 100 brands and regulated industries, including Facebook, Nestlé, Adobe, Fidelity, IBM, Save the Children, Pinterest, Cisco and The Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Previously, she was Altimeter Group’s digital advertising and media analyst, and prior to that she was Vice President at Econsultancy. Rebecca was VP and Editor-In-Chief of The ClickZ Network for over seven years.

53

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Is written by global industry thought-leader Rebecca Lieb, who has conducted and published more

content marketing research than anyone else << Shares the results of deep quantitative research and hundreds of hours of interviews with senior marketers at the world’s most respected brands << Reveals the value content can not only bring to owned media initiatives, such as company websites or blogs, but the essential role content plays in all other marketing initiatives, from social media to advertising to offline channels << Empowers readers to make the best organizational, tool and process decisions necessary to get content up and running across departments and organizational silos

Description Content, in all its forms, is the single most critical element of any marketing campaign. Finding a successful equilibrium between content marketing and content strategy is difficult, but essential. Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing goes beyond superficial descriptions of how to produce engaging social media content to offer the results of many years of deep quantitative research, and hours of interviews with senior marketers at some of the world’s leading brands. Written by a recognised industry thought-leader, Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing explores how content functions in the broader framework of all marketing, as well as organizational concerns and IT decision making. It demonstrates the value content brings not only to “owned” media initiatives, such as a company website or blog, but also the essential role content plays in all other marketing initiatives, from social media to advertising to offline channels. It will enable readers to make the organizational, staffing, tools and process decisions necessary to get content up and running across divisions and organizational silos. Deeply researched and insightful, Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing is, quite simply, the definitive research-based guide to content marketing.

Table of Contents 1

The shift to content marketing 1.1 Content marketing versus content strategy 1.2 Converged media 1.3 Native advertising 1.4 Organizing for content 1.5 A culture of content 1.6 Global content strategy 1.7 Real-time marketing 1.8 Content marketing software 1.9 Content marketing performance 1.10 Contextual campaigns

Marketing Communications


Valuable Content Marketing How to Make Quality Content Your Key to Success Edition: 2 Date: 07/28/2015 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473273 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473280 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Communications

Author Information Sonja Jefferson shows you what to write. A content marketing consultant and trainer with a background in professional sales, she founded Valuable Content, which helps business owners get their message across in the right way. She reaches the heart of the message, producing and sharing the right type of information to help a business grow. Sharon Tanton shows you how to write. Creative Director at Valuable Content, she is a copywriter with a background in crafting stories. Working in radio, television, magazine features and internal communications, she helps companies convey their message in a way that audiences appreciate.

54

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Shows how to create valuable, targeted and discoverable content, thereby turning prospects into buyers and buyers into long-term loyal customers << Explains exactly what type of content is needed to promote a business << Teaches how to produce valuable content in a clear and compelling way

Description WINNER: 2016 Marketing Book of the Year; Small Biz Book Awards. From websites, white papers and blogs to tweets, newsletters and video, content is king in the digital world, now more than ever before. Get it right and you have a huge opportunity to connect with clients and customers in ways they appreciate and trust - theyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ll be knocking at your door wanting to do business with you. Valuable Content Marketing shows you how to create and share the type of information that clients, customers and search engines really want - on your website, using social media and through more traditional methods. Whether youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re starting a business or aiming to grow, this book shows you how to get better results from your marketing efforts. Marketing with valuable content really works - this book shows you how to grow your business by raising awareness of your brand, turning prospects into buyers and buyers into long-term fans. This fully revised second edition of Valuable Content Marketing is a clear, practical guide that helps you make sense of marketing in the digital world and learn to enjoy the journey. It includes new ideas and examples, step-by-step action lists, quick tips and goal-driven chapter summaries to make understanding the key concepts easier than ever. Perfect for small-business owners and sales, marketing and branding professionals as well as practitioners in publicity or corporate communications, it provides inspiration from companies of all sizes that have got valuable content marketing right, from small companies like software development from Desynit to household names like HSBC.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Why valuable content? 2.1 Buying has changed. Has your marketing caught up? 2.2 What is valuable content and why does it win you business? 2.3 Guiding principles for your valuable content 3 What valuable content? 3.1 Blogging 3.2 Social media 3.3 Email newsletters 3.4 Search engine optimization 3.5 Deeper written content, e-books, white papers, SlideShares and published books 3.6 Video, audio, infographics and more 3.7 Widen your reach: PR, guest blogging, events and paid Advertising 4 How to supercharge your business with valuable content 4.1 Pulling together a valuable content strategy 4.2 Making your website valuable 4.3 How to write valuable content 4.4 How to sell with valuable content: Winning the challenge of constant content generation 4.5 Troubleshooting Q&A: answers to the big content questions 4.6 Conclusion and your new manifesto for marketing people love

Marketing Communications


Customer-Centric Marketing Supporting Sustainability in the Digital Age Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2015 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472092 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472108 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Fundamentals

This book

<< Aids decision making and implementation in the digital marketing and sustainable development

arenas << Helps marketers attract and retain customers by illustrating how new technologies can be harnessed to promote growth and customer satisfaction << Strengthens the competitive advantage of organizations by suggesting solutions to problems facing practitioners

Description Two of the major parallel challenges facing businesses today are how to adapt to the changes of fastpaced, fragmenting markets and how to grow a business whilst engaging in recognisably sustainable practices. It is not enough to just be sustainable, it is about communicating it and getting the customer involved in the message. Customer-Centric Marketing shows readers how sustainable development practices and digital marketing techniques work naturally together to add value, leading to improved customer satisfaction, better professional relationships and increased effectiveness. Ideal for senior marketing professionals and students on digital marketing or marketing strategy modules who wish to utilise the benefits of sustainable development and forms of digital marketing, this accessible and straight to-the-point book uses case studies to show how the marketing theories and tools work in actual business scenarios. Customer-Centric Marketing covers contemporary issues such as the increasing use of mobile, QR codes and social network sites for consumers interested in ethical, environmental and sustainable marketing.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Neil Richardson is a Senior Marketing Lecturer at Leeds Beckett University and a Chartered Institute of Marketing Course Leader. He has over 20 years of experience in sales management, marketing and customer service in the B2B sector.

1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Neil Kelley is a Senior Examiner for the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CAM Marketing and Consumer Behaviour) and Senior Lecturer for Marketing at Leeds Beckett University. He was previously Senior Territory Manager for Electronic Arts, contributing to the marketing and promotion of products such as The Sims and a variety of EA Sports titles. Jon James is a Senior Lecturer in Marketing at Leeds Beckett (formerly Leeds Metropolitan) University. Jon has provided strategic business & marketing consultancy to organisations in both the public and private sectors. His research interests include global & international marketing, marketing management and SME development.

55

Marketing, PR and Sales

Changing landscapes 5.5 Services and sustainability Developments in society 6 What does the future hold? Why do companies fail? 6.1 What does the future hold? Orientations Marketing and sustainability: Separating facts from fiction 2 Knowing your own company 2.1 Digital marketing and research 2.2 Systems and customer-centricity 3 Building relationships 3.1 How stakeholders make buying decisions 3.2 Users and/or customers? 3.3 The sustainable customer 3.4 Acquiring, retaining and satisfying customers 3.5 Communities and networks 4 Marketing planning 4.1 Goal setting: Mission (or vision) statement, corporate objectives and gap analysis 4.2 Situation review: The internal (micro) and external (macro) environments 4.3 Marketing objectives, strategy formulation and tactical implementation 4.4 Resource allocation: Monitoring, evaluation and control 4.5 Barriers to adopting sustainable marketing planning: And how to overcome them 5 The marketing mix 5.1 Communications 5.2 Convenience for customers 5.3 Customer benefits 5.4 Cost or sacrifice

Marketing Fundamentals


Marketing Analytics A Practical Guide to Improving Consumer Insights Using Data Techniques Edition: 2 Date: 04/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482169 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482176 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Science

Author Information Mike Grigsby is vice president of customer insights and advanced analytics at Brierley and Partners in Texas, US. With more than 25 years of experience, he is the former vice president of strategic business analysis and advanced analytics at Targetbase, director of marketing science for Millward Brown and has held leadership positions at Hewlett-Packard and Gap.

56

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Simplifies intimidating data, segmentation and predictive analytics tools for everyday use in

business, using real-world marketing problems to apply to a range of practical scenarios << Provides accessibility and insightful application of techniques regardless of experience level << New to this edition: Three new chapters on panel data regression, insights and how to collect, separate and analyze data using big data analytics; added tools such as tobit analysis - a customer lifetime value framework

Description Who is most likely to buy and what is the best way to target them? How can businesses improve strategy without identifying the key influencing factors? The second edition of Marketing Analytics enables marketers and business analysts to leverage predictive techniques to measure and improve performance. By exploring real-world marketing challenges, it provides clear, jargon-free explanations on how to apply different analytical models for each purpose. From targeted list creation and data segmentation, to testing campaign effectiveness, pricing structures and forecasting demand, this book offers a welcome handbook on how statistics, consumer analytics and modelling can be put to optimal use. The fully revised second edition of Marketing Analytics includes three new chapters on big data analytics, insights and panel regression, including how to collect, separate and analyze big data. All of the advanced tools and techniques for predictive analytics have been updated, translating models such as tobit analysis for customer lifetime value into everyday use. Whether an experienced practitioner or having no prior knowledge, methodologies are simplified to ensure the more complex aspects of data and analytics are fully accessible for any level of application. Complete with downloadable data sets and test bank resources, this book supplies a concrete foundation to optimize marketing analytics for day-to-day business advantage.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction to Marketing Analytics 2 Overview - How Can Marketing Analytics Help You? 2.1 A Brief Statistics Review 2.2 Brief Principles of Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy 2.3 What is an Insight? 3 Dependent Variable Techniques 3.1 What Drives Demand? Modelling Dependent Variable Techniques Who is Most Likely to Buy and How Do I Target Them? 3.2 When are My Customers Most Likely to Buy? 3.3 Panel Regression - How to Use a Cross-Sectional Time Series 3.4 Systems of Equations for Modelling Dependent Variable Techniques Inter-Relationship Techniques 3.5 What Does My Customer Market Look Like? 3.6 Segmentation - Tools and Techniques 4 More Important Topics for Everyday Marketing 4.1 Statistics Testing â&#x20AC;&#x201C; How Do I Know What Works? 4.2 Implementing Big Data and Big Data Analytics 5 Conclusion 5.1 The Finale â&#x20AC;&#x201C; What Should You Take Away From This?

Marketing Science


Marketing Value Metrics A New Metrics Model to Measure Marketing Effectiveness Edition: 2 Date: 10/28/2014 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468972 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468989 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Science

Author Information Professor Malcolm McDonald is Emeritus Professor of Marketing at Cranfield School of Management, having formerly been the Marketing Director of Canada Dry. Peter Mouncey has over 40 years’ experience in the field of marketing, and is a Visiting Fellow of Cranfield School of Management. He is also the Editor-in-Chief of the Market Research Society’s International Journal of Market Research. Stan Maklan is Reader in Strategic Marketing at Cranfield University. In addition he is an experienced marketer and consultant.

This book

<< Introduces a marketing metrics model developed by experts at Cranfield School of Management that allows all participants to monitor and measure the effectiveness of any marketing strategy << Details key steps in the framework and modelling processes << Creates a solid basis of understanding how to go about designing the right metrics for the organizational goals

Description This second edition of Marketing Accountability, now called Marketing Value Metrics, introduces and guides readers through a metrics model developed at the renowned Cranfield School of Management that not only shows how marketing systematically contributes to shareholder value, but also provides a metrics-based framework for developing and implementing marketing strategies that are measurable and accountable. Malcolm McDonald, Stan Maklan and Peter Mouncey introduce strategic marketing planning and then describe in detail the key steps in the modelling process as well as the procedures for applying it in practice. Updated throughout, this new edition includes the latest digital and social media metrics and advice on measuring the effectiveness of multichannel strategies. Marketing Value Metrics will enable marketing executives to measure more effectively the impact of marketing activity against organizational goals and will empower marketing teams and their managers to justify and defend their plans and strategies to their CEOs and CFOs.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

57

Marketing, PR and Sales

Introduction Strategic marketing planning – a brief overview A three-level marketing accountability framework A process of Marketing Due Diligence The Marketing Value Metrics model and process Segmentation – the basic building block for markets How to become the first choice for the customers you want Turning strategy into action, and measuring outcomes Delivering accountability – finalizing the metrics strategy Why data quality can make or break accountability Assessing the effectiveness of customer strategies – Stan Maklan and Hugh Wilson Social media: metrics and measurement – Robert Stratton Assessing the value of market assets – David Haigh and Stan Maklan

Marketing Science


Geodemographics for Marketers Using Location Analysis for Research and Marketing Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2016 Price: $34.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473822 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473839 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Science

Author Information Dr Barry Leventhal is a leading UK authority on geodemographics. He chairs the Census and Geodemographics Group (CGG), an advisory board of The Market Research Society (MRS), and is a leading voice in the UK information industry.

This book

<< Demonstrates how to implement and improve the use of geodemographics across industries and

sectors << Features case studies from the automotive industry, the telecommunications industry, retail, the Scottish Referendum, the 2011 UK Census, Callcreditâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s international CAMEO classifications and more to bring the field to life Incorporates the newly introduced generation of geographical classifications and discusses the key census changes proposed for 2021 << Supported by a range of online resources, including figures, practical sessions and learning feedback

Description Geodemographics, the process of analyzing survey data to profile economic and demographic characteristics of populations, is a successful data-driven analysis tool for marketers. Geodemographic classifications are widely embedded in customer databases and market research datasets. Written by a leading UK authority on geodemographics, Geodemographics for Marketers provides marketers with the know-how to leverage it as an effective research tool to identify location-based segments for highly targeted marketing. International in scope and impartial in its approach, this book demonstrates how to implement geodemographics techniques for practical application in retail, financial services and telecommunications as well as the public sector. Geodemographics for Marketers includes numerous case studies, from the automotive, retail and telecommunications sectors to the public sector, that illustrate core concepts and how they can be applied to gain positive results. It is also supported by a range of online resources, including figures, practical sessions and learning feedback. The book also incorporates the newly introduced generation of classifications, as well as a discussion of the key decisions of the proposed 2021 census.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

58

Marketing, PR and Sales

Introduction An overview of geodemographics Big data and geodemographics Key data sources Geodemographic classification systems Other types of geodemographic discriminators The mechanics of using geodemographics Applications in various industry sectors Choosing a geodemographic classification The international perspective Creating your own information products Looking to the future

Marketing Science


Predictive Analytics for Marketers Using Data Mining for Business Advantage Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2018 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479930 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479947 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Science

Author Information Dr Barry Leventhal is a leading UK authority on geodemographics and a marketing analytics expert. He is Emeritus Chair of the Census and Geodemographics Group (CGG), which is an advisory board of The Market Research Society (MRS) and a leading voice in the UK information industry. He was recently awarded the MRS Gold Medal Award - the association’s rarest accolade, presented for the first time since 2008 - in recognition of his lifetime of exceptional achievement and contribution to the research profession.

This book

<< Provides an impartial overview of the various solution vendors and software providers available, enabling readers to select the most appropriate predictive analytic tools for their needs << Features international case studies gleaned from the author’s more than 25 years of industry experience, and contains supplementary articles from recognised thought-leaders in the field << Gives a holistic, balanced overview of predictive analytics, the universal branch of advanced analytics used to make predictions about unknown future events

Description Predictive analytics has revolutionized marketing practice. It involves using many techniques from data mining, statistics, modelling, machine learning and artificial intelligence, to analyse current data and make predictions about unknown future events. In business terms, this enables companies to forecast consumer behaviour and much more. Predictive Analytics for Marketers will guide marketing professionals on how to apply predictive analytical tools to streamline business practices. Including comprehensive coverage of an array of predictive analytic tools and techniques, this book enables readers to harness patterns from past data, to make accurate and useful predictions that can be converted to business success. Truly global in its approach, the insights these techniques offer can be used to manage resources more effectively across all industries and sectors. Written in clear, non-technical language, Predictive Analytics for Marketers contains case studies from the author’s more than 25 years of experience and articles from guest contributors, demonstrating how predictive analytics has been used to successfully achieve a range of business purposes.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

59

Marketing, PR and Sales

Introduction How can Predictive Analytics Help Your Business? Using Data Mining to Build Predictive Models Managing the Data for Predictive Analysis The Analytical Modelling Toolkit Software Solutions for Predictive Analytics Predicting Customer Behaviour using Analytical Models Predicting Lifetimes – From Customers to Machines How to Build a Customer Segmentation Accounts, Baskets, Citizens or Businesses – Applying Predictive Analytics in Various Sectors From People to Products – Using Predictive Analytics in Retail How to Benefit from Social Network Analysis Testing the Benefits of Predictive Models and other Marketing Effects Top Tips for Gaining Business Value from Predictive Analytics

Marketing Science


Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice An Overview of Tools and Techniques Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479558 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479565 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Science

Author Information Dr. Steven Struhl PhD, MBA, MA has more than 25 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience in consulting and research, specializing in practical solutions based on statistical models of decisionmaking and behavior. In addition to text analytics and data mining, his work addresses how buying decisions are made, optimizing service delivery and product configurations and finding the meaningful differences among products and services. Steven also has taught graduate courses on statistical methods and data analysis. He speaks at conferences and has given numerous seminars on pricing, choice modelling, market segmentation and presenting data.

60

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Serves to integrate widely disparate approaches to predicting consumer choice via artificial

intelligence marketing, showing the strengths, weaknesses and best applications of each method and point of view. << Covers methods and techniques including Discrete Choice Modelling, Conjoint Analysis and Machine Learning Models, placing all of these in the wider context of predictive analytics and artificial intelligence marketing. << Explores the human side of advanced analytics - using data to predict what people will choose. << Includes extensive diagrams and charts, pointers on tools and techniques, definition boxes and practical hints and tips. << Online resources: bonus chapters on AI, ensembles and neural nets, and finishing experiments, and a range of multiple or single product simulators

Description The ability to predict consumer choice is a fundamental aspect to success for any business. In the context of artificial intelligence marketing, there are a wide array of predictive analytic techniques available to achieve this purpose, each with its own unique advantages and disadvantages. Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice serves to integrate these widely disparate approaches, and show the strengths, weaknesses, and best applications of each. It provides a bridge between the person who must apply or learn these problem-solving methods and the community of experts who do the actual analysis. It is also a practical and accessible guide to the many remarkable advances that have been recently made in this fascinating field. Online resources: bonus chapters on AI, ensembles and neural nets, and finishing experiments, plus single and multiple product simulators.

Table of Contents 1

Who Should Read this Book and Why? 2 Getting the Project Going 3 Conjoint, Discrete Choice and Other Trade-offs: Letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Do an Experiment 4 Creating the Best, Newest Thing: Discrete Choice Modelling 5 Conjoint Analysis and its Uses 6 Predictive Models: Via Classifications that Grow on Trees 7 Remarkable Predictive Models with Bayes Nets 8 Putting it Together: What to Use When

Marketing Science


Practical Text Analytics Interpreting Text and Unstructured Data for Business Intelligence

This book

<< Provides real-world guidance on the application of text analytics for marketing professionals << Bridges the gap between marketers and data analysis experts by cutting through jargon << Helps marketers to frame the right questions and apply the results successfully Description

Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2015 Price: $34.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474010 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474027 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Marketing Science

In an age where customer opinion and feedback can have an immediate, major effect upon the success of a business or organization, marketers must have the ability to analyze unstructured data in everything from social media and internet reviews to customer surveys and phone logs. Practical Text Analytics is an essential daily reference resource, providing real-world guidance on the effective application of text analytics. The book presents the analysis process so that it is immediately understood by the marketing professionals who must use it, so they can apply proven concepts and methods correctly and with confidence. By decoding industry terminology and demonstrating practical application of data models once reserved for experts, Practical Text Analytics shows marketers how to frame the right questions, identify key themes and find hidden meaning from unstructured data. Readers will learn to develop powerful new marketing strategies to elevate customer experience, solidify brand value and elevate reputation.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Steven Struhl PhD, MBA, MA has more than 25 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience in consulting and research, specializing in practical solutions based on statistical models of decisionmaking and behaviour. In addition to text analytics and data mining, his work addresses how buying decisions are made, optimizing service delivery and product configurations and finding the meaningful differences among products and services. Steven also has taught graduate courses on statistical methods and data analysis. He speaks at conferences and has given numerous seminars on pricing, choice modelling, market segmentation and presenting data.

61

Marketing, PR and Sales

1

Who should read this book? And what do you want to do today? 2 Getting ready: capturing, sorting, sifting, stemming and matching 3 In pictures: word clouds, wordles and beyond 4 Putting text together: clustering documents using words 5 In the mood for sentiment (and counting) 6 Predictive models 1: having words with regressions 7 Predictive models 2: classifications that grow on trees 8 Predictive models 3: all in the family with Bayes Nets 9 Looking forward and back

Marketing Science


Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning Understanding Marketing Plans and Strategy Edition: 2 Date: 11/28/2016 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478216 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478223 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Marketing Strategy

Author Information Professor Malcolm McDonald enjoys a global reputation as a leading authority on marketing. He was until recently Professor of Marketing and Deputy Director at Cranfield University School of Management, and is now an Emeritus Professor at the University as well as being an Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School and Academic Advisor at the Oxford College of Marketing. He has been consultant to many major companies from the United Kingdom, Europe, USA, Far East, South-East Asia, Australasia and Africa, in the areas of strategic marketing and marketing planning, market segmentation, key account management, international marketing and marketing accountability. Malcolm is also Chairman of numerous companies and works with the operating boards of some of the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading multinationals on all continents. He has written more than 40 books including the best-selling Marketing Plans: How to prepare them, how to use them.

62

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Written by the internationally acknowledged authority on marketing planning, Malcolm McDonald. << Explains the key concepts and principles of marketing planning in an accessible, engaging fashion. << A compact guide for busy professionals, containing all essential info in a user-friendly, pedagogically rich format featuring helpful margin notes and key points.

<< Includes adaptable business templates and tools that the reader can use when establishing their own marketing plans. << Online resources: multiple templates as a practical toolkit for marketing planning.

Description A primer for marketing professionals and students, the second edition of Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning provides a clear guide to marketing planning. Focussing on the practical application of marketing planning this book will guide readers through the production of a marketing plan that has real world application. Key content includes defining markets and segments, setting marketing objectives and strategies, advertising and sales promotion strategies, and price and sales strategies. With an emphasis on practicality this fully revised second edition has been thoroughly overhauled to contain new content on the essentials of marketing planning and the strategic marketing process. Online resources include multiple templates as a practical toolkit for marketing planning.

Table of Contents 1 2

Letâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s get real Getting rid of that big managerial nonsense 3 Understand the real meaning of customer value 4 A very practical way to begin planning a profitable future 5 Market segmentation 6 What do our customers want? 7 How to set marketing objectives 8 How to set marketing strategies 9 A step-by-step strategic planning system 10 How to deal with adversity

Marketing Strategy


How to Write a Marketing Plan Edition: 5 Date: 09/28/2016 Price: $14.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475710 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475727 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Marketing Strategy

This book

<< Provides a step-by-step guide to formulating a workable and successful marketing plan << Includes up-to-date information on email shots, web usage and e-marketing and social media << Features include chapter summaries, in-depth guidance on mobile commerce in marketing as well as tips on presenting a marketing plan effectively

Description How to Write a Marketing Plan provides a step-by-step guide to creating a successful marketing plan: from carrying out a marketing audit, setting objectives and devising budgets to writing, presenting and implementing the plan. With brand new content on producing mini-plans and seizing new opportunities quickly, it also contains the most current information on email marketing, web usage, mobile commerce and social media. Including helpful chapter summaries and a detailed sample marketing plan, How to Write a Marketing Plan is essential reading for anyone who wants to boost their product or business. The creating success series of books... With over one million copies sold, the hugely popular Creating Success series covers a wide variety of topics and is written by an expert team of internationally best-selling authors and business experts. This indispensable business skills collection is packed with new features, practical content and inspiring guidance for readers across all stages of their careers.

Author Information John Westwood has held a wide variety of senior sales and marketing positions and is currently an independent marketing consultant. He is the author of The Marketing Plan, 30 Minutes to Write a Marketing Plan, The Marketing Plan Workbook and Marketing Your Business, all published by Kogan Page.

63

Marketing, PR and Sales

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Situation analysis â&#x20AC;&#x201C; the marketing audit 1.2 Objectives 1.3 Strategies and action plans 1.4 The distribution plan 1.5 The advertising and promotions plan 1.6 Costs and budgets 1.7 Writing the plan 1.8 Presenting the plan, follow-up and revision 1.9 Mini-plans and quick plans

Marketing Strategy


Design Management The Essential Handbook Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478414 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478421 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Product Design

This book

<< Provides a complete overview of the development, key issues and future directions of design

management, giving students the holistic knowledge they need to practice design management across a wide range of industries << Gives students the skills to get design management recognised at board level, enabling them to effect revolutionary new initiatives and changes in their companies << Builds awareness of the changing nuances of design management practice at varying levels, including macro, organizational and individual-project level, allowing students to develop their studies and careers in accordance with their skills and interests << Links theory to practice with in-depth case studies and thought-provoking contributions from actively practicing professionals << Online Resources: PPT slides, review questions, project questions, activity worksheets, further reading

Description Design Management is the essential handbook to all things design. As a discipline, design management is continually in motion; changing, responding and adapting to the dynamics of social and business transformation. As a business function, it combines project management, design, strategy and supply chain techniques to enable the creation of more effectively designed products, services, communications and brands. As such, it is relevant to a very broad range of industries and sectors, and Design Management recognises this by structuring content around four key universal perspectives: values, horizons, visions, and futures. These perspectives give an overview of the development, key issues and future direction of design management. Meticulously researched, Design Management goes beyond individual project-level implementation and also explores design strategy at both organisational and macro levels. By showcasing its impact all the way up to industrial and national application, students will gain a deep understanding of the nuances, scope and scalability of design. Filled with vibrant case studies and guest perspectives from a spectrum of industry leaders and policy makers, Design Management is an invaluable real-world commentary on designâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s role as a key asset in organisational activity. Accompanied by a valuable toolkit of downloadable resources, the bookâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s engaging and accessible style provides students and practitioners with everything needed to foster a climate of creative engagement.

Author Information Dr David Hands is a senior lecturer in Design Management at Lancaster University. He is also Course Leader for MA Design Management at Lancaster Institute for Contemporary Arts. He has written and published extensively on all aspects and themes surrounding strategic design management theory and practice.

64

Marketing, PR and Sales

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Design Values - Design and the Organization 3 Design Management in Action Case Studies 4 Design Horizons - Fluid Strategies for Success 5 Design Strategies in Action Case Studies 6 Design Vision - A National Asset 7 Design - A Possible Instrument for Growth and Innovation (Mexico) 8 Design Futures - Design as an Enabler for Change 9 Looking Ahead and Discussions on the Future of Design Management

Product Design


Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns A Strategic Approach Edition: 4 Date: 12/28/2015 Price: $37.50 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468736 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468743 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Dr Anne Gregory is a professor of corporate communication and a leading international academic. She is based in the School of Business and Law at the University of Huddersfield. Anne previously spent many years in public relations practice, gaining experience at senior levels both in-house and in consultancy. She remains a consultant and is an advisor at board level to a number of large organizations. Anne is also series editor for thePR in Practiceseries (published by Kogan Page).

65

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Describes how to create and manage the ongoing development of a campaign in a structured way << Covers all aspects of planning, from research and analysis, to objectives, strategy and tactics,

timescales, resources, evaluation and review << Features case studies such as WRAP’s Love Food, Hate Waste campaign; McArthur River Mining; AkzoNobel’s Corporate Revolution; the UK Department of Culture, Media & Sport’s First World War Centenary Commemorations; and Lanson’s campaign for unbiased.co.uk << Supported by online resources, including best practice case studies, Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns is widely regarded as one of the best ‘how-to’ guides for students and practitioners.

Description Getting a public relations campaign or programme off the ground can seem overwhelming. Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns provides a blueprint for all practitioners. Practical and easy to read, the book presents a 12-point plan for ensuring success of campaigns of all sizes, covering many vital areas including the role of public relations in organizations, the importance of context, research and analysis, setting objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales and resources, evaluation and review. Supported by online resources, including best practice case studies, Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns is widely regarded as one of the best ‘how-to’ guides for students and practitioners. This fully updated fourth edition features new developments in public relations, including social media, along with new case studies including WRAP’s Love Food, Hate Waste campaign; The Sleep Pod Hotel Media Tour; McArthur River Mining; AkzoNobel’s Corporate Revolution; the UK Department of Culture, Media & Sport’s First World War Centenary Commemorations; and Lanson’s campaign for unbiased.co.uk. About the PR in Practice series: Published in collaboration with the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR), the PR in Practice series consists of accessible, practical introductions to day-today public relations practice and management issues. The series’ action-oriented approach keeps practitioners’ knowledge and skills up to date.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

Planning and Managing; the context Public relations in context Starting the planning process Research and analysis Communication theory and setting aims and objectives Knowing the Publics and Messages Strategy and tactics Timescales and resources Knowing what has been achieved: Evaluation and review

Public Relations


Myths of PR All Publicity is Good Publicity and Other Popular Misconceptions Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479596 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479602 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Listed in PR Week’s 29 under 29 list and named one of ‘the brightest young social media communicators’, Rich Leigh has a rich and varied PR background, having led award-winning campaigns and household name accounts at digital agency 10 Yetis and consumer agency Frank PR. He now runs Radioactive PR, working with brands big and small, as well as a range of personal PR clients. Rich Leigh created PRexamples.com, dedicated to the best in up-to-date PR stunts and campaigns. He also co-founded blogger outreach service bloggabase, used by brands including Disney, Ralph Lauren and Tesco.

This book

<< Frames a critical look at the world of PR by exploring a number of myths that endure, and offers

frank discussions of what they reveal about the industry << Explores fascinating PR myths, and provides genuine insights into where these have stemmed from and what lessons they offer startup owners, brand marketers, communications practitioners and students << Written in an engaging, anecdotal style while still being underpinned by research and clear, evidence-based conclusions

Description Myths of PR uses popular myths about the theory and practice of public relations as a vehicle for helping startup owners, brand marketers, communications practitioners and students to distinguish between fads and tried-and-tested PR practice. Its purpose is to shatter widespread misconceptions about PR, and grant readers insights into why these myths have endured in spite of clearly demonstrable evidence to the contrary. By exploring topics that readers will relate to (though many might frequently misunderstand), Myths of PR will shed new light on essential PR methodology. From the assumption that PR is a neverending party, propagated by the way the industry is shown in the media and entertainment, to more potentially damaging misconceptions such as the often-repeated ‘all publicity is good publicity’, it is an engaging, anecdotal read that offers authentic insights into the reality of PR practice from one of the brightest and most exciting young communication experts in the UK.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

66

Marketing, PR and Sales

Introduction PR is all Spin, Smokescreens and Lies PR Results Can’t Be Measured All Publicity is Good Publicity The Press Release is Dead The Media Ignores Good News You Have to Pay to See Social Media Benefits PR is Glamorous Calling the Media is a No-No That You Can Make Something Go Viral You Have to Be an Extrovert to Succeed in PR PR is the Silver Bullet Good People and Products Market Themselves The More You Pay, the Better the Job Done PR Results are Instant Consumers Want Conversations With Brands Working In-House is Easier Media Relationships are Especially Important Gender Wage Gap Figures Conclusion

Public Relations


Ethics in Public Relations A Guide to Best Practice Edition: 3 Date: 04/28/2016 Price: $34.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477264 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477271 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Patricia J Parsons

67

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Demonstrates that an individual’s sense of morality has an impact on decision making and ethical business behaviour, and helps managers account for this in business practice << Helps practitioners understand and react to ethical consequences in the face of fast-moving technological advances << Explores the concept of personal ethics spilling into the professional realm in relation to topical issues such as sexual harassment and social media << Relates underlying ethical issues such as utilitarianism and moral relativism to everyday issues

Description Ethical practice in any professional discipline is guided by age-old philosophical perspectives, but its modern parameters are continually evolving. Ongoing developments in technology, social media and social contexts mean that public relations and its practices are constantly changing, and so do the ethical questions faced by practitioners in the field. Ethical questions and dilemmas are inherent to public relations, and ensuring that practitioners operate ethically is fundamental to the professionalism and credibility of the field. Engaging and accessible, Ethics in Public Relations offers a lively exploration of the key ethical concerns present in the public relations world today by way of practical tips and guidance to support those in PR and corporate communications. Written by a leading academic in the field, this fully updated third edition of Ethics in Public Relations includes an entirely new chapter on the uses of ethics in social media, covering topical issues such as blogger engagement and the relationship between employee social media activity and organizational reputation.

Table of Contents 1 What Lies Beneath 1.1 Before we begin: New profession... or one of the oldest? 1.2 Lies, truth and honesty: their role in PR practice 1.3 Truth, trust and the virtue of being ‘good’. 1.4 Whose rights are right? 1.5 The trouble with rules 1.6 Utilitarianism: Right acts and wrong reasons 2 Ethics and the Practitioner 2.1 Your moral development: Cultivating respect and humility 2.2 Codes of ethics: The good, the bad and the (almost) ugly 2.3 Conflicts of Interest: Sex and other relationship issues 2.4 (Very) personal ethical decisions: Whistle-blowing and moonlighting 3 Strategies and Dilemmas 3.1 Public Relations ethics and traditional media 3.2 Public Relations ethics and social media 3.3 Persuasion propaganda and advocacy: The ethics of influence 3.4 Supporting ‘good causes’: bad ethics or bad taste? 3.5 Deceptive authorship: Ghostwriting and plagiarism 4 Organizations, Ethics and PR 4.1 Making decisions: The true reality of everyday ethics

Public Relations

4.2 PR and the corporate ethics programme 4.3 The future of ethical PR: education and leadership 4.4 Appendix 1: For your bookshelf 4.5 Appendix 2: Chartered Institute of PR Code of Conduct 4.6 Appendix 3: Guidelines for the ethics audit


Media Interview Techniques A Complete Guide to Media Training Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2015 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474720 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474737 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Robert Taylor is one of the UK’s most experienced media trainers: his trainees include more than 1,000 executives from the Foreign and Commonwealth Office, the Department for International Development and the British Council, including ambassadors. Other clients have included the executive management teams of the Olympic Delivery Authority for London 2012, senior executives at Accenture, BT, British Airways, FedEx, SAP, Orange, Oracle, SITA and a huge range of public sector bodies and charities. He has been the leading media trainer of the Chartered Institute of Public Relations since 2008.

68

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Offers expert guidance on how to successfully navigate interviews across the range of available

media, including radio, TV, video, online and social channels << Presents the author’s tried-and-tested methodology to help interviewees prepare for their media interview and convey their key messages effectively << Details techniques which apply across the spectrum of global corporate, governmental, public sector and public-facing organizations in situations requiring a confident and polished response << Punctuates practical guidance with anecdotal insights and transcripts of real interviews featuring George W. Bush, David Cameron, Prince Philip and other public figures << Supported by online resources, including web links for each chapter to relevant media interviews and high-profile news stories

Description Any individual preparing for an interview with the media, however practiced or well-rehearsed they are, worries about failing to convey the essential points, or encountering that awkward question in the glare of public scrutiny. As media channels multiply by the day, offering ever more opportunities for exposure, so they also present a growing probability of finding oneself in front of the camera, webcam, or microphone in a make-or-break encounter where every word, gesture or expression counts. Never has media training been more relevant, or more in demand. Media Interview Techniques is the authoritative guide to giving successful media interviews, combining the author’s own unique models and techniques with a survey of published research and influential opinion to help the reader prepare for that occasion when called upon to represent an organization publicly. Supported throughout with insightful anecdotes and transcripts of good and bad interviews given by George W. Bush, HRH Prince Philip and other notable figures, this book presents the author’s methodology which has been proven across the spectrum of industry sectors both nationally and internationally. This book is written for those who speak on behalf of commercial companies, public services, charities or NGOs, or as a subject expert. No PR executive, press officer or communications professional can afford to be without a copy for briefing clients prior to an interview. The book is also supported by online resources, including web links for each chapter to relevant media interviews and high-profile news stories.

Table of Contents 1

Why do a media interview? Preparing for your interview 2 How to create a resonant message 3 Keeping your cool 4 Voice and body language 5 The perfect tone of voice 6 Keeping control of the interview 7 Winning over sceptical and hostile audience 8 Crisis media interviews 9 Capitalizing on your interview

Public Relations


Chartered Public Relations Lessons from Expert Practitioners Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2015 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473723 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473730 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Stephen Waddington is President of the CIPR, a Chartered PR Practitioner and European Digital and Social Media Director of Ketchum Public Relations. He has earned a reputation as a public relations moderniser through senior roles he has held during the last twenty years. He is also author of Brand Anarchy, #BrandVandals, Share This and Share This Too.

This book

<< Keeps readers informed on current debates in the industry << Reflects on and examines the fundamental PR theories and their application to modern practice << Identifies and inspires best practice in the industry Description Published as part of the 2015 tenth anniversary celebrations of the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR)’s Royal Charter, Chartered Public Relations is an anthology of modern-day public relations best practice from Chartered Public Relations practitioners. It makes a valuable contribution to the advancement of public relations thinking worldwide by addressing the most current discussions on topics such as qualification of results in public relations, internal communications, freedom of information, global communication and more. Chartered Public Relations discusses in detail, among other things, the shift to the open organisation, the application of best practice in different markets and the impact of the globalisation of markets in public relations. Featuring contributions from public relations experts from a plethora of industries and companies including Specsavers, Thomson Reuters, Pielle Consulting and the University of Cambridge, it will inspire a new wave of professionals to take up the challenge of achieving Chartered PR Practitioner status.

Table of Contents 1

1.1

1.2

1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6

2

2.1

2.2

69

Marketing, PR and Sales

The shift to the open organization – the application of public relations within every area of a modern organization Putting citizens at the heart of public relations: Public relations and public value – Paul Mylrea Chart.PR, FCIPR Plus ça change, plus c’est la même chose for public relations? – Alan Smith Chart. PR, MCIPR Death or rebirth? A digital future for PR – Matt Appleby Chart. PR, FCIPR Freedom of Information: Is it changing the way we do PR? – Susan Fox Chart. PR, FCIPR The future practitioner – Catherine Arrow Chart. PR, FCIPR, FPRINZ Communications shared services in the public sector: An idea whose time has come or a passing phase? – Sally Sykes Chart.PR, FCIPR Developing areas of practice – an exploration of the opportunity in developing areas of public relations Passport to the win-win zone? The role of psychology in public relations practice and education – Ben Verinder Chart.PR, MCIPR An analysis of the role of quantification in public relations

Public Relations

evaluation – Paul Noble Chart. PR, FCIPR 2.3 Internal communications: Poor relation or powerhouse? – Linda Rolf Chart.PR, MCIPR 2.4 Communicable viruses: The adaptation of the public relations profession to the changing anatomy of the web – Matt McKay Chart.PR, FCIPR 2.5 Communications microstrategies – Martin Turner Chart. PR, MCIPR 2.6 Is public relations evolving into reputation management? – Julie McCabe Chart.PR, MCIPR 3 The application of best practice in markets – an analysis of the application of public relations in different markets 3.1 Engineering the future? Using influence to benefit society – Anne Moir Chart.PR, MCIPR 3.2 Defining the defence communicator – Clare L Parker Chart.PR, MCIPR 3.3 The evolution of UK public relations consultancies from 1984 to 2009 – Jane Howard Chart.PR, FCIPR 4 International – the impact of the globalization of markets on public relations 4.1 What does it take to be a global communications professional? – David Crundwell Chart.PR,

FCIPR 4.2 Globalization and national economic development: A role for public relations and communication management – Peter L Walker Chart.PR, FCIPR 5 Reflections – an examination of the fundamental theories of public relations and their application to modern practice 5.1 Is excellence in public relations beyond our reach? – Richard Flynn Chart.PR, MCIPR 5.2 The roadmap to excellence in public relations – Hilary Berg Chart.PR, MCIPR 5.3 A critical review: The four models of public relations and the excellence theory in an era of digital communication – Stephen Waddington Chart.PR, MCIPR


Evaluating Public Relations A Guide to Planning, Research and Measurement Edition: 3 Date: 06/28/2014 Price: $37.50 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468897 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468903 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Tom Watson is Professor of Public Relations at Bournemouth University, with a focus on applied research and professional practice. He was formerly Associate Professor and Head of the School of Communication at Charles Sturt University in Australia and was chairman of the UK’s Public Relations Consultants Association from 2000-2002. Paul Noble FCIPR is an independent PR and communications trainer, consultant and facilitator. A CIPR Approved Trainer and e-learning specialist, he provides management support to growing PR consultancies, and is chief examiner of the CIPR’s Advanced Certificate. Paul has 30 years’ experience in senior consultancy, in-house and academic environments.

70

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Arms PR professionals with the means to clearly and objectively measure and prove the value of

their work << Helps improve effectiveness for businesses and institutions, especially with regard to using online tools << Provides plenty of examples of what works from around the world

Description Operating under tight budget constraints and with an ever-increasing range of tools and technologies to choose from, PR professionals have never been under so much pressure to justify their decisions. Evaluating Public Relations advises PR practitioners at all levels on how to demonstrate clearly and objectively the impact that their work has to their clients and managers. The authors draw on both their practical and academic experience to discuss a diverse range of evaluation methods and strategies. This fully updated edition of Evaluating Public Relations includes coverage and advice on the industry standards on PR measurement. Covering both theory and practice and containing case studies on Philips, Pepsi, St John Ambulance, Medicare and Westminster City Council, it is an essential handbook for both students and experienced practitioners.

Table of Contents 1

Principles of public relations theory and practice 2 Evaluation and communication psychology 3 The history and culture of PR measurement and evaluation 4 Gathering and interpreting information 5 Evaluation structures and processes 6 Developing a media evaluation system 7 Evaluation in practice – case studies 8 Objectives and objective setting 9 Relationship management and crisis communication measurement 10 Evaluating social media 11 Linking PR activity to business

Public Relations


The PR Professional’s Handbook Powerful, Practical Communications Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2014 Price: $34.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468422 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468439 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Caroline Black is a highly experienced corporate, consumer, business-to-business and crisis management communications professional. She has worked with large private-sector organizations, government departments, educational establishments and charities. Her clients include Sainsbury’s, Pedigree Petfoods, the Foreign and Commonwealth Office, Brasenose College, Roehampton University, Cancer Research UK and Sightsavers. She is a Licentiate of the CIPD and an approved trainer for the CIPR. She acts as a conference chair, and lectures and speaks regularly on communication issues. She runs her own independent PR consultancy.

This book

<< Helps practitioners identify and use the best channels - online/digital, face-to-face, media (both

editorial and advertising), direct, etc - for communications << Addresses the psychology of communications so readers can better understand audiences << Covers every aspect of communication skills, from briefing, listening and questioning to writing, selling and recommending << Includes an overview of visual imagery (from photography to moving pictures) to assist in the briefing process

Description At a time when rapid changes in communications technology, such as social media, are having a major impact on the way businesses choose to communicate, more and more people are having to understand the principles of modern PR and how they can use it to underpin effective business management. The PR Professional’s Handbook offers practical advice and solutions for anyone involved in the public relations function. The PR Professional’s Handbook guides practitioners in preparing and evaluating campaigns. In addition to providing a full breakdown on the individual skills required in briefing, writing and presenting projects of different shapes and sizes, the book covers the role and importance of public relations and communications in organizations, addressing, in full, key theories for PR, skills and disciplines, channels and creativity. About the PR in Practice series: Published in collaboration with the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR), the PR in Practice series comprises accessible, practical introductions to day-today issues of public relations practice and management. The series’ action-oriented approach keeps knowledge and skills up to date.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

71

Marketing, PR and Sales

Introduction The role and importance of public relations in organizations Key theories for public relations practitioners The professional public relations practitioner Planning and evaluating public relations Public relations, marketing and related disciplines Understanding audiences Using the right communications channels and tactics Creativity in public relations Visual communications Public relations essentials for issues, incidents and crises Essential skills for the PR practitioner

Public Relations


Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2014 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469924 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469931 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Public Relations

Author Information Andrew Griffin is a corporate reputation specialist. He advises some of the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading companies and most trusted brands on crisis management, issues management and corporate citizenship. Andrew is managing director of Regester Larkin, the international reputation risk management consultancy which is credited with pioneering best practice systems across all sectors in this specialist discipline. He is a regular speaker, writer and commentator in this critical area of management and corporate communications.

This book

<< Summarises key methodologies behind reputation management << Shows how issues and crises can be handled successfully and effectively with minimum damage and disruption << Includes practical models, toolkits and checklists readers can start using immediately

Description Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management defines reputation, explores how to value it and provides practical guidelines for effective reputation management, including how to approach issues of Corporate Social Responsibility. Practical and accessible, it outlines a comprehensive approach to managing situations that may turn into crises and handling crises once they occur. Featuring a wide range of international case studies of brands who have had to respond to a variety of crises including Nestle, Unilever, General Electric, McDonaldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s, Coca-cola, Cadbury, Tesco, Pan Am, RBS and more, Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management demonstrates how organizations have to understand and respond rapidly to shifting public values, rising expectations, demands for public consultation and increasingly intrusive news media. As such, it provides a new and broader perspective on the topic for new and seasoned practitioners alike.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

72

Marketing, PR and Sales

Reputation: what it is and why it matters The challenging climate in which reputations are managed What are the risks to reputation? Externally driven issues Internally driven issues Externally driven incidents Internally driven incidents Interrelated risks Managing reputation risk through the life cycle Predicting reputation risk Preventing reputation risk Preparing for acute reputation risk Resolving risks to reputation Responding to immediate reputation risk Recovering from reputation damage Where next for crisis, issues and reputation management?

Public Relations


Retail Marketing Strategy Delivering Shopper Delight Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476915 ISBN Ebook: 9780749476922 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Retail Studies

Author Information Constant Berkhout is a passionate practitioner of retail marketing and shopper insights. As Founder and Owner of Rijnbrug Advies, a consultancy based in the Netherlands, and based on more than twenty yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience at major companies including Ahold, De Boer Winkelbedrijven, Kraft Foods, Gillette/P&G and PepsiCo, he develops new ways to grow retail categories and connect with the shopper for a diverse range of food, non-food and supplier clients.

73

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Includes current insights derived from neuromarketing research into consumer behaviour << Provides practical tools that are robust and easy to use to translate the theory into tangible results << Contains new models for retail brand management based on first-hand experience at major global retailers and suppliers

Description Basing shopper marketing strategy on customer insights is what differentiates market leading retail brands from weaker competitors. Many retail organizations lack business development and strategic departments that collect experiences, set benchmarks and create models and manuals. Retail Marketing Strategy makes the information available to drive new ways of thinking and make retail practice more agile for everyone. Taking in five key capabilities required for retail excellence, namely in-store execution; organizational development; fact-driven decision making; multi-channel operations, and understanding customers, Retail Marketing Strategy answers some of the most difficult questions in retail including how to innovate to develop new ways to interact with customers across multiple channels, and how to replicate online success stories from other sectors. Practical steps are put forward for collating and interpreting the data generated in shopper activity, helping to make sense of trends and build effective strategy. Guidance is based throughout on neuromarketing research, providing a clear framework for building in experiential elements such as scent or music into the retail environment to really engage with consumers on an emotional level. If you are a marketing, branding or supply chain professional working in retail seeking straightforward and research-driven techniques for building lasting customer loyalty, or you are responsible for driving retail strategy in your organization, let Retail Marketing Strategy be your guide.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 2 2.1 2.2

Shopper happiness Delivering shopper happiness Shoppers are people The myth of impulse purchasing Tapping into irrational shopper behaviour 2.3 Understanding the shopper brain through neuro research 3 Channel choices 3.1 Channel preference: the future of the hypermarket channel 3.2 What the shopper wants from online shopping channels 4 Fact-driven decision making 4.1 Getting your assortment right 4.2 Really making loyalty card programmes work 4.3 Making big data digestible 5 In-store execution 5.1 The unstoppable growth of private labels and opportunities for A-brands 5.2 The unexplainable effect of music 5.3 Can scents work wonders? 5.4 Self-scanning is more than savings 6 Organizational development 6.1 The birth of category management 6.2 True customer understanding 6.3 Shopper marketing: new phase of trade marketing 7 Embracing the shopper 7.1 Retailers in action to increase shopper happiness

Retail Studies


Category Management in Purchasing A Strategic Approach to Maximize Business Profitability Edition: 3 Date: 10/28/2015 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472306 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472313 Pages: 504 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Retail Studies

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of the international purchasing consultancy and training provider, Positive Purchasing Ltd. With over 25 years’ experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of category management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Supplier Relationship Management and Negotiation for Purchasing Professionals.

74

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Provides a clear definition and understanding of category management << Provides a step by step guide to the tools, techniques and application of category management,

equipping the reader to deliver value and cost savings when sourcing and purchasing << Allows readers to analyse complex sourcing situations quickly and clearly, and develop innovative and creative proposals for sourcing

Description Category Management in Purchasing is a comprehensive guide to strategic category management, providing a step-by-step guide to its implementation and use. This book provides the necessary tools, techniques and applications that will enable the reader to implement this cost saving purchasing method. The 3rd edition of Category Management in Purchasing has been rigorously updated to reflect the latest thinking in the field. Jonathan O’Brien shows how a strategic approach needs to work effectively together with other approaches, such as Supplier Relationship Management. He has added important sections on governance, included more supplier and supply chain tools, and introduced a pragmatic route for smaller businesses or those who need step-by-step advice. The book provides case studies of real companies, including: IKEA, The Body Shop, NHS, Heinz, Cardiff Council, and GlaxoSmithKline.

Table of Contents 1

Introducing category management 2 The principles of category management 3 Laying the groundwork for success 4 Stage 1: Initiation 5 Stage 2: Insight 6 Stage 3: Innovation 7 Stage 4: Implementation 8 Stage 5: Improvement 9 Making category management happen 10 Guaranteeing success – now and for the future

Retail Studies


Sales and Marketing Channels How to Build and Manage Distribution Strategy Edition: 3 Date: 04/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482145 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482152 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Sales

Author Information Julian Dent is Chairman of VIA International, a specialist routes-to-market consultancy. He has more than 35 years of global experience in distribution, specializing in channel strategy and implementation at global, corporate and regional levels. His clients include Barclays, Esso, Hewlett-Packard, Hyatt, Microsoft, Philips, Subway and Xerox. Michael White is EMEA General Manager of Quadmark, a global channels and sales enablement consultancy. He has been a worldwide routes-to-market specialist for 30 years across multiple industries, leading commercial consumer channel strategy from formulation through to execution. His clients include Apple, Caterpillar, Cisco, Electrolux, PayPal and Procter & Gamble.

75

Marketing, PR and Sales

This book

<< Provides a complete economic framework for analyzing any channel partner (distributor, reseller or retailer) and a new series of multi-sector insights << Enables a defined go-to-market strategy and forecasting for emerging channels and technology << Supports the allocation of scarce resources for the highest returns, and channel negotiation from positions of market strength or weakness << New to this edition: multi-sector focus, the emergence of the cloud, new consumer channels, the switch from products to services, the ‘gig economy’ and monetizing intellectual property

Description Unprecedented upheavals in routes-to-market are challenging businesses of all types. Products are becoming services, online and offline channels are integrating, and new distribution channels are dictating terms to producers. The third edition of Distribution Channels re-positions itself as Sales and Marketing Channels, placing market access at the heart of business and marketing strategy. This global bestseller delivers a rational economic framework to analyze, plan and manage profitable channels to market. It addresses emerging business models and buying behaviours with practical steps, ensuring maximum leverage of channel partners at every stage of the go-to-market process. Sales and Marketing Channels, a fully-revised third edition, takes a multi-sector approach with an entire new series of specialist sections for application to any business. This efficient structure extracts tangible commercial value from partner relationships, integrating innovative case studies like AirBNB, the largest seller of rooms without ownership of any; Transferwise, the peer-to-peer Forex; plus the rise of online retailers like Amazon and ASOS versus the decline of traditional stores like Macy’s or BHS. Updates include the impact of cloud technology, advancing consumer channels, monetizing the distribution of intellectual property and the evolving ‘gig economy’, led by Uber and Deliveroo. Often referred to as the “Place” P in the marketing mix, this book and its host of downloadable resources are an essential toolkit for strategizing new and existing routes to market.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 How to Get the Best out of this Book 1.2 The Business of Getting Products and Services to Market 1.3 Major Trends and Developments in Market Access 2 Distributors, Wholesalers and Intermediaries 2.1 The Role of the Distributor for Sales and Marketing Channels 2.2 How the Distributor Business Model Works 2.3 Managing Distributors – Margins and Profitability 2.4 Managing Distributors – Working Capital 2.5 Managing Distributors – Productivity 2.6 Managing Distributors – Sustainability 2.7 Managing Distributors – Growth 2.8 Understanding the Distribution Landscape 2.9 How to Get the Best from Distribution Strategy 3 Managing Final Tier Sales and Marketing Channels 3.1 The Roles of the Final Tier Channel Players 3.2 How the Business Model Works for Final Tier Channel Players 3.3 Managing Final Tier Channel Players - Sales and Utilization 3.4 Managing Final Tier Channel Players - Gross Margin 3.5 and Recoverability

Sales

3.6 Managing Final Tier Channel Players - Working Capital Management 3.7 Managing Final Tier Channel Players - Value Creation and Growth 3.8 How to Get the Best from Final Tier Trade Channel Players 4 Managing Distribution in Individual Industry Sectors 4.1 Introduction to Managing Distribution in Individual Industry Sectors 4.2 Insights from Managing Capital Goods Distribution 4.3 Insights from Managing Consumer Goods Distribution 4.4 Insights from Managing Services Distribution 4.5 Insights from Managing Hotels, Restaurants, Catering and Travel Distribution 4.6 Insights from Managing Intellectual Property Distribution 4.7 Insights from Managing Franchised Distribution


Business, Finance, Risk & Information Management Innovation and Best Practice in Accounting and Finance Business & Management Skills Compliance & Regulation Corporate Governance & CSR Information & Data Management International Business Leadership Management Science Management Thinking Professional Services Risk Management Strategy

www.koganpage.com www.koganpage.com

76


International Finance For Non-Financial Managers Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2018 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480011 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480028 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Dora Hancock has over 30 years’ teaching experience at universities in the UK including Birmingham City University and Leeds Beckett University. Recently, her teaching has focused solely on finance, including international, corporate and investment finance on undergraduate, postgraduate and professional courses. She has taught UK and international students. The author is passionate about teaching and writing materials for students and lecturers to use.

77

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Includes a highly accessible, engaging introduction to what can sometimes be a difficult, technical subject << Draws on examples from practice from around the world to offer a truly global approach << Offers an up-to-date approach to the subject post global financial crisis << Provides a glossary to accompany the text, offering instant access to key terminology << Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides

Description International Finance offers a clear and accessible introduction to the fundamental principles and practice of international finance in today’s world, from the international financial environment and exchange rates, to financing multinational companies and international investment. The theory and techniques are presented with the non-financial manager in mind, and the theoretical material is supplemented by case studies and a discussion of the appropriateness of the various techniques and principles to solve practical problems. This book draws from examples and practice around the world, helping students of international corporate finance, particularly non-specialist finance students, understand the complexities of modern Europe and comparative systems of finance globally. International Finance is essential reading for anyone studying international finance or needing an up-to-date, engaging resource to help them navigate the complicated and ever-changing global financial world. Key theories and terms are explained and defined, avoiding unnecessary jargon and acknowledging that many readers are coming to the subject with little or no prior knowledge of corporate finance at all.

Table of Contents 1

The International Financial Environment 1.1 The Rise of the Multinational and the International Monetary System 1.2 The Institutions and Participants that Make Up the Global Financial System 1.3 The History of Exchange Rates, the IMF and the World Bank 1.4 The Euro and the Global Financial Environment 2 Exchange Rates 2.1 Exchange Rate Regimes 2.2 Parity Conditions and Forecasting Exchange Rates 2.3 Currency Markets 2.4 Measuring and Managing Exchange Risk 3 Financing the International Company 3.1 Financing International Trade 3.2 Long Term Sources of Finance 3.3 International Cash Management 4 International Investment 4.1 Investing Directly in Foreign Enterprises 4.2 International Investment Appraisal 4.3 Country Risk Analysis 4.4 Long–Term Financing 4.5 Capital Structure

Accounting & Finance


The Handbook of International Trade and Finance The Complete Guide for International Sales, Finance, Shipping and Administration Edition: 4 Date: 08/28/2016 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475987 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475994 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Anders Grath has over 25 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience in international trade and finance within major European financial institutions, as head of both international departments and corporate units. He is the author of a series of similar titles on individual country markets.

78

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Contains international case studies and examples of cross-border transactions from across the globe << Features a section on risk management and its potential impact on the physical flow of goods and the cost of insurance << Contains a comprehensive glossary to demystify all the key terms associated with international trade and finance to ensure that readers can use them confidently << Provides a complete and thorough assessment of all the issues involved in the international financing process as well as key insight into the financing process by describing it from the perspectives of both the buyer and the seller << Is full of practical examples and easy-to-use templates to ensure practitioners are complying with best practice << Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides

Description International trade, and its financing, is now a key component of many undergraduate and postgraduate qualifications. For anyone involved in international sales, finance, shipping and administration, or for those studying for academic or professional qualifications in international trade, The Handbook of International Trade and Finance offers an extensive and topical explanation of the key finance areas. This essential reference resource provides the information necessary to help you to reduce risks and improve cash flow, identify the most competitive finance alternatives, structure the best payment terms, and minimize finance and transaction costs. This fully revised and updated 4th edition of The Handbook of International Trade and Finance also describes the negotiating process from the perspectives of both the buyer and the seller, providing valuable insight into the complete financing process, and covering key topics such as: trade risks and risk assessment; structured trade finance; methods and terms of payment; currency risk management and bonds, guarantees and standby letters of credit. The Handbook of International Trade and Finance provides a complete and thorough assessment of all the issues involved in constructing, financing and completing a cross-border transaction, as an indispensable guide for anyone dealing with international trade. The new edition also includes a section on risk management, which plays an increasingly important role in international trade from currency fluctuations to political risk and natural disasters. N.B. This covers the principles of international trade and finance that are common across the globe and is relevant to anyone wanting to understand the subject, wherever they are located. Specific national issues (such as the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Brexit decision) do not affect the content. Online supporting resources include PowerPoint lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

Trade risks and risk assessment Methods of payment Bonds, guarantees and standby letters of credit 4 Currency risk management 5 Export credit insurance 6 Trade finance 7 Structured trade finance 8 Terms of payment 9 The export quotation

Accounting & Finance


Accounting and Finance for Managers A Decision-Making Approach Edition: 2 Date: 12/28/2017 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481148 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481155 Pages: 488 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Matt Bamber is an assistant professor in accounting at the University of Toronto’s Rotman School of Management. He is a chartered accountant with several years’ experience of teaching on a range of programmes, including MBA, professional and master’s courses. Simon Parry is a research fellow at Newcastle University who has taught professional, MBA and other postgraduate courses for 15 years. He is also a chartered accountant with over 25 years’ experience.

79

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Develops analytical skills through the interpretation and analysis of financial statements, leveraging

exercises and comprehension questions << Places accounting in a real-world context, making it more accessible and immediate for students interested in its application to management decision making << Includes tips for teachers on enthusing and engaging students and a breakdown of how each chapter relates to course structures << New to this edition: updated examples and case studies from Tesco, Ryanair and Whitbread PLC, new content on corporate governance and ratio analysis, and a new chapter on financing decisions << Online Resources: bonus chapters containing guidance and teaching tips, additional questions and lecture slides for each chapter

Description Accounting and Finance for Managers is specifically designed for MBA, EMBA, MA and MSc Business and Management students who require a grounding in the key concepts of accounting and finance. Including real financial statements and worked examples from well-known businesses, as well as full exercises and questions at the end of each chapter, this accessible guide provides students with the financial tools and analytical skills for managerial advantage. Taking a uniquely practical approach that focuses on the financial aspects of business decisions, the book covers all the core topics of accounting and finance, including basic bookkeeping, financial analysis, business planning, cash-flow analysis, and investment decisions. Now in its second edition, Accounting and Finance for Managers contains updated examples and case studies from Burberry, Ryanair and Whitbread, new content on corporate governance and ratio analysis, reflective activities and a new chapter on financing decisions. Bonus online material includes guidance and teaching advice, additional questions and lecture slides for each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction to Accounting Accounting Concepts and Systems 3 Financial Analysis Part I 4 Financial Analysis Part II 5 Business Planning 6 Budgets and Performance Management 7 Cash and Working Capital Management 8 Pricing Decisions 9 Investment Decisions 10 Financing Decisions 11 Operational Decisions

Accounting & Finance


Accounting for NonAccountants Edition: 11 Date: 09/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480769 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480783 Pages: 408 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Accounting & Finance

This book

<< Helps readers understand real-world issues in presenting and interpreting financial information by leveraging examples of company accounts << Brings the reader up to date on UK GAAP accounting standards, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Accounting Standards (IAS) << Includes review questions designed to support those following a number of accountancy qualifications (ACCA, AAT, CIMA) << New to this edition: fully updated with new content including an evaluation of the main accounting software packages available and a new chapter on the economic environment << Online resources: additional review questions for each chapter and a multiple choice question section

Description Accounting for Non-Accountants provides the perfect introduction to the basics of accounting and finance. Designed for non-specialists with little or no background in accounting, it guides readers through the maze of financial terms and accounting concepts and techniques in a clear and easy-tofollow style. Now in its 11th edition, Accounting for Non-Accountants includes information on the UK GAAP accounting standards as well as an overview of current international standards, and updates including a new chapter on how competition, the financial markets and government economic policy can influence organizations. The book is structured clearly to provide in-depth understanding in three key areas: annual accounts (including income statements, balance sheets, cash flow and reporting standards); management accounting (costing, marginal costing and budgetary controls); and financial management (including the cost of capital, working capital, investment appraisal and performance analysis). With updated online resources including additional review questions for each chapter and a multiple choice question section, Accounting for Non-Accountants is ideal for beginners and provides an excellent grounding for those taking accountancy qualifications.

Author Information David Horner has taught A Level courses in Accounting, Economics and Business for over 20 years. He currently teaches at Birkdale School in Sheffield. A senior examiner for a major examining board since 2002, he is also the author of a number of textbooks on accounting, economics and related areas - including Business Accounting Basics, coauthored with Frank Wood.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

80

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Financial Record Keeping Income Statements The Balance Sheet Further Adjustments to the Income Statement Checking the Double-Entry System Accounting Concepts Accounting for Other Business Organisations An Introduction to Business Costing Marginal Costing and Decision Making Standard Costing Budgeting Working Capital Management Capital Investment Appraisal An Introduction to Limited Companies Published Accounts of the Limited Company Accounting Standards Statement of Cash Flows Accounting Ratios The Economic Environment

Accounting & Finance


Forensic Accounting and Finance Principles and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479992 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480004 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Bee-Lean Chew is an experienced member of the forensic accounting team at Wilder Coe Ltd., a director of the Network of Independent Forensic Accountants and a provider of CPD training to solicitors and fellow business professionals. The author trained with Wilder Coe Ltd., becoming partner in 2005. A Chartered Accountant, Ms Chew has a Law degree from Kent University, a Masterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s degree in Finance from the University of Strathclyde and is an ICAEW-accredited Forensic Accountant.

This book

<< Each chapter is written by a high profile specialist, in association with the Network of Independent

Forensic Accountants, bringing the latest industry insights to the topics covered << Considers the Forensic Accountant in practice, using case studies throughout from a number of different regions and sectors to demonstrate the link between theory and forensic accountancy in the professional world << Offers comprehensive coverage of all key forensic accounting topics, such as taxation, financial analysis and modelling and auditing and reporting while also covering areas of current interest to the sector, including financial crime, fraud and cyber crime while sharing expertise on civil disputes and litigation and expert witnessing and dispute resolution << Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides and links to regional updates

Description A complete guide to Forensic Accounting and Finance, this book is ideal for advanced-level students and new or mid-level forensic accounting professionals looking to boost their specialist knowledge as part of their CPD, for accountants who wish to build more knowledge in this skills area or advanced undergraduates who feel ready to stretch themselves. Demand for expertise in this field is growing, and Forensic Accounting and Finance offers a complete, accessible and affordable guide, combining coverage of principle theory with the real and practical needs of the professional. Written by a strong academic and practitioner author team and in association with the Network for Independent Forensic Accountants, this book covers all forensic accounting topics from forensics as an extension of auditing and the basic principles of forensic accounting, to financial analysis and modelling, financial reporting, financial crime, and IT systems. Forensic Accounting and Finance shares current examples and case studies, highlighting cultural differences for key topics with updated regional legislation information available online for those looking for a truly global approach which is always up to date.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

81

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Foreword The Forensic Accountant in Practice The Forensic Accountant as Expert Witness Forensic Accountancy and Taxation Forensic Accountancy and Fraud Fraud Prevention Professional Negligence Valuations Auditing and Financial Reporting Crime Commercial Disputes Forensic Accountancy in Matrimonial Cases Insolvency Personal Injury

Accounting & Finance


Understanding Islamic Financial Services Theory and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2017 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480516 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480523 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Karim Ullah is Assistant Professor and Islamic Financial Services Co-ordinator, Centre for Excellence in Islamic Finance at the Institute of Management Sciences. He has taught extensively in the areas of Islamic banking and finance, business finance and managerial finance, amongst others. Wafi Al-Kalaghouli is Senior Lecturer in Operations and Project Management, Brunel University. He has extensive experience within multinational companies and Higher Education.

82

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Considers Islamic banking and finance as a multi-level service system, an approach which will

enable students and professionals of Islamic finance to gain a more in-depth, holistic understanding of how the system functions << Offers four cutting edge, in depth case studies that clearly demonstrate how the system operates in different types of financial systems << Is written by Karim Ullah, a key player in Islamic finance in Pakistan, having played a major role in setting up the Centre for Excellence in Islamic Finance there << Presents a much needed up to date resource for a growing global industry thirsty for new sources of knowledge.

Description Understanding Islamic Financial Services offers fresh insights on the Islamic financial system. The importance of this system cannot be underestimated. Experts expect that it is likely to sustain double digit growth globally over the next few years, and demand for professionals in the area has never been higher, both in the UK and around the world. While other texts on the subject look at the basic concepts, principles, contracts and financial products used in Islamic banking and finance, Understanding Islamic Financial Services goes one step further and provides a new context, identifying four levels on which the Islamic Financial system operates: product level, institution level, market level and inter-market level. It considers Islamic banking and finance as a multi-level service system, an approach which will enable students and professionals of Islamic finance to gain a more in-depth, holistic understanding of how the system functions. Understanding Islamic Financial Services covers contemporary developments in service science (e.g. service theories, service visualization tools and service co-creation concepts) and implications for the development and sustainability of Islamic financial services. Examples from practice enliven the text and allow the reader to relate the theories and principles discussed to current practice.

Table of Contents 1

History and Development of the Islamic Financial System 2 Islamic Law (Shariah), Economics, and Financial System 3 Core Elements of the Islamic Financial System 4 Multi-Level Islamic Financial System 5 Product Level Development of Islamic Financial System 6 Institution Level Development of Islamic Finance 7 Market Level Development of Islamic Financial System 8 Inter-Markets (Ecosystem) Level Development of Islamic Financial System 9 Adaptability and Sustainability of Islamic Financial System

Accounting & Finance


Economics for Business A Guide to Decision Making in a Complex Global Macroeconomy Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749470197 ISBN Ebook: 9780749470203 Pages: 360 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Ivan K. Cohen is Associate Professor in Finance and Economics at Richmond Business School, the American International University in London. With many years of teaching experience across a wide range of Economics and Finance modules, and having taught on both sides of the Atlantic, he is able to offer a unique global approach to the study of economics.

83

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Provides a thorough understanding of the key economic concepts and their applications in business << Explains the crucial importance of the financial system to individual business and the

macroeconomy << Gives managers and executives the economic understanding they need to make important business decisions << International content adds to the reader’s understanding of global financial markets, of key importance in today’s world << Online Resources: bonus chapters on shareholders, trading blocs and skills groupings, a glossary, history of economics and an instructor’s manual

Description Economics for Business enables the reader to develop a clear understanding of the economic environment in which business takes place. This comprehensive book covers: the process of globalization and its implications for business; the role of the market and supply and demand; the impact of demand on branding and brand loyalty; and pricing strategies under various market structures. With specific business content integrated throughout and a global perspective on the current world of business, taking into account the financial crisis and its aftermath, Economics for Business is a useful introduction to economics for business students, a streamlined and comprehensive alternative to large undergraduate economics textbooks, and a valuable resource for managers and executives who need to understand the basics of economic concepts to grow their business. Online supporting resources for this book include bonus chapters on shareholders, trading blocs and skills groupings, a glossary, history of economics and an instructor’s manual.

Table of Contents 1

INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 1.1 Introduction: What’s economics got to do with business? 1.2 Introduction to markets 1.3 Introduction to macroeconomy 1.4 Introduction to the financial system 2 MICROECONOMICS: INDIVIDUAL ECONOMIC AGENTS AND INSTITUTIONS 2.1 Demand: in theory and in practice 2.2 About the firm 2.3 Supply: costs, output and distribution 2.4 Competition and markets 2.5 Business strategy: creating and sustaining a competitive advantage 3 MACROECONOMICS: THE BUSINESS BACKGROUND 3.1 The role of government 3.2 Money, interest rates and central banking: the role of monetory policy 3.3 Technological change and innovation 3.4 Forecasting 3.5 Employment 3.6 The International arena 3.7 Summary and overview

Accounting & Finance


Financial Management for Technology StartUps A Handbook for Growth Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481346 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481353 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Accounting & Finance

Author Information Alnoor Bhimani is Founding Director of LSE Entrepreneurship and Professor of Management Accounting at the London School of Economics. He is widely published and an established speaker to managers and business entrepreneurs, as well as scholars and accounting practitioners across the globe. He currently carries out research on the interface between business growth and digital technologies, including the Internet of Things, blockchain, AI and 3-D printing.

84

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Concentrates on what is important in financial terms for technology-based and innovation-focused

entrepreneurial business << Features the simple, yet effective Tech start-up tracker, meaning that Finance for Technology Start Ups: A Handbook for Growth offers a complete and must-have financial toolkit for managing technology-based start ups << Uses straight forward language and extensive practical illustrations and case studies to demonstrate how technology and innovation-based start ups can adopt and use a financial understanding that is effective and focused on their needs << Covers accounting statements, financial ratio analysis, tech start-up metrics and funding valuation essentials, focusing entirely on tech-entrepreneurs’ needs

Description All start-up businesses must be founded on product expertise, a grasp of digitisation, and being aware of market forces. Tech start-ups also need a unique understanding of accounting to succeed, knowledge which is required to power their more innovative business models, and the ways of working that drive technology-based businesses. Unlike traditional accounting manuals or those aimed more generally at small business operators, Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups concentrates on what is important in financial terms for technology-based and innovation focused entrepreneurial businesses. Featuring a simple yet effective ‘Start-Up Financial Control Loop’ and ‘Tech Start-Up Tracker,’ Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups offers a complete and must-have financial toolkit for launching and managing a tech start-up. The book covers all relevant facets of accounting and finance not covered by any other publication by using straight-forward language, extensive practical illustrations and case studies to demonstrate the financial understanding that has become essential to technology and innovation-based start-ups.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

Preface Now is the Time Tech Startups – It’s a Different World 4 Startup Contribution Analysis 5 Startup Financial Analysis 6 Startup Progress Analysis 7 The Importance of Being Liquid 8 What’s it Worth to You? 9 Tracking Your Startup’s Growth 10 Glossary 11 Resources

Accounting & Finance


Investment and Portfolio Management A Practical Introduction

This book

<< Introduces what can sometimes be a difficult, technical subject in a highly accessible, engaging way << Takes an original approach: Unlike many other textbooks << Investment and Portfolio Analysis is rooted in Europe rather than adapted from a US text, but draws on examples and practice from around the world

<< Adopts a practical approach, drawing on the authorsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; many years of experience working in the

Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2017 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480059 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480066 Pages: 616 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

financial sector to illustrate concepts with real-world examples and practice, making it the perfect choice for those preparing for a career in finance and investment << Offers a concise introduction, supported with links to further reading and self-directional study << Online resources: Lecture slides and figures from the book

Author Information

Table of Contents

Ian Pagdin is Course Leader for Banking & Finance Masters and a variety of finance and international finance courses at Sheffield Hallam University. His background is finance, having worked in the finance industry for 22 years, including 19 years as an independent financial adviser. Michelle Hardy is a senior lecturer and module leader for several key modules on a variety of finance and international finance courses at Sheffield Hallam University. Her background is corporate banking and international wealth management for 14 years. She is a fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales

85

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Description For students of finance at both undergraduate and postgraduate level, or those preparing for professional examinations, Investment and Portfolio Management develops knowledge and understanding of the key financial products, investment strategies and risks in financial markets in the UK and internationally. With an emphasis on practice, Investment and Portfolio Management presents the theory and its relevance and application in the financial workplace. The authors draw on their experience working in the financial sector to illustrate concepts with case studies, examples and problems, including material relevant to candidates studying for professional examinations offered by the major professional bodies in the subject area (Charted Institute of Investment, CII & Chartered Institute of Securities and Investment, CISI). Each chapter is written in an easy-to-follow style, allowing readers to navigate their way through different topics without issue, avoiding complicated technical jargon, in favour of simpler terms and writing style. To meet the criteria for those studying for academic and professional courses, links are provided to more in-depth material and in-chapter features to encourage self-directional learning. Online supporting resources for this book include lecture slides and figures from the book.

1 2 2.1 2.2

Introduction Financial Markets Main Market Participants Global Fund Management Industry 2.3 Investment Theory 3 Investment Classes 3.1 Equity 3.2 Debt 3.3 Mutual Funds 3.4 Derivatives 3.5 Alternative Investments 4 Risk 4.1 Types of Risk 4.2 Financial Regulation and Supervision 5 Portfolio Management 5.1 The Advisor and the Client 5.2 Issues Involved in the Management of Retail Fund Management Products 5.3 Taxation

Banking


Relationship Management in Banking Principles and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482831 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482848 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

Author Information Steve Goulding worked for a UK Bank for 35 years, the majority of which were spent in Commercial and Corporate, while 25 as Relationship Director. He is now an author, coach and mentor for a number of financial services personnel, and provides management consultancy services for a number of businesses. Richard Abley has operated within the banking industry since 1978, fulfilling a number of customer-facing and leadership roles in business and corporate banking. Simultaneously, he has lectured to many hundreds of bankers seeking to obtain their professional qualifications, and has coauthored several books on banking.

86

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Supports the Chartered Banker Instituteâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s (CBI) Relationship Management in Banking module

requirements and helps to prepare for assessment << Is written by banking sector experts with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students studying banking at undergraduate and postgraduate level << Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout << Offers thought leadership on relationship management from expert authors with over 50 years of combined experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute << Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation

Description Endorsed by the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Chartered Banker Institute as required reading for the Chartered Banker programme, Relationship Management in Banking supports and develops the need to be able to manage key customer relationships. The text considers the nature of commercial relationships and help the reader synthesise complex factors in order to develop a robust relationship management methodology. It will draw from bona fide case studies and examples that can demonstrate key relationship management concepts as well as bring learning to life and share examples of customers, good and bad, from a range of different sectors. Through case studies and providing online updates to regulations, Relationship Management in Banking considers how to critically analyze approaches to relationship management used for a variety of banking customer types and examine the impact of legislation, regulation, governance and technology on banking relationship management and customer acquisition and retention.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Customer 2.1 Retail Banking and Wealth Management 2.2 Business Customers 2.3 Products and Services 2.4 Consumer Protection (Legislation and Regulation) 3 Relationship 3.1 Reputational Risk 3.2 Servicing Customers 3.3 The Role of the Relationship Manager 3.4 Tools and Techniques to Help the Relationship Manager 4 Management 4.1 The Use of Technology in Managing Customer Relationships 4.2 Portfolio Planning and Segmentation 4.3 Strategic Imperatives in Relationship Management 5 Live Case Study 5.1 Putting it all Together

Banking


Retail and Digital Banking Principles and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482718 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482725 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

Author Information John Henderson has over 30 years’ experience in the banking sector, having held a number of roles for The Bank of Scotland, Sainsbury’s Bank, the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS) and NatWest. He began his career working in retail branches but has also been Regional Training Manager, headed up the Treasury Department and other operational risk services, managed quality for an operational call centre business and also led branch design and distribution. His current role is with the RBS Group, where he manages the offshoring portfolio. The author is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Bankers.

87

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Supports the Chartered Banker Institute’s (CBI) Retail and Digital Banking module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment << Is written by a banking sector expert with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students of banking in professional training or at undergraduate and postgraduate level << Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout << Offers thought leadership on retail and digital banking from an expert author with over 39 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute << Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation

Description Written in support of the UK’s Charter Banker Institute’s (CBI) Retail and Digital Banking module, Retail and Digital Banking looks at the changes that have occurred for retail branches, developments in onshore and offshore operations, call centres and the impact of technology and other critical factors in retail and digital banking’s journey. This book considers the evolution of retail banking services and the major role that technology has played in providing high-quality and cost-effective services to consumers. This fascinating text then goes on to offer expert thought leadership on the future of retail banking and what this could mean for existing established banks and disruptive new entrants. Retail and Digital Banking offers readers the opportunity to take a step back and consider the evolution of the sector in which they work and the tremendous level of change that has occurred over time for all operational activity. Retail and Digital Banking provides support for the module assessment and features practical case studies from the banking sector. This essential text brings the journey of modern banking to life and considers what the future holds. Online resources include a glossary, workplace activities, regulation updates and assessment preparation material.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2

Introduction The Past to Present Creation of Money and Banking Evolution of Retail Banking in the 20th Century 2.3 The Impact of Financial Crises 2.4 Retail Banking Operational Strategies to Manage Cost to Income Ratio 2.5 Emergence of New Players 3 The Present – Internal Environment 3.1 Retail Banking Channels 3.2 Multi Channel v Omni Channel 3.3 The Competitive Environment 4 The Present – External Environment (Legal, Political, Social and Technology factors) 4.1 Legislation and Regulation 4.2 The Technology Revolution 5 The Future 5.1 Preparing for the Future

Banking


Commercial Lending Principles and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482770 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482787 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

This book

<< Supports the Chartered Banker Institute’s (CBI) Commercial Lending module requirements and

helps to prepare for assessment << Is written by a banking sector expert with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students of banking at undergraduate and postgraduate level << Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout << Offers additional numeracy support to help readers with practical lending work, such as assessing balance sheets and understanding financial reports and documents << Offers thought leadership on commercial lending from an expert author with over 30 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute << Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation

Description Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as required reading for the Chartered Banker programme, Commercial Lending supports readers that wish to develop their ability to analyze the creditworthiness of a customer and their business in the context of the current economic climate, future market and sector expectations. Commercial Lending uses a series of practical exercises and case studies, and provides the tools needed for the reader to understand and appraise a customer’s business strategy. This will then enable the reader to provide appropriate funding solutions to meet the commercial needs of customers while reflecting the bank’s risk appetite. These tools include: how to assess the performance and creditworthiness of a business; how to critically evaluate the robustness of cash flow; and how to undertake sensitivity analysis to quantify sustainable debt repayment capacity. This practical text will present a critical analysis of financial and non-financial information to help readers identify key risks inherent in the customer’s lending proposition. Readers will go on to propose suitable funding solutions that mitigate risk and meet the needs of customer and bank.

Author Information Adrian Cudby has a wide range of experience in banking and education. He worked for over 30 years in banking for RBS, where he carried out an extensive range of roles including lending, relationship management, high risk management and roles in central strategy teams. The author now works predominantly in higher education and lectures on a wide range of subjects including lending, law, risk management, management, marketing, international trade, leadership and ethics, and interpretation of financial statements. He is an Associate of the Chartered Institute of Bankers.

88

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5

Introduction The Customer Financial Analysis of Businesses Cash Analysis How to Structure a Lending Proposition 6 Strategic Analysis of Businesses 7 Security for Lending 8 Lending Products 9 Management 10 Businesses Facing Financial Difficulties

Banking


Anti-Money Laundering A Practical Guide to Reducing Organizational Risk Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2018 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481896 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481902 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Banking

Author Information Rose Chapman is as Global Head of Compliance for a leading travel commerce platform and solutions provider. With over 20 years of experience working in compliance and ethics in global organizations, she is accustomed to the demands and challenges faced by business professionals and compliance teams working in fast-moving, culturally diverse and dynamic environments. She is a lecturer and training manual writer/ reviewer for the ICA in Post Graduate Diplomas and Certificates in Compliance, a member of the Institute of Money Laundering Prevention Officers Committee, UK, and a recognised speaker and expert voice on antimoney laundering.

89

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Addresses the needs of the non-specialist compliance professional from a range of industries,

backgrounds and experience << Outlines the different elements of anti-money laundering (AML) practice to support compliance professionals at any stage of their career to put effective controls in place in their own organisations << Presents readers with the global oversight needed to align activity to a cohesive plan, sharing case studies and examples of good and bad practice from around the world << Includes the EU 4th Directive, due to come into practice in July 2017; stays up-to-date with current regulations

Description It is estimated that between 2 and 5 per cent of global GDP (over $3 trillion) is laundered by criminals around the world every year. Once thought to be a problem which only affected banks and the financial services sector, high profile cases, such as the recent leak of the Panama Papers in 2016, have thrust the issue into the public arena, and governments around the world are being forced to put robust systems and controls in place. Anti-Money Laundering offers a cost-effective self-development tool for the busy compliance professional eager to progress their career and in need of an accessible, practical and jargon-free introduction to anti-money laundering (AML). Anti-Money Laundering offers a practical guide to navigate the maze of requirements needed to counter money laundering in an organization. This book separates the different elements of AML practice, featuring a range of case studies and scenarios highlighting issues and best practices around the world. The text demonstrates that it is by foresight and methodology that AML can be mitigated, and provides clarity on complex points to better enable readers to gain the expertise they need to achieve success in practice.

Table of Contents 1

Reaction – The Rise of AML and Anti-Terrorist Financing Activity 2 Over-Reaction – When What We Know Does Not Inform Us Well 3 Entering Global Markets – Why Transparency is King 4 Suspicious Activity Reporting 5 Weak or Strong Regulators – Which are Best? 6 Evidencing Activities 7 Applying the Brakes at Key Moments – Placement, Layering and Integration 8 Cross-Border Financial Intelligence Unit Activity

Banking


Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking Principles and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482909 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482916 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Banking

Author Information Fred Bell is an experienced career banker with extensive risk management leadership experience, particularly in operational risk management, change management and business continuity. Working over 39 years in the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS), his experience also includes project management and delivery, including the establishment of new businesses and business due diligence exercises. His senior leadership roles have included Head of Operational Risk in the RBS Wealth Division, Head of Risk at Tesco Personal Finance and Head of the RBS Bank of China Risk Programme. The author established and ran RBS’s first dedicated business continuity function.

90

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Supports the Chartered Banker Institute’s (CBI) Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking module

requirements and helps prepare for assessment << Is written by a banking sector expert with cutting-edge industry perspective, ideal to support students of banking win professional training courses, or at undergraduate and postgraduate level << Aids work-based learning and professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout << Offers thought leadership on culture, conduct and ethics from an expert author with over 39 years of experience in the sector; endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute << Online resources: includes a glossary and updates to regulation

Description Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as required reading for the Chartered Banker programme, Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking supports the need to ensure that banking professionals gain a critical appreciation of the interrelationship between conduct, culture and ethics in banking. This text considers the social utility of banking and finance, and how formal and informal influences shape banking organizations. Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking takes a practical and applied approach and aims to develop the capability of readers to: recognize and contribute toward balanced outcomes for consumers and organizations; understand the impact of reputational deficit; and understand the personal impact of an individual in the workplace. Through case studies and continuous updates to regulations, Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking analyzes the evolution of the bank’s role in society; examines the impact of legislation, regulation and governance on banking operations; offers a range of ethical theories and their applicability to banking and finance; and helps you critically analyze how to achieve balanced and ethically sound outcomes.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Introduction A Short History of Banking The 2007 Financial Crisis Ethics Theory – A primer Ethics in Business – A primer Banking and Competition Regulation and Legislation Stakeholders, Channels and Products Organization and Management Culture and Conduct Risk Management Professionalism and Banking Strategy and Decision Making

Banking


The Business Skills Handbook Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2009 Price: $55.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982180 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983392 Pages: 536 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business & Management Skills

This book

<< Helps students refine key study and workplace skills, from how to study and work in teams to

developing critical reading and project management skills << Takes an experiential learning approach to get students assessing and improving their own skills << Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and figures and tables from the book

Description How do you develop leadership skills or give a successful presentation? What difference can effective thinking and critical reading make to your performance? How can you get and stay organized to meet deadlines? The first book of its kind to cover all the business skills that students need at university and at work, The Business Skills Handbook covers all the practical, cognitive, technical and development skills that students need to succeed, from organising life and work to developing good writing and teamwork skills. Mapped to the learning outcomes of the CIPD Level 7 Advanced Developing Skills for Business Leadership module, and with a focus on experiential learning to get students assessing and developing their skills, The Business Skills Handbook is designed to help students manage themselves more effectively, make justifiable decisions and problem solve more effectively, lead and influence others, interpret financial information, manage financial resources, demonstrate IT proficiency and demonstrate competence in postgraduate study skills. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and figures and tables from the book.

Author Information Roy Horn is an academic and researcher in the School of Business and Management at Buckinghamshire New University, UK.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

91

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Organising Life and Work How to Study Learning and Skills What are the Key Skills of University Life and the Workplace? Working in Teams Effective Reading Skills Developing Good Writing Skills Presentation Communication Business Calculations Critical Reading and Writing Skills Analysis and Evaluation Skills Examinations and Assignments Thinking and Memory Skills Word Processor Skills Being Effective with Spreadsheets Project Management Skills Social Skills Leadership, Coaching and Mentoring Skills Careers and ‘Futuring’ Skills

Business & Management Skills


Myths of Management What People Get Wrong About Being the Boss Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480233 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480240 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Business & Management Skills

Author Information Stefan Stern writes for the Guardian and the FT, where he was the management columnist between 2006 and 2010. He is visiting professor in management practice at Cass Business School and is Director of the High Pay Centre. Sir Cary Cooper CBE is the 50th Anniversary Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at the Alliance Manchester Business School, University of Manchester. He is President of the CIPD, President of the British Academy of Management and Editor-inChief of the Blackwell/Wiley Encyclopedia of Management.

This book

<< Explores over 40 of the most pervasive myths that all managers and aspiring managers should be

able to recognize and relate to, from the entertaining to the downright damaging << Draws on extensive and compelling research in management, organizational psychology and organizational behaviour which includes interviews with the likes of Charles Handy, Eve Poole, Henry Mintzberg, Tom Peters, Hermina Ibarra and Laura Empson << Includes real world business examples from a diverse range of global companies to provide authentic insights into myths in practice and how to overcome them << Is written by Professor Sir Cary Cooper (President of the CIPD and Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at Manchester Business School) and Stefan Stern (prominent journalist at the FT, the Guardian, the International Business Times and Director of the High Pay Centre) << Tackles fascinating myths about management such as: working long hours will lead to success, only hire people who ‘fit in’, it’s lonely at the top and hierarchy is finished

Description Is it really true that working longer hours makes you more successful? Do you really need to hide your emotions in order to gain respect as a manager? Does higher pay really always lead to higher performance? The world of management is blighted by fads, fiction and falsehoods. In Myths of Management, Cary Cooper and Stefan Stern take you on an entertaining journey through the most famous myths surrounding the much-written about topic of management. They debunk false assumptions, inject truth into over-simplifications and tackle damaging habits head-on. Fascinating insights from psychology, leadership theory and organizational behaviour provide you with a compelling and practical guide to avoid falling into the trap of cliché, misinformation and prejudice. This engaging read offers you authentic insights into the reality of work, drawn from extensive research and real-world business examples, to give you the essential knowledge you need to become a better manager. Whether cheesy, naïve or even destructive, management myths could be holding you back and stifling your team’s potential. Myths of Management is the guide you need to become an enlightened manager.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

92

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Introduction Myth 1 - There is One Right Way to Lead or Manage Myth 2 - It’s Tough at the Top Myth 3 - Long Hours Will Lead to Success Myth 4 - It’s Important Not to Show Vulnerability or Doubt Myth 5 - It’s Lonely at the Top Myth 6 - You Need to be the Smartest Person in the Room Myth 7 - Hierarchy is Finished Myth 8 - Consistency is Essential Myth 9 - Only Hire People Who Will Fit In Myth 10 - Leadership is More Important than Management Myth 11 - You Have to Pay Top Dollar to Get the Right Person Myth 12 - Annual Appraisals Help You Manage Performance Myth 13 - Information Must be Controlled and Limited Myth 14 - … but Women Don’t Really Want Top Jobs Myth 15 - Leaders are Born Not Made Myth 16 - Your First 100 Days in a New Job are Make or Break Myth 17 - You Have to Know Everything that is Going On Myth 18 - Heroic Leaders Can Change Entire Organizations on their Own Myth 19 - The Boss with the Best Strategy Wins Myth 20 - It is Not Possible to

Business & Management Skills

Work Flexibly in Senior Roles 22 Myth 21 - Pay Must be Kept Confidential 23 Myth 22 - Psychology is Psychobabble and there’s No Need or Place for it 24 Myth 23 - The Robots are Coming to Take Your Job 25 Myth 24 - Leadership Must Be Transformational 26 Myth 25 - Conformity Leads to Success 27 Myth 26 - Feelings are Soft and for Losers 28 Myth 27 - Keep Your Distance if You Want Respect 29 Myth 28 - Be Yourself — It’s All About Authenticity 30 Myth 29 - Date of Birth is Destiny 31 Myth 30 - People are Motivated by Money 32 Myth 31 - Fear Works and ‘Engagement’ is Unnecessary 33 Myth 32 - The Business Case Will Always Prove Persuasive 34 Myth 33 - There’s Nothing Wrong with the Business, there’s just a Few Rotten Apples 35 Myth 34 - We Have Woken Up to the Problems Caused by Prejudice 36 Myth 35 - All the Power Resides at the Top 37 Myth 36 - People Will Learn if you Explain Things to them Clearly

38 Myth 37 - You Must Keep Up with all the New Management Ideas and Give Them a Try 39 Myth 38 - You’ve Got to Talk Like a Real, Serious, GrownUp Business Person. Learn the Jargon 40 Myth 39 - You Can’t Manage People if You Can’t See Them 41 Myth 40 - Who Needs Employees Anyway? Get With the Gig Economy 42 Myth 41 - People Hate Change 43 Myth 42 - Big Data Will Fix Everything 44 Myth 43 - A Cool Office Will Make Everybody More Creative 45 Myth 44 - There are Only 44 Things to Get Wrong


Contract Management Core Business Competence Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480646 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480653 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Business & Management Skills

Author Information Peter Sammons is a commercial/ procurement specialist with 35 years in field. He is now a consultant who provides commercial support and develops/delivers training seminars

93

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Provides a practical handbook for procurement and supply chain managers who need to review their own skills and practices << Provides tools to help organizations move towards best practice << Equips the reader with accompanying PowerPoint slides that illustrate the tools and skills << Presents broad commercial skill-sets which are internationally applicable

Description Contract management is a key management skill, yet it is underplayed in most organizations, which usually default to project management skills as a proxy for contract management skills. Whilst project management skills are equally essential, they are not the same thing. Contract Management looks at the wider contract management picture from an industrial-commercial perspective, and helps set-out typical structures and processes that assist the contract management task. The author uses diagramatic representations to depict complex ideas. Contract Management includes â&#x20AC;&#x153;learning pointsâ&#x20AC;? in each chapter, looking at handling problems, procedural changes and enhancing commercial performance.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Contract Management as a Value Driver 3 What is the Task? 4 Role and Importance of Effective Contract Management 5 Contract Administration 6 Commercial Strategy 7 Contract Design 8 Mobilization 9 When Things Go Wrong 10 Managing for Success 11 Practical Tools and Checklists

Business & Management Skills


Continuing Professional Development Edition: 2 Date: 01/22/2007 Price: $52.50 ISBN Paperback: 9781843981664 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482503 Pages: 176 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business & Management Skills

Author Information David Megginson is a professor of HRD at Sheffield Hallam University, UK. He is on both the membership and education committees of the CIPD and the CPD Working Group. Vivien Whitaker is a lecturer, researcher and consultant at Sheffield Hallam University, UK.

94

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Examines the importance of CPD and the methods that can be used to create and implement a CPD plan << New to this edition: increased coverage of the critical debate about issues in CPD, an outline of how to organize and encourage CPD and guidance on how senior members of the profession can benefit from CPD << Online resources: instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual and lecture slides

Description To maximise enjoyment of work and life requires a continual response to the changing world in which we live. Are you living to work or working to live? What would you like to be doing? We need to look within at our latent skills and abilities and explore ways of building on our current talents and developing new aspects of ourselves. Continuing Professional Development explores the importance of continuing professional development (CPD) and the different methods that can be used to analyse development needs and create and implement a CPD plan. It provides practical guidance and a theoretical overview of CPD, including examples and case studies. This fully updated 2nd edition of Continuing Professional Development includes increased coverage of the critical debate about issues in CPD, outlines how to organize and encourage CPD and provides guidance on how senior members of the profession can use and benefit from CPD. Activities and selfdiagnostic tools, critical debates about issues and coverage of how to organize and encourage CPD all bring the topic to life for CIPD students undertaking the Professional Development Scheme as well as general readers seeking to encourage CPD in the workplace. Online supporting resources include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1

Exploring Continuing Professional Development 1.1 Clarifying Continuing Professional Development 1.2 Understanding Continuing Professional Development 2 Engaging in Continuing Professional Development 2.1 Identifying Development Needs 2.2 Prioritising Needs and Selecting Appropriate Activities 2.3 Undertaking Development Activities 2.4 Recording and Evaluating Development 2.5 Organisational Contribution to CPD 3 Consolidating Your CPD Achievements 3.1 Celebrating Success 3.2 Networking Your Future 3.3 Empowering Career Creativity

Business & Management Skills


Researching and Writing Dissertations A Complete Guide for Business and Management Students Edition: 2 Date: 02/01/2012 Price: $47.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983026 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983231 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business & Management Skills

This book

<< Includes often overlooked guidance on how to craft compelling introductions and conclusions << New to this edition: now includes coverage of the latest development in technologies that can be used for research such as Twitter and Facebook << Online resources: lecturer’s guide and PowerPoint slides as well as templates and checklists from the book for students

Description From finding a topic to writing and reviewing your work, Researching and Writing Dissertations is an essential tool for anyone working on a dissertation or business report. This new edition is now suitable for students studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced units Investigating a Business Issue and Using Information in HR but is equally relevant for all non-CIPD students too. Covering everything from strategies for finding and developing a dissertation topic and how to develop a research proposal through to what methodology to use and how to analyse your data, this is the only book you need to write clear, effective and compelling dissertations and reports. In addition to practical guidance on the researching and writing up of projects, this book includes essential guidance on effective time management and how to ensure that projects are completed and submitted on time as well as invaluable insights through real-life student and supervisor comments. Fully supported by online resources including an instructor’s manual and lecturer slides as well as templates, checklists and quizzes for students, Researching and Writing Dissertations is a book that anyone working on dissertations, research projects or business reports can’t afford to be without.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Roy Horn is an academic and researcher in the School of Business and Management at Buckinghamshire New University, UK.

1 2

95

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Preface and Introduction Strategies for Finding and Developing a Dissertation Topic 3 The Key Skills Tested in the Dissertation 4 The Research Proposal 5 How Can I Manage My Time and Complete on Time? 6 Theory and Literature 7 Methodology 8 Data, and How to Analyse It 9 Data Analysis and Representation 10 The Craft of Writing, and Introductions and Conclusions 11 Reviewing and Evaluating Your Dissertation

Business & Management Skills


Business Research Enjoy Creating, Developing and Writing Your Business Project Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2013 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468958 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468965 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business & Management Skills

Author Information Wilson Ng leads and delivers business research methods modules for undergraduate and postgraduate students at the University of Roehampton. He is a Visiting Professor at two European universities: UNICA (Università degli studi di Cagliari) in Italy and BEM (Bordeaux Management School) in France. Prior to his academic career, Wilson was a senior investment banker with NM Rothschild in London and Singapore. Elayne Coakes has taught business research methods at the University of Westminster for many years. Her consultancy experience in large and small enterprises has provided Elayne with extensive applied business experience.

96

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Provides a clear, step-by-step narrative that links the student’s research to their aims of getting into their preferred organizations << Makes students comfortable and confident in selecting research methods to learn about organizations << Provides a clear, step-by-step narrative that links the students’ research methods to their aim of getting into their preferred organizations. << Helps students to develop strong arguments and convincing stories that will convince examiners of their knowledge

Description Knowledge of business research is necessary for any business student, as all postgraduate business programmes and business-related disciplines require it. Business Research is a groundbreaking book for student researchers who need to conceive, conduct and complete a new research project for the first time. It concentrates on the business organization and gives invaluable practical advice on going out into the field and conducting interviews, researching problems and learning about organizations. Through its conversational, accessible style and its adoption of a student’s perspective, this book will make the process of learning about research enjoyable and the resulting research project outstanding. Business Research is essential reading for students who are studying for one or more modules in research methods for a postgraduate qualification in business and management; students who have a methodological component to one of their modules (eg a module in organizational behaviour); and students who have to conduct an investigation in a business and management field, for a dissertation or project report, and need guidance and assistance on how to approach, conduct and report every aspect of their project.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3

Introduction Planning your project The nature of business research Methodology and methods ‘Doing’ your project The project proposal Collecting quantitative data Collecting qualitative data through interviews 3.4 Collecting data as an ethnographer 3.5 Case study research 3.6 Collecting data: less common methods 3.7 Ensuring data saturation 4 Reporting your findings 4.1 Analysing quantitative data 4.2 Analysing qualitative data 5 Writing your report 5.1 Discussing project findings 5.2 Conclusion to your report 5.3 Reference lists 5.4 Writing your abstract 5.5 Conclusion

Business & Management Skills


Business Research Methods A Practical Approach Edition: 1 Date: 11/24/2009 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982289 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983620 Pages: 640 Format (mm): 264x195 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business & Management Skills

This book

<< Helps students apply research methods to their own projects << Presents complex principles in a user-friendly way << Online resources: instructor’s manual with additional activities and supporting handouts, lecture slides, figures and tables from the text and web links, templates, quizzes, activities, examples of practice and sample questionnaire results for students

Description Organizations need research, and managers have to be able to commission, judge and use others’ research as well as conduct research themselves to inform business decisions. Business Research Methods helps you understand the challenges of carrying out worthwhile research into significant issues and develop a wide range of research-related professional skills. Guiding you through the process of selecting, carrying out and reporting on a successful research project, it breaks down the research process, from exploring the literature and crafting a research proposal to practical research management and addressing the transferable skills of project management and communication. Business Research Methods places research firmly in the real world, exploring why research is done and how to ensure that projects are meaningful for organizations. Examples and case studies, including examples of students’ projects, give learners with little or no work experience a meaningful context in which to relate their own projects. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor’s manual with additional activities and supporting handouts, lecture slides and figures and tables from the text. Resources for students include web links, templates, quizzes, activities, examples of practice and sample questionnaire results for students.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Sheila Cameron is a senior lecturer at the Open University Business School (OUBS), UK.

1

Deborah Price is a lecturer in Management at the Open University Business School (OUBS), UK.

97

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

From First Ideas to Possible Topics 1.1 Practical Business Research - An Overview 1.2 The Complexities of Business Research 1.3 The Investigative Process 1.4 Stakeholders, Power and Ethics 1.5 Considering Possible Topics 2 Towards a Research Proposal 2.1 Exploring the Literature 2.2 Writing A Literature Review 2.3 Research Questions and Purposes 2.4 Data, Evidence and Sampling 2.5 Choosing a Research Method 2.6 Crafting a Research Proposal 3 Data Collection 3.1 Producing a Research Project from Secondary Data 3.2 Case Study Research 3.3 Action-Oriented Research and Action Research 3.4 Questionnaires 3.5 Interviews 3.6 Focus Groups and Workshops 4 Data Analysis 4.1 Grounded Theory 4.2 Content Analysis 4.3 Representing Quantitative Data 4.4 Inferential Statistical Analysis 4.5 Drawing Valid Conclusions 5 Essential Research Skills 5.1 Managing the Project 5.2 Managing Client Relationships 5.3 Learning and Reflection 5.4 Writing about Research

Business & Management Skills


Practical Statistics A Handbook for Business Projects

This book

<< Enables readers and students to translate statistical data into comprehensive information << Supports readers at all levels of knowledge and experience through a two-level approach with ‘The

Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2013 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468460 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468477 Pages: 184 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Business & Management Skills

essentials’ and ‘Tell me more’ sections << Encourages active distance and independent learners through case studies and simple explanations

Author Information

Table of Contents

John Buglear is Head of the Division of Management at Nottingham Business School. He teaches quantitative methods and basic accounting on undergraduate and postgraduate programmes. He has lectured in statistics, operational research and research methods on postgraduate international programmes: Azerbaijan (in collaboration with BP Exploration); the Czech Republic (in collaboration with PricewaterhouseCoopers) and Uzbekistan.

98

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Description Practical Statistics is an introduction and reference guide for those studying business and management at postgraduate level, MBA students and professionals. It gives the reader a solid understanding of statistics without being too simple or mind-numbingly complex. It turns statistics, often perceived as being difficult and pointless, into something approachable and sensible. John Buglear emphasizes the importance of working back from results rather than working out results. He starts the book with basic concepts that get increasingly more complex, from simple diagrams to multivariate methods, as well as using simple metaphors to aid understanding. The book has a two-level approach, with sections headed ‘The essentials’ and ‘Tell me more’ to support learning at all levels. A rare book on business statistics that students and professionals can really understand, Practical Statistics supports active learning with use of applications and case studies, invaluable online learning materials and fully worked solutions to questions in the review section.

1 2

Introduction What you need to know before you start analysing data 3 Analysing univariate data 4 Analysing bivariate data 5 Analysing multivariate data with dependency 6 Analysing multivariate data for interdependency

Business & Management Skills


Corporate Governance Ethics and CSR

This book

<< Demonstrates the realities of balancing social responsibility with modern business practice << Takes a practical approach to a complex topic << Includes private and public sector examples

Edition: Date: Price:

1 01/28/2013 $60.00ISBN Paperback: 9780749463854 ISBN Ebook: 9780749463861 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

John Taylor is a Senior Lecturer in accounting and auditing at Leeds Metropolitan University. He has substantial experience of working as an accountant in the audit profession and was formerly financial director of a company in the clothing industry.

1 2 3 4 5

Justine Simpson is a Principal Lecturer in Accountancy Financial Services at Leeds Met. She teaches professional accounting qualifications (CIMA, CIPFA, ACCA) and management accountancy, project management, forensic accounting and financial management modules on BA Accounting Finance degree and MSc Accounting.

The rise of CSR (corporate social responsibility) is creating a paradigm shift in contemporary corporate culture and organizational behaviour with shareholder and stakeholder activism on the rise as international banking crises and global corporate scandals dominate the headlines. Through accountability and transparency, fiduciary capitalism is being challenged to tie sustainability and corporate conscience to the bottom line. With the emergence of impact investing, social responsibility and ethics in corporate governance is becoming essential to long-term success in the new global marketplace. Corporations need to demonstrate that ethical, environmentally conscious business practices and profit are no longer mutually exclusive. Justine Simpson and John R. Taylorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Corporate Governance Ethics and CSR gives the reader a comprehensive guide to todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirements for governance and reporting that organizations must adopt to successfully strike a balance between financial gain and socially responsible, green business practices that enhance the greater good. Employing current examples (Walmart, Goldman Sachs, Citigroup) and case studies in both the public and private sectors, Simpson and Taylor have compiled a thorough and fascinating roadmap, including historical context, for anyone seeking to understand the complex workings of the international corporate economy that affects us all. This book is perfect for students of, and those wishing to participate in, this revolutionary wave sweeping our planet.

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

99

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Introduction The need for trust Corporate culture Ethical behaviour Principles of corporate governance The role of the senior executives/board Assessing performance and remuneration of directors and senior executives The audit function Corporate governance and other stakeholders Corporate Social Responsibility and its reporting Corporate Social Responsibility, its measurement, theories and models Small companies, charities and other not-for-profit organizations Emerging issues

Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility


Business Ethics in Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/01/2012 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982722 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482541 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

Author Information Simon Robinson is Professor of Applied & Professional Ethics at Leeds Metropolitan University, UK Paul Dowson is a Senior Lecturer at the School of Applied Global Ethics at Leeds Metropolitan University, UK

This book

<< Provides guidance on ethics relating to consumers, the supply chain, competition and the

environment as well as workplace ethics << Includes examples from small and medium-sized businesses as well as multi-national corporations including Barcelona FC, BP, Nestle, Tesco, Nike, Body Shop, Google and John Lewis << Online resources: PowerPoint slides for every chapter, lecturer’s guides including advice on inchapter questions and student guide with practical tools for reflective learning

Description Business Ethics in Practice is essential reading for all undergraduate, postgraduate and MBA students looking to ensure they act responsibly and make the right decisions when faced with ethical dilemmas. Covering the impact of character and culture on managing ethics, leadership, governance and social responsibility, this book goes beyond ethical theory to show ethical considerations and challenges in practice. With examples from both small businesses and large multinational corporates such as Google, BP and Nestle, Business Ethics in Practice shows how ethics must be considered by everyone in every sector, in a business of any size. With coverage of ethics in relation to staff, consumers, the supply chain, competitors and the environment, this book will ensure that students can think ethically and make effective ethical decisions. Supported by online resources including powerpoint slides and a guide for lecturers as well as practical tips for students, this book will help anyone studying business ethics in both their professional and personal development.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

100

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

‘Are We Still the Good Guys?’ Introducing Ethics in Business Normative Ethical Theory Ethical Decision Making Whose Responsibility? The Ethical Environment Leadership and Governance Character, Culture, and Code: Managing Ethics The Workplace of the 21st Century Business, Management and Professions Consumers Supply Chain and Competition Social Responsibility Business and Government Global Ethics Environmental Sustainability

Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility


Responsible Business Making Strategic Decisions to Benefit People, the Planet and Profits Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480608 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480615 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

Author Information Annemieke Roobeek is Professor of Strategy and Transformation Management at Nyenrode Business Universiteit (Netherlands). She was previously Professor of Technology and Economics at Nyenrode and Professor of Complex Issues in strategy and policy at the University of Amsterdam. Jacques de Swart is Professor of Applied Mathematics at Nyenrode Business University and partner within PwC, where he is responsible for the Data Analytics Group. Myrthe van der Plas has a background in communication, financial risk management and econometrics. She teaches courses in statistics and strategic decision making at Nyenrode Business University and New Business School Amsterdam.

This book

<< Highlights the added value to organizations of incorporating triple P (People, Planet and Profits)

considerations into investment decisions << Features case studies from private and public sector, not-for-profit and social enterprise organizations who have benefited from this approach including the Ellen MacArthur Foundation << Includes access to a ready-made business simulator tool for evaluating investment decisions

Description Until recently, profit has been the driving force for most business decisions. However, business leaders must now look more widely at their actions to assess the impact of these on people both inside and outside the organization as well as the environment. Responsible Business provides a seven step framework that eliminates internal bias and can be used to make decisions that increase profits, benefit staff and protect the environment as a whole. This means that personal values, ethics and morals can be aligned with business goals and overall company strategy. Responsible Business will enable business leaders to answer questions including what values should be attached to financial and non-financial aspects of business decisions? How can these values be translated into concrete manageable actions? and which decisions best suit the strategic goals of the organization? Readers will have access to the business simulator tool which removes the complexity, ambiguity and stress of business decisions to allow leaders to manage the competing priorities in their organization and confidently make the best investment decisions for their business. With diverse case studies from organizations who have benefited from this approach, this book is essential reading for everyone needing to evaluate their investment decisions.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

101

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Preface The Strategic Importance of the Business Simulator The Strategic Decision-Making Process Shared Value as a Framework for Shaping the Strategy Innovation as a Catalyst for Responsible Growth Sustainability, Business Models and Decision Making Action Research as a Generator of Financial and Non-Financial Key Outputs Working Towards a Circular Economy Using the Business Simulator Reducing Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Becoming More Energy Efficient Quantifying the Contribution of Sport Creating a Healthy and Productive Working Environment Putting Roof Renovation in a Strategic Context Choosing between Various Waste Collection Systems Attracting Investment at a Social Enterprise Providing Policy Makers with an Objective Decision-Making Process

Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility


Global Business Ethics Responsible Decision Making in an International Context Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473952 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473969 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

Author Information Ronald D Francis is Professor Emeritus in Ethics and Governance at Victoria University, Melbourne. His experiences in ethics extends over decades, and includes a period as Chairman of a national ethics committee, and as a member of a psychologists’ registration board, as well as ten years on a research ethics committee. As a consultant, he has worked with corporations and universities to develop ethics codes and deliver practical business ethics training. Guy Murfey is a psychologist and lawyer, recently retired as the National Practice manager of the Australian Tax Office’s (ATO) Legal Services Branch, where he was responsible for the day to day running of litigation, ensuring that the highest ethical standards of practice were adhered to.

This book

<< Gives the reader the knowledge and confidence to make sound ethical decisions in all business

activities << Provides easily implementable practical guidance in the form of decision-making trees and a model organizational ethics code << Features detailed analysis of international ethical issues such as the conflict between Sharia law and Western principles << Supports the student market with case studies and worked examples of dilemma-solving, and online lecturer resources << Online Resources: Instructor’s manual, lecture slides and appendices.

Description Corporate social responsibility, sustainability and acting ethically are all accepted business aims, but their meaning and implementation in a global context is far less clear-cut. Global Business Ethics cuts through the confusion to provide a coherent basis for ethical decision-making within the complications of the international business landscape. Underpinned by theory and including worked-through examples of ethical dilemmas and their solutions, this textbook will guide the reader beyond theory to real-world business decisions. Practical tools such as decision trees and suggested principles to apply in dilemma situations give readers the skills and confidence to tackle the ethical challenges they face. Global Business Ethics offers a unique working code of ethics provided as a model with guidance to readers for adaptation and implementation. Case studies include: Walmart, Hershey’s, Citibank, Ford, Nike, Johnson & Johnson, Harley-Davidson, The Body Shop and Procter and Gamble. A chapter on the legal aspects of ethics provides guidance on the complex relationship between law and ethics in international business. The final part takes an in-depth look at the practical application of ethics in business life. Covering all the major theories of ethics, including an examination of the role of quantification of ethics, Global Business Ethics demonstrates how their principles can be applied to inform better business decisions. Online supporting resources for this book include instructor’s manual, lecture slides and appendices.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

102

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

The necessity, justification and research into cross cultural business ethics Background to ethics Justification for ethics Cross-cultural issues in business ethics Organizational factors in business ethics Individual factors in business ethics Theoretical issues in business ethics Theoretical approaches Legal aspects of ethics Solving problems Ethical gradualism, culture, quantification and codes Investigating ethical breaches International standards and first principles Ethical codes: ready reference guide (glossary of international codes related to ethics)

Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility


IT Governance An International Guide to Data Security and ISO27001/ISO27002 Edition: 6 Date: 09/28/2015 Price: $95.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474058 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474065 Pages: 360 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Information & Data Management

Author Information Alan Calder is founder-director of IT Governance Ltd, which provides IT governance, compliance, risk management and information security books, trading tools, consultancy and training. Alan consults with companies internationally on matters relating to information security. Steve Watkins is a director at IT Governance, Chair of the ISO/IEC 27001 User Group the UK Chapter of the ISMS International User Group - and contracted Technical Assessor for UKAS, assessing certification bodies offering ISMS/ISO 27001 and ITSMS/ ISO 20000-1 accredited certification. He sits on the UK national standards body’s technical committees RM/1, IST/33 and subcommittee IST/33/1 , and is Chair of IST/33/1 Panel 2, which is responsible for the UK’s contributions to standards including ISO 27006, 27007, 27008 and 27021.

This book

<< Provides best practice advice for organizations to implement a robust IT governance system << Is fully aligned with the latest regulations and standards, including ISO 27001:2013 << Empowers readers to better protect their businesses against external cyber threats and provides a clear risk management framework

<< Clearly explains how organizations can comply with their responsibilities under international information and privacy-related regulations << Covers the latest technological developments and their associated benefits and risks to organizations.

Description Faced with constant and fast-evolving threats to information security and with a growing exposure to cyber risk, managers at all levels and in organizations of all sizes need a robust IT governance system. Now in its sixth edition, the bestselling IT Governance provides guidance for companies looking to protect and enhance their information security management systems and protect themselves against cyber threats. This version has been fully updated to take account of current cyber security and advanced persistent threats and reflects the latest regulatory and technical developments, including the 2013 updates to ISO 27001/ISO 27002. Changes for this edition include: updates in line with the revised ISO 27001 standard and accompanying ISO 27002 code of practice for information security controls; full coverage of changes to data-related regulations in different jurisdictions and advice on compliance; guidance on the options for continual improvement models and control frameworks made possible by the new standard; new developments in cyber risk and mitigation practices; guidance on the new information security risk assessment process and treatment requirements. Including coverage of key international markets, IT Governance is the definitive guide to implementing an effective information security management and governance system.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

103

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Why is information security Compliance necessary? 26 The ISO27001 audit The UK Combined Code, the FRC Risk Guidance and Sarbanes– Oxley ISO27001 Organizing information security Information security policy and scope The risk assessment and Statement of Applicability Mobile devices Human resources security Asset management Media handling Access control User access management System and application access control Cryptography Physical and environmental security Equipment security Operations security Controls against malicious software (malware) Communications management Exchanges of information System acquisition, development and maintenance Development and support processes Supplier relationships Monitoring and information security incident management Business and information security continuity management

Information & Data Management


Cross-Cultural Management in Work Organisations Edition: 3 Date: 02/17/2015 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983675 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984030 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: International Business

Author Information Ray French is a principal lecturer at Portsmouth Business School, UK, where he is the subject leader for Organisation Studies and Human Resources.

104

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Evaluates existing frameworks and examines the inter-cultural competencies required by managers << New to this edition: updated case examples to provide a topical and engaging insight into the

subject << Online resources: instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides and seminar activities for tutors and web links and self-assessment exercises for students

Description Formerly rooted firmly in the domain of anthropology, the topic of culture has shifted over the last thirty-five years to become an important component of business and management as organisations have become global. As companies outsource some of their work to other countries, or as employees migrate to new locations, culture can impact upon things such as attitudes to authority, differences in communication styles and ethics, which will affect working relationships. Cross-Cultural Management in Work Organisations explores the models and meanings of culture and how these play out in the work environment. The essential introduction to cross-cultural social relations in the workplace, Cross-Cultural Management in Work Organisations provides an evaluation of existing frameworks for understanding cross-cultural differences, examines the inter-cultural competencies such as cultural awareness needed by managers and evaluates how both cultural and non-cultural factors influence social processes at work. This fully updated 3rd edition includes new examples to provide topical and engaging insight into the subject. It is suitable for all postgraduate students studying cross-cultural management or cross-cultural awareness. Online supporting resources include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides and seminar activities for tutors and web links and self-assessment exercises for students.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 2 2.1 2.2

Setting the Scene Introduction Culture - Uses and Limitations The Meaning(s) of Culture Models of Culture - Traditional Approaches 2.3 Models of Culture Developments and Debates 3 Cross-Cultural Social Relations in the Workplace 3.1 Culture and Organisation Structure 3.2 Intercultural Communication and Negotiation 3.3 Leadership and Multicultural Teams 3.4 Motivation and Exchange in a Cross-Cultural Context 4 Managing Across or Within Cultures 4.1 Intercultural Competencies, Training and Ethics 4.2 Culture and Human Resource Management 5 Looking to the Future 5.1 Conclusions

International Business


Emerging Markets Strategies for Competing in the Global Value Chain Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474492 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474508 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: International Business

Author Information Professor Robert E. Grosse is Dean of the School of Business Administration at American University of Sharjah, and was 2012-2014 President of the Academy of International Business. He has taught international finance in the MBA programmes at Thunderbird, the University of Miami, the University of Michigan, the Instituto de Empresa (Madrid, Spain), and in many universities in Latin America, and he lectures on executive education programmes around the world. He was founding Director of Standard Bank Groupâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s (South Africa) executive education programme, the Global Leadership Centre, offering leadership development training to 11,000 managers and executives. He is a leading author on international business topics, and his latest book, Can Latin American Firms Compete? was published by Oxford University Press in 2007.

105

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Demonstrates how companies can build their competitiveness by understanding the global value

chain in which they operate << Offers lessons for US, Japanese and European multinational companies as well as emerging market multinationals in how to understand the new business environment << Explains how to position your company to succeed in both emerging markets and in traditional markets, and to take advantage of the benefits of both << Includes case studies from renowned international companies from both sides of emerging markets and online resources as teaching and lecturing aids << Online Resouces: Lecture slides of each chapter

Description The traditional dominance of international markets by companies from the US, Western Europe and Japan can no longer be taken for granted. Emerging market economies, from the powerhouse Chinese economy (set to pass the US in national income by 2020) to dynamic players such as Mexico, South Africa and Indonesia, are rapidly changing the competitive landscape. Companies that can successfully enter these emerging markets may reap rewards and benefits from cost reductions and market opportunities. By understanding their positioning in the global continuum of companies and customers - the global value chain - businesses can build their strategies for better competition, more effective resource allocation, cost reduction, and a heightened awareness of the risks and benefits. Packed with in-depth case studies of multinationals from both sides of emerging markets, including Accenture, Walmart, Google, Nike, Novartis, PetroChina, Embraer, Tata Group and FEMSA, Emerging Markets is essential reading for anyone looking to understand the new competitive landscape and how they can maximise the business opportunities available. Online supporting resources include lecture slides that align with each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Why emerging markets are the place to be 3 The time horizon 4 What is the challenge from emerging markets? 5 Competing in emerging markets 6 Competitive strategies of firms in China: MNEs, SOEs and private firms 7 Emerging market MNEs competing in industrial countries and globally 8 Innovation is key 9 Large, small, family-owned and state-owned companies from emerging markets 10 Conclusions

International Business


International Management Explorations Across Cultures Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2012 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749465285 ISBN Ebook: 9780749465292 Pages: 408 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: International Business

Author Information Elizabeth Christopher holds a PhD from the University of New South Wales. She is both an academic and consultant for crosscultural leadership and management teaching and training. She is Senior Associate of an international leadership training consultancy in the USA, Christopher, Smith and Associates; an Honorary Associate of Macquarie University, Sydney; and a consultant to Open Universities Australia for online teaching and learning. She presents papers at international conferences, is a reviewer for international journals and has published widely in her field.

106

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Provides a unique cross-disciplinary approach to international management studies, relating to a

general theme of international management and cultural diversity << Includes a wealth of online resources for lecturers, including PowerPoint slides and teaching notes to accompany each chapter << Explains and identifies the major management styles that continue to characterise people across regions, nations, communities and organisations, within groups and as individuals << Online Resources: lecture slides and notes for academics.

Description Winner of the Management and Leadership Textbook category at the CMI Management Book of the Year Awards 2013/14, International Management explores management opportunities in encounters across the world between national, organizational, political, professional and social cultures. It is soundly based theoretically and supported with real-life international examples from contemporary events and situations, exploring contemporary and historical material to provide insights for todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s managers who find themselves dealing with diversity and difference. From a historical perspective and a uniquely cross-disciplinary approach, Elizabeth Christopher identifies the major leadership styles that continue to characterise people across regions, nations, communities and organisations, within groups and as individuals. International Management is a practical and comprehensive textbook for successful negotiation in a world rich not only in cultural diversity but also in convergence. It also covers the ethical, moral and environmental ramifications of business today and the corporate leaders who are learning to manage their businesses across nations and continents, not only profitably but in ways that contribute to societies overall through economic, environmental and social action. International Management is an indispensable guide for students and practitioners to key issues of cross-cultural management, suitable to accompany online or private studies, or a teaching unit within professional and university graduate studies of international management. Online supporting resources for this book include lecture slides and notes for academics.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction: The historical background to international leadership 2 Exploring cultural differences 2.1 Industry: cultural differences in industry leadership and the effects of mass media reports 2.2 Patterns of employment: the roles of women and minorities in international business 2.3 Management of public and private sector involvement 3 Exploring international operations and activities 3.1 International networks and alliances, structures and controls, strategies for sustainable business 3.2 Negotiations and decisions: leadership and motivation 4 Exploring technology, learning, language and culture 4.1 Technology, the internet and dealing with change 4.2 Learning: action learning and learning organizations 4.3 Language and culture: translations, interpretations and world EngIishes 5 Exploring management ethics 5.1 The ethics of international business 5.2 Looking to the future

International Business


Essential Leadership Develop Your Leadership Qualities Through Theory and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2017 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477400 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477417 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Leadership

Author Information Esther Cameron has been experimenting with approaches to leadership and change for 25 years. She is a founding Director of Integral Change Consulting Ltd and was previously a lecturer for the University of Bristol. Together with Mike Green, she is co-author of Making Sense of Change Management (also published by Kogan Page). Mike Green is Director of Transitional Space Ltd, and a Visiting Fellow at Henley Business School where he tutors and coaches in Leadership and Change. Mike also delivers bespoke and accredited learning programmes in Change Management to managers and change agents globally.

107

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Contains all the essential and emerging theories and models of leadership to give students and

practitioners a solid and rigorous academic underpinning to their leadership development << Combines this theory with practical guidance based on research in the field and case studies, allowing students and practitioners to unite academic background with real-life situations in order to strengthen themselves as leaders << Online Resources: Through self-assessment tools and reflective exercises, students and practitioners are given the means to discover their personal leadership style, their strengths and weaknesses, as well as how they can adapt and improve to become better leaders

Description Essential Leadership is a practical, accessible book that tackles theory and practice in an integrated and stimulating way. You are encouraged to engage with a wide range of leadership theories and frameworks as well as rate your own leadership skills and qualities, make realistic self-development plans and start to experiment with new or different approaches. Rather than offering one best way forward or becoming overly theoretical, this book is a pragmatic resource for new and experienced leaders looking to navigate the leadership literature and start to fully realize their own leadership potential. Supported by exercises, practical examples, rigorous self-assessments, advice and suggestions, Essential Leadership offers an important guide for those currently working, or planning to work, in a 21st century business environment with all its complexity and uncertainty. It provides an overarching framework of five essential leadership qualities that can be refined and combined as leaders grow, allowing them to be particularly responsive to the business context. The book allows readers to discover and develop their own leadership qualities, and master them through understanding, experimentation, feedback and reflection. Cutting-edge research into Millennial Leadership is also included, as are sections on developing your leadership maturity throughout life, and how leadership culture forms and changes.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Leading in a New Era 2 Leadership Frameworks and Research 2.1 Leadership Traits and Characteristics 2.2 Contingency Theories 2.3 Situational Leadership 2.4 Psychodynamics, Power and the Shadow 2.5 Transformational and Transactional Leadership 2.6 Strategic and Innovation Leadership 2.7 Change Leadership 2.8 Leadership Responsibility and Values 2.9 Leading across Organizations and Networks 2.10 Leadership Health â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Mind, Body and Spirit 3 Learning to Lead in Practice 3.1 What Does 21st-century Leadership Require? 3.2 How do Leaders Learn? 3.3 Levels of Leadership Maturity 4 You and Your Development 4.1 Taking Stock and Self-Rating 4.2 Clarifying your Goals and Intended Outcomes 5 Developing and Using the Five Qualities 5.1 Overview of the Five Qualities Framework 5.2 The Tenacious Implementer Quality 5.3 The Measured Connector

Leadership

5.4 Quality 5.5 The Visionary Motivator Quality 5.6 The Thoughtful Architect Quality 5.7 The Edgy Catalyser Quality 5.8 Becoming Masterful 6 Leadership and Organizations 6.1 Defining Leadership Culture 6.2 Changing Leadership Culture 6.3 The Implications of Millennial Leadership


Myths of Leadership Banish the Misconceptions and Become a Great Leader Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480745 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480752 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

This book

<< Explores over 40 of the most pervasive myths that all leaders and aspiring leaders should be able to

recognize and relate to, from the entertaining to the potentially career damaging << Contains real life examples from a diverse range of global companies and industries to show the reader how to spot myths in action << Is written by the bestselling and award winning author Jo Owen (The Mindset of Success and The Leadership Skills Handbook) << Contains compelling evidence from leadership theory, true business accounts and interviews to help the reader separate fact from fiction and become a better informed leader << Tackles fascinating myths about leadership such as: leaders are born not made, leaders should be the smartest people in the room, leaders should always be in control and the founder should always be the leader.

Description The best leaders are born, not made. The best leaders are always in control. The best leaders are those with the highest IQs. But are they really? The thinking surrounding what makes the greatest leaders is increasingly muddled by stereotypes, snake oil promises and pseudo-science. The best leaders rely on fact, not fads. Myths of Leadership blasts away the fluff and confronts false legends head on. Jo Owen uses the most credible research to analyse each myth, using international business case studies, leadership theory and insightful interviews, to uncover the truth. This is a compelling and practical examination of the most pervasive misconceptions about leadership that will help you elevate your own leadership abilities, better inspire your team and empower your organization by thinking differently. Entertaining but evidence-based, Myths of Leadership throws out the management jargon and skewers over-hyped leadership trends to bring you the best practical tips you need to become a better leader.

Author Information Jo Owen is a best-selling and multi-award winning leadership author, keynote speaker and social entrepreneur. He is a founder of eight charities, including the UK’s largest graduate recruiter Teach First. His books The Mindset of Success, The Leadership Skills Handbook and Management Stripped Bare, all published by Kogan Page, have been translated into eight different languages.

108

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 We Know What Leadership Is 2.1 Myth 1 - We Know What Leadership Is 2.2 Myth 2 - The Perfect Leader 2.3 Myth 3 - Leadership is About Your Rank, Title or Position 2.4 Myth 4 - Managers are Leaders 2.5 Myth 5 - Leaders Know What Leadership Is 2.6 Myth 6 - The Founder is the Leader 2.7 Myth 7 - Leadership is Universal 3 We Know What Leaders Do 3.1 Myth 8 - We Know What Leaders Do - Top Level Leaders 3.2 Myth 9 - We Know What Leaders Do - Your Leadership Journey 3.3 Myth 10 - Leaders Motivate their Followers 3.4 Myth 11 - Leaders Communicate Well 3.5 Myth 12 - Leaders are Decisive 3.6 Myth 13 - Leaders Set Goals and Give Directions 3.7 Myth 14 - Great Leaders Build Great Teams 3.8 Myth 15 - The Leader Knows What’s Going On 4 We Know What Leaders are Like - Character and Traits 4.1 Myth 16 - Leaders are Born, not Bred 4.2 Myth 17 - Leaders are Visionary 4.3 Myth 18 - Leaders are Charismatic and Inspirational 4.4 Myth 19 - Leaders are Honest

Leadership

4.5 Myth 20 - Leaders are Brave 4.6 Myth 21 - The Leader is the Smartest Person in the Room 4.7 Myth 22 - The Best Leaders are Clever 4.8 Myth 23 - Male and Female Leaders are Different 4.9 Myth 24 - Psychopaths Succeed as Leaders 4.10 Myth 25 - Leaders are Reasonable 4.11 Myth 26 - An Effective Leader is a Skilled Leader 5 We Know How Leaders Succeed 5.1 Myth 27 - Leaders Succeed on Merit 5.2 Myth 28 - Leadership is About Survival of the Fittest 5.3 Myth 29 - It’s Not What You Know But Who You Know 5.4 Myth 30 - Power Comes from Your Position 5.5 Myth 31 - Leaders Need Experience 5.6 Myth 32 - The First 90 Days 5.7 Myth 33 - You Have to Manage Before You Can Lead 5.8 Myth 34 - Sporting Heroes Show Us How to Lead 5.9 Myth 35 - You Can Teach Leadership 5.10 Myth 36 - Leaders Know When to Move On 6 We Have a Theory of Leadership 6.1 Myth 37 - The Great Man Theory

of Leadership 6.2 Myth 38 - Servant Leadership 6.3 Myth 39 - The Humble Leader 6.4 Myth 40 - Distributed Leadership 6.5 Myth 41 - Transactional and Transformational Leadership 6.6 Myth 42 - Authentic Leadership 6.7 Myth 43 - Leadership is a Team Sport 6.8 Myth 44 - Leadership and Money - The Dog That Didn’t Bark 6.9 Myth 45 - Leaders are Like Tea Bags 7 We Have Beliefs About Leadership 7.1 Myth 46 - It’s Lonely at the Top 7.2 Myth 47 - The Buck Stops Here 7.3 Myth 48 - It’s Tough at the Top 7.4 Myth 49 - The Leader Makes a Difference 7.5 Myth 50 - The Leader is In Control 7.6 Myth 51 - Leaders are Role Models 7.7 Myth 52 - Leaders are Popular 7.8 Myth 53 - Leaders Deserve Exceptional Rewards 8 Conclusions 8.1 Myths, Fads and Theories 8.2 Leaders Take People Where They Would Not Have Got By Themselves 8.3 I Have the Answer - Myth or Reality?


Professional Services Leadership Handbook How to Lead a Professional Services Firm in a New Age of Competitive Disruption

This book

<< Analyses the current state and future direction of the professional services industry, giving readers a roadmap for change << Identifies common pain points that professionals face and gives focused advice to deal with them << Includes pricing models, checklists and other practical tools that readers can adapt to use in their practice

Description

Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477349 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477356 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Leadership

Professional services firms - from the legal sector to accountancy, consulting and beyond - face increased disruption. Service delivery models are under pressure to adapt to changing client expectations. Technology offers new ways of working with clients, but changes the skills profile required of professionals, and threatens the traditional people-centred business model. The Professional Services Leadership Handbook equips leaders, and aspiring leaders, with tools and insights both to tackle these long-term disruptive trends and to maximise their firm’s profitability today. Leaders of professional services firms find themselves with a daunting, but exciting, range of challenges ahead. Using practical insights drawn from experienced professional services leaders, the Professional Services Leadership Handbook explores new models and working practices to address four components of strategic leadership: clients, business, people and self leadership. It offers clearsighted analysis of common pain points, and provides innovative solutions for dealing with them. This practical guide is designed for everyone involved in leadership decisions, whether that be a practice area, sector group, business function, or even firm-wide leadership role. It will help readers to focus their attention on the activities that will really make a difference to the success of their firm.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Nigel Clark is a non-executive director of the Professional Services Marketing Group. He is also the editor and lead author of the Professional Services Marketing Handbook, published by Kogan Page. Ben Kent is the founder-director of insightled consultancy Meridian West. Ben advises leading professional and financial services firms and provides strategic research, consultancy and training. Alastair Beddow is a director at Meridian West, working with firms of all sizes to develop engaging, differentiated and successful client leading strategies. Adrian Furner is Managing Director of Kommercialize, a practitioner-led advisory firm focused on commercial excellence.

109

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

1 Business Leadership 4.3 Balance – How to Succeed as a 1.1 Vision – How to Create and Leader without Burning Out Implement a Robust Strategic Plan 1.2 Innovation – How to Reap the Benefits of Innovation in your Firm 1.3 Performance – How to Improve the Profitability of Client Engagements 2 Client Leadership 2.1 Understanding – How to Stay Attuned to the Changing Needs of your Clients and Markets 2.2 Connecting – How to Foster a Client-Focused Culture in your Firm 2.3 Sales – How to Improve your Firm’s Client Development Success 3 People Leadership 3.1 “Future-Fit” – How to Foster a Commercial Mind-Set in your Firm 3.2 Motivate and Collaborate – How to Create High-Performing Teams 3.3 Performance – How to Establish a Culture of Continuous Improvement 4 Self Leadership 4.1 Forward Reflection – How to Assess your Leadership Potential 4.2 Capability – How to Develop the Skills, Competencies and Experiences to be a Successful Leader

Leadership


The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills Unlock the Creativity and Innovation in You and Your Team Edition: 3 Date: 09/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481025 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481032 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Paul Sloane is an experienced speaker, course leader and facilitator. A recognized authority on innovation and creative speaking, he speaks and gives workshops to leading corporations around the world. He is also the best-selling author of How to Be a Brilliant Thinker, The Innovative Leader and editor of A Guide to Open Innovation and Crowdsourcing, all published by Kogan Page.

110

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< New to this edition: brand new content on attracting and retaining creative team members, how

random input can improve lateral thinking and important case studies of lateral thinking in action at Uber and AirBnB << Contains several practical activities to boost creativity that leaders can try out immediately, including lateral thinking puzzles, new brainstorming techniques, self evaluation checklists, questioning exercises and action lists << Challenges conventional approaches and describes new ways of thinking to help leaders (and their teams) boost their ability to be creative and generate more innovative ideas << Is the only book on lateral thinking on the market that is specifically aimed at business leaders

Description Lateral thinking can help you transform your ability to generate ideas, unlock the creative potential of your team and make your organization more innovative. With a lively, energetic and practical approach, The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills will teach you dynamic, up-to-date techniques to unleash the creative energies of your people and show you how to put the techniques to work immediately. Lateral thinking can turn your organization around and make you a better leader. In The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills, highly acclaimed author, trainer and presenter Paul Sloane demonstrates how the lateral leader develops the vision, culture and processes that transform a regular business into an innovation hothouse. This book is packed with real-life examples, practical methods and lateral thinking exercises that you can put to work today.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 The Need for Innovation 1.2 Characteristics of the Lateral Leader 1.3 The Innovation Test 1.4 Laying the Foundations for Change 1.5 Making the Vision Real 1.6 Challenge Your Assumptions 1.7 Ask Searching Questions 1.8 Take a Different View 1.9 Combine the Unusual 1.10 Adopt, Adapt, Improve 1.11 Break the Rules 1.12 Analyse First 1.13 Increase the Yield 1.14 Introduce the Random 1.15 Evaluate 1.16 Implement 1.17 Welcome Failure 1.18 Use the Team 1.19 Organizing for Innovation 1.20 Common Mistakes – Great Ways to Crush Creativity 2 21 Great Ways to Innovate 2.1 Summary 2.2 The Lateral Leadership Course

Leadership


The Leadership Skills Handbook 90 Essential Skills You Need to be a Leader Edition: 4 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480332 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480349 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Leadership

Author Information Jo Owen is a best-selling and multi-award winning leadership author, keynote speaker and social entrepreneur. He is a founder of eight charities, including the UK’s largest graduate recruiter Teach First. His books The Mindset of Success, The Leadership Skills Handbook and Management Stripped Bare, all published by Kogan Page, have been translated into eight different languages.

111

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< New to this edition is brand new content on financial skills, political skills and the art of strategy << Includes original research from over 1000 leaders across the world, at all levels and in a variety of

sectors << Features practical advice on over 90 leadership skills plus tips, exercises and examples, arranged in an easy dip-in-and-out style << Allows you to create your own personalized formula for success, based on a combination of what works best for both the individual reader’s career and their company

Description Winner of the CMI Management Book of the Year Awards in the 2012/2013 New Manager category, The Leadership Skills Handbook from best-selling author Jo Owen reveals the essential skills you need to be an effective leader. It shows you what works in practice, not in theory, in crucial areas such as people skills, career skills, mindset skills, organization skills, personal values and behaviours. Each skill is presented in a concise, easy to follow format, with an accompanying framework to help you deploy it in your own life. The skills are about the real challenges real leaders have to master, and as you observe and record real-life examples of skills in action, you will be developing your own unique formula for success in the context that matters to you. Based on research from over a thousand leaders throughout the world at all levels in the public, private and voluntary sectors, it identifies the practical skills to make you even more successful, and offers guidance on all key topics. This completely revised fourth edition of The Leadership Skills Handbook includes brand new content on some of the most challenging skills that successful leaders need to master through three new sections on financial skills (including budgeting, costs, pricing and creating an investment case), political skills (including influencing, negotiating, networking and partnering) and the art of strategy (including strategic models, understanding the customer, marketing, pricing and advertising). This indispensable guidance will boost your confidence, technical abilities and give you the edge on your peers.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Mindset Skills 2.1 Positive Leadership 2.2 Responsibility 2.3 High Aspirations 2.4 Have Courage 2.5 Be Adaptable 2.6 Learn To Be Lucky 2.7 Managing Stress 2.8 Honesty 2.9 Self-Awareness 2.10 Working To Win 3 Career Skills 3.1 Your Leadership Journey: Key Principles 3.2 Managing Your Leadership Journey 3.3 Discover Your Rules of Success 3.4 Build Your Career 3.5 Careers Versus Careering: Avoiding The Death Stars 3.6 How Not To Get Promoted 3.7 Knowing When To Move On 3.8 Coach Yourself To Success 3.9 Running The Leadership Marathon 3.10 Staying Employable 4 People Skills 4.1 Understand Yourself 4.2 Understand Others 4.3 Understand How You Affect Others 4.4 Delegating 4.5 Motivating 4.6 Coaching 4.7 Valuing Others: Cultural Intelligence

Leadership

4.8 Managing Expectations 4.9 Managing Performance 4.10 Managing Professionals 5 Moment Of Truth Skills 5.1 Taking Control 5.2 Conflict Management 5.3 Crisis Management 5.4 Dealing With Bullies 5.5 Negative Feedback 5.6 Fighting Battles 5.7 Power 5.8 Managing Adversity 5.9 Knowing Who To Trust 5.10 Stepping Up 6 Daily Skills 6.1 Reading 6.2 Writing 6.3 Presenting 6.4 Storytelling 6.5 Listening 6.6 Doing Numbers 6.7 Problem Solving 6.8 Time Management 6.9 Managing Stress 6.10 Using Technology 7 Organization Skills 7.1 Making Decisions 7.2 Decision Making In Uncertainty 7.3 Effective Meetings 7.4 Managing Projects 7.5 Setting Goals 7.6 Selling and Persuading 7.7 Managing Change 7.8 Reorganizing 7.9 Selecting Your Team 7.10 Developing Your Team

8 Financial Skills 8.1 Managing Budgets 8.2 Negotiating Budgets 8.3 Reviewing Budgets 8.4 Understand The Nature of Your Costs 8.5 Cutting Costs 8.6 Balanced Scorecard 8.7 Making an Investment Case 8.8 Understand Your Business Drivers 8.9 Manage Pricing 8.10 Decoding CAPM 9 Political Skills 9.1 Influencing People 9.2 Achieving Influence and Power 9.3 Influencing Decisions 9.4 Learning To Say ‘No’ 9.5 The Partnership Principle 9.6 Negotiations 9.7 Networks 9.8 Leading Without Power 9.9 Manage Upwards 9.10 Flattery 10 The Art Of Strategy 10.1 Creating A Vision 10.2 Classical Strategy 10.3 Post-Modern Strategy 10.4 Strategic Discussions 10.5 Competitive Strategy 10.6 Understanding the Customer 10.7 Marketing Strategy 10.8 Pricing Strategy 10.9 Advertising 10.10 The Advertising Brie


Practical Consultancy Ethics Professional Excellence for IT and Management Consultants Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2017 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478537 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478544 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Professional Services

This book

<< Equips IT and management consultants with the skills to recognize ethical pitfalls and to make

defensible choices that safeguard their professional reputations << Sets ethics within the consulting lifecycle and focuses on the practical rather than philosophical aspects of ethical behaviour << Enables consultants to answer the questions: what should I continue to do? What should I start doing? What should I stop doing? << Includes case studies of ethical failures within businesses and IT organizations, drawing out consequences and lessons learnt for consultants << Presents ethical dilemmas that consultants may experience and uses a ‘You Decide’ feature to work through responses

Description Consultants - working for an organization but not as part of it - are particularly subject to commercial pressures from both their employers and their clients, never more so than when consulting on complex and costly IT engagements. A consultant’s reputation is crucial to their professional capital, and they have to be able to make defensible decisions that protect this reputation whilst delivering value for the client. This means acting ethically, responsibly and commercially. Practical Consultancy Ethics approaches the subject of ethics from the individual’s perspective: the management or IT consultant who will need to make ethical decisions within their engagement. With clear-sighted identification of the ethical dilemmas that may arise at each stage of a consultancy project - from defining the problem to fit the solution, through to prioritizing competing stakeholder needs, and having access to confidential client information - and guidance on ethical and risk-reducing actions that consultants can take, the emphasis throughout is on improved decision-making. Enhanced with case studies showcasing real-life ethical pitfalls and featuring consultancy ethical dilemmas to challenge the reader, this is a uniquely practical guide to applying best ethical practice in consulting engagements.

Author Information David Yardley is an IT consultant with a global provider of consulting and technology services. He has over twenty years’ experience working in the IT industry within major organizations and consulting firms. Over the years, his skills and experiences have enabled him to take an objective look at some of the key challenges facing his profession, understand how and why they occur and identify the practical steps needed to help overcome them. His previous books include Successful IT Project Delivery, Careers in Computing and IT and Getting a Top Job in IT.

112

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5

Introduction Ethics and Consulting Basic Ethics Ethics in Practice Ethics within the Consulting Lifecycle 6 Working with Stakeholders 7 Effective Business Communication 8 Building the Foundations for Change 9 Managing Organizational Change 10 Adopting and Sharing Ethical Values 11 Making Ethical Decisions 12 Reducing Ethical Risks

Professional Services


Strategic Tendering for Professional Services Win More, Lose Less Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478513 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478520 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Professional Services

Author Information Matthew Fuller has 25 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience of working in the professional services sector. He has led global business development and marketing teams at Allen & Overy Herbert Smith and currently White & Case. He has run training programmes throughout the world advising partners on proposals best practice. Tim Nightingale is a founding director of Nisus Consulting, providing market research and client insight services to the professional services sector. He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Marketing, a full member of the Market Research Society and a member of the Professional Services Marketing Group (PSMG).

113

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Gives readers best-practice guidance to managing every stage of the proposals and bidding process << Draws on insights from proposals experts and voices from client procurement teams, uncovering their expectations and success criteria << Leads readers through the process with user-friendly charts and diagrams, concise summaries and key actions in every chapter << Analyses the commercial processes and systems that are available to support pitch assembly and reporting, enabling readers to make informed choices << Supports improvement on an individual and business-wide level, with guidance that is scalable to all types and sizes of firm

Description Competitive bidding for work is a long-established aspect of business within the professional services and consulting sector. For many markets, pitching has become a critical element of both attracting and retaining business. Combating clientsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; demands and intense competition, firms that want to win and retain business need business development and marketing teams that are experts in creating compelling proposals. Strategic Tendering for Professional Services offers a masterclass in improving your pitching skills and processes. Drawing on insights from current pitch and proposal professionals and client-side procurement teams, Strategic Tendering for Professional Services provides end-to-end best practice guidance. From the crucial decision of which request-for-proposals (RFPs) to respond to, right through to the all-important face-to-face presentation and post-pitch follow-up, this practical handbook leads readers through all stages of the process on best practice and strategies for success. Packed with practical features to help readers put guidance into practice, Strategic Tendering for Professional Services also supports business-wide improvement with a clear analysis of the processes and systems available to support pitch assembly and reporting. Whether you are a bid and proposal professional looking for extra tools, a business development or marketing manager providing support and expertise to partners, or a professional wanting to improve pitching skills, this book will be key to winning opportunities that will set the firm apart.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction - Why use the Proposals Book? 1.1 To pitch or not to pitch? 1.2 What does the client want? 1.3 Planning to win 1.4 The procurement predicament 1.5 Smart pricing 1.6 Writing to win 1.7 Presenting to win 1.8 Following up and post pitch feedback 1.9 Tools and technology 1.10 There has to be a better way 1.11 Appendix: How to manage a billion dollar pitch

Professional Services


Fundamentals of Risk Management Understanding, Evaluating and Implementing Effective Risk Management Edition: 5 Date: 01/28/2017 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483074 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483081 Pages: 488 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Paul Hopkin is an internationally recognized risk management professional and was previously Technical Director at the Institute of Risk Management (IRM) and held the same role at Airmic for nine years previously. He was previously Director of Risk Management for The Rank Group and prior to that Head of Risk Management at the BBC. He is a Certified Fellow of the IRM. The IRM is the world's leading professional body for risk management, driving excellence in managing risk to ensure organizations are ready for opportunities and threats of the future.

114

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Includes regulatory developments affecting risks to reputation, the business model and strategy,

along with improvements in risk management documentation and statutory risk reporting for assurance and reporting purposes << Explains successful risk management with examples including Colgate Palmolive, Tesco and United Utilities << New to this edition: now completely aligned with the recently updated ISO 31000 standard and COSO ERM Framework Covers developments in enterprise risk management (ERM), loss control and the value of insurance << as a risk management method << New to this edition: Fully updated to reflect the development of risk management standards and practice, in particular business continuity standards.

Description This 5th edition of Fundamentals of Risk Management is a comprehensive introduction to commercial and business risk for students and risk professionals. Providing extensive coverage of the core frameworks of business continuity planning, enterprise risk management and project risk management, this is the definitive guide to dealing with the different types of risk an organization faces. With relevant international case examples including Ericsson, Network Rail and Unilever, the book provides a full analysis of changes in contemporary risk areas including supply chain, cyber risk, risk culture and appetite, improvements in risk management documentation and statutory risk reporting. Now revised to be completely aligned with the recently updated ISO 31000 and COSO ERM Framework, this comprehensive text reflects developments in regulations, reputation risk, loss control and the value of insurance as a risk management method. Also including a thorough overview of international risk management standards and frameworks, strategy and policy, Fundamentals of Risk Management is the definitive text for those beginning or considering a career in risk.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction to Risk Management 1.1 Approaches to Defining Risk 1.2 Impact of Risk on Organizations 1.3 Types of Risks 1.4 Scope of Risk Management 1.5 Principles and Aims of Risk Management 2 Approaches to Risk Management 2.1 Risk Management Standards 2.2 Establishing the Context 2.3 Enterprise Risk Management 2.4 Alternative Approaches 3 Risk Assessment 3.1 Risk Assessment Considerations 3.2 Risk Classification Systems 3.3 Risk Analysis and Evaluation 3.4 Loss Control 3.5 Defining the Upside of Risk 4 Risk Response 4.1 Tolerate, Treat, Transfer and terminate 4.2 Risk Control Techniques 4.3 Insurance and Risk Transfer 4.4 Business Continuity 5 Risk Strategy 5.1 Core Business Processes 5.2 Reputation and the Business Model 5.3 Risk Management Context 5.4 Risk Management Responsibilities 5.5 Control of Selected Hazard Risks 6 Risk Culture 6.1 Risk-Aware Culture 6.2 Importance of Risk Appetite

Risk Management

6.3 Risk Training and Communication 6.4 Risk Practitioner Competencies 7 Risk Governance 7.1 Corporate Governance Model 7.2 Stakeholder Expectations 7.3 Operational Risk Management 7.4 Project Risk Management 7.5 Supply Chain Management 8 Risk Assurance 8.1 The Control Environment 8.2 Risk Assurance Techniques 8.3 Internal Audit Activities 8.4 Reporting on Risk Management


Risk Management Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2013 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468385 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468392 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Risk Management

This book

<< A jargon-free guide on the nature of risk and its relevance to the business model << Encourages the reader to feel confident in adopting a proactive and appropriate treatment of risk << Supported throughout by real-life examples, checklists and case studies for risk measurement and analysis

<< Shows the reader how to reduce the frequency and severity of possible loss events and to put

contingency plans in place to cope with them << Sets out a simple, practical approach to risk management, making it relevant by setting it within the context of an integrated set of activities << Online Resources: Downloadable templates including risk agenda, risk response and risk communication

Description Risk management is not just a topic for risk professionals. Managers and directors at all levels must be equipped with an understanding of risk and the tools and processes required to assess and manage it successfully. Risk Management offers a practical and structured approach while avoiding jargon, theory and many of the complex issues that preoccupy risk management practitioners but have little relevance for non-specialists. Supported by online templates and with real-life examples throughout, this is a straightforward and engaging guide to the practice and the benefits of good risk management. Coverage includes: the nature of risk; the relevance of risk management to the business model; essential elements of the risk management process; different approaches to risk assessment; strategy, tactics, operations and compliance requirements; how to build a risk-aware culture; and the importance of risk governance. Online supporting resources for this book include downloadable templates including risk agenda, risk response and risk communication.

Author Information Paul Hopkin is Technical Director at the Association of Insurance and Risk Managers (AIRMIC) and a Fellow of the Institute of Risk Management. He was previously Director of Risk Management for The Rank Group Plc and prior to that Head of Risk Management at the BBC. He is regular speaker at conferences across the world on a range of risk management topics and author of the classic IRM textbook, Fundamentals of Risk Management, also published by Kogan Page.

115

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Risk agenda 2.1 Relevance of the risk agenda 2.2 Drivers of risk management 2.3 Features of risk management 2.4 Planning the risk agenda 3 Risk assessment 3.1 Relevance of risk assessment 3.2 Analysing potential impact 3.3 Evaluating anticipated consequences 3.4 Utilizing risk assessments 4 Risk response 4.1 Relevance of risk response 4.2 Designing risk controls 4.3 Disaster recovery and business continuity 4.4 efficiency and effectiveness of controls 5 Risk communication 5.1 Relevance of risk communication 5.2 Risk architecture and protocols 5.3 Risk action plan 5.4 Risk reporting 6 Risk governance 6.1 Relevance of risk governance 6.2 Providing risk assurance 6.3 governance of emerging risks 6.4 Risk and stakeholder expectations

Risk Management


Cyber Risk Management Practical Strategies to Protect Your Organization from Cyber Threats Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482596 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482602 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Professor Richard Benham is a global cyber security adviser and Professor in Residence at the National Cyber Skills Centre. He founded the National MBA in Cyber Security at Coventry University, UK, and continues to lecture at the University of Gloucestershire, UK, Staffordshire University, UK and Coventry Business School, UK. Professor Benham acts as an adviser to several large organizations including government, and is a regular international speaker on the subject of cyber security.

116

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Covers recent developments in cloud computing, hacking, blockchain, cryptography, social

engineering, artificial intelligence and the Internet of Things << Includes case studies of real world cyber crimes, such as the attacks on Tesco Bank and Yahoo << Explores the human factors of cyber security by identifying potential problematic behaviours and issues of trust << Explains how to manage insider threat, analyse the financial impact of cybercrime, effectively communicate cyber risks and follow legal and professional standards

Description It is estimated that cyber crime costs trillions of dollars globally every year as businesses become increasingly reliant on technology. 87 per cent of FTSE 100 companies have identified cyber as a principal risk (Deloitte 2017), and it is clear that failure to focus on cyber risk can potentially lead to huge financial losses and disruption of operations, as well as reputational damage. Cyber Risk Management offers vital guidance on evaluating threats and effectively implementing and communicating a cyber security strategy. Crucially, human factors in cyber security are also considered, from employee vetting and managing insider threats, to theories of behaviour and staff training to guard against manipulation. Structured in two parts, the first section looks at technical developments in how businesses use technology, including cloud computing, blockchain, cryptography, artificial intelligence and the Internet of Things. Case studies of real world cyber crimes, such as the attacks on Tesco Bank and Yahoo, help to explore the origin of threats. The second section provides guidance on how to successfully manage an organizationâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s cyber security, covering risk assessments, financial impact analyses, crisis communications plans, international standards and legal responsibilities. Cyber Risk Management is the indispensable guide for those responsible for assessing cyber risks and creating information security strategies.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Developments in Cyber Security 2.1 Use of Information in Personal, Business and Government 2.2 Development of Threats to Information 2.3 Reliance upon Technology and Interconnectedness 2.4 Trusting Technology to Process Information 2.5 How to Trust People in Information Processing Technology 2.6 Artificial Intelligence 3 Managing Cyber Risk 3.1 Cyber Security Strategy 3.2 Marketing Cyber Security 3.3 Managing the Organisation Cyber Posture 3.4 Financial Aspects of Cyber Security 3.5 Cyber Behaviour and Managing Insider Threat 3.6 Corporate Reputation and Crisis Communications 3.7 Digital Security Risk and Audit Management 3.8 Network Defence Management 3.9 International Cyber and Digital Law

Risk Management


Rethinking Reputational Risk How to Manage the Risks that can Ruin Your Business, Your Reputation and You Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477363 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477370 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Anthony Fitzsimmons is Chairman of Reputability LLP and an authority and leading thinker on reputational risk and the propensity of behavioural and organizational risks to cause reputational damage. Derek Atkins BSc PhD MIMMM CEng FCIM FCII Chartered Insurer was a visiting Professor at Cass Business School, London, teaching risk management, reputational risk, and insurance, and a partner in Reputability LLP. He was the co-author of a dozen books.

117

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Explains the underlying behavioural and organizational risks that can leave organisations vulnerable to what can be catastrophic reputational damage << Provides a framework and insights that will help risk managers and boards to focus on and deal with the fundamental behavioural risks that underlie reputational risks << Reveals how and why these risks remain hidden for long periods before emerging unexpectedly, giving readers the incentive to troubleshoot for their organizations well before trouble emerges << Uses a wide variety of real-life case studies - BP, Barclays, AIG, Volkswagen and the NHS - and examples of organizations that have suffered reputation damage to draw out insights

Description A company’s reputation is one of its most valuable assets, and reputational risk is high on the agenda at board level and amongst regulators. Rethinking Reputational Risk explains the hidden factors which can both cause crises and tip an otherwise survivable crisis into a reputational disaster. It uses case studies such as BP’s Deepwater Horizon oil spill, Volkswagen’s emissions rigging scandal, Tesco, AIG, EADS Airbus A380, and Mid-Staffordshire NHS Hospital Trust. Reputations are lost when the perception of an organization is damaged by its behaviour not meeting stakeholder expectations. Rethinking Reputational Risk lays bare the actions, inactions and local ‘states of normality’ that can lead to perception-changing consequences and gives readers the insight to recognize and respond to the risks to their reputations. Through case studies and analysis of failures, this hard-hitting guide also applies lessons drawn from behavioural economics to the behavioural risks that underlie reputation risk. An essential read for risk professionals, business leaders and board members who need to understand and deal with business-critical threats to their reputation, this book presents a new framework that will be invaluable for all involved in safeguarding an organization’s reputation.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

Rethinking Introduction Reputation Basics How Reputations are lost What is Reputational Risk? The hole in Classical Risk Management 1.6 Stakeholder Behaviour 1.7 Risks from failing to communicate and learn 1.8 Character, Culture and Ethos 1.9 Incentives 1.10 Complexity 1.11 Board composition, Skill, Knowledge, Experience and Behaviour 1.12 Risks from Strategy and Change 1.13 Incubation and complacency 1.14 The special role – and Risks – of leaders 2 Case studies 2.1 BP: Texas City Explosion 2.2 BP: Deepwater Horizon 2.3 Tesco PLC 2.4 American International Group (AIG) 2.5 EADS Airbus A380 2.6 Volkswagen 2.7 Mid Staffordshire NHS Foundation Trust (Stafford Hospital) 3 Practicalities 3.1 The way forward 3.2 System Basics – Getting to ‘go’ 3.3 Setting up the Reputational Risk Management System 3.4 Operating the Reputational Risk Management System

Risk Management


The Risk Management Handbook A Practical Guide to Managing the Multiple Dimensions of Risk Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2016 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478827 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478834 Pages: 336 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Dr David Hillson is The Risk Doctor. He is an international risk management consultant, and leads The Risk Doctor Partnership (www.risk-doctor.com). He is recognized globally as an expert practitioner in risk management, and he has made several innovative contributions to the field. He consults, writes and speaks widely on the topic and has received many awards. David Hillson is an active Fellow of the Institute of Risk Management (IRM) where he was named the inaugural â&#x20AC;&#x153;Risk Personality of the Yearâ&#x20AC;? in 2010-11, and he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts (RSA) to contribute to its Risk Commission.

This book

<< Covers all the main areas of risk management in business, including cyber risk and political risk << Includes chapters from leading subject experts, outlining best practice and emerging developments << Highlights the key emerging issues in risk management for business, drawing on cutting-edge thinking

<< Uses a consistent framework to allow readers to easily compare practice in each area and apply insights

Description Risk management is dynamic, with new risks continually being identified and risk management techniques adapting to new challenges. The Risk Management Handbook gives a clear snapshot of the current state of play in the risk management landscape, and a look ahead to the key emerging issues in the field. Drawing together leading voices from the major risk management application areas - from GRC to supply chain risk, operational risk to cyber risk - this edited collection showcases best practice in each discipline and provides a succinct and coherent picture of the field as a whole. Part One surveys these crucial application areas and provides a broad integrative framework for the differing contexts within which risk management is undertaken. Part Two explores emerging issues and techniques, from risk-based thinking to communicating uncertainty. The Risk Management Handbook offers readers knowledge of current best practice and a cuttingedge insight into new developments within risk management. Whether you are a risk professional wanting to stay abreast of your field, a student seeking a broad and up-to-date introduction to risk, or a business leader wanting to get to grips with the risks that face your business, this book will provide expert guidance.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

118

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Introducing risk Multidimensional risk management Enterprise Risk Management Governance, Risk and Compliance Operational Risk Management Project, programme and portfolio risk management Political risk management Reputational risk Supply chain risk management Business Continuity Management Managing stakeholder risk Ethics in risk management Cyber risk management Emerging trends Country risk management Communicating uncertainty Risk-based decision making Risk leadership in complex organizations Resilience Organizational change management and risk Risk culture Social media risk Risk in development aid practice The future of risk management

Risk Management


People Risk Management A Practical Approach to Managing the Human Factors That Could Harm Your Business Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2015 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471354 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471361 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Risk Management

Author Information Dr Keith Blacker has worked in a variety of board and executive roles globally and is the former CFO of a large UK-based health insurance business. He has over 30 years’ experience working within the financial services industry and has consulted to a range of national and international banks and insurance companies on risk management matters. He is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England & Wales and a Fellow of the UK Institute of Internal Auditors. Dr Patrick McConnell has been a senior manager in, and a consultant to, large international corporations, financial institutions and governments on multiple continents for over 35 years. His expertise is in risk management and information technology. He is a Fellow of BCS, the Chartered Institute for IT. He has taught in Australia and Ireland to advanced students and in-house executives. Both authors hold doctorates in Business Administration and have published and spoken widely in industry and academic forums.

119

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Explains the concept of people risk and enables the reader to consider it within the context of their own organization, flagging up the human factors that may not have been considered << Encourages managers and practitioners to take a more focused approach to people management << Offers practical tools, solutions and insights into how to implement an effective people risk management framework within your organization << Demonstrates how better people risk management can add measurable value to a business

Description People Risk Management provides unique depth to a topic that has garnered intense interest in recent years. Based on the latest thinking in corporate governance, behavioural economics, human resources and operational risk, people risk can be defined as the risk that people do not follow the organization’s procedures, practices and/or rules, thus deviating from expected behaviour in a way that could damage the business’s performance and reputation. From fraud to bad business decisions, illegal activity to lax corporate governance, people risk - often called conduct risk - presents a growing challenge in today’s complex, dispersed business organizations. Framed by corporate events and challenges and including case studies from the LIBOR rate scandal, the BP oil spill, Lehman Brothers, Royal Bank of Scotland and Enron, People Risk Management provides best-practice guidance to managing risks associated with the behaviour of both employees and those outside a company. It offers practical tools, real-world examples, solutions and insights into how to implement an effective people risk management framework within an organization.

Table of Contents 1 2

People Risk in context Definition and models of People Risk 3 The human dimension of People Risk 4 Case studies in People Risk 5 People Risk Management Framework 6 People Risk in the boardroom 7 The influence of organizational culture 8 Roles and responsibilities 9 Improving decision-making 10 Personal responsibility 11 Conclusion

Risk Management


Strategic Decision Making A Discovery-led Approach to Critical Choices in Turbulent Times Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472603 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472610 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject:

Author Information Dr Simon Haslam is a Chartered Director, strategy consultant and strategy programme lead at the Institute of Directors. He is a Visiting Fellow at Durham University Business School and co-owns the research and consulting firm FMR Research. He consults internationally to public,private and third sector organisations. Dr Ben Shenoy helps organizations apply behavioural insights to a variety of business issues, through executive education, speaking engagements and applied research. He is a Visiting Professor at The London School of Economics and Director of the Business Insights Lab at the University of Surrey.

120

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Explores what senior managers can do to make better strategic decisions in a business environment of uncertainty, ambiguity and confusion << Shows how to test, evaluate and refine strategic interventions before cascading throughout the whole organization << Provides guidance on how to combat decision-making bias and organizational inertia << Features examples from Ryanair, Netflix, HMV, Komatsu, Caterpillar, Ericsonn, Tesco and McDonalds

Description Making strategic decisions is a fundamental skill for leaders and managers. However, in a business environment that is in a constant state of change, making strategic decisions has never been more difficult. Strategic Decision Making addresses this challenge by providing a framework that can be used to make sound decisions in an uncertain world. Structured around the core concepts of framing, experimenting and scaling, this book will ensure that efforts are focused where the need is greatest, that interventions are tested, evaluated and revised if necessary and that successful initiatives are effectively rolled out across the business. Packed with real world examples and backed up by academic research, Strategic Decision Making will allow todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leaders and the leaders of tomorrow to make successful and defensible business choices. It shows how to: avoid decision-making bias; overcome organizational inertia; manage the difficulties of rigid organizational structures and avoid being side tracked by outdated or irrelevant experience. Essential reading for business practitioners and management students alike, this comprehensive guide provides a robust approach to achieving strategic success.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction - Why Strategic Decision Making needs to become Discovery-led 2 The World is Changing, but we donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t always see it 3 Organizational Inertia - Why Enterprises find it Difficult to Change 4 Top-down Decisions 5 Middle-Out Decisions 6 Discovery-Led Decision Making 7 Mode I - Framing 8 Mode II - Experimenting 9 Mode III - Scaling 10 Implications for Organisations 11 The Force that is You

Strategy


Radical Business Model Transformation Gaining the Competitive Edge in a Disruptive World Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480455 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480462 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Strategy

Author Information Dr Carsten Linz is an entrepreneurial leader and business transformation expert with 20 years’ experience. He has successfully started and developed several new businesses and is currently Business Development Officer at SAP SE. Prof. Dr. Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor of Strategic Management and Director of the Institute of Management at the University of St. Gallen. His main research interest is corporate strategy. Prof. Dr. Alexander Zimmermann is an Assistant Professor of Organization and Strategic Management and the Project Manager for the Center for Organizational Excellence (CORE) at the University of St. Gallen.

121

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This book

<< Explains why making small innovations is not a business model gamechanger - businesses need to

consider more radical transformations << Sets out the options facing companies looking to reassess their business model. << Provides practical insights of organizations that have made a radical shift including: Daimler, SAP, Xerox, Atlas Copco, Infosys and Netflix. << Includes a manual for organizations wanting to take up the leadership challenge and navigate their own business transformation.

Description Many companies are relying on a business model that is fundamentally suited to a different era. Now, organizations are under pressure from new trends such as digitization and servitization. Trying to adapt to a new environment, they risk relying on improvements that only scratch the surface of developing a radically different value proposition. Based on rigorous research into companies that have successfully and radically redesigned their business models, Radical Business Model Transformation shows why they made the leap, what they had to do to achieve it and how it has transformed the potential for their organizations. This book is a step-by-step guide for leaders who want to seize the opportunity of new business models and gain a competitive advantage. It explains how to assess the status quo, identify the value of future business models and develop a transformation path. It also provides advice on how to involve both the leadership team and all other employees in order to implement successful business model transformation. Illustrative case studies of organizations that have crossed the line to a more transformative business range from exponential-growth companies like Netflix and global players like Xerox, SAP and Daimler to mid-sized hidden champions like Knorr-Bremse and LEGIC. Radical Business Model Transformation is essential reading for business leaders, transformation experts and MBA students interested in ensuring that their business model is future-proof and can withstand the new proliferation of innovations that are set to transform the business landscape.

Table of Contents 1

Why Business Models Need To Radically Shift 1.1 Taking Consequences From Digitization And Servitization 1.2 Assessing Your Current Business Model 1.3 Moving From Small Tweaks To Radical Shifts 2 How To Lead A Radical Shift Of Your Business Model 2.1 Shifting The Level Of Inclusiveness 2.2 Shifting The Level Of Customization 2.3 Sequenzing Multiple Radical Shifts 3 Learning From Successful Transformational Organizations 3.1 Case Studies Of Companies Shifting Radically The Level Of Inclusiveness 3.2 Case Studies Of Companies Shifting Radically The Level Of Customization 3.3 Case Studies Of Companies That Sequence Multiple Radical Shifts 4 How To Move Forward 4.1 Mastering The Transformational Leadership Challenge 4.2 Navigating With The Business Model Transformation Manual

Strategy


HR, L&D, Coaching & CIPD Innovation and Best Practice in Change Management Coaching Employee Engagement Employment Law & Relations Human Resource Management Learning & Development Organization Development Performance Management Project Management Recruitment Reward Management Talent Management

122

www.koganpage.com


Making Sense of Change Management A Complete Guide to the Models, Tools and Techniques of Organizational Change Edition: 4 Date: 03/28/2015 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472580 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472597 Pages: 464 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Change Management

Author Information Esther Cameron is a founding director of Integral Change Consulting Ltd, where she specializes in complex organizational change projects. Previously a lecturer in Change Management for the University of Bristol, she has been collecting and experimenting with approaches to change across different levels of organizational systems around the world for over 25 years. Mike Green is director of Transitional Space Ltd, a company dedicated to individual, team and organizational development across the public, private and not-for-profit sectors. He is a Visiting Fellow at Henley Business School, where he tutors and coaches in leadership and change. Mike also delivers bespoke and accredited learning programmes in change management to senior managers and change agents around the world.

123

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides critical knowledge for line managers facing change and project managers who want to

know how change works << Introduces two new chapters on Project-Led Change and Culture-Led Change to guide managers through this novel and valuable territory << Stimulates readers to broaden their understanding of different cultural approaches through case studies and examples << Online resources: lecture slides

Description The definitive, bestselling text in the field of change management, Making Sense of Change Management provides a thorough overview of the subject for both students and professionals. Along with explaining the theory of change management, it comprehensively covers the models, tools, and techniques of successful change management so organizations can adapt to tough market conditions and succeed by changing their strategies, structures, boundaries, mindsets, leadership behaviours and of course their expectations of the people who work within them. This completely revised and updated 4th edition of Making Sense of Change Management includes more international examples and case studies, emerging new thinking and practice in the area of cultural change and a new chapter on the interrelationship with project management (PM) and change management. It also covers complexity models, agile approaches, and stakeholder management along with cultural sensitivity and what to do when cultures collide. Making Sense of Change Management remains essential reading for anyone who is currently part of, or leading, a change initiative. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, making this an ideal textbook for MBA or graduate students focusing on leading or managing change.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 The underpinning theory 2.1 Individual change 2.2 Team change 2.3 Organizational change 2.4 Leading change 2.5 The change agent 3 The applications 3.1 Restructuring 3.2 Mergers and acquisitions 3.3 Culture and change 3.4 Project- and Programme-led change 4 Emerging inquiries 4.1 Complex change 4.2 Leading change in uncertain times

Change Management


Managing Change

This book

A Critical Perspective

<< Offers a critical perspective and challenges change management assumptions to facilitate a deeper

Edition: 2 Date: 08/13/2010 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982418 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984528 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Change Management

Description

understanding and appreciation of the subject << New to this edition: new chapters on perspectives, power and politics, ethics, agents and agency, HRM and evaluation; a revised structure to reflect strategic, group and individual change; a revised final chapter on evaluating the practice and theory of change management; and an appendix of twenty popular change management techniques << Online resources: annotated web links for students, an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual complete with commentary on questions and cases in the book, lecture slides and additional case studies for tutors

Managing Change: A Critical Perspective explores how and why change occurs in organizations and how the change process can be managed effectively. Complete with an appendix featuring twenty popular change management techniques, it is an ideal core textbook for change modules on HR and business degree programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. It offers a critical perspective, challenging the main assumptions and ensuring that the complexity of the subject is understood and appreciated. This fully updated 2nd edition of Managing Change: A Critical Perspective includes new chapters on perspectives, power and politics, ethics, agents and agency, HRM and evaluation. Its revised structure reflects strategic, group and individual change, and a revised final chapter evaluates the practice and theory of change management. Online supporting resources include annotated weblinks for students, an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual complete with commentary on questions and cases in the book and lecture slides and additional case studies for tutors.

Author Information Mark Hughes is a senior lecturer in organisational behaviour at Brighton Business School, UK.

124

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 The Managing Change Conundrums 1.2 Organisational Change Classifications 1.3 History and Organisational Change 1.4 The Role of Paradigms and Perspectives 2 External and Internal Change Context 2.1 Why Organisations Change 2.2 Organisational Design and Change 2.3 Strategic Level Change 2.4 Group and Team Level Change 2.5 Individual Level Change 3 Managing Change 3.1 The Leadership of Change 3.2 Change Communications 3.3 Resistance to Change 3.4 Cultural Change 3.5 Organisational Learning 4 Developments in Managing Change 4.1 Power, Politics and Organisational Change 4.2 Ethics and Managing Change 4.3 Change Agents and Agency 4.4 HRM and Managing Change 4.5 Technological Change 5 Conclusions 5.1 Evaluating Managing Change 6 Appendix - The Organisational Change Field Guide

Change Management


Organizational Change Explained Case Studies on Transformational Change in Organizations

This book

<< Uses real-world examples to show how issues and challenges have been overcome in organizations << Covers a wide range of organizational perspectives with examples from GlaxoSmithKline, the NHS and other large and small companies << Includes reflective questions for critically assessing and learning from the case studies

Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475475 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475482 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Change Management

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Sarah Coleman is director of Business Evolution. Her clients include multinationals and established medium-sized enterprises across government and industry sectors including telecoms, professional and financial services, engineering and healthcare. Sarah is a Fellow and former Trustee of the Association for Project Management (APM) and Visiting Fellow at Cranfield and Lincoln universities. Bob Thomas is a highly experienced programme, portfolio, PMO delivery manager with a consulting and delivery background in airports, retail, government (central and local), insurance, logistics, health, financial services, transportation and management consulting. Bob also established Change Practitioner Groups for the APM.

125

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

The best way to learn how to navigate change successfully is to look at practical examples of change management programmes. Organizational Change Explained shares stories and insights from experienced change practitioners so professionals can reflect on their own work, respond critically to what others have done, and take away new tools and techniques to apply to their own change management practice. The book includes a range of cases from different sectors and countries including GlaxoSmithKline and the NHS to offer insights no matter the scale of the change management programme. Organized around central themes such as shaping and design, change leadership, and communication and engagement, Organizational Change Explained presents each case alongside an introduction, conclusion, list of key learning points, questions for reflection and sources of further reading. The book is invaluable to anyone tasked with leading or managing change within their teams, projects, departments or divisions, whether at local level or across geographic locations, countries and cultures.

1

The Reality of Organizational Change 1.1 Organizational development in the NHS 1.2 Sparking change 1.3 Changing the way we change 1.4 Shaping and designing change 1.5 Brain, behaviour and being the same or different 1.6 Working with resistance to change 1.7 Creating the resilient organization 1.8 Leading change 1.9 Employee communication and engagement during change 1.10 Project Carpe Diem 1.11 Operational readiness for change 1.12 Managing change in Asia and the West 1.13 Developing change capacity and capability in organizations 1.14 Risk and organizational change 1.15 Embedding and sustaining change 1.16 Change innovation 2 The Future of Organizational Change 2.1 The future of change and management 2.2 Leading the agile organization 2.3 The shift from complicated to complex 2.4 The future and manufacturing 2.5 The future and local government 2.6 The future of healthcare

Change Management


Neuroscience for Organizational Change An Evidence-based Practical Guide to Managing Change Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2016 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474881 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474898 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Change Management

Author Information Hilary Scarlett is a consultant, writer, speaker and director of Scarlett & Grey. Her work on the development of people-focused change management programmes, coaching and employee engagement has spanned Europe, the US and Asia. She is currently conducting research on applied neuroscience with four major organizations in the private and public sectors. Hilary also has been working with Professor Walsh of University College London to apply cognitive neuroscience to practical management tools.

126

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Offers practical science-based advice on engaging and supporting employees during times of

change << Includes examples of what has actually worked in real organizations including Lloyds Banking Group, the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills, Orbit Housing Group and BAE Systems << Provides the evidence that some of what is already being done in organizations is really getting results, and so helps the HR practitioner to prove their worth << Includes questions and check-lists at the end of each chapter to help the reader to find their own solutions for creating a more engaged mindset in their organization during change, based on a better understanding of the brain

Description Understanding how employeesâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; brains work has lasting impact in terms of meeting business objectives and becoming an employer of choice. Neuroscience for Organizational Change helps businesses understand why employees find organizational change difficult and what they need from work relationships to perform at their best. Providing practical examples of how to apply these insights, the book enables organizations to improve performance as well as support the mental and emotional wellbeing of employees. Drawing on examples from big-name organizations such as Lloyds Banking Group, Department for Business, Innovation and Skills, Orbit Housing Group and BAE Systems, Neuroscience for Organizational Change looks at the need for social connection at work, the essential role that leaders and managers play, how best to manage emotions and reduce bias to avoid making flawed decisions, and why we need communication, involvement and storytelling to help us through change. It also sets out a new science-based planning tool, SPACES, to enhance motivation.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3

The Challenge Introduction to Neuroscience Brain Facts Why Our Brains Donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t Like Organizational Change 2 What Can We Do? 2.1 Performing at Our Best During Change 2.2 Our Social Brains 2.3 Managing Emotions During Change 2.4 Decision-Making and Bias 2.5 Communication, Involvement and the Role of Storytelling 2.6 Planning Change With the Brain in Mind 2.7 Applying Neuroscience in the Organization

Change Management


Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change The theory and practice of sustaining change through people

This book

<< Will equip students and practitioners with the practical skills to manage the emotional aspects of change, vital in todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s rapidly changing organizations. << Outlines the benefits of leading and managing the human dynamics of change which include a more committed workforce and more sustainable operational performance. << Includes global case studies to help apply the theory to practice, including Kodak, Nissan, Yahoo, Aegon Asset Management and BankCo.

Description

Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2016 Price: $55.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474195 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474201 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Change Management

Tremendous forces for change are radically reshaping the world of work. Disruptive innovations, radical thinking, new business models and resource scarcity are impacting every sector. Although the scale of expected change is not unprecedented, what is unique is the pervasive nature of the change and its accelerating pace which people in organizations have to cope with. Structures, systems, processes and strategies are relatively simple to understand and even fix. People, however, are more complex. Change can have a different impact on each of them, all of which can cause different attitudes and reactions. Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change is written for leaders with the key responsibility of managing people through transitions. Managing and Leading People through Organizational Change provides a critical analysis of change and transformation in organizations from a theoretical and practical perspective. It addresses the individual, team and organizational issues of leading and managing people before, during and after change, using case studies and interviews with people from organizations in different sectors across the globe. This book demonstrates how theory can be applied in practice through practical examples and recommendations, focusing on the importance of understanding the impact of the nature of change on individuals and engaging them collaboratively throughout the transformation journey.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Dr Julie Hodges is an academic, author and consultant. She is currently Director of MBA programmes at Durham University Business School and a lecturer and researcher into change in organizations. Julie has a PhD in the impact of change on levels of stress among middle managers in organizations. Before entering the academic world Julie worked as a management consultant for over 20 years in several profit and non-profit organizations, including the British Council, Vertex, PwC and RBS. Julie is a founding Director of the Leading Well - a social enterprise for developing leaders in the public and third sectors.

127

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

1

UNDERSTANDING ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE 1.1 The context and nature of change 2 INDIVIDUAL RESPONSES TO CHANGE 2.1 The impact of organizational change on emotions 2.2 Individual sense-making processes 3 THE ROLES OF LEADERS AND MANAGERS 3.1 Leading people through change 3.2 Fostering commitment and ownership 3.3 Engaging people through dialogue 3.4 Understanding and carrying out culture change 4 BUILDING CAPABILITIES 4.1 The role of HR in transitioning people through change 4.2 Building capabilities for change 5 ETHICS, SUSTAINABILITY AND CHANGE 5.1 Sustaining change

Change Management


Leading Cultural Change The Theory and Practice of Successful Organizational Transformation Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2015 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473037 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473044 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Change Management

Author Information Professor James McCalman, formerly MD of Sothebyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Institute of Art, is currently the Head of the Centre for Strategy and Leadership at the University of Portsmouth. He has previously enjoyed roles as MBA Director at the Universities of Glasgow and Strathclyde as well as at Ashridge Business School, before moving to senior leadership roles in the private and charitable sectors. Dr David Potter is the founder of The Cultural Change Company, which specializes in enabling cultural change interventions. He is a qualified NLP Practitioner and holds both an MBA and a PhD specialising in strategy design and cultural change dynamics. He frequently teaches and presents to students on MBA and Executive courses on the topic of cultural change, including at Adam Smith Business School University of Glasgow, University of St Andrews Business School, Glasgow Caledonian University and Glasgow University Business School.

128

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Helps readers to lead a successful cultural change intervention within their organizations << Guides the reader towards achieving sustained competitive advantage through organizational

change << Provides a practical framework for the implementation and evaluation of cultural change << Enables managers to communicate cultural change successfully to their stakeholders << Includes a longitudinal case study of Cordia, a public-sector organization transitioning into an LLP, to enhance learning and understanding

Description With coverage of the major theories and concepts alongside diagnostic tools and a practical framework for implementation, Leading Cultural Change will help the reader analyse and diagnose their current organizational culture, become aware of the key challenges and how to overcome them and learn how to adapt their leadership style, ensuring they are fit to lead a cultural change programme. Taking in core topics such as change context, language and dialogue as a key cultural process and the change team process, it uses a longitudinal case study of Cordia, a public sector organization transitioning into an LLP, to enhance learning and understanding. Leading Cultural Change is a unique text, rooted in behavioural sciences, which explores the topic as an organizational necessity to achieving sustained competitive advantage.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Leading cultural change. Theoretical perspectives 2.1 Cultural change management 2.2 Organization development 2.3 Cultural change literature 2.4 A theory of culture 2.5 Cultural management as a form of control 2.6 Leadership as a cultural variable 2.7 Leadership and the management of meaning 2.8 Language as a cultural process 2.9 Ethnography as a tool for cultural change 3 Cultural and strategic tensions. When theory meets practice 3.1 The client and its problem 3.2 Change technologies 3.3 What did the people think? 3.4 Reflective learning 3.5 Closing thoughts

Change Management


The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook Essential Guidance to the Change Management Body of Knowledge Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2014 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473075 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473082 Pages: 632 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Change Management

Author Information APMG is a leading global Examination Institute and the Official Accreditor of the UK Government’s Cabinet Office and the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS). They accredit professional training and consulting organizations and manage certification schemes for knowledge-based workers. Richard Smith (Editor) is a specialist in organizational development-related people development issues. He works with clients as diverse as Unilever, Nestle, Mars and Harvard Business School. He is the Chief Examiner for APMG Change Management products and lead author of the first global Change Management Body of Knowledge (CMBoK) for the Change Management Institute. He is also a Fellow of the CIPD.

This book

<< Is the official guide for the first ever Change Management Body of Knowledge, created by Change

Management Institute and APMG << Provides a strong base level knowledge for continuing professional development across the discipline << Enables change managers to effectively advise and coach senior colleagues and those sponsoring or leading change initiatives

Description The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook is designed to help practitioners, employers and academics define and practise change management successfully and develop change management maturity within their organization. A single-volume learning resource covering the range of knowledge required, it includes chapters from established thought leaders on topics ranging from benefits management, stakeholder strategy, facilitation, change readiness, project management and education and learning support. Endorsed by the Change Management Institute and the official guide to the CMI Body of Knowledge, The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook covers the whole process from planning to implementation, offering practical tools, techniques and models to effectively support any change initiative. The editors of The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook - Richard Smith, David King, Ranjit Sidhu and Dan Skelsey - are all experienced international consultants and trainers in change management. All four editors worked on behalf of the Change Management Institute to co-author the first global change management body of knowledge, The Effective Change Manager, and are members of the APMG International examination panel for change management.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

129

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

A change management perspective – Richard Smith Defining change – Robert Cole, David King and Rod Sowden Managing benefits: Ensuring change delivers value – Stephen Jenner Stakeholder strategy – Patrick Mayfield Communication and engagement – Ranjit Sidhu Change impact – Caroline Perkins Change readiness, planning and measurement – Nicola Busby Project management: Change initiatives, projects and programmes – Ira Blake Education and learning support – Richard Smith Facilitation – Dan Skelsey Sustaining change – Helen Campbell Personal and professional management – Ray Wicks Organizational considerations – Tim Cole, Martin Lunn, Una McGarvie and Eric Rouhof

Change Management


Leading Change How Successful Leaders Approach Change Management Edition: 1 Date: 12/28/2014 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471682 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471699 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Change Management

Author Information OD expert and executive coach, Paul Lawrence is Co-director of the Centre for Systemic Change, a change management company based in Sydney. Paul was previously a Global Programme Director for OD and Learning at BP.

130

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides an evidence-based approach offering a viable and unique organizational change

alternative to rigid, linear ‘top down’ methods, and supported by both academic research and original case studies for practitioners to use << Provides practical guidance, backed by the author’s own experiences of global change programmes (notably with BP), to frame pragmatic ways leaders can engage with a complex adaptive system to bring about successful organizational change << Moves away from looking at why so many change programmes fail and explores what we can learn from those that are successful

Description It is often claimed that 70% of organizational change efforts fail, despite the popularity of linear change models. However these linear approaches to change are often based on the premise that change is predictable and straightforward, when actually change is complex, with the ‘human’ element often changing the functioning of the organizational system as a whole. Leading Change provides the practical framework that allows leaders to actively engage with a complex adaptive system to bring about successful organizational change. Supported by academic research, and grounded with a range of examples and cases, the book offers a genuine, viable alternative to existing approaches.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 The emerging change model 2 Reflective dialogue in action 2.1 Dialogue and communication 2.2 Listening 2.3 Voicing 2.4 Reflection 3 Perspective, purpose and identity 3.1 The evolution of perspective 3.2 The evolution of purpose 3.3 The evolution of identity 4 Power and politics 4.1 Power and politics 5 Themes 5.1 Authenticity 5.2 Resistance to change 5.3 Systemic thinking 6 Application 6.1 Case study: The emerging change model in practice 6.2 Getting started 6.3 Leadership 6.4 Building capability 6.5 The role of coaching

Change Management


Excellence in Coaching The Industry Guide Edition: 3 Date: 12/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474454 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474461 Pages: 360 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Coaching

Author Information Jonathan Passmore is a professor of psychology with an international reputation, and the managing director of a consulting company. He speaks at conferences around the world and is the editor of Kogan Page’s prestigious Association for Coaching book series. He is also the co-author of Top Business Psychology Models and Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management, also published by Kogan Page.

131

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Covers all the fundamental areas in coaching to enable best practice << Shows how to use a diverse range of coaching models in the modern workplace to deal with issues

such as stress and motivation << Allows managers and coaches to effectively evaluate coaching programmes and measure their ROI << Takes a practical approach on how to apply the theory and models to the client’s needs, such as managing stress, working across cultures, and focusing on solutions << Features a new chapter on team coaching and contributions from some of the biggest names in the profession, including Carol Wilson, Peter Hawkins and Professor Sir Cary Cooper

Description Published with the Association for Coaching, Excellence in Coaching presents cutting-edge thinking in the field of workplace coaching. This comprehensive industry guide enables coaches to achieve personal excellence in a rapidly evolving profession through a collection of best-practice material from some of the biggest names in the profession including Sir John Whitmore, Philippe Rosinski and Peter Hawkins. Part One covers the business of coaching, telling practitioners everything they need to know about setting up a coaching practice, defining the coaching requirements, building a business case and embedding best practice in workplace coaching. Part Two covers models and approaches including NLP, appreciative coaching, cognitive behavioural coaching and solution-focused coaching. Part Three considers issues around coaching including evaluating coaching programmes, ethics, and coaching supervision. This latest edition has been updated to reflect recent developments in the industry and includes a new chapter on team coaching. Excellence in Coaching is essential reading for practising coaches as well as for anyone studying coaching through the ILM, coaching training, a Master’s course, or more generally as part of a psychology or business degree.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3

The Business of Coaching What is Coaching? Coaching Within Organizations Leveraging the Coaching Investment 1.4 Setting Up and Running Your Coaching Practice 2 Coaching Models and Approaches 2.1 Behavioural Coaching – the GROW Model 2.2 Solution-Focused Coaching 2.3 Cognitive Behavioural Coaching 2.4 NLP Coaching 2.5 Transpersonal Coaching 2.6 Appreciative Coaching: Pathway to Flourishing 2.7 Integrative Coaching 3 Coaching Issues 3.1 Intercultural Coaching 3.2 Coaching and Stress 3.3 Coaching Ethics: Integrity in the Moment of Choice 3.4 Coaching Supervision 3.5 Evaluating Coaching Programmes 3.6 Coach Accreditation 3.7 Team Coaching

Coaching


50 Top Tools for Coaching A Complete Toolkit for Developing and Empowering People Edition: 4 Date: 03/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482329 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482336 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Author Information Gillian Jones is Managing Director of Emerge, a development consultancy that specializes in leadership, organizational development and executive coaching. She is a champion for women’s development, delivering RISE, the popular empowering women’s programme, both in Europe and the Middle East. Ro Gorell is an independent talent management and change consultant and business coach. She has particular expertise in group coaching and enhancing company culture through coaching. She is the author of Group Coaching and the co-author with Gillian Jones of How to Create a Coaching Culture, also published by Kogan Page.

132

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides over 50 easy-to-use coaching templates, checklists, hints and tips on applying the tools

with the best effect for clients << New to this edition: addresses the rising hot topics in the field of coaching, including coaching women into leadership, coaching in the digital age and coaching for change in a VUCA (volatile, uncertain, complex and ambiguous) world << Online resources: interactive templates, reference tables and web links to help put the tools into practice

Description A complete resource for both in-house and external coaches, 50 Top Tools for Coaching presents the techniques required for every coaching situation. Full of exercises, models, checklists and templates, it covers how to assess the needs of clients, select the right tool for the circumstance and deliver effective coaching with confidence. The book focuses on every stage of the coaching process, from setting up and managing the coaching relationship, understanding and resolving conflict, developing client confidence and performance to enhancing leadership styles and planning for the future. Supporting hints and tips are found throughout explaining how these tools help coaches be more successful. This fully revised 4th edition includes new tools for topical issues such as development coaching for women and coaching in times of organizational change. Online supporting resources include additional tools, interactive templates and videos of the tools in action demonstrated by the authors.

Table of Contents 1

Setting up the Coaching Relationship 1.1 The Coaching Process 1.2 Coaching Assessment Form 1.3 Coaching Brief and Contract Form 1.4 Coaching Self-Assessment Questionnaire 1.5 Checklist for Establishing Contract Rules 1.6 Action Plan 1.7 Coaching Evaluation 2 Foundation Tools 2.1 Listening Model 2.2 Questioning Skills and Techniques 2.3 Feedback Techniques and Examples 2.4 The ORACLE Model 2.5 Coffee-Break Coaching 2.6 Self-Coaching 3 Goal Setting 3.1 Creating Powerful Intentions 3.2 Goal Setting 3.3 Breaking Down Previous Goals 3.4 Spatial Action Planning 3.5 Goal Visualization 3.6 Goal Visualization Script 4 Problem Resolution 4.1 Logical Levels 4.2 Positive Problem Solving (Reframing) 4.3 Problem Mapping 5 Values and Beliefs 5.1 Internal Conflict Negotiation 5.2 Helping Individuals Reduce Stress

Coaching

5.3 Changing Negative Thought Patterns 5.4 Determining Values 5.5 Prioritizing Values 5.6 Belief Assessment 6 Confidence Strategies 6.1 Reprogramming Negative Language 6.2 Personal Centre of Excellence 7 Working Effectively with Others 7.1 Behavioural Conflict Resolution 7.2 Analysing and Resolving Conflict 7.3 360-Degree Perspective 8 Personal Impact and Influence 8.1 Communication Skills Audit and Skills Inventory 8.2 360-Degree Feedback 9 Enhancing Leadership Style 9.1 Team Climate Inventory 9.2 Improving the Delegation Process 9.3 Planning to Delegate 9.4 Prioritizing – Paired Comparison 9.5 Prioritizing – ImportanceUrgency Grid 10 Planning for the Future 10.1 Life Events 10.2 The Discovery Model 10.3 Ideal Work Designer 10.4 Managing My Career 11 Developing Women 11.1 Identifying Super Powers Through Strengths-based Portraits 11.2 Reflected Strengths Portrait Exercise

11.3 Improving Confidence by Changing Beliefs 11.4 Questions to Change Limiting Beliefs 11.5 Part 2 11.6 Confidence Building 11.7 Emotional Intelligence Through Modelling 11.8 Managing Upwards 12 Coaching During Change 12.1 Creating a Group Coaching Environment 12.2 Creating Tools for Group Coaching 12.3 Lean Change Canvas 12.4 Mapping Different Perspectives 12.5 Hot Seat Coaching 13 Ten Extra Tools from our Coaches 13.1 Goal – Setting Ensuring Goals are Aligned 13.2 Targeting What’s Important 13.3 Guiding Others Through Change 13.4 SLOBA Model for Building Credibility 13.5 The Alignment Process 13.6 Accountability Review 13.7 Breaking the Gridlock 13.8 Building Resilience 13.9 Building and Using a Supportive Network 13.10 Establishing a Real Purpose, Meaning and Value to Client Progress


Leadership Team Coaching Developing Collective Transformational Leadership Edition: 3 Date: 07/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478490 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478506 Pages: 408 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Coaching

Author Information Peter Hawkins is Professor of Leadership at Henley Business School in the UK, founder and emeritus chairman of Bath Consultancy Group and chairman of Renewal Associates. He is also visiting professor in executive coaching at Oxford Brookes University and in leadership and change at the University of Bath. The author has worked with many leading companies internationally, codesigning and facilitating major change projects and coaching boards and leadership teams. He is the author of several books including Leadership Team Coaching in Practice, also published by Kogan Page.

133

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Includes tools and advice for coaching different types of teams including virtual teams,

international teams and executive boards << Matches key interventions with individual team needs to provide a targeted approach to team coaching tailored to the needs of an organization << Explores the five disciplines of successful team practice and how to use them to achieve optimum organizational performance << New to this edition: A chapter on systemic coaching as well as new international case studies

Description Organizations are most effective when the teams responsible for their success function to the best of their ability. When the relationships within the team work well and all members have a clear focus, the team is able to achieve goals more easily. Leadership Team Coaching is a roadmap for those who have the responsibility of developing a leadership team. It provides a thorough explanation of the key elements of team coaching and is filled with practical tools and techniques to facilitate optimum performance across virtual teams, international teams, executive boards and other teams. The fully updated 3rd edition of Leadership Team Coaching brings together the latest research in leadership teams and team coaching along with numerous examples to illustrate how to develop people from disparate groups into a high-performing team. With new international case studies throughout as well as a new chapter on systemic coaching, the book covers the five disciplines of team performance, how to select team members, how the relationship of the coach and the team develops through stages, how CEOs can foster effective teams with shared leadership, how to choose the best team coach and more to facilitate effective leadership teams.

Table of Contents 1 High Performing Teams 5.4 Developing as a Team Coach 1.1 Why the World Needs More 5.5 Supervising Team Coaching High-Performing Leadership 5.6 Team Coaching Methods, Tools Teams and Techniques 1.2 The High-Performing Team and Conclusion the Transformational Leadership Team 1.3 The Five Disciplines of Successful Team Practice 2 Team Coaching 2.1 What is Team Coaching? 2.2 The Team Coaching Process 2.3 Coaching the Five Disciplines Systemic Team Coaching 3 Coaching Different Types of Teams 3.1 Many Types of Teams 3.2 Coaching the Board 4 The Next Frontier for Systemic Team Coaching - Beyond the High Performing Team 4.1 Disrupting and Renewing Team Coaching 4.2 New Dimensions for EcoSystemic Team Coaching 5 Creating Shared Leadership, Selecting, Developing and Coaching your Own Team Advice to Chief Executives and Other Team Leaders 5.1 Selecting the Players for a HighPerforming Team 5.2 Key Steps for CEOs in Creating a High-Performing Team With Shared Leadership 5.3 How to Find, Select and Work With a Good Team Coach

Coaching


Coaching and Mentoring Practical Techniques for Developing Learning and Performance Edition: 3 Date: 12/28/2016 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477622 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477639 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Coaching

Author Information Melville Leedham is an associate lecturer at the University of Northampton. He runs his own coach-mentoring business specializing in improving the performance of individuals, teams and organizations and also trains, supervises and assesses other coaches. Diane Newell is the managing director of coaching services at The OCM, formerly the Oxford School of Coaching and Mentoring, and an experienced coach-mentor working with individuals and teams to catalyse success.

134

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides a clear, accessible and unbiased introduction to coaching and mentoring at individual,

team and organizational levels << Shows how to align coaching and mentoring to an organizationâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s overall business strategy and measure its transformational impact << New to this edition: chapters on the organizational value of coaching and mentoring with case studies from retail, oil and gas and professional services companies

Description Over the last 15 years, Coaching and Mentoring has become the go-to guide for anyone looking to develop their coaching and mentoring skills at individual, team or organizational level. Clear and accessible, it uses practical tools and best practice to demonstrate how to relate theoretical models to specific situations to gain real benefits. It provides strategies that can be applied to any situation, including life coaching, business coaching and community mentoring. Now in its 3rd edition, Coaching and Mentoring has been fully updated to cover the latest thinking and developments in this area including extended coverage of coaching supervision. There is also now a brand new section on practical applications of coaching and mentoring for organizations which includes advice on how to align coaching and mentoring strategies to overall business goals and how to provide evidence for its transformational impact on employee performance. Full of practical advice, case studies and examples, this comprehensive guide will be of value to everyone involved in any aspect coaching and mentoring.

Table of Contents 1

The purpose, nature and practice of coaching and mentoring 1.1 In the mainstream? 1.2 Models of coaching and mentoring 1.3 Community mentors and life coaching 1.4 Helping people to learn how to learn 1.5 Awareness of individual differences 1.6 Feedback that builds confidence and success 1.7 Observant listening 1.8 Questioning 1.9 Situational supervision? 1.10 An industry or a maturing profession? 2 How to effectively implement coaching and mentoring in organizations 2.1 Why invest in CAM? What and where is the need? 2.2 Coaching and mentoring: what they are and how they are used in organizations 2.3 Implementing coaching and mentoring 2.4 Roles and responsibilities in coaching and mentoring 2.5 Supervision in practice 2.6 Coaching the team 2.7 Coach-mentoring in the system and the impact of culture 2.8 Whatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s next?

Coaching


Employee Engagement Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2014 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472016 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472023 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Employee Engagement

Author Information Emma Bridger is an award winning employee engagement specialist and Director of People Lab, an Employee Engagement Consultancy, working with clients worldwide. With over 18 years’ experience gained in a variety of roles, Emma began her career lecturing on graduate and post-graduate courses in psychology, her specialist area being behaviour change. Emma has designed and developed the CIPD range of short Employee Engagement courses as well as contributing to and being published within the UK Government Review - Engaging for Success. She now advises the Government taskforce on engagement as part of the “guru group”. Emma is also a regular conference speaker and case studies detailing her work have been published in industry journals.

135

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Unique positive-psychology-based approach to driving employee engagement << Solidly grounded in engagement theory, it also provides practical tools, techniques and diagnostics << Covers all the key areas from defining engagement right through to future thinking and developments

<< Is written by the course designer of CIPD short courses on employee engagement Description Achieving employee engagement is crucial to the success and continued high performance of any organization. But with budgets tighter than ever before, economic struggles and an increasingly stressful workplace for staff, it has become an increasingly difficult task. Aimed at HR practitioners and managers, Employee Engagement offers a complete, practical resource for understanding, measuring and building engagement. Grounded in engagement theory and an understanding of psychology combined with practical tools, techniques and diagnostics, this book will help you assess and drive engagement in your organization. Case studies include British Gas, Capital One, Asda, Ministry of Justice, Mace and RSA.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

What is employee engagement? Does engagement matter? Developing your employee engagement strategy 4 How it works 5 Employee engagement: How do you do it? 6 Employee engagement tools and techniques 7 Planning and action 8 Measuring engagement 9 The future of employee engagement

Employee Engagement


50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement A Complete Toolkit for Improving Motivation and Productivity Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479879 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479886 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Employee Engagement

Author Information Debbie Mitchell is an organizational development consultant specializing in employee engagement, coaching, talent management, change and HR support. She works with businesses both locally and internationally that include consumer electronics, FMCGs, pharmaceuticals as well as those in the transportation, insurance, not for profit and education sectors. Prior to this, Debbie held in-house HR and OD roles for British American Tobacco for 10 years, and has experience of HR roles in retail, public sector and manufacturing.

136

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides fifty ready-to-use tools which can be put into practice with individuals, teams or

organizations << Includes guidance on when and how to use each tool and how long each one will take to implement << Guides readers in measuring the impact of each tool to show which ones are making the most difference

Description Engaged employees are more productive, motivated and resilient, yet gaining financial support to develop engagement is harder than ever as budgets are being squeezed and everyone is being asked to do more with less. 50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement shows that you don’t need expensive interventions or additional resource to achieve employee engagement. It contains practical tools which can be used to make an immediate difference to engagement, whether you’re working with individuals, teams or the organization as a whole. Each tool in 50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement includes guidance on when to use it, how long it will take and useful hints and tips to help get the most out of it. Most importantly, this book will give guidance on how to measure the impact of each tool to show what’s working and where efforts are best focused. Addressing all the key areas of engagement throughout the employee life cycle, from talent attraction and induction to career progression and development, this book is a complete resource to engaging your workforce.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Engaging One on One Engaging Teams Engaging the Organisation In Talent Attraction In Induction In Training When Life Changes Happen When Career Changes Happen On Retirement On Leaving Business Improvement Change Customer Focus Delivering Results Evaluating Organisational Engagement 16 Quick View of Tools and Some Additional Templates

Employee Engagement


Employment Law The Essentials Edition: 14 Date: 01/31/2017 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984382 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984580 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Employment Law / Relations

This book

<< Takes the reader step-by-step through everything they need to know using engaging case studies

and examples which encourage deeper thinking and practical application << New to this edition: includes the latest cases and legislation, such as the Trade Union Act 2016 and the Enterprise Act 2016; new content on the enforcement of tribunal awards, zero hours contracts and migrant workers, and an up-to-date analysis of anti-discrimination law, the national living wage and TUPE << Online Resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, further case studies and annotated web links

Description Employment Law is the core textbook for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced Employment Law module and is ideal for all HR professionals and business leaders who need a clear understanding of the area, as well as those studying the subject on postgraduate and undergraduate HRM or business degrees. It takes the reader step-by-step through everything that they need to know, including the formation of the Contract of Employment, discrimination, health and safety in the workplace, unfair dismissal and redundancy. Easy to read and navigate, and full of case studies and useful examples that encourage deeper thinking, this fully updated 14th edition provides a thorough theoretical grounding in employment law that can be applied in practice. This new edition of Employment Law is completely up to date with the latest cases and legislation, including the Trade Union Act 2016 and the Enterprise Act 2016, offers new content on the enforcement of tribunal awards, zero hours contracts and migrant workers, and provides an up-todate analysis of anti-discrimination law, the national living wage and the ‘Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 2006’ (TUPE). Online resources such as lecture slides, extra case studies and annotated web links will support your learning and enable you to apply the theory in practice.

Author Information

Table of Contents

David Lewis is Professor of Employment Law in the Law School at Middlesex University, UK

1

Malcolm Sargeant is Professor of Labour Law in the Business School at Middlesex University, UK

2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

137

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

The Sources and Institutions of Employment Law Formation of the Contract of Employment (1) - The Sources of Terms Formation of the Contract of Employment (2) - Implied Terms of Law Recruitment and Selection Pay Issues Discrimination against Employees (1) Discrimination (2) - Lawful Discrimination, Vicarious Liability, Burden of Proof, Enforcement and Equality of Terms Parental Rights Health and Safety at Work The Regulation of Working Time Variation, Breach and Termination of the Contract of Employment at Common Law Unfair Dismissal (1) - Exclusions and the Meaning of Dismissal Unfair Dismissal (2) - Potentially Fair Reasons and the Concept of Reasonableness Redundancy Unfair Dismissal and Redundancy Claims Continuity of Employment and Transfers of Undertakings Information and Consultation Trade Unions and Collective Bargaining

Employment Law / Relations


Introduction To Employment Law Fundamentals for HR and Business Students Edition: 4 Date: 03/15/2016 Price: $55.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984078 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984399 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Employment Law / Relations

Author Information Kathy Daniels is a Senior Teaching Fellow at Aston Business School, UK. She is also a tutor on the Foundation, Intermediate and Advanced Certificates in Employment Law for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development and is a fellow of the CIPD. She is a lay member of the Employment Tribunals, sitting in Birmingham. Prior to these appointments she was Head of HR at a large manufacturing organisation.

This book

<< Consolidates learning through chapter objectives, examples, tasks and activities that encourage the exploration of the issues << New to this edition: addresses the latest developments in employment law, full coverage of the CIPD module at level 5 and a useful introduction to the topic for students at level 7, a brand new section on social media with reference to recent case law and extended coverage of the formation and development of the law and the politics behind it << Online Resources: includes annotated web links, summaries of key points from each chapter, and podcasts, as well as updated and additional case studies and lecture slides << Provides the most accessible and concise coverage on the market of all that is required for both undergraduate and postgraduate students studying Employment Law for the first time

Description Introduction to Employment Law is the most accessible and concise employment law textbook on the market. A clear structure takes the reader through every aspect of employment legislation, including employment tribunals, the contract of employment, individual protections rights, discrimination and the protected characteristics, trade union legislation, and privacy and confidential information. It is essential reading for students studying employment law as part of HR and business degrees, as well as HR and business managers looking to further their knowledge of employment law for practical use. Written in a clear and engaging style, this new edition of Introduction to Employment Law is packed with interactive tools that consolidate your learning and will help you relate theory and law to reallife practice: chapter objectives, examples to work through, tasks and activities to encourage the exploration of the issues addressed in greater depth, and key learning points that pull out the most important areas for you to remember. Features of the 4th edition include the latest developments in employment law, full coverage of the CIPD module at level 5 and a useful introduction to the topic for students at level 7, a brand new section on social media with reference to recent case law and extended coverage of the formation and development of the law and the politics behind it. Extensive online resources are also available, and include annotated web links, summaries of key points from each chapter, and podcasts, as well as updated and additional case studies and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

138

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

The Formation of Employment Law The Employment Tribunals and the Employment Appeal Tribunal Contract of Employment Atypical Contracts and the Variation of Contracts Individual Protection Rights Discrimination - Concepts and Definition Discrimination - The Protected Characteristics Termination of Employment Redundancy and Transfers of Undertaking Trade Union Legislation Privacy and Confidential Information Health and Safety Legislation Study Skills in Employment Law

Employment Law / Relations


Employment Law Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2014 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469740 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469757 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Employment Law / Relations

Author Information Liz Aylott has over 15 years of experience as an HR specialist and Lecturer in areas of Employee Relations and Employment Law. After a career in HR both in industry and the charitable sector, she joined the Hampshire Business School where she lectured on CIPD programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. Currently based at BPP where as a member of the Business School faculty she lectures on HRM and business degrees, she also has extensive experience of resolving Employment Tribunal claims.

139

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Aligns compliance to legal requirements with the strategic objectives of your organization,

equipping you with the crucial skills and knowledge you need to use employment law effectively << Provides a practical understanding to the field and covers why employment law is so important to organizations, from protecting employees to protecting employers themselves, and how to keep up to date with the latest developments << Presents a step-by-step guide from the start to finish of managing the employment relationship, with chapters on how to go about it, plan, implement and measure the process

Description Employment Law is a practical guide to understanding and applying the law effectively at work in the UK. Tailored to the needs of practitioners it offers a complete overview of the fundamentals of employment law, examining its importance for an organization, its employees and the HR function. Using a combination of practical tools, assessments, scenarios and case studies from best practice it will build your legal knowledge of key areas including immigration, employing temporary staff, changing contracts, discrimination, equal pay, family rights, redundancy and much more. Employment Law is part of the HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD. It is the ideal companion to Employee Relations, also by the same author.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

Introduction Fundamentals What is employment law? The importance of employment law Employment law and strategy In practice How it works How you do it Planning and action Measurement Conclusions and Government changes to employment law

Employment Law / Relations


Managing Employment Relations Edition: 6 Date: 03/15/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983781 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984351 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Employment Law / Relations

This book

<< Provides critical reflections on the increasing role of line managers in employment relations and as

well as the influence of employee representation << New to this edition: new chapter on workplace mediation and coverage on the theory and practice of managing conflict << Online resources: lecturer guides, powerpoint slides, sample essay questions, additional case studies and annotated web links for students

Description Managing Employment Relations is an indispensable guide for anyone studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module Managing Employment Relations as well as anyone looking for a thorough understanding of the theory and practice of the relationship between employers and employees. Fully updated, this edition has new coverage of the changing labour market, regulatory reform and the global environment, ensuring that readers have access to the most up-to-date information in this area. Covering the context, processes and legal aspects of employment relations, Managing Employment Relations gives a thorough grounding in all the underpinning theory of employment relations. It also provides practical guidance on employee engagement, involvement and representation as well as employment relations strategies, policies and change. In this sixth edition, there is a brand new chapter on workplace mediation and enhanced coverage of discipline, grievances and redundancies. Supported by a lecturer guide, sample essay questions and powerpoint slides for instructors as well as annotated web links and annual updates for students, this book is essential reading for anyone teaching or studying employment relations.

Author Information

Table of Contents

John Gennard was Professor of Human Resource Management at the University of Strathclyde, UK.

1 2

Graham Judge is Group Human Resources Director for Local World Ltd, UK. Anthony Bennett is Visiting Fellow and lecturer at Sheffield Hallam University, UK and is also a freelance researcher, workplace mediator and trainer. Richard Saundry is Associate Professor (Reader) in Human Resource and Leadership Studies at Plymouth University, UK

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

140

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction The Concepts and Processes of Employment Relations The Context of Employment Relations Employment Relations and the Law The Global Environment Employment Relations Strategies, Policies and Change Employee Engagement Managing Employment Relations Employee Representation Employee Involvement and Participation Managing Workplace Conflict Managing Workplace Discipline Managing Employee Grievances Managing Redundancy The Role of Mediation in Conflict Resolution Conclusion: Thoughts for the Future

Employment Law / Relations


Employment Relations A Critical and International Approach Edition: 1 Date: 02/18/2011 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982685 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983255 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Employment Law / Relations

This book

<< Covers both the conceptual debates and functional areas of employment relations << Considers the local, national and global effects on the practice of employment relations << Online resources: lecturer guides, PowerPoint slides and additional cases as well as annotated web links and further reading for students

Description Drawing on the latest research, Employment Relations is a key text for anyone studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module Managing Employment Relations as well as all those looking to expand their knowledge and understanding in this area. Covering both the conceptual debates and contextual factors relating to employment relations as well as key management interventions, this is invaluable reading for anyone looking to understand both the theory and practice of employment relations. With coverage of the main players in employment relations - Trade Unions, Employers and the State and critical discussion of the local, national and global effects on employment relations, Employment Relations provides a thorough grounding in the international context of employment relations. With comprehensive consideration of key workplace issues including employee engagement, discrimination, conflict, downsizing and redundancies, this is ideal reading for students and practitioners alike. Packed with exercises, examples and case studies, this book allows readers to take a critical approach to this crucial topic. Online supporting resources include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides, additional cases, annotated web links and further reading.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Pauline Dibben is Senior Lecturer in Employment Relations at the University of Sheffield, UK.

1 2

Gilton Klerck is Professor of Sociology at Rhodes University, South Africa. Geoffrey Wood is Professor in Human Resource Management at the University of Sheffield, UK.

141

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction Conceptual Debates and Contextual Factors 2.1 The Main Players in Employment Relations - Trade Unions, Employers, and the State 2.2 Theories of Employment Relations 2.3 Employment Relations and Human Resource Management 2.4 Local, National and Global Effects on the Practice of Employment Relations 2.5 Power and Authority 3 Management Interventions in Employment Relations 3.1 Voice 3.2 Employee Engagement 3.3 Pay and Reward 3.4 Discrimination, Difference and Diversity 3.5 Discipline and Grievance 3.6 Conflict and Dispute Resolution 3.7 Downsizing and Redundancy 3.8 Conclusion: The Relevance of Employment Relations and Comparative Employment Relations

Employment Law / Relations


Employee Relations Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2014 Price: $34.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469764 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469771 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Employment Law / Relations

Author Information Liz Aylott has over 15 years of experience as an HR specialist and Lecturer in areas of Employee Relations and Employment Law. After a career in HR both in industry and the charitable sector, she joined the Hampshire Business School where she lectured on CIPD programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. Currently based at BPP where as a member of the Business School faculty she lectures on HRM and business degrees, Liz also has extensive experience of resolving Employment Tribunal claims.

142

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Offers a complete overview of the field of employee relations and how to align your approach to

this with an overall HR and broader organizational strategy << Provides an up-to-date perspective on employee relations and outlines how to plan and measure an employee relations strategy effectively << Offers practical guidance and outlines the benefits of having an employee relations strategy that works for your organization

Description Employee Relations is a guide to the fundamental principles of employee relations in the UK. Tailored to the needs of practitioners it offers a complete overview of the field strongly aligned to the organizational and HR strategy and objectives. Using a combination of practical tools, assessments, scenarios and case studies from best practice it will build your knowledge of the area from understanding the labour market and the employment relationship to trade unions and international governing bodies. The book covers key areas such as conflict and dispute resolution, dismissal and redundancy, rights, ethics and much more. Aligning effective employee relations with strategic objectives, this book will equip you with the skills you need to plan, implement and assess employee relations. Employee Relations is part of the brand new HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD. It is the complementary partner title to Employment Law, also by the same author.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3

Introduction Fundamentals What is Employee Relations? The importance of Employee Relations Employee Relations and strategy In Practice Employee Relations in practice Planning and action Measurement

Employment Law / Relations


50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing A Complete Toolkit for Developing Happy, Healthy, Productive and Engaged Employees Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482183 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482190 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Employment Law / Relations

Author Information Debbie Mitchell is an organizational development consultant specializing in employee engagement, coaching, talent management, change and HR support. She has experience of senior HR roles in organizations across FMCG manufacturing, supply chain, retail, public sector and support service sectors. She is the author of 50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement, also published by Kogan Page.

143

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides tools to improve all areas of employee wellbeing including physical, mental and social

wellbeing << Includes guidance on when and how to use each tool, what resources are required, how long each one will take to implement and how much each tool will cost << Guides readers in measuring the impact of each tool to show which ones are making the most difference

Description In a world of political and economic uncertainty where stress and unhappiness are on the rise, improving employee wellbeing has never been more important. But with budgets being squeezed and the constant need to do more with less, this can seem like an insurmountable task. 50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing shows that interventions don’t need to be expensive or time-consuming. It contains practical tools for immediately improving staff wellbeing, resulting in happier, more engaged and more productive employees. Each tool in the book includes guidance on when to use it, how to get the most out of it and - most importantly - how to measure its impact to show what’s working and where efforts are best focused. Addressing all the key areas of the subject, from career development and workplace culture to physical, mental and financial wellbeing, this is a complete resource for improving your workforce’s wellbeing.

Table of Contents 1 Leadership and Advocacy 1.1 Creating a Wellbeing Strategy 1.2 Workplace Wellbeing Assessments 1.3 Developing a Wellbeing Programme 1.4 Wellbeing Committees 1.5 Championing Wellbeing 2 Career 2.1 Strengths-based People Management 2.2 Peer Coaching 2.3 Promoting Learning 2.4 Finding Purpose 2.5 Communicating 2.6 A walk-and-talk 2.7 Enabling Flow 2.8 Encouraging a Growth Mindset 2.9 Mentoring 2.10 Giving Great Feedback 2.11 The Check-in 2.12 Involvement 2.13 Engagement 2.14 Change 3 Physical and Mental 3.1 Return to Work Interview 3.2 Managing Employee Illness 3.3 The Fruit Box 3.4 Exercise at Work 3.5 Workplace Massage 3.6 Travel Health 3.7 Stress Prevention and Signalling 3.8 Managing ‘Overwhelm’ 3.9 Employee Assistance Programmes 3.10 Emotional Intelligence 3.11 Building Resilience

Employment Law / Relations

3.12 Reframing 3.13 Mindfulness 3.14 Mediation 3.15 Switching off 3.16 Getting Organized 3.17 Designing the Working Environment 3.18 Remote Working 3.19 Flexible Working 4 Social and Community 4.1 Motivation 4.2 Harmony Initiatives 4.3 Building Trust 4.4 Anti-bullying Action 4.5 Giving Back 4.6 Shared Interest Groups 4.7 Netwalking 4.8 Fun at Work 4.9 Pets at Work 4.10 Music at Work 5 Financial 5.1 Flexible Benefits 5.2 Pre-retirement Planning 6 Supporting Information


Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice Edition: 14 Date: 02/28/2017 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474119 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474126 Pages: 776 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of HRM books. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twenty-one languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). Stephen Taylor is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School and a chief examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS.

HR, Organizational

144 Development and Coaching

This book

<< Written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages << Updated to include the latest on engagement, talent management and leadership development as well as new chapters on employee retention, absence management and managing flexibility << Aligns with the Chartered Institute of Personnel Development (CIPD) professional map and professional standards << Includes comprehensive online resources for both lecturers and students

Description Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice is the bestselling, definitive text for all HRM students and professionals. Providing a complete resource for understanding and implementing HR in relation to the needs of the business as a whole, it contains in-depth coverage of all the key areas essential to the HR function such as employment law, employee relations, learning and development, performance and reward. Accessible and to the point as ever, this fully updated 14th edition includes emerging theory and practice, embracing the most current thinking on engagement, talent management and leadership development. With updated case studies and references to academic journals, professional magazines and recent research and surveys, it also includes coverage of new approaches to topics such as job evaluation and pay structures. Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice is aligned with the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) professional map and standards, with the sections meeting CIPD learning outcomes now even clearer than before. Comprehensive online support material for instructors, students and HR managers are included. Resources for students and professionals include multiple choice questions, flash cards, case studies, further reading and a glossary of HRM terms. The lecturers’ manual contains session notes, discussion questions, a literature review and a complete set of lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1

Fundamentals of Human Resource Management 1.1 Human Resource Management (HRM) 1.2 Human Capital Management 1.3 Strategic HRM 2 Delivering HRM 2.1 HR Architecture – The HR System 2.2 The Role of the HR Function 2.3 The Role of HR Professionals 2.4 HRM and Performance 3 Human Resource Management Processes 3.1 HR Strategies 3.2 HR Policies 3.3 HR Procedures 3.4 HR Analytics 3.5 Knowledge Management 3.6 Competency-Based HRM 3.7 The Ethical Dimension of HRM 3.8 Corporate Social Responsibility 4 People and Organizations 4.1 Organizational Behaviour 4.2 Work, Organization and Job Design 4.3 Organization Development 5 Factors Influencing Employee Behaviour 5.1 Motivation 5.2 Commitment 5.3 Employee Engagement 6 People Resourcing 6.1 Strategic Resourcing 6.2 Workforce Planning 6.3 Recruitment and Selection 6.4 Talent Management

6.5 Introduction to the Organization 6.6 Release from the Organization 6.7 Managing Employee Retention 6.8 Absence Management 6.9 Managing Diversity and Inclusion 6.10 Managing Flexibility 7 Learning and Development 7.1 Strategic Learning and Development 7.2 How People Learn 7.3 The Process of Learning and Development 7.4 Workplace Learning 7.5 Social Learning 7.6 E-Learning 7.7 Training 7.8 Leadership and Management Development 7.9 The Role of the Learning and Development Function 8 Performance Management 8.1 Performance Management Fundamentals 8.2 The Process of Performance Management 9 Rewarding People 9.1 Reward Management 9.2 Market Pricing 9.3 Job Evaluation 9.4 Grade and Pay Structures 9.5 Contingent Pay 9.6 Managing Reward for Special Groups 9.7 Managing Reward Systems 10 Employee Relations 10.1 The Basis of Employee Relations 10.2 The Employment Relationship 10.3 The Psychological Contract

Human Resources Management

10.4 The Practice of Industrial Relations 10.5 Employee Voice 10.6 Employee Communications 11 Employee Well-Being 11.1 The Practice of Employee WellBeing 11.2 Health and Safety 12 International HRM 12.1 The International HRM Framework 12.2 The Practice of International HRM 12.3 Managing Expatriates 13 HRM Practices 13.1 HR Information Systems 13.2 Employment Law 14 HR Skills 14.1 Strategic HRM Skills 14.2 Business Skills 14.3 Problem-Solving Skills 14.4 Analytical and Critical Skills 14.5 Research Skills 14.6 Statistical Skills 14.7 Selection Interviewing Skills 14.8 Job, Role and Skills Analysis and Competency Modelling 14.9 Learning and Development Skills 14.10 Negotiating Skills 14.11 Leading and Facilitating Change 14.12 Leadership Skills 14.13 Influencing Skills 14.14 Handling People Problems 14.15 Handling Challenging Conversations 14.16 Managing Conflict 14.17 Political Skills 14.18 Investigating a Business Issue from an HR Perspective


Introduction to Human Resource Management A Guide to HR in Practice Edition: 3 Date: 09/22/2014 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983590 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983354 Pages: 672 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

This book

<< Balances theory with practice, covering aspects of organizational culture, the role of the HR

practitioner and HR planning << New to this edition: updates on legislation along with coverage of the rise of social media and e-recruitment, employer branding, onboarding and socialization for attracting and retaining staff, new methods for delivering learning and development << Online resources: instructor’s manual and lecture slides

Description Introduction to Human Resource Management is a comprehensive and accessible guide to the subject of HRM. Drawing on the authors’ experiences in both the public and private sectors, and underpinned by academic theory, this textbook follows the logical sequence of the employment cycle and shows how human resource management plays out in practice. It covers organizational culture, the role of the HR practitioner, HR planning, recruitment and selection, talent management, L&D, motivation and performance, health and safety, diversity and equality, employment law, change management and handling and managing information. With a range of pedagogical features, including contemporary case studies and review questions, Introduction to Human Resource Management maps to the CIPD Level 3 Foundation Certificate in HR Practice and is also ideal for foundation and undergraduate students encountering HRM for the first time. This fully updated 3rd edition has been revised and expanded to include the rise of social media and e-recruitment, the ideas of employer branding, onboarding and socialization for attracting and retaining staff, new methods for delivering learning and development events and updates on legislation. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Charles Leatherbarrow, Chartered FCIPD, is a senior lecturer in HRM at the University of Wolverhampton.

1 2

Janet Fletcher, Chartered FCIPD, is a senior lecturer in HRM at the University of Wolverhampton.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

145

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Organisations Aspects of Organisational Culture Human Resource Management (HRM) The Role of the HR Practitioner Human Resource Planning Recruitment Selection Induction and Retention Learning and Development - Key Concepts Learning and Development - The Practical Aspects Employee Motivation and Performance Employee Reward The Employment Relationship Health, Safety, Well-Being and Work-Life Balance Diversity and Equality Understanding Employment Law Ending the Employment Relationship Change Management Handling and Managing Information

Human Resources Management


Human Resource Management at Work Edition: 6 Date: 03/15/2016 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983712 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984368 Pages: 544 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Mick Marchington is emeritus professor of Human Resource Management at University of Manchester, UK and a Chartered Companion of the CIPD. Adrian Wilkinson is a professor and the director of the Centre for Work, Organisation and Wellbeing at Griffith University, Australia and a Chartered Fellow of the CIPD. Rory Donnelly is a reader in Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour at Birmingham Business School, UK and a Chartered Member of the CIPD. Anastasia Kynighou is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK and a Chartered Member of the CIPD.

This book

<< Promotes a critical awareness of HRM through case studies, examples and activities << New to this edition: coverage of knowledge intensive firms, employee engagement and talent

management along with additional coverage of international and comparative HRM with new case studies and a review of the latest literature << Online resources: instructor’s manual and lecture slides

Description A leading textbook in its field, Human Resource Management at Work provides a clear introduction to the multiple meanings of HRM (human resource management) and the relationship between strategy and HRM. Covering international and comparative HRM as well as HRM and performance, it is filled with case studies and activities to bring the subject to life while summarizing the major forces shaping HRM and looking at the principal theoretical frameworks. Ideal for business and HR students taking a critical look at HRM theory and practice, this fully updated 6th edition of Human Resource Management at Work combines the latest research with real-world examples. Linking theory with practice, it encourages a critical awareness of HRM through case studies, real-world examples and activities. Now with a closer analysis of the forces shaping HRM at work and the growth of insecure work, it also features new case studies, an updated literature review and a stronger emphasis on international and comparative HRM. Knowledge intensive firms, employee engagement and talent management are discussed in detail as well, as is the role of bodies such as ‘Engage for Success’ in promoting new methods of working. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

3.6 3.7 4 4.1 4.2

146

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

HRM, Strategy and the Global Context HRM, Strategy and Corporate Social Responsibility Forces Shaping HRM at Work High Commitment HRM: Policy and Practice Aligning HRM with Organisational Goals and Market Context International and Comparative HRM Responsibilities for Delivering HRM The Role of the HR Function in Changing Times Line Managers, Leadership and HRM HRM Practices and Processes Resourcing and Talent Management Performance Management Learning and Knowledge Development Managing Employment Relations Employee Involvement and Participation: Creating Engagement and Voice in the Workplace Reward Management Examining the Links between HR Practices and Processes and Organisational Performance HRM and Performance from a Business Perspective Research Skills and Project Management

Human Resources Management


Human Resource Practice Edition: 7 Date: 07/15/2016 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984061 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984481 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Malcolm Martin BSc, Chartered FCIPD has been involved in the design and delivery of CIPD programmes since 1993. His experience covers a range of sectors from care, education and manufacturing, to polymers, chemicals and steel, and he has held management positions in industrial relations, project management and human resources. Fiona Whiting MSc, LLb, Chartered FCIPD is a freelance HR consultant with many years’ experience working across the public, voluntary and private sectors. She has held a number of board level HR Director posts within the NHS and is co-founder and Director of consultancy ThePeopleEffect.

147

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides all the practical skills and critical information needed by HR professionals to practise

successfully << New to this edition: explores the application of HR models, including the Ulrich model, and provides further information on practical elements of HR including law, recruitment, performance management and reward << Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and updates from the authors’ blog

Description Human Resource Practice provides a practical and accessible guide for students and anyone looking to gain a thorough understanding of HR, and is the definitive text for the CIPD’s Level 3 Foundation Certificate in HR Practice. International case studies, examples and activities enable the reader to engage with the key areas of practical HR management, including the legal background to employment, learning and development, change in organizations and employee relations. This fully updated 7th edition of Human Resource Practice explores the application of models within the practice of HR, including the Ulrich model, timely discussion on employee engagement and well-being in the workplace, and further information on the practical elements of HR, including law, recruitment and selection, performance management and reward. From two renowned experts in HR practice, this clear and in-depth text will provide you with all the skills and information that you need for a successful career in HR. Online resources offered are useful and relevant for both students and tutors, including instructor’s guides, lecture slides and annotated web links.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Introduction and Overview The Organisational Context The Legal Background to Employment Job Analysis Recruitment and Selection Performance Management Reward Employee Relations Learning and Development Information and Communication Technology in HR Change in Organisations Personal Effectiveness

Human Resources Management


Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters Edition: 3 Date: 01/31/2017 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984429 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984597 Pages: 200 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Iain Henderson is a senior teaching fellow at Edinburgh Business School, Heriot-Watt University, UK.

This book

<< Offers a solid foundation in both the theory and practice of HRM through a wide variety of

pedagogical features << New to this edition: a greater international and contemporary focus, fresh case studies, coverage of the impact of new forms of employment and technology on HR and updated online resources << Online resources: an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, videos, multiple-choice questions and additional case studies for tutors plus multiple-choice questions and additional case studies for students

Description Packed with practical information and offering a solid foundation in HRM theory, Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters covers all the topics MBA students need to know in a concise, accessible way. One of the only texts available for HR non-specialist students doing a Masters or MBA, it looks at the changing world of the line manager and HR professional with regard to key topics such as HRM and strategy, employee resourcing, human resource development, employee relations and performance management. Annotated further reading for each chapter and questions for each case study help cement knowledge and understanding. Now aimed at a wider readership of management Masters students, this fully updated 3rd edition of Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters features a greater international and contemporary focus, fresh case studies, coverage of the impact of new forms of employment and technology on HR, and updated online supporting resources. With diagrams and models throughout, it covers topics such as CSR, organizational culture and change, performance management and talent management, the criticisms of HRM levelled by the Critical Management School and different HRM challenges as they relate to each chapter. Online supporting resources for tutors include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, videos, multiple-choice questions and additional case studies; additional resources for students include multiple-choice questions and additional case studies.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

148

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Human Resource Management Employee Resourcing Learning and Development Employee Relations Human Resource Management and the Design of Work Managing Performance Managing Rewards The Global Context of HRM International and Comparative HRM Contemporary Issues and Future Trends

Human Resources Management


Human Resource Management in a Business Context Edition: 3 Date: 06/01/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984047 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984511 Pages: 608 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information John Kew is an educational consultant and has written flexible learning material for the CIPD’s Professional Development Scheme. John Stredwick is Senior Lecturer at University of Bedfordshire and a well renowned author. He is Visiting Professor at Webster University (US) based in Regents Park.

149

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Is the essential text for all postgraduate and undergraduate students studying the broader business context within which HR operates << New to this edition: updated to include an even broader range of global case studies with extended coverage from China and India and updates to policies and legislation << Online resources: provides additional case studies and activities, alongside lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links

Description Highly accessible and student-friendly, Human Resource Management in a Business Context is the core text for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module, Human Resource Management in Context, and is also essential reading for other undergraduate and postgraduate HR and business degrees. In clear and easy to navigate chapters, which consider government policy, regulation, the world economy and demographic and social trends, this book provides the firm theoretical background that you can apply in practice. Human Resource Management in a Business Context is packed with international case studies, examples and activities that will actively engage you with the different areas of knowledge and allow you to work through the material step-by-step. This edition is fully updated to include an even broader range of global case studies with extended coverage from China and India and updates to policies and legislation. The online resources available have also been expanded on, and now provide additional case studies and activities, alongside lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links.

Table of Contents 1

Human Resource Management in Context 2 The Managerial Context of Human Resources 3 The Competitive Environment 4 Government Policy 5 Regulation 6 The World Economy 7 Demographic and Social Trends 8 Technology 9 Ethics, Social Responsibility and Sustainability 10 Strategic Management 11 HR Delivery, Strategy and Performance

Human Resources Management


Studying Human Resource Management Edition: 2 Date: 05/24/2016 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984153 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984405 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Stephen Taylor is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK and also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. He previously taught at Manchester Business School and Manchester Metropolitan University Business School. Professor Carol Woodhams is an Associate Professor of Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK. She has held various positions within the CIPD including National Examiner for Designing and Delivering Training and Editor of the flexible learning materials at Intermediate and Advanced levels.

150

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Designed specifically to address the core units of the CIPD intermediate level qualification in HRM << New to this edition: Includes new material on the HR function and the job of the HR manager << Online resources: Videos, podcasts, lecture slides with tutor notes, multiple choice questions, extra case studies, annotated web links and a glossary

Description Written by experts in the field with a wealth of academic and practical experience, Studying Human Resource Management is essential reading for all those studying the CIPD Level 5 Intermediate qualification in HRM. With its discussion of studying HRM, managing and co-ordinating the HR function and business issues in the context of HR, this is also invaluable reading for all students on undergraduate HRM and Business and Management degrees. Studying Human Resource Management also has extensive coverage of developing professional practice and using information in HR and now includes additional material on the HR function as well as new coverage of the job of the HR manager. Supported by brand new online resources including videos, podcasts and interactive multiple-choice questions as well as an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides and additional case studies, this is a crucial book for all those teaching and studying human resource management.

Table of Contents 1

Studying HRM [Stephen Taylor and Carol Woodhams] 2 Managing and Co-Ordinating the HR Function [Krystal Wilkinson and Stephen Taylor] 3 Business Issues and the Contexts of Human Resources [Stephen Taylor and Krystal Wilkinson] 4 Developing Professional Practice [Ted Johns and Graham Perkins] 5 Using Information in Human Resources [Graham Perkins and Carol Woodhams] 6 Developing the Knowledge and Skill of the HR Professional [Carol Woodhams, Graham Perkins and Krystal Wilkinson]

Human Resources Management


Human Resource Management People and Organisations Edition: 2 Date: 05/23/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984160 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984412 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Stephen Taylor, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK and also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. He previously taught at Manchester Business School and Manchester Metropolitan University Business School. Professor Carol Woodhams is an Associate Professor of Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK. She has held various positions within the CIPD including National Examiner for Designing and Delivering Training and Editor of the flexible learning materials at Intermediate and Advanced levels.

151

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Designed specifically to address the optional units of the CIPD intermediate qualification in HRM << New to this edition: three new chapters on Human Resource Development; Improving Organisational Performance and Organisational Design and Development << Online resources: videos, podcasts, lecturer slides with tutor notes, multiple choice questions, glossary and annotated web links

Description Written by experts in the field, Human Resource Management: People and Organisations is essential reading for all those studying the CIPD Level 5 Intermediate qualification in HRM. It contains essential coverage of key HR topics including resourcing and talent planning, reward management and contemporary developments in employment relations, making it equally valuable to all students on undergraduate HRM and Business and Management degrees. This 2nd edition of Human Resource Management: People and Organisations now includes three brand new chapters on Human Resource Development; improving organisational performance and organisational design and development as well as additional real-life case studies throughout, ensuring the most comprehensive and up-to-date coverage of people and organisations. Fully supported by online resources including new videos, podcasts and interactive multiple choice questions as well as a lecturer guide and powerpoint slides for instructors, this is an authoritative, informative and engaging guide essential for all HR students

Table of Contents 1

Human Resource Service Delivery (Gail Swift) 2 Employment Law (Stephen Taylor and Krystal Wilkinson) 3 Resourcing and Talent Planning (Krystal Wilkinson and Stephen Taylor) 4 Employee Engagement (Ted Johns and Cecilia Ellis) 5 Contemporary Developments in Employee Relations (Cecilia Ellis) 6 Reward Management (Graham Perkins and Carol Woodhams) 7 Human Resource Development (Graham Perkins) 8 Organisational Design and Organisational Development (Claire Roberts) 9 Improving Organisational Performance (Stephen Taylor)

Human Resources Management


Human Resource Management in Context Insights, Strategy and Solutions Edition: 4 Date: 02/13/2015 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983583 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984023 Pages: 432 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information David Farnham, Chartered Fellow of the CIPD, is an emeritus professor at the University of Portsmouth and visiting professor at the University of Greenwich, UK. He has been a visiting professor at the University of East London, a visiting senior research fellow at the University of South Wales and a visiting senior research fellow at the Catholic University Leuven. He is Chief Examiner for the CIPD and a member of the advisory board of the Personnel Policies Study Group of the European Group of Public Administration, Brussels.

This book

<< Helps students understand, analyse and critically evaluate key issues including the managerial and

business environment, how HR strategies are shaped, globalization and demographic, social and technological trends << New to this edition: enhanced emphasis on the impact of the external environment on the HR profession, a discussion of the impact of technology and social media, increased coverage of ethics and CSR and links to the HR Profession Map << Online resources: instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and answers to/guidance for the chapter activities for lecturers

Description HR functions within both internal and external contexts. The understanding of both contexts is crucial for comprehending how and why they drive HR strategies and practices in organizations, as well as the rules and structures within which they work. Built around five major themes which impact upon the HR function, and mapping to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name, Human Resource Management in Context enables students to understand the complex and changing organizational context in which HR operates today by providing a comprehensive breakdown of the concepts, theories and issues from globalization and government policy to demographic, social and technological trends. This fully updated 4th edition of Human Resource Management in Context includes a range of pedagogical features, balancing theory with practical analysis to form an engaging insight into the strategic side of HR. It includes enhanced emphasis on the impact of the external environment on the HR profession, a discussion of the impact of technology and social media, increased coverage of ethics and CSR and links to the HR Profession Map. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and guidance for the chapter activities.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

152

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introducing Human Resource Management, Organisation and Management Human Resource Management and its External Contexts Contemporary Organisations and their Internal Contexts The Managerial and Business Contexts of Organisations Strategy Formulation and Implementation Developing Corporate Strategies Developing Human Resource Strategies The External Contexts of Human Resource Management Markets and the Competitive Context Globalisation and International Factors Demographic and Social Trends The Technological Context Government Policy and Legal Regulation

Human Resources Management


Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management Edition: 6 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476823 ISBN Ebook: 9780749476830 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twentyone languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

153

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Shows how to adopt a strategic approach on a day-to-day basis to operate as part of the

management team and demonstrate how their activities add value << Includes a toolkit for conducting a strategic review, which features the use of checklists to analyse different aspects of HR strategy, and the basis of workshops and focus groups << Written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages << New to this edition: chapters on developing and delivering HR strategy, implementing individual performance strategies, creating and executing a corporate social responsibility strategy as well as a new discussion of international HRM strategies << Online resources: lecture slides, an instructor’s manual and a student’s manual complete with a bibliography and glossary

Description Strategic human resource management has been taken up by academics, consultants and practitioners alike. However, the integration of human resource strategy with overall business strategy is often easier in theory than in practice. Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management provides a bridge between theory and practice, serving as a guide both to formulating human resource strategies and to implementing them. This completely revised sixth edition examines HRM and SHRM as well as organizational and functional strategies from a practical standpoint. It includes brand new chapters on developing and delivering HR strategy, implementing individual performance strategies, creating and executing a corporate social responsibility strategy as well as a new discussion of international HRM strategies. Full of case studies, checklists and practical examples, Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management is an indispensable resource for all those who are involved in putting complex strategy into practice to effect positive and productive change. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, an instructor’s manual and a student’s manual complete with a bibliography and glossary.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction The framework of strategic HRM 2.1 Human resource management 2.2 Strategic management 2.3 Strategic human resource management 2.4 The strategic role of HR 3 HRM strategy in general 3.1 The nature of HR strategy 3.2 Developing HR strategy 3.3 Delivering HR strategy 4 HRM strategies related to organizational capability and organizational and individual performance 4.1 Organization development strategy 4.2 Human capital management strategy 4.3 Knowledge management strategy 4.4 Corporate social responsibility strategy 4.5 Organizational performance strategy 4.6 Individual performance management strategy 5 HRM strategies dealing with specific aspects of HRM 5.1 Employee engagement strategy 5.2 Resourcing strategy 5.3 Talent management strategy 5.4 Learning and development strategy 5.5 Reward strategy 5.6 Employee relations strategy

6 The international scene 6.1 Strategic international HRM 6.2 International HRM strategies

Human Resources Management


Strategic Internal Communication How to Build Employee Engagement and Performance Edition: 2 Date: 06/28/2017 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478650 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478667 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Dr David Cowan is a visiting scholar in the Communications Department at Boston College, USA. He has worked with a variety of clients, including SABIC, Honeywell Aerospace, SAP, Saudi Aramco, HewlettPackard, and has taught the Dialogue Box to over 600 participants in America, Britain, China, Netherlands, India, Saudi Arabia, Singapore and South Korea. He is former Global Head of Internal Communications at ArcelorMittal and has worked at the World Bank and as a finance and technology journalist. He holds degrees from the University of Oxford and the University of St Andrews, where he earned his PhD.

154

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Helps improve employee engagement and performance by ensuring business goals are effectively communicated to staff << Combines theory and practice - including case studies from the author’s own experience - for confidently designing and implementing a strategic approach to internal communications << New to this edition: Specific guidance on how to use the Dialogue Box tool to communicate organizational restructures more successfully and avoid misunderstandings among employees

Description Previously restricted to cascading information and managing day-to-day conversations, internal communication is now essential to empowering employees to deliver business strategy. Strategic Internal Communication shows how to design and implement a strategy which will lead to engaged and motivated staff, increased productivity and consequently improved business performance. The book uses the author’s own Dialogue Box tool designed to help companies explore more thoroughly what kinds of conversations they need to have with employees to address internal and cultural challenges. It helps transform organizations into open and transparent communities to ensure that entire workforces are committed to the overall business vision. This fully updated 2nd edition of Strategic Internal Communication includes new information on how to use Dialogue Box during times of transition and organizational change. It also gives advice on how to manage difficult conversations and avoid damaging miscommunication and misinterpretation. Supported by examples and case studies from the author’s own experience, Strategic Internal Communication is an indispensable guide to creating an integrated and collaborative culture which will take your organization to the next level of success.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction The New Organizational Triangle – Internal Communications, Employee Engagement and HR 3 Culture Shock – Corporate Culture Does Not Exist 4 Communicating Through Change, Changing Through Communication 5 Dialogue and the Digital World 6 Zone 1 – Intelligence – How Organizations and People Think 7 Zone 2 – Emotion – How Organizations and People Feel 8 Zone 3 – Interpretation – How Organizations and People Understand 9 Zone 4 – Narrative – How Organizations and People Agree (or Disagree!) 10 The End Zone – Ensuring Effective Dialogue – How Organizations and People Talk 11 Using the Dialogue Box

Human Resources Management


Effective HR Communication A Framework for Communicating HR Programmes with Impact Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $44.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476168 ISBN Ebook: 9780749476199 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Debra Corey is an experienced HR professional, with over 30 years of experience as a rewards practitioner. She is currently the group reward director at Reward Gateway, having held similar roles at global organizations such as PageGroup, Merlin Entertainments, Quintiles, Honeywell and Gap. Debra has developed and led a variety of award-winning communication campaigns, and currently teaches a communications course through WorldatWork.

155

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides the HR practitioner with the tools for designing and delivering communications campaigns << Includes checklists for each stage and tips from experts on ‘dos’ and ‘don’ts’ along the way, with case studies from leading companies << Enables the HR practitioner to demonstrate the value they are adding to the organization by effectively communicating the benefits of the projects and programmes they are implementing

Description In today’s competitive environment where we are doing everything we can to compete for talent, effective communication ensures we are showcasing our HR programmes in a way which will help us attract, retain and engage talent. Whether introducing new HR programmes or re-launching existing ones, communications help us deliver the key messages so that employees understand, appreciate and action them to meet our HR and business objectives. Effective HR Communication is a practical guide to develop and deliver effective communication campaigns, ensuring that teams have the knowledge, skills and tools to achieve the desired objectives. Effective HR Communication introduces a six-step ‘IMPACT’ model to explain and demonstrate the critical steps to be followed when developing a communications campaign. This includes steps such as understanding the communication needs and requirements of employees, developing the most robust objectives, selecting and developing the appropriate medium, planning a campaign in an effective manner, leveraging the support of business partners, developing effective communications content, and measuring the success of the campaign. Using a combination of theory, examples, tips and tools from leading experts, this book provides practical information which can easily be used to create effective and impactful communications. Case studies from leading organizations such as BT, LV=, Merlin Entertainments and Reward Gateway are included to further illustrate how communication has been done effectively.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Investigation Medium Planning Allies Content Testing Case Study: BT employee share plan project 8 Case Study: LV= pensions project Case Study: LV= !nnovate project 9 Merlin Entertainments 10 Case Study: Reward Gateway Project Solar 11 Conclusion

Human Resources Management


Internal Communications A Manual for Practitioners Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2014 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469320 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469337 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Liam FitzPatrick is Joint Managing Partner of change communication consultancy Agenda Strategies. He has worked both in-house and for major consultancies running change campaigns, developing communications teams and advising on metrics and evaluation. Liam co-founded the Black Belt series of training for internal communicators and lectures and has served as an external examiner at UK universities. A Fellow of the UK Chartered Institute of Public Relations, he has been involved in planning the education and training of PR practitioners. He is a also member of the Global Certification Council of the International Association of Business Communicators.

This book

<< Offers a refreshingly practical introduction to internal communications which covers all the core

concepts and models, skills and processes << Helps readers both understand key theories and put them into practice with tools and advice throughout << Includes ready-to-use templates for communications in a variety of situations, including crises, health and safety, branding, redundancy and bad news, mergers and acquisitions, customer service and new business strategies << Supported by online resources, including slides for lecturers

Description Get internal communications right in your organization and the benefits are clear: motivated staff, better financial performance, a strong external reputation and delighted customers are just a few of the reasons why getting your message over to staff effectively matters. Internal Communications explores what good practice in internal communications looks like, providing a no-nonsense, step-bystep approach to devising an internal communications strategy. Written by experts with extensive experience as consultants and in-house leaders in the private, public and not-for-profit sectors, Internal Communications covers how to build an internal communications team and plan; devise messages and decide which channels to use; work with line managers and senior leaders; research and evaluate internal communications and support change within an organization. Supported by easy to follow models, example explanations of the core theory, and case studies, it provides students and internal communicators alike with the practical tools and advice they need to make a difference in an organization. The book is also supported by online resources, including slides for lecturers.

Table of Contents 1

What internal communication is and why it matters 2 Organizing internal communication 3 Planning 4 Audiences 5 Messaging 6 Channels 7 Why line managers matter and how to support them 8 Working with senior leaders 9 Change 10 Research and evaluation for internal communicators 11 Developing yourself and the team

Klavs Valskov is Joint Managing Partner of change communication consultancy Agenda Strategies. Since 1999 he has worked in PR, marketing and communication with organisations including Lâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;Oreal, Accenture, Nordea Bank and the Danish Government. From 2008-2013 Klavs was the award-winning Global Director of Communication in Maersk Line managing a team around the world working on public relations, crises, internal communications, social media and customer campaigns. Klavs is part of the Advisory Board at the Institute of Business Communication at Copenhagen Business School. He holds a double MA in Communication and Business Studies.

156

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Human Resources Management


Predictive HR Analytics Mastering the HR Metric Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473914 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473921 Pages: 472 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Martin R. Edwards is reader in HRM and Organisational Psychology at King’s College London. Martin has run many HR analytic workshops with FTSE companies, conducted and advised on employee engagement surveys and taught statistics to undergraduate and postgraduate students. Kirsten A. Edwards, MCIPD, works with Pearn Kandola LLP as a diversity specialist. Prior to this, she held various roles at Coutts including associate director for culture, engagement and diversity. She has over sixteen years’ experience across four continents in the financial, technology, professional services and public sectors. She is a guest lecturer at Kings College London.

This book

<< Shows how to use predictive analysis with HR metrics, whether analysing the data themselves or

employing external consultants << Is accompanied by a companion website with Excel files and SPSS data files for working through the case study examples << Helps develop skills in presenting the data and linking it to organizational strategy, demonstrating the value of the HR function to the company’s bottom line << Includes case studies of particular types of predictive models including diversity analysis, predicting turnover, evaluating interventions and predicting performance << Online resources: data sets for using alongside the book

Description Where other functions of an organization deal in profits, sales growth, forecasts and strategic planning, the HR function is responsible for employee well-being, engagement and motivation. Such concerns do not immediately conjure up images of analytical know-how, despite the fact that in reality the management of such things often requires a lot of measurement and technical skill. Predictive HR Analytics provides a clear, accessible framework with which to understand and work with HR analytics at an advanced level, taking HR professionals through examples of particular predictive models so they can develop effective HR strategies based on evidence. Predictive HR Analytics will show step-by-step, using simple terms, how to carry out analysis (using the statistical package SPSS) and interpret the results, helping to communicate the potential of HR analytics and get the most out of the HR function, whether carrying out the analysis or briefing external consultants. The book will help deliver a credible and reliable service to businesses by providing metrics on which executives will be able to make sound business decisions. Online supporting resources include data sets for using alongside the book.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

157

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Understanding HR Analytics HR Information Systems and Data Analysis Strategies Case Study 1: Diversity Analytics Case Study 2: Employee Attitude Surveys – Engagement and Workforce Perceptions Case Study 3: Predicting Employee Turnover Case Study 4: Predicting Employee Performance Case Study 5: Recruitment and Selection Analytics Case Study 6: Monitoring the Impact of Interventions Business Applications: Scenario Modelling and Business Cases More Advanced HR Analytic Techniques Reflection on HR Analytics: Usage, Ethics and Limitations

Human Resources Management


Data-driven Organization Design Sustaining the Competitive Edge Through Organizational Analytics Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474416 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474423 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Rupert Morrison is the CEO of Concentra, a leading analytics company and winner of the Technology Innovation Award 2011 in The Sunday Times Tech Track 100. He led the creation of OrgVue, a solution for HR analytics, organization design and workforce planning. Rupert’s aim is to revolutionize the way people see, plan and manage their organizations to gain competitive advantage. His approach combines his experiences of running a tech firm with supply chain optimization, capacity planning and organization design projects.

158

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Shows how to use visualization of data as an aid to design so that the practitioner can actually ‘see’ what is going on in their organization << Advises on what data to collect and how to manage and present it so that meaningful conclusions can be drawn << Offers real-world insights into mistakes and successes from the author’s own experiences to show what really works when implementing a large design

Description Data is changing the nature of competition. Making sense of it is tough; taking advantage of it is even tougher. There is a clear business opportunity for organizations to use data and analytics to transform business performance. Data-driven Organization Design provides a practical framework for HR and organization design practitioners to build a baseline of data, set objectives, carry out fixed and dynamic process design, map competencies, and right-size the organization so everyone performs to their potential and organizations have a hope of getting and sustaining a competitive edge. Data-driven Organization Design shows how to collect the right data on organizations, present it meaningfully and ask the right questions of it to help complex, fluid organizations constantly evolve and meet moving objectives. Through the use of case studies, practical tips, and sample exercises, it explains in detail how to use data and analytics to connect all the elements of the system so you can design an environment for people to perform, an organization which has the right people, in the right place, doing the right things, at the right time. Whether you are looking to implement a long-term transformation, large redesign, or a one-off small scale project, Data-driven Organization Design will guide you through making the most of organizational data and analytics to drive business performance.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1

Introduction Data Driven Organization Design Challenges Foundations and core concepts Macro Design Introduction Strategy articulation and design criteria 2.2 Structural options and business case 3 Micro Design 3.1 Introduction 3.2 The data goldmine 3.3 Objectives management 3.4 Fixed process design 3.5 Dynamic process design 3.6 Competency management 3.7 Rightsizing 4 Making it Real 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Common traps 4.3 HOWWIP 4.4 Implementation 4.5 Workforce planning 4.6 Talent management, succession development and planning 4.7 Organizational getting things done 4.8 Sustaining the edge

Human Resources Management


Data-Driven HR How to Use Analytics and Metrics to Drive Performance Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482466 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482473 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Bernard Marr is a big data guru and bestselling author. A strategic performance consultant, he has and advised many of the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s best-known organizations including Accenture, Barclays, BP, DHL, Fujitsu, Gartner, HSBC, Mars, Microsoft, Oracle, The Home Office, NHS, Orange, Tetley, T-Mobile, Toyota, Royal Air Force, SAP and Shell on their business and data strategies. A frequent keynote speaker, he also writes on the topic of data and analytics for various publications including Forbes, the Huffington Post and LinkedIn Pulse. Bernard Marr is also the author of Data Strategy (2017) published by Kogan Page.

159

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Shows how to take a data-driven approach to recruitment, engagement, safety, wellbeing, training and performance management << Helps HR professionals analyse the vast amount of company data to gain tangible organizational insights and drive performance << Includes guidance on how to ensure data collection is transparent and that employees understand what information is being collected and why

Description Traditionally seen as a purely people function unconcerned with numbers, HR is now uniquely placed to use company data to drive performance, both of the people in the organization and the organization as a whole. Data-driven HR is a practical guide which enables HR professionals to leverage the value of the vast amount of data available at their fingertips. Covering how to identify the most useful sources of data, collect information in a transparent way that is in line with data protection requirements and turn this data into tangible insights, this book marks a turning point for the HR profession. Covering all the key elements of HR including recruitment, employee engagement, performance management, wellbeing and training, Data-driven HR examines the ways data can contribute to organizational success by, among other things, optimizing processes, driving performance and improving HR decision making. Packed with case studies and real-life examples, this is essential reading for all HR professionals looking to make a measurable difference in their organizations.

Table of Contents 1 What is data-driven HR? 1.1 The evolution of intelligent (and super-intelligent) HR 1.2 Data-driven strategy: making a business case for more intelligent HR 1.3 Capitalizing on the data explosion: identifying key sources of HR-relevant data 1.4 Data-driven HR tools: turning data into insights with HR analytics 1.5 Potential pitfalls: looking at data privacy, transparency and security 1.6 Data-driven recruitment 1.7 Data-driven employee engagement 1.8 Data-driven employee safety and wellness 1.9 Data-driven learning and development 1.10 Data-driven performance management 1.11 The future of data-driven HR

Human Resources Management


The Psychology of Work Insights into Successful Working Practices Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2015 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468347 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468354 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Chantal Gautier is a London-based academic, Chartered Psychologist and eclectic professional with consultancy skills, specializing in a wide range of academic and business activities. Her successful track record in Higher Education warranted the Teaching Fellow Award for Excellence in Teaching and Learning. Chantal continues to apply her academic knowledge and teaching skills in a range of settings. Her breadth of experience and specialist insight into leadership, team development, employee engagement, Change Management and customer services, has led to contributions in both public and private sectors, as well as internationally.

160

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Contains narratives from experienced professionals from around the world offering insights into

real-world working practices in organizations including BBC, Santander, IBM and Qantas << Is based on extensive research with university students about their attitudes to future employment and how well prepared for the work place they feel << Integrates psychological theory with personal narrative to bring the theory to life and to propose new ways of thinking about work

Description The Psychology of Work integrates psychological theory with personal narrative from global industry leaders, as well as those entering the workforce, to offer tangible insights into the real world of work. It is ideal for students, professionals and anyone with an interest in how successful organizations operate. It charts the development of the field of organizational psychology and provides the key theoretical frameworks. Crucially, it explores how these can be utilized to enhance organizational culture, and why this is so relevant and important in the modern workplace. Through the inclusion of interviews with students, The Psychology of Work reveals what the future workforce expect of the organizations that they are going into and encourages students reading the book to reflect on what kind of leaders they would like to be. The book is also a valuable resource to support professionals and practitioners, highlighting current working practices and the need for change, offering practical guidance on how to bring the â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;humaneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; back into organizational life.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Introduction Recruitment and selection Employability Teams Barriers and intricacies Organizational culture Leadership Motivation and engagement

Human Resources Management


Myths of Work The Stereotypes and Assumptions Holding Your Organization Back Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481285 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481292 Pages: 192 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Ian MacRae is Director of High Potential, an organizational consultancy providing customized psychological tests and reports for improving performance, predicting potential and developing people. Adrian Furnham is Professor of Psychology at UCL and Adjunct Professor of Management at the Norwegian School of Management. He has written over 1000 scientific papers and 70 books and is among the most well-known psychologists in the world. Adrian is also a newspaper columnist at The Sunday Times. He has written regularly for The Financial Times, The Daily Telegraph and is a contributor to stations including the BBC, CNN, and ITV.

This book

<< Explores over 27 of the most pervasive myths about the workplace - from the serious to the silly -

and debunks them through compelling research. << Overturns stereotype and misinformation to help you become a better manager in the modern workplace << Includes fascinating real life examples from organizations and industries around the world << Is written by Sunday Times Columnist and performance expert Ian Macrae and best-selling author Adrian Furnham, Professor of Psychology at UCL << Tackles fascinating myths about workplaces such as: surveillance improves performance, computers are going to take all of our jobs, workplace romantic relationships should be banned and fads like table tennis tables will make your staff happier

Description Buying a table tennis table will make your staff happier. Working eight hours a day, five days a week, will result in the most productivity. Paying higher salaries will always result in higher motivation. But will it really? There are a staggering number of myths, stereotypes and out-of-date rules that abound in the workplace. This can make it feel impossible to truly know how to get the most out of your career, your team and your organization. In Myths of Work, Ian MacRae and Adrian Furnham take an entertaining and evidence-based look at the most pervasive myths about our working lives, from the serious to the ridiculous, to give you the insight you need to become a better manager in the modern workplace. Fascinating real life case studies from organizations around the world display the myths (and how to overcome them) in practice. Myths of Work takes the most up-to-date academic research in business and psychology and combines it with practical insights, a lively writing style and a handy dip-in-and-out structure to form your ultimate guide to becoming a better enlightened manager.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

161

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Myth 1 - Staff Should Work 8 Hours a Day Monday to Friday Myth 2 - Working From Home Reduces Productivity Myth 3 - Social Media Should Never Be Used at Work Myth 4 - Listening to Music Whilst Working is Distracting Myth 5 - Health and Safety is the Enemy Myth 6 - Surveillance Improves Performance Myth 7 - Creating a Google-Style Office Environment Will Make Staff More Innovative Myth 8 - Mindfulness is the Answer to all Problems Myth 9 - Neuroscience is the Silver Bullet to Workplace Problems Myth 10 - Start-Ups Need a Different Type of Leader to Succeed Myth 11 - It’s Better to have Higher Self-Esteem at Work Myth 12 - We Only Use 10% of our Brain at Work Myth 13 - Making Workplaces Sustainable is a Burden Myth 14 - The Best Way to Motivate People is to Pay Them More Myth 15 - Employees Who Work the Longest are the Most Valuable People Myth 16 - People Should Retire at 65

17 Myth 17 - Perfectionists Make the Best Employees 18 Myth 18 - Women aren’t as Competitive as Men at Work 19 Myth 19 - People Personalities can be Categorised 20 Myth 20 - Sexuality and Gender should be Taken into Account at Work 21 Myth 21 - Millennials are Changing the Workplace 22 Myth 22 - Co-Workers Shouldn’t Form Romantic Relationships 23 Myth 23 - Teaching and Training are the Same 24 Myth 24 - Annual Appraisals are the Best Way to Measure Performance 25 Myth 25 - High Achievers Make Great Managers 26 Myth 26 - A Computer is Going to Take Your Job 27 Myth 27 - Open Plan Offices are Always the Best Option

Human Resources Management


Research Methods in Human Resource Management Investigating a Business Issue Edition: 3 Date: 04/24/2013 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983088 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983545 Pages: 456 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Human Resources Management

Author Information Dr. Valerie Anderson, Chartered MCIPD, is Principal Lecturer in HRM at Portsmouth University Business School, UK. She gained extensive HRM and HRD management and consultancy experience in a range of different public and private sector organizations before moving to a career in higher education. Valerie’s main teaching activities relate to research methods, leadership and management, and learning, training and development. Her research interests are focused on learning and development in work organizations. She was the lead researcher for two CIPD research projects: The Value of Learning (2007) and Coaching at the Sharp End (2009).

162

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Breaks down a typical HRM project so students and others conducting research can understand

research methods and develop the necessary skills << New to this edition: increased attention to methodology issues, more real-life examples, a discussion of ethics in line with current research and practice, ‘Review and Reflect’ sections at the end of each chapter to apply learning to personal experience and professional development, multiple-choice questions for students to track their learning and a glossary of terms << Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links

Description Fully mapped to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module on Investigating a Business Issue from an HR Perspective, Research Methods in Human Resource Management is a key resource for anyone undertaking a research report. It covers the planning and execution of HRM research projects, from investigating and researching HR issues to designing and implementing research and then evaluating and reviewing the results. Filled with international examples to provide a global perspective, this fully updated 3rd edition of Research Methods in Human Resource Management balances theoretical frameworks and practical guidance. It includes increased attention to methodology issues, more real-life examples and a discussion of ethics in line with current research and practice. ‘Review and Reflect’ sections at the end of each chapter help apply learning to personal experience and professional development, and multiple-choice questions and a glossary of terms help students understand the key concepts. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Investigating and Researching HR Issues 2 Plan and Design the Research 2.1 First Stages Towards an HR Project 2.2 Finding and Reviewing HR Literature and Information Sources 2.3 Ethics, Professionalism and HR Research 2.4 Planning the Research Process 3 Implement Your Research 3.1 Finding and Using Documents and Organisational Evidence 3.2 Collecting and Recording Qualitative Data 3.3 Analysing Qualitative Data 3.4 Collecting and Recording Quantitative Data 3.5 Analysing Quantitative Data 4 Evaluate and Review 4.1 Writing Up Your Project and Making Recommendations 4.2 Developing Effective Links Between Research and Practice

Human Resources Management


International Human Resource Management A Case Study Approach Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2017 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480981 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480998 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: International Human Resource Management

Author Information Daniel Wintersberger is a teaching fellow at Birmingham Business School in the UK, specializing in International Human Resource Management. He currently teaches on the MBA (HRM), MSc in Human Resource Management and the BSc in Business Management. Previously, Daniel lectured at Cardiff University Business School and Swansea School of Management. He has conducted research for the International Transport Workers’ Federation (ITF) and worked with the British Airline Pilots’ Association (BALPA). His professional and research experience spans Central and Eastern Europe, China, India and Brazil.

163

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Fully examines the functional elements of International HRM including recruitment and selection,

rewards and benefits, performance management, training and development, employment relations and job design << Includes global case studies from a range of organizations such as Telefonica, McDonald’s, Toyota, Unilever and Volkswagen << Online resources: additional case studies, lecture slides for each chapter, self-test multiple-choice questions for students, discussion questions and further reading

Description In the face of globalization, multinational companies have become the norm, rather than the exception. HR professionals now need to manage across borders, cultures and time zones, meaning that a complete understanding of the theory and practice of International Human Resource Management (HRM) is essential. International Human Resource Management is a concise introduction for all students studying International HRM at the Masters level. It covers everything from the cultural and institutional contexts, international employment law and the role of International Framework Agreements to recruitment and selection, training and development, performance management, reward and benefits, job design and other functional areas of International HRM. With numerous industry examples and global case studies from companies such as Telefonica, Unilever and Volkswagen, International Human Resource Management goes beyond the theory to fully explore how International HRM works in practice. It is an indispensable textbook to prepare students for successful careers in human resources. Online supporting resources include additional case studies, lecture slides for every chapter, self-test exercises for students, discussion questions and further reading.

Table of Contents 1

The Context of International 2.8 Conclusions: Change or HRM Continuance in National 1.1 Introduction and Background Systems of HRM? to International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger] 1.2 The Cultural Context of International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger] 1.3 Leadership Across Cultural Contexts [Avis Tam] 1.4 Cross-Cultural Communication [ James Baba Abugre] 1.5 The Institutional Context of International HRM [Daniel Wintersberger] 1.6 Global Labour Governance and Core Labour Standards [Christina Niforou] 2 Functional Areas of International HRM 2.1 International Recruitment, Selection and Talent Management [Peter Foss] 2.2 International Staffing in Multinational Companies [James Baba Abugre] 2.3 International Reward [Daniel Wintersberger] 2.4 International Training and Workforce Skills [Daniel Wintersberger] 2.5 International Employee Relations [Geraint Harvey] 2.6 Work Organization and Job Design across National Contexts [Daniel Wintersberger 2.7 and Jorge Muniz Jr]

International Human Resource Management


International Human Resource Management Edition: 4 Date: 01/15/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983750 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984184 Pages: 504 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: International Human Resource Management

This book

<< Explores cross-cultural HRM, comparative HRM and international HRM in detail << New to this edition: extended coverage of cross-cultural management, a broader scope of

countries and key topics such as global talent management, global leadership, global knowledge management, and differing national contexts << Online resources: instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides and additional case studies

Description International Human Resource Management is a critically engaging and student friendly textbook for International HRM modules at all levels, including the CIPD Level 7 Advanced International HRM module. Providing wide international coverage and incorporating a global strategy perspective, it offers a particular focus on cross-cultural, comparative and strategic HRM issues, with a strong emphasis on culture and its impact on organizational behaviour and HRM. This fully updated 4th edition of International Human Resource Management includes extended coverage of cross-cultural management, a broader scope of countries and key topics such as global talent management, global leadership, global knowledge management, and differing national contexts. Filled with geographically diverse examples and case studies, and covering topics from culture and reward systems to managing expatriate assignment and diversity in international forms of working, it is an ideal textbook for all students of international HRM as well as HRM specialists and practicing managers. Online supporting resources include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides and additional case studies.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Chris Brewster is a professor of International HRM at Henley Business School, UK.

1

Elizabeth Houldsworth is an associate professor of HRM at Henley Business School, UK. Paul Sparrow is the director of the Centre for Performance-Led HR and professor of International HRM at Lancaster University Management School, UK. Guy Vernon is an associate professor of Human Resource Management at Southampton University, UK.

164

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

International HRM - An Introduction 2 Cross-Cultural Human Resource Management 2.1 Differing National Contexts 2.2 The Impact of National Culture 2.3 Culture and Organisation Life 3 Comparative Human Resource Management 3.1 Employee Relations and Collective Communication 3.2 The Organisation of Work 3.3 Flexibility and Work Life Balance 3.4 Recruitment and Selection 3.5 Performance Management 3.6 Rewards 3.7 Training and Development 3.8 Global HRM Departments 4 International Human Resource Management 4.1 International HRM - Theory and Practice 4.2 Managing Expatriate Assignments 4.3 Managing Diversity in International Forms of Working 4.4 Integrating Global HRM Practices 4.5 Globalising HRM

International Human Resource Management


International Human Resource Management A Cross-Cultural and Comparative Approach Edition: 1 Date: 04/26/2013 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983002 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983538 Pages: 440 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: International Human Resource Management

Author Information Paul Iles is Professor of Leadership and HRM at Glasgow School for Business and Society, Glasgow Caledonian University, UK Dr. Crystal Ling Zhang is Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour at Leeds Business School, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK

165

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Includes contributions from experts on HR in specific countries and regions << Ideal for students studying International Human Resource Management for the first time or those

studying in their second language << Online resources: Lecturer guide, powerpoint slides, case studies and a bonus chapter on new directions in International HRM as well as annotated web links and self-test questions for students

Description International Human Resource Management is an essential book for all students and HR professionals looking to really understand international HRM. Covering the context of International HRM, HRM and National Culture, HRM in different regions and international HRM policies, this book provides thorough discussion and comprehensive consideration of all elements of international HRM, Full of contributions from experts in specific regions including North America, the Middle East and North Africa, India, Russia and China, this book will provide readers with a thorough understanding of HRM around the world. With crucial coverage of international HRM issues including cross-cultural leadership, business ethics, global talent supply and management as well as performance management of international staff, International Human Resource Management is essential reading for all those working or looking to work in HR around the world, particularly those looking to work in multinational companies. Fully supported by online resources including powerpoint slides, a lecturer guide, additional case studies and a bonus chapter on issues and new directions in International Human Resource Management as well as annotated web links and self-test questions for students.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction and Context 1.1 International HRM, National Differences and the Transfer of HRM (Paul Iles) 1.2 National Difference, Culture and IHRM (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles) 1.3 Globalisation and IHRM Policies at the Enterprise Level (Paul Iles) 2 HRM and National Culture 2.1 Cross-Cultural Learning Theories and Principles (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles) 2.2 Cross-Cultural and Global Leadership, Leadership Development and IHRM (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles) 2.3 Ethics, Culture and Corporate Social Responsibility (Paul Iles) 2.4 IHRM, Culture and Knowledge Flows in International Alliances, Joint Ventures, Mergers and Acquisitions (Paul Iles) 3 HRM in Different Regions 3.1 HRM in North America and Western Europe - The emergence of a â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;Westernâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; HRM model? (Paul Iles) 3.2 HRM in Russia and Central and Eastern Europe (Paul Iles) 3.3 HRM in the Middle East and North Africa (Paul Iles & Niki Kyriakidou) 3.4 HRM in Sub-Saharan Africa (Paul Iles) 3.5 HRM in Latin America (Paul Iles) 3.6 HRM in India (Crystal Zhang,

Shakiya Nisa & Paul Iles) 3.7 HRM in China (Paul Iles & Xiaoxian Zhu) 4 International HRM Policies in IES 4.1 Employee Resourcing - Staffing, Recruitment and Selection in International Contexts (Paul Iles and Tingting Jiang) 4.2 Cross-Cultural Training and International HRD (Crystal Zhang & Paul Iles) 4.3 Global Talent Management (Paul Iles, Xiaoxian Zhu) 4.4 Managing the Performance of International Staff (Paul Iles) 4.5 Global Reward Management, Organisational Benefits and Employer Branding (Paul Iles and Tingting Jiang) 4.6 Employment Relations and Employee Voice in a Global Context (Paul Iles)

International Human Resource Management


International Human Resource Development Learning, Education and Training for Individuals and Organizations Edition: 3 Date: 10/28/2012 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749461065 ISBN Ebook: 9780749461072 Pages: 536 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: International Human Resource Management

Author Information John P Wilson is a researcher and consultant with 40 years’ experience in education and training, working with a range of international organizations. He currently teaches at the University of Oxford and the University of Sheffield. He is also Director of the EU Commission project Call Centre Training and Knowledge Transfer. He is the author of The Call Centre Training Handbook and Experiential Learning (both also published by Kogan Page).

This book

<< Substantiates the value of learning and development and shows you how to get the most out of

investing in your workforce << Helps you identify learning needs and evaluate whether your training programmes have been effective << Demonstrates the relationship between HRD and HRM and why this is important in increasing the performance of your organization as a whole << Substantiates its arguments with case studies from experts in the field of human resource development worldwide << Supports you in encouraging constructive and positive learning and training

Description International Human Resource Development provides thought-provoking questions and stimulating answers to key issues in human resource development today, putting HRD in its strategic organizational context and examining in depth the process of learning from different perspectives. <0x000D>This third edition provides a thorough exploration of international human resource development, and has been completely updated and revised with a variety of case studies and contributions from a range of HR development experts, making it the most topical book in this field. It also addresses the increasingly important area of knowledge management, incorporating learning and development. Clearly structured and mapped against the current Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) standards, this comprehensive handbook covers each aspect of the training cycle, including the role and identification of learning, training and development needs in organizations, working in multicultural and multilingual settings, learning and competitive strategy, planning and design, delivering effective training programmes, assessment and evaluation, international development and managing the human resource function.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.2 3

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

3.5

3.6

166

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

International human resource development and learning International human resource development – John P Wilson Strategic human resource development – Thomas N Garavan and Ronan Carbery What is learning? – John P Wilson Organizational learning Change management and organization development – John P Wilson Knowledge management – Eduardo Tomé National and international learning, education, training and human resource development National systems of education – John P Wilson UK vocational education and training – John P Wilson European vocational education and training – Martin Mulder National human resource development strategies: comparing Brazil, Russia, India and China – Alexandre Ardichvili, Elena K Zavyalova and Vera N Minina International development: policy learning as an approach to VET reform in transition and development countries – Sören Nielsen and Madlen Serban Capacity development and

4 5 5.1

6 6.1 6.2

7 7.1 7.2

7.3 8 8.1 9 9.1

human resource development – Dalia Al-Zendi and John P Wilson The training cycle Identification of learning needs The identification of learning needs – Richard Palmer, Allan Claudius Queiroz Barbosa, Leandro Pinheiro Cintra, Junia Marcal Rodrigues and Juliana Barbosa e Oliveira IDesign Designing learning events – David Simmonds Working in multicultural and multilingual environments: HRD professionals as learning and change agents in the global workplace – Maria Cseh and Beatriz Coningham IDelivery Delivering training – John Kirkham and Jacqueline Pattison Informal, non-formal and work-based methods of learning – Jacqueline Pattison, John Kirkham and Mariana Gabriela Hudrea Coaching and mentoring – Stephanie T Sturges Evaluation Assessment and evaluation – Tanuja Agarwala Managing HRD Leadership and management development – Ronan Carbery and Thomas N Garavan

International Human Resource Management

9.2 Managing human resource development functions and services – Barney Erasmus and Pieter Loedolff 9.3 HRD practice and research: investigating business issues through applied social science research – K Peter Kuchinke 9.4 HRD and consultancy – Kiran Trehan and Clare Rigg 9.5 Learning spaces that change people and organizations – Colin Beard and Ilfryn Price 9.6 HRD and business ethics – Alexandre Ardichvili and Douglas Jondle


Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR Developing Effective People Skills for Better Leadership and Management

This book

<< Fully aligns with the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) ‘Leading, Managing

and Developing People’ and ‘Developing Skills for Business Leadership’ modules << Written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages << Online resources: lecture slides, an instructor’s manual, a student’s manual and a literature review << Explores the key concepts of leadership, management and people development as it relates to the HR function

Edition: 4 Date: 11/28/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478155 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478162 Pages: 472 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Leadership

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twentyone languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

167

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

To make an effective contribution, HR specialists have to be good at management, leadership and developing both themselves and others. They also need to be aware of the management and business considerations that affect their work. Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR provides guidance on the processes of management and leadership with particular reference to what HR managers and aspiring managers need to know and do to make a difference. Written by renowned human resources expert and bestselling author Michael Armstrong, Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR covers in one volume the ‘Leading, Managing and Developing People’ and ‘Developing Skills for Business Leadership’ Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) modules. It includes numerous practical features such as case studies, practitioner interviews, exercises and clear learning objectives to aid learning. This is the essential book for HR students and professionals looking to broaden their skills and understanding relating to management and leadership. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, an instructor’s manual, a student’s manual and a literature review.

1

Leading, managing and developing people fundamentals 1.1 Leadership 1.2 Management 1.3 Developing people 2 Human resource management and learning and development 2.1 The essence of human resource management 2.2 The practice of HRM 2.3 The practice of learning and development 2.4 The contribution of HRM and L&D in different types of organizations 2.5 The professional and ethical approach to HRM and L&D 3 People management processes 4 Motivation 4.1 Commitment 4.2 Employee engagement 4.3 Change management 4.4 Flexible working 4.5 Managing diversity and inclusion 5 Leadership, management and learning and development skills 5.1 Leadership skills 5.2 Management skills 5.3 People management skills 5.4 Learning and development skills 5.5 Managing interpersonal relationships at work 5.6 Managing oneself

Leadership

5.7 Problem solving and decision making 5.8 Analytical, critical and consultancy skills 5.9 Information handling skills 5.10 Business and financial skills 5.11 Postgraduate study skills


Leading, Managing and Developing People Edition: 5 Date: 04/15/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984122 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984375 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Leadership

Author Information Gary Rees is Head of the Organization Studies and Human Resource Management at Portsmouth Business School, UK Ray French was previously Principal Lecturer in Organizational Behaviour at Portsmouth Business School, UK

This book

<< Provides comprehensive coverage of key issues including leadership development, professionalism,

motivation at work, employee engagement and retention << New to this edition: insights on cutting-edge issues and debates in the field including lean management as well as additional international case studies and increased theoretical links between topics << Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, example essay questions as well as annotated web links, a glossary and additional case studies for students

Description Leading, Managing and Developing People is critical reading for all those studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module in Leading, Managing and Developing People as well as all HR and L&D practitioners. It provides extensive coverage of the aims, objectives and contribution of HRM such as the scope and nature of human resources, HR’s role when organisations grow and how to ensure professionalism and ethical behaviour when managing people. This book also includes discussion of major contemporary themes in leading, managing and developing people including leadership development, flexibility, agile working and the psychological contract. This ensures that readers are fully prepared to lead, manage and develop staff in the new world of work. With rigorous academic underpinning and clear theoretical exploration, Leading, Managing and Developing People also includes practical advice on key activities including recruitment, job design, performance management, motivation and reward. Supported by online resources including an instructor’s manual, lecture slides, international case studies, example essay questions and annotated web links, this is an indispensable guide for both students and practitioners.

Table of Contents 1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

168

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction [Gary Rees and Ray French] The Scope and Nature of Human Resource Management and Human Resource Development [Gary Rees] HRM Contributions in Different Settings [Charlotte Rayner and Liza Howe-Walsh] Professionalism and Ethics in Managing People [Matthew Anderson and Charlotte Rayner] Leadership and Leader Development [Wenjin Dai & Alex Tymon] Managing Change [Gary Rees and David Hall] Flexibility and the Psychological Contract [Ray French] Organisational and Job Design [Ray French] Recruitment and Selection [Sally Rumbles and Ray French] Developing Employees [Alex Tymon and Margaret Mackay] Managing the Employment Relationship [Sally Rumbles and Peter Scott] Performance Management, Motivation and Reward [Gary Rees and Alex Tymon] Summary Themes and Future Trends [Ray French and Gary Rees]

Leadership


Developing Skills for Business Leadership Edition: 2 Date: 02/17/2014 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983163 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983651 Pages: 568 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Leadership

Author Information Gillian Watson is a principal lecturer in the Faculty of Business and Law at the University of Sunderland, UK, responsible for international development and partnerships. She has undertaken additional senior roles in the faculty such as HRM team leader and chair of the Applied Management, FdA and HND board. Stefanie Reissner is a lecturer at Newcastle University Business School, UK. She is currently degree programme director for a dual Masters in conjunction with Rijksuniversiteit Groningen in the Netherlands. She is a fellow of the Higher Education Academy and an associate academic member of CIPD.

This book

<< Focuses on three core areas for successful professional development and practice: managing

yourself and others, transferable managerial skills and postgraduate study skills << New to this edition: new chapter on reflecting and coaching, updated references to the CIPD’s HR Profession Map, IT skills integrated into each chapter, more coverage of stress, health and wellbeing and enhanced international dimension throughout the text << Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, additional case studies, and sample assignments, checklists and exam guides lecturers can use in their teaching

Description Mapped to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name, Developing Skills for Business Leadership focuses on three core areas for successful professional development and practice: managing yourself and others, transferable managerial skills and postgraduate study skills. Each skill is covered both conceptually and practically by a subject area expert to help all readers analyze and critically evaluate, manage more effectively, make sound and justifiable decisions and lead and influence others. Covering key concepts such as developing your professional identity, effective management of interpersonal relationships at work, people management and interpreting financial information, this fully updated 2nd edition of Developing Skills for Business Leadership is ideal for all postgraduate business students taking a module in professional development, career development or management skills. Integrating IT skills into each chapter, it includes a new chapter on reflecting and coaching, updated references to the CIPD’s HR Profession Map, additional coverage of stress, health and wellbeing and an enhanced international dimension throughout the text. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides as well as additional case studies, and sample assignments, checklists and exam guides lecturers can use in their teaching.

Table of Contents 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13

169

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Skills for Continuing Professional Development and Practice (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner and Gillian Watson) Essential Skills for Postgraduate Study and Beyond (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) Practical Aspects of Postgraduate Study Skills (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) Concepts of Self and SelfManagement Skills (Kevin Gallagher) Developing Your Professional Identity (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) Skills for Learning, Training and Development (Gillian Watson) Coaching, Professional Development and Practice (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) Effective Team-Building and Communication (Gillian Watson) Negotiation and the Management of Interpersonal Relationships at Work (Dr. Lesley Mearns) Constructive Performance Management (Dr. Lesley Mearns) Leadership and Team Dynamics (Gillian Watson) Leading Change and Development in Organisations (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) Introduction to Quantitative Data Analysis (Dr. Andrew

Leadership

Simpson) 14 Interpreting Financial Information (Mike Ashwell) 15 Managing Financial Resources (Mike Ashwell) 16 Effective Decision-Making and Problem-Solving (Gillian Watson) 17 Applying Skills for Business Leadership (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner and Gillian Watson) 18 Consolidating Leadership Skills: Project Management and Your Development (Kevin Gallagher and Gillian Watson)


Leadership and Management Development Edition: 1 Date: 04/20/2010 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982449 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983262 Pages: 424 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Leadership

Author Information Alan Mumford has published numerous articles and books and is a leading figure in the management development field.

This book

<< Features multiple perspectives alongside analysis and critique to help paint a full picture of the

subject << New to this edition: increased coverage of diversity, ecology, ethics and SMEs along with at least two case studies per chapter to support academic and critical context << Online resources: instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual and lecture slides

Description How do you measure managers and leaders? How do you assess their development needs? Leadership and Management Development covers these and other key topics that form the requirements for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name. Retitled and revised to focus on leadership as well as management, the book includes multiple perspectives from those who have either experienced or provided leadership and management development alongside analysis and critique to help paint a full picture of the subject. Students will learn to analyse the concepts of leadership and management, identify leadership and management development needs and formulate and implement strategies and interventions. This fully updated 5th edition of Leadership and Management Development features increased coverage of diversity, ecology, ethics and SMEs. At least two case studies per chapter support academic and critical context, and the book takes a more international perspective by considering global leaders and presenting international examples. It is ideal for students studying leadership and management development as part of a CIPD qualification or as part of a general business or HR degree. Online supporting resources include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1

Jeff Gold is a principal lecturer in Organisation Learning at Leeds Business School, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK.

2

Richard Thorpe is a professor of Management Development and deputy director of the Keyworth Institute at Leeds University Business School, University of Leeds, UK.

4 5 6

3

7 8 9 10 11 12 13

170

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Leaders and Managers, Leadership and Management Development Strategic Leadership and Management Development Measuring Leaders and Managers Assessing Development Needs Leaders, Managers and Learning Activities for the Development of Leaders and Managers Combining Work and Learning Evaluating Leadership and Management Development Leadership and Management Development and Social Capital The Future Supply of Leaders and Managers Diversity and Ecology Leadership and Management Development in Small and Medium-Sized Organisations Future Learning for Leaders and Managers

Leadership


Developing Leadership and Management Skills Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: ISBN Ebook: 9781843984559 Pages: 96 Format: Epub Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Learning and Development

This book

<< Explains the distinction between leadership and management << Includes different approaches to developing leaders and managers and the role of the learning and development function in this << Provides guidance on how to ensure the ownership and success of leadership and management development programmes

Description Developing Leadership and Management Skills is essential reading for anyone studying the Level 5 CIPD L&D module of the same name as well as all learning and development professionals looking to develop the skills of leaders and managers in their organisation. With a thorough grounding in scientific management, leadership theories and the similarities and differences between leaders and managers, reader will fully understand the distinction between the two roles. There is also comprehensive coverage of the role of L&D in developing leaders and managers including designing learning interventions, using e-learning and blending learning, talent development, succession planning and employee engagement. Developing Leadership and Management Skills also includes guidance on how L&D professionals can ensure ownership and success of leadership and management development programmes. This includes indicators of success, individualised interventions and how to demonstrate and communicate achievement of success ensuring that L&D professionals have all the tools they need to effectively develop leaders and managers in their organisation.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Jeff Gold is a principal lecturer in Organisation Learning at Leeds Business School, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK.

1 2

Lisa Anderson is Associate Head (Postgraduate Programmes) at the University of Liverpool Management School.

3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

18 19 20

171

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction The Distinction Between Leadership and Management Activity Scientific Management Human Relations School Leadership Theories Practices of Managers and Leaders Similarities and Differences Different Approaches to Developing Leaders and Managers, and the Role of the Learning and Development Function What is Leadership and Management Development? Leadership and Management Competencies The Learning and Development Role for LMD Designing Learning Interventions E-Learning and Blended Learning Talent Management and Succession Planning Employee Engagement Evaluation Ensuring Ownership and Success of Leadership and Management Development Programmes Introduction Indicators of Success Ensuring Value and Success from LMD

Learning and Development

21 Individualised Interventions 22 Demonstrating and Communicating Achievement of Success Indicators 23 References


Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace Edition: 3 Date: 05/15/2016 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984085 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984474 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Kathy Beevers, Chartered FCIPD, is a qualified trainer, coach and verifier based in the UK. She runs a training and qualifications consultancy called Lightbulb Learning Ltd Andrew Rea, Affiliate MCIPD, is trainer, coach and facilitator based in the UK with a background in management

This book

<< Shows how to effectively design, deliver, assess and evaluate learning and development activities in the workplace << New to this edition: coverage of all new topics in the updated CIPD L&D qualification as well as increased discussion of social media and a broader international perspective on the topic << Online resources: lecturer guides, PowerPoint slides, annotated web links (including podcasts) as well as additional activities and self-test questions for students

Description Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace is the definitive textbook for anyone studying the updated CIPD Level 3 Foundation Learning and Development (L&D) qualifications and is also ideal introductory reading for those at intermediate level. Part One provides practical guidance for L&D practitioners and Part Two provides essential coverage of all the underlying theories and models giving readers access to everything they need to excel as an L&D professional. Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace covers all aspects of L&D practice in an organization including how to identify L&D needs, how to design, deliver and evaluate learning and development activities as well as how to organise L&D events. There is also practical guidance on using technology to facilitate learning, how to enhance learner engagement and how to support collective and social learning. With a broader international perspective, extended coverage of social media and further critical exploration of learning models this new edition is an indispensable guide for students and practitioners alike. Online supporting resources include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links, and self-test questions and other activities for students.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

172

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Becoming an Effective Learning and Development Practitioner Learning and Development and the Organisation Identifying Learning and Development Needs Designing Learning and Development Activities Delivering Learning and Development Activities Evaluating Learning and Development Activities Using Technology to Facilitate Learning Enhancing Learner Engagement Supporting Collective and Social Learning Supporting Individual Learning through Coaching and Mentoring Assessing Learning and Development Organising Learning and Development Events

Learning and Development


Studying Learning and Development Context, Practice and Measurement Edition: 1 Date: 01/30/2017 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843984146 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984603 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator. Patricia Rogers is part of the Postgraduate Taught Strategy and Development Group responsible for the development of postgraduate taught strategies across Coventry University, UK.

173

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Is written and edited by experts with a wealth of experience in teaching, writing and examining in

the field of Learning and Development << Has an easy to navigate structure that takes students step-by-step through developing the knowledge and skills required for professional practice, the context of learning and development and fully utilising data in order to build a business case for its value within an organisation << Online resources: multiple-choice questions for self-assessment, web links, extra case studies and a glossary of key terms, as well as lecturer slides, guides and test banks

Description Studying Learning and Development is the essential textbook for anyone studying the field in order to further their professional development, and HR practitioners wishing to extend their understanding of its background and practical application. With a clear layout that is easy to navigate, it takes you step by step through developing the knowledge and skills required for professional practice, understanding the broader context of learning and development - including the influential factors on achieving strategic objectives and developing policies that suit your organisational needs - and fully utilising learning and development data in order to build a business case for its value within your organisation. Written and edited by experts in the field with a wealth of experience in teaching, writing and examining, Studying Learning and Development is the first and only text to map the unit learning outcomes of the three core modules for the CIPD Level 5 Intermediate level qualification. Its broad coverage means that it is also ideal for any students studying Learning and Development as part of a wider HR or business degree and wanting to gain a deeper appreciation for the knowledge, skills and planning required for the success of its policies and activities in practice. The additional resources available online, including multiple choice questions for self-assessment, web links to further resources, extra case studies and a glossary of key terms, as well as lecturer slides, guides and text banks, will enhance learning of the text and ensure thorough grounding in the theory. There are also six ebooks available to support the CIPD Level 5 Studying Learning and Development optional modules.

Table of Contents

Assertiveness Managing Relationships 1 The Knowledge, Skills and Presentation and Report Writing Behaviours Required of Summary Learning and Development Applying CPD Techniques Practitioners to Devise, Implement 1.1 Introduction and Review a Personal 1.2 Context for Learning and Development Plan Development 4.1 Introduction and Overview 1.3 Frameworks for Learning and 4.2 The Importance of CPD for Development Professionals in a Changing 1.4 L&D Knowledge and Skills Environment 1.5 Putting the Data to Work 4.3 Using Reflective Practice to 1.6 Designing Effective Learning Enrich Your CPD Process 1.7 How to Evaluate Learning 4.4 Stages of the CPD Cycle 1.8 Effective Communication for 4.5 CPD Learning Logs L&D Professionals 4.6 Sustaining the Motivation for 1.9 Concept of CPD CPD 2 Planning to Meet Personal 4.7 Summary Learning and Development 5 The Key Factors Influencing Needs Achievement of Strategic 2.1 Introduction Objectives in Varying 2.2 The Role of Self-Assessment in Organisation Developing Performance 5.1 Contexts and their Impact on 2.3 Using Self-Assessment to Learning and Development Identify Development Needs Policies and Practice 2.4 Using Knowledge to Map 5.2 Introduction Development against 5.3 Historical Development of Performance Related Criteria Strategic Management 2.5 Summary 5.4 How to Carry Out a Strategic 3 Working Collaboratively as a Analysis Member of a Team or Working 5.5 Summary Group 6 The Nature of Organising 3.1 Introduction and Managing in a Variety of 3.2 Groups and Teams Contexts 3.3 Working With Others 6.1 Introduction 3.4 Meetings 6.2 The Organisation 3.5 Techniques for Influencing, 6.3 Managing and Organising Persuading and Negotiating Organisations

Learning and Development

3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4

6.4 Organisation Structures 6.5 Cross-Cultural Competence 6.6 Summary 7 Developing Learning and Development Policies and Activities to Respond to and Exploit the Limitations and Opportunities arising from Varying Contextual Factors 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Strategic Alignment 7.3 Trends in L&D Delivery 7.4 Considerations in Delivering an L&D Strategy 7.5 Developing the Business Case for L&D 7.6 Undertaking a Learning Needs Analysis 7.7 L&D Planning Summary 7.8 Using Information Metrics and Developing Business Cases for Learning and Development 8 Using Learning and Development Data 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Key Terms and Concepts 8.3 HR Analytics 8.4 L&D Data, Metrics and Analytics 8.5 Summary and Conclusion 9 Conducting a Research Project 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Research Paradigms 9.3 The Research Process 9.4 Summary and Conclusion 10 Conclusions and Future Directions


Learning and Talent Development Edition: 1 Date: 01/13/2011 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982500 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983422 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator. Clare Rigg lectures at the Institute of Technology, Tralee, Ireland.

174

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Shows the nature and benefits of a critical understanding of and approach to the professional

practice of learning and talent development << Case studies help students focus on particular concepts and prepare for professional practice << Online resources: web links for each chapter, lecture slides and an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual complete with lecture handouts and additional case studies per chapter

Description Written for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name, Learning and Talent Development combines a clear and concise structure and writing style with an academic and critical approach to the subject. It analyses and evaluates a range of learning and talent development theories and strategies so students can learn how to take the lead and confidently initiate, develop and implement these strategies, interventions and activities in the workplace. Covering key topics such as the national and organizational context of learning and talent development, concepts related to individual and organizational learning and the functions associated with managing learning and talent development in the context of professional practice, Learning and Talent Development equips individuals to meet the expectations placed upon those performing specialist roles in developing others and is therefore also ideal for undergraduate and postgraduate students of human resource management or business students taking a module in human resource development or learning and development. Online supporting resources include web links for each chapter, lecture slides and an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual complete with lecture handouts and additional case studies per chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction The Nature, Purpose and Context of Learning and Talent Development 2.1 Organising and Managing Learning and Talent Development 2.2 International and National Contexts 2.3 Various and Varying Organisation Contexts 2.4 The Politics of Learning and Talent Development 3 The Process of Learning and Talent Development 3.1 Individual and Organisation Learning in Talent Development 3.2 Establishing Needs and Solutions to Talent Development 3.3 Learning and Talent Development Practical Strategies 4 The Management of Learning and Talent Development 4.1 Designing and Evaluating Talent Development 4.2 Accessing and Managing Resources 4.3 Ethics and Professionalism in Learning and Talent Development 4.4 Doing a Student Research Project 4.5 Conclusion

Learning and Development


Professional Practice in Learning and Development How to Design and Deliver Plans for the Workplace Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2016 Price: $55.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477424 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477431 Pages: 424 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Dr. Mark Loon is a faculty member at Bath Business School, Bath Spa University. He has published in various academic journals such as the Journal of Managerial Psychology, as well as practitioner reports and books. He is currently the Chair of the British Standards Instituteâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Human Capital Standard SubCommittee on developing International HRM Standards and the Deputy Vice Chair of the Programmes and Qualifications committee within the University Forum on Human Resource Development. Prior to academia, he was in management consulting, working for firms such as Cap Gemini, Ernst & Young and KPMG.

175

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides the most up-to-date thinking on the issues and opportunities facing the L&D profession, including social, blended and digital learning << Discusses the latest approaches to traditional and online blended delivery, based on cutting edge research and case studies << Covers the knowledge and understanding required for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD)â&#x20AC;&#x2122;s intermediate level courses in learning and development << Online resources: multiple-choice questions and answers for each chapter

Description Professional Practice in Learning and Development guides learning and development professionals and students in designing and delivering effective people development in the modern organization. It is a core text for those studying for learning and development qualifications such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development Intermediate level, and a useful handbook for those in learning and development roles looking to develop their understanding of the latest developments facing the profession. With a particular focus on digital, blended and social learning it will help you deliver more for less. Starting with an introduction to learning and development, it shows how to make the business case for activities, use metrics to demonstrate the value add, and engage the right stakeholders. Drawing on the latest research, Professional Practice in Learning and Development highlights the new opportunities made available to the learning and development practitioner by technology, new media and the networked world in which we live. It looks at approaches to helping people learn and how to develop tailored solutions. Case studies and reflective questions develop skills in facilitating collaborative learning, working in teams, and communicating effectively with all stakeholders. This book also equips you to measure and communicate the value of the programmes and, drawing on insights from neuroscience, demonstrates some practical new tools for engaging learners to improve the effectiveness of their work. Online supporting resources include multiple-choice questions and answers for each chapter.

Table of Contents 1

Developing professional practice in L&D 2 Understanding the context of L&D 3 Using information, metrics and developing business cases for L&D 4 Developing and using consultancy skills 5 Enhancing participant engagement in the learning process 6 Designing and developing digital and blended learning solutions 7 Facilitating collective and social learning 8 Developing and delivering L&D solutions for international markets

Learning and Development


Learning for Organizational Development How to Design, Deliver and Evaluate Effective L&D Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2017 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477448 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477455 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Eileen Arney is Teaching Director of Masters Programmes at The Open University Business School, UK. She is a Chartered Fellow of CIPD, has taught on level 7 CIPD programmes and has trained and practised as an executive coach. She has held senior civil servant posts including Assistant Director of National Police Training and has designed and delivered leadership programmes for senior managers in the UK and overseas.

176

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides up-to-date thinking on the issues and opportunities facing learning and development

(L&D), including the role of L&D in talent attraction and retention << Includes case studies and reflective questions alongside the knowledge and understanding required for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD)â&#x20AC;&#x2122;s intermediate level courses in learning and development << Arms the professional with the evidence for L&Dâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s transformational impact, showing how to link L&D to individual performance and organizational success

Description Learning for Organizational Development presents how to design, deliver and evaluate effective learning and development (L&D) programmes. This definitive guide to L&Dâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s function in enhancing individual performance and organizational success is a core text for those studying for L&D qualifications such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) Intermediate level as well as a useful handbook for L&D professionals looking to further their understanding of the latest developments. Complete with case studies and reflective questions to aid comprehension, Learning for Organizational Development considers the strategic business function of L&D for communicating the vital contribution that it makes to both individual performance and organizational success. It explores the role of L&D in talent development, showing how to support line managers in developing their people to drive retention and attraction. It also addresses the importance of developing the leadership capability within the organization, and provides practical guidance and examples of what works.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

Understanding Organizational Development The Role of Learning and Development in Talent Management Developing Leadership and Management Capability Using Facilitation Skills Implementing Coaching and Mentoring Evaluating Learning and Development in a Knowledge Economy

Learning and Development


Learning and Development Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2014 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469887 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469894 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Rebecca Page-Tickell is a Business Psychologist and HR Specialist. During her career she has worked in-house as an HR practitioner in L&D as well as working with HR professionals in a consultative capacity. She has worked across industry sectors and in organizations of varying sizes, from micro-organizations through to multinational corporations. Rebecca specializes in talent identification and management, performance management and engagement. She currently lectures CIPD accredited courses at the Hampshire Business School.

177

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Identifies and demonstrates how to align learning and development with the strategic objectives

of an organization, equipping the reader with the skills they need to implement a successful L&D strategy. << Provides international case studies and various short scenarios to immediately show how to put learning into practice. << Helps you to critically evaluate the impact of your L&D programme and to reach a considered view on emerging developments in the field.

Description Learning and Development is a practical guide on designing and delivering training and L&D effectively in an organizational context. It demonstrates how to link learning to strategic business goals and explores both the benefits and complexities associated with learning and development. Tailored to the needs of HR and L&D practitioners, it offers a comprehensive overview of the field strongly aligned to organizational and HR strategies and objectives. Using a combination of practical tools, assessments, scenarios and case studies, this essential handbook will build your knowledge of the area - from diagnosing L&D needs and types of intervention and development categories, to assessment and training evaluation. Learning and Development is part of the HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD.

Table of Contents 1

Fundamentals of learning and development 1.1 Defining learning and development 1.2 The importance of learning and development 1.3 Learning and development, organization and human resource management (HRM) strategy 1.4 How learning and development works 2 In practice 2.1 How do you do it? 2.2 Planning and action 2.3 Measurement 2.4 Conclusion

Learning and Development


Developing People and Organisations Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2012 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983132 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983316 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator. Patricia Rogers is part of the Postgraduate Taught Strategy and Development Group responsible for the development of postgraduate taught strategies across Coventry University, UK.

178

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Helps students develop effective analytical and problem-solving skills as they understand key OD and HRD issues << Explains concepts and theoretical approaches clearly and provides activities to help cement understanding << Online resources: instructor’s manual, additional case studies, multiple-choice questions and annotated web links

Description Developing People and Organisations introduces and explores concepts relevant to the learning outcomes for the optional units in CIPD’s Level 5 Intermediate qualifications in human resource development (HRD) and organisational design and development. It provides a practical and accessible exposition of key theories informing the professional practice of HRD so students can explain and analyse the organisational context of HRD practice and describe, compare and critically evaluate a range of theories and approaches. Written and edited by CIPD-accredited experts in the field and mapped to CIPD’s HR Profession Map, Developing People and Organisations covers key topics such as organisation design and development, developing coaching and mentoring in organisations, meeting OD needs and developments in HRD. It includes reflective activities, annotated further reading, a glossary and case studies to encourage the application of theory to a practical working environment. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, additional case studies, multiple-choice questions and annotated web links.

Table of Contents 1

Organisation Design (Gary Connor, Ian McLean and Michael McFadden) 2 Organisation Development (Sophie Mills, Kristen Stevens, Krish Pinto, Amanda Lee) 3 Developing Coaching and Mentoring within Organisations (Terrence Wendell Brathwaite, Jill Ashley-Jones, Rosalind Maxwell-Harrison) 4 Meeting Organisational Development Needs ( Jim Stewart, Dalbir Sidhu) 5 Contemporary Developments in Human Resource Development ( Jim Stewart, Sharon McGuire) 6 Knowledge Management (Carol Woodhams, Graham Perkins) 7 Improving Organisational Performance (Patricia Rogers, Michelle McLardy, Raymond Rogers, Susan Barnes)

Learning and Development


Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D Essentials for Practice

This book

<< Mixes theory, case application and exercises to provide a comprehensive exploration of the topic << Includes a range of case studies from different countries to illustrate how key ideas and theories are operating in practice around the globe, and are accompanied by questions or activities for students << Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and web links

Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2014 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983606 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983699 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Learning and Development

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Peter Cureton is a former associate examiner for designing and delivering training with the CIPD. Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School, UK. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

179

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

As the global economy has changed and thus organizations with it, more learning is delivered at and through work and individuals are encouraged to utilise the opportunities that advances in technology have brought to take charge of their own learning. Essential reading for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced postgraduate unit Designing, Delivering and Evaluating Learning and Development Provision, Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D critically examines the contextual factors impacting upon these activities in organizations. With case studies from the public, private and voluntary sectors as well as examples of international practice, the book helps to identify some of the challenges L&D professionals face in a range of environments. Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D is suitable not just for students working towards a CIPD Level 7 qualification, but also for those studying more general business and management degrees, as well as anyone who may have studied the subject previously and wishes to engage in continuous professional development with regard to this key HR practice. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and web links.

1

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating Learning and Development (Peter Cureton and Jim Stewart) 2 Individual and Collective Learning (Clair Doloriert, Jim Stewart and Sally Sambrook) 3 The External and Internal Context (Amanda Lee, Sophie Mills and Dalbir Sidhu) 4 Establishing Learning Needs (Tricia Harrison and Randhir Auluck) 5 Designing Learning Interventions (Crystal Zhang and Niki Kyriakidou) 6 Delivering and Facilitating Learning (Michelle McLardy and Nigel O’Sullivan) 7 Evaluating Learning and Development (Marian O’Sullivan and Michael McFadden) 8 Acting Professionally and Ethically (Peter Cureton and Maureen Royce) 9 Themes and the Future of DDE ( Jim Stewart and Peter Cureton)

Learning and Development


Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions

This book

<< Explains current and emerging learning technologies and their uses in L&D << Shows how to structure a blended learning solution to meet the needs of the organisation << Provides guidance on how to implement digital and blended learning technologies including the roles, tools and processes needed for success

Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: ISBN Ebook: 9781843984221 Pages: 80 Format: Epub Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Learning and Development

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Dr Mark Loon is a faculty member at Bath Spa University, UK. He holds a PhD and a DBA as well as an MBA. His expertise is in organizational behaviour and his primary research area is in the use of technology in learning and teaching in higher education, learning in the workplace, higher-order thinking dispositions, and leadership development. His secondary research area is within the organizational context that includes organizational learning and change, dynamic capabilities, and business model innovation.

Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions is essential reading for anyone studying the Level 5 CIPD L&D module of the same name as well as all learning and development professionals looking to understand the growing role of technology in L&D. Covering both current and emerging learning technologies, this book will help readers assess which technologies are right for their needs. It also covers how to design blended learning solutions, how to develop digital learning content as well as how to evaluate the effectiveness of this digital content. Most importantly, Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions provides guidance on how to implement digital and blended learning solutions including identifying the appropriate platforms and the roles, tools and processes needed to support effective implementation. Full of practical examples and advice, this is an invaluable guide for students and practitioners alike.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

180

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction Digital Technologies, and Learning and Development Current Learning Technologies Emerging Technologies and Use of Technologies for Learning and Development Learning Technologies and Individual Modalities of Learning Summary of Chapter 1 Designing Blended Learning Solutions Blended Learning Enhancing Learning Structure a Blended Solution to Meet the Underlying Need Matching Blended Learning Solutions with the Most Appropriate and Effective Media Summary of Chapter 2 Designing and Developing Digital Learning Content Digital Learning Content Roles, Tools and Processes for the Design and Development of Digital Learning Content Evaluating Digital Learning Content Summary of Chapter 3 Implementing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions Digital and Blended Learning Platforms Roles, Tools and Processes in Delivering and Supporting Digital and Blended Learning

Learning and Development

21 22 23 24

Solutions Summary of Chapter 4 Conclusion References


Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: ISBN Ebook: 9781843984238 Pages: 72 Format: Epub Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Dr Claire Valentin is Deputy Director of the Graduate School of Education and Sport and Senior Lecturer at Moray House School of Education,The University of Edinburgh.

This book

<< Is the core supporting text for the CIPD Level 5 Unit 5PEL and essential reading for students and

professionals studying L&D as part of wider undergraduate and postgraduate HR degrees, or other professional courses << Takes the reader through everything they need to know about participant engagement in the learning process to enable them to reap the benefits of a successful L&D programme within their own organisation << Offers a broad range of valuable content and pedagogical feature such as tasks, which encourage active learning

Description Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process is an accessible guide for students studying Learning and Development (L&D), and is the supporting text for the CIPD Level 5 Unit 5PEL. It takes the reader through everything they need to know about participant engagement in the learning process: what we mean by ‘learning’ in L&D, the key stakeholders and their varying expectations and interests, motivation theory and learning engagement, how different contexts affect staff engagement in learning, and the psychology behind the learning process. Packed full of examples and engaging tasks, Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process will develop your ability to plan, manage and deliver learning that meets the needs of learners and stakeholders, underpinned by relevant psychological theories and research. Essential reading for anyone studying L&D with the CIPD, on an undergraduate or postgraduate course, or those with a broader business interest in participation in the learning process, this is a practical text that will ground you in the theory and enable you to reap the benefits of a successful L&D programme in your organisation.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

181

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Key Concepts in Engagement in Learning and Development Defining Engagement in the Learning Process What Do We Mean by ‘Learning’ in L&D? Review Task Issues in Engagement With L&D A Learning Journey Learning, Training and Instruction Stakeholders in the Learning Process Introduction What are Stakeholders? Who are the Stakeholders in the L&D Process? Different Stakeholder Interests in Engagement in L&D Stakeholder Expectations and Interests Stakeholders Power in L&D Mapping L&D Stakeholders L&D Partnerships Stakeholder Analysis at Different Stages in the Learning Process Motivation Theory and Learning Engagement Introduction Motivation Concepts - Drives and Motives Review of Motivation Theory Motivation Theory in the 21st Century Motivation and Learning Research Positive Psychology

Learning and Development

25 Employee Engagement 26 The Impact of Multiple Contexts on Staff Engagement in Learning 27 Employee Engagement/ Motivation Scenario 28 Psychology and the Learning Process 29 Introduction 30 Psychological Perspectives on Learning 31 Behaviourism: Classical and Instrumental Conditioning 32 Cognitive Perspectives - Memory and information Processing 33 Types of Learning 34 Process of Learning 35 Learning Styles 36 Supporting Learning 37 Social Learning 38 Scenario Task 39 Neuroscience and Learning 40 Introduction 41 Neurons, Neuroplasticity and Neurogenesis 42 Memory 43 Attention 44 Learning Tasks 45 Rest 46 Emotions and Learning 47 Collaboration 48 Learning Task 49 Limitations on Learning 50 Unconscious Thought Theory 51 Review Task 52 Scenario 53 Facilitating Participant Engagement in Learning

54 55 56 57 58 59 60

Introduction Learning in L&D The Organisation Methods and Approaches Review Task Facilitating Group Learning Teaching, Training and Facilitating Learning – Lessons from Cognitive Neuroscience 61 Presentations 62 Gaming 63 References


Developing and Using Consultancy Skills Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: ISBN Ebook: 9781843984269 Pages: 40 Format: Epub Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Learning and Development

Author Information Peter Cureton is a former associate examiner for designing and delivering training with the CIPD.

182

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Explains the meaning of consultancy and the common stages of the consulting process in an L&D context << Shows how to work with a client to agree a learning and development solution << Provides guidance on how to support a client whilst implementing an L&D solution

Description Developing and Using Consultancy Skills supports students and practitioners in their understanding of the meaning of consultancy and the skills required in consulting in a learning and development context. It covers all the stages in the consulting process and provides guidance on engaging with the client, clarifying the nature of the issues, agreeing the research areas and analysing feedback. Developing and Using Consultancy Skills also includes essential coverage of common problems with client-consultation relationships and how to overcome these as well as discussion of ethics and consultant behaviour. Essential reading for anyone studying the intermediate CIPD L&D qualification, this guide will not only equip students for their studies, but also for their role as L&D professionals in the workplace.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Learning Outcomes Introduction and Overview The Meaning of Consultancy Skills in Consulting Stages in the Consulting Process Engage with the Client Clarify the Nature of the Issue(s) Agree the Research area Feedback Results Common Problems with ClientConsultant Relationships 11 Ethics and Consultant Behaviour 12 Concluding Thoughts 13 Bibliography and Further Reading

Learning and Development


Facilitating Collective and Social Learning Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: ISBN Ebook: 9781843984542 Pages: 64 Format: Epub Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Learning and Development

This book

<< Is the essential text for any students studying Learning & Development (L&D) as part of

undergraduate or postgraduate courses, and is the supporting text for the CIPD level 5 Unit 5CSL << Will develop a solid understanding of how collective and social learning can support the reader’s organisation in achieving its L&D objectives << Explores the key current social media and e-learning tools, technologies and their applications for L&D, and how social media and e-learning tools can be employed to meet organisational learning objectives

Description Facilitating Collective and Social Learning is the essential text for any students studying Learning & Development (L&D) as part of undergraduate or postgraduate courses, and is the supporting text for the CIPD level 5 Unit 5CSL. It will develop your understanding of collective and social learning within the workplace by identifying and exploring what we mean by the terms ‘collective’ and ‘social’, explaining the use of collective over group, collaborative and co-operative learning, and consider the implications of this for L&D and HRD practitioners and their practice. The authors describe the emergent manifestations of collective and social learning within the workplace, and introduce and assess different theoretical models. You will explore the key current social media and e-learning tools, technologies and their applications for L&D, and how social media and e-learning tools can be employed to meet organisational learning objectives. Ideal for professionals looking to further their understanding of the field, you will learn how collective and social learning can support your organisation in achieving its L&D goals and wider business objectives. Easy to navigate and clearly written, Facilitating Collective and Social Learning will provide you with the solid grounding in the theory so that you can apply and benefit from it in practice.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Clair Doloriert is a lecturer in Organisational Learning at the University Of Wales Bangor.

1

William Boulton is the HE Business Management and Enterprise External Examiner at Sheffield Hallam University.

2

Sally Anne Sambrook is Professor of Human Resource Development at Bangor Business School.

4

3

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15

16 17

183

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Defining Collective and Social Learning Introducing Collective and Social Learning Comparing and Contrasting Collective and Social Learning Other Terms and How They Fit With Collective and Social Learning Individual Learning Within Collective and Social Learning Conclusion Theory and Practice of Collective and Social Learning Collective and Social Learning Within the Workplace Assess Different Models of Collective and Social Learning Collective and Social Learning’s Role Within Organisational Learning Conclusion Technology for Collective and Social Learning A Brief History of Collective and Social Learning Identify the Key Current and Social Media and E-Learning Tools and Technologies and their application Explore How Social Media and E-Learning Can Be Employed By Various Groups to Meet Organisational Learning Objectives Conclusion Implications for L&D and HRD

Learning and Development

18 Challenges to Implementing Collective and Social Learning 19 Overcoming Barriers to Implementation of Collective and Social Learning 20 Conclusion 21 Concluding Collective & Social Learning


Organization Development A Practitioner’s Guide for OD and HR Edition: 2 Date: 05/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749470173 ISBN Ebook: 9780749470180 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Organizations

Author Information Dr. Mee-Yan Cheung-Judge is the founder of Quality & Equality Ltd. She speaks, writes and delivers most of the OD training programmes in the UK and was voted one of the 25 most influential thinkers in HR by HR Magazine in 2008, 2012, 2013 and 2014. Dr. Linda Holbeche is co-director of The Centre for Progressive Learning at London Metropolitan University, director of The Holbeche Partnership, a development consulting company, and adjunct professor at Imperial College London’s Business School. She is the author of The Agile Organization (also published by Kogan Page).

184

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides a complete guide to implementing effective OD in your business and the tools to drive

performance and growth << Includes theory overviews as well as tools, techniques and international case studies for both students and practitioners << Is unique among OD books in its practitioner focus and in providing a bridge between OD practice and HR context

Description Written by two of the leading experts in the field, Organization Development is a guide to the basic principles of effective organization development. A compendium of theories, practices, diagnostics techniques and figures, it provides practical advice for identifying an organization’s needs and determining the most appropriate course of action to maximize organizational capability. It provides an overview of the history and theory of OD and addresses the various phases, the role of the practitioner, aspects of power and politics, and the human resources context. The book also discusses organizational design, culture change, managing transformational change, and developing effective leadership. Bridging the gap between theory and practice, this fully updated new edition of Organization Development now includes coverage of complexity and chaos theory, new case studies describing OD practices and attitudes in countries outside of the US and UK, and new chapters on change and culture and on employee engagement and wellbeing. The authors also have added emphasis on the collaborations between OD and HR functions. It provides a wealth of helpful advice for OD practitioners, HR professionals and those with an interest in helping develop their organization.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction A practitioner’s guide for Organization Development 2.1 What is OD? Its brief history 2.2 Theories and practices of OD: a theory overview 2.3 Theories and practices of OD: the OD cycle and the entry and contracting phase 2.4 Theories and practices of OD: the diagnostic phase 2.5 Theories and practices of OD: the intervention phase 2.6 Theories and practices of OD: the evaluation phase 2.7 Living at the edge of chaos of change 2.8 Back room and front room change matters 2.9 Can behavioural change be made easy? 2.10 The Organization Development practitioner 2.11 Power and politics and Organization Development 3 HR in relation to OD: practice examples 3.1 HR in relation to OD 3.2 Organization Design 3.3 Transformation and culture change 3.4 Building organizational agility and resilience 3.5 Building the context for employee engagement 3.6 Developing effective leadership

Organizations


Understanding Organisation Development Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: ISBN Ebook: 9781843984306 Pages: 72 Format: Epub Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Organizations

Author Information Dr Paul Tosey is an independent consultant. Formerly a Senior Lecturer in Management in the Surrey Business School, University of Surrey, his career experience includes internal and external consultancy and coaching. He has taught Organisation Development on MSc and MBA programmes and served as external examiner to several of the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading Masters programmes in this field. His research interests include organisational learning, human resource development and Clean Language, an innovative coaching practice that is based on metaphor, on which he has published widely. He is co-editor of the Handbook of Research Methods on HRD (Edward Elgar 2015).

This book

<< Is essential reading for students studying Organisation Development (OD) as part of a wider HR

degree or professional qualification, is the core textbook for the CIPD level 5 Unit 5UOD, and is ideal for professionals looking for a solid theoretical grounding they can apply in practice << Will provide the reader with a thorough understanding of the concept, development and varying models of Organisation Development << Is written in a clear and easy to navigate style

Description Understanding Organisation Development is essential reading for students studying Organisation Development (OD) as part of a wider HR degree or professional qualification, is the core textbook for the CIPD level 5 Unit 5UOD, and is ideal for professionals looking for a solid theoretical grounding that they can apply in practice. With a clear and accessible format, it will enable readers to understand and analyse the concept of Organisation Development (OD) and its relationship with learning and development (L&D), and develop their understanding of the evolution of OD in contemporary organisations and its role in contributing to major organisational change. Working step-by-step through the broad framework of OD, Understanding Organisation Development takes the reader through its concept and purposes, historical development, the relationship between OD and HRM, the different models of OD and the common processes involved. This essential text will give you a thorough understanding of the knowledge, skills and behaviours required to function effectively in an OD practitioner role.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

185

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Understanding Organisation Development Purpose and Aim of Unit This Unit is Suitable for Persons Who Learning Outcomes Guided Learning Hours The Concept and Key Purposes of Organisation Development The Concept of Organisation Development (OD) The Historical Development of OD The Relationship and Connections of OD to HRD and to HRM Organisation Development Models, Tools and Techniques Models of OD OD Tools and Techniques Critiques of OD & Change Management The Organisation Development Practitioner - Roles, Styles, Processes and Skills Roles and Styles Processes Skills and Qualities Ethics and OD Summary

Organizations


Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change A Practical Guide to Delivering Value

This book

<< Shows how to plan a consulting intervention, from diagnosing what change is needed and

identifying risks to ensuring ethical practice and demonstrating value << Provides global case studies and perspectives from internal and external consultants across a range of consultancies, from the ‘Big Four’ to boutique firms << Helps build the necessary skills to get work as a consultant, from putting the business case forward to establishing credibility

Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2017 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478636 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478643 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Organizations

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Dr Julie Hodges is a leading expert on organizational change. She is an Associate Professor at Durham University Business School and a Senior Fellow of the Foundation for Management Education. Before entering academia Julie worked as a management consultant for over 20 years in organizations such as PwC and the British Council. She has extensive experience of working on transformational change programmes with clients across the globe in the private, public and third sectors. Julie is the author of several books on organizational change, including ‘Managing and Leading People through Change’ (published by Kogan Page).

186

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Organizations are increasingly investing in consulting capabilities to understand what changes they need to make to keep up the pace with the competition and future-proof their business. Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change is a guide for students and internal and external consultants needing to develop the necessary skills to consult in organizational settings where there is a great deal of complexity. It tackles the issues posing the greatest threat to the success of the change programme, including how to adapt to rapidly shifting needs, deal with the emotional and ethical issues that arise and ensure that the managers take full ownership for the change so that ‘business as usual’ is established. Complete with case studies from the ‘Big Four’ consultancy groups as well as boutique firms, Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change shows how to identify and execute interventions in a variety of organizational settings to deliver value. It provides guidance on how to develop a value proposition; define, write and present the business case for the proposed interventions; establish credibility and report on the results.

1 The Context of Consulting 1.1 The Nature and Value of Consulting 1.2 Roles and Responsibilities of Consulting 2 The Consulting Cycle 2.1 Preparation and Contracting 2.2 Diagnosing the Need and Readiness for Change 2.3 Designing and Delivering Interventions 2.4 Transition 3 Consulting Capabilities 3.1 Building Capabilities for Consulting 3.2 Becoming a Consultant 3.3 The Shadow Side of Consultancy 3.4 Conclusions and Reflections

Organizations


The Agile Organization How to Build an Engaged, Innovative and Resilient Business Edition: 2 Date: 06/28/2018 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482657 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482664 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Organizations

Author Information Linda Holbeche is an international consultant, developer and author in the fields of HR, leadership, strategy and change. Based in the UK, the author was previously Director of Research and Policy for the CIPD, Director of Leadership and Consultancy at the Work Foundation and Director of Research and Strategy at Roffey Park. She is currently a Visiting Professor (HRM and OD) at Cass Business School, a member of several advisory boards and a Fellow of the Institute for Employment Studies and Roffey Park. She is the co-author of Organization Development (also published by Kogan Page).

187

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Equips readers with the strategies and methods to ensure their organization can respond rapidly

and retain competitive advantage in the face of change << Includes self-assessment tools, guidelines, checklists and international case studies, including ING, the UK National Health Service, the Royal Bank of Scotland and Atkins << New to this edition: fresh material on agile strategizing, people, environments and cultures, alongside new case studies to illustrate each of these themes

Description In today’s volatile and ambiguous world, organizations need to have the capacity and flexibility to respond rapidly to changes in their environment, both internally and externally. The key to retaining competitive advantage is agility, a set of capabilities that help organizations adapt with the full cooperation of their employees. The Agile Organization is a practical blueprint to building both agility and resilience at individual, team and organizational levels. It draws on case studies such as ING, the UK National Health Service, the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS) and Atkins, as well as on the lived experience of HR and organization development (OD) professionals, to show how it is possible to build a sustainably agile business while enhancing employee engagement and resilience. This revised 2nd edition of The Agile Organization showcases new organizational models, groundbreaking themes and case studies which illustrate how organizations are addressing the challenge of developing organizational agility. Packed with helpful checklists, self-assessment tools, guidelines and new material on agile strategizing, people, environments and cultures, this book remains a ‘go to guide’ for HR and OD specialists, senior leaders and managers who want to help bring about organizational transformation.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Why Go Agile? Why are Agility and Resilience So Elusive? The Resiliently Agile Organization Agile Strategizing Agile Implementation Agile Linkages Designing for Agile Agile People Processes HR’s Role in Building a HighPerformance Work Climate Nurturing Employee Engagement and Resilience Change and Transformation Building a Change-Able Culture Agile Leadership

Organizations


People and Organisational Development A New Agenda for Organisational Effectiveness

This book

<< Provides examples of emergent theories of OD and HRM and details of how these can be applied in the workplace << Includes international case studies showing both successful and unsuccessful attempts at change << Online resources: additional case studies and practical tools

Description

Edition: 1 Date: 01/01/2012 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982692 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983279 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Organizations

People and Organisational Development is ideal for both practitioners and students alike. Setting out a new agenda for organisational effectiveness, this book not only covers emergent theories of organisational development and human resources management, it also gives practical examples for how these theories can be applied. Covering everything from how HR can support strategic change and how technology can be an agent of transformation to performance management, diversity, talent management and emotion at work, this book firmly places HR at the heart of a modern approach to OD. Crucially, People and Organisational Development doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t just examine successful change initiatives, it also covers the unsuccessful attempts at organisational change and what can be learnt from these. There is also invaluable discussion of the OD role of HRD in ethics, corporate social responsibility (CSR) and sustainability. Packed with international case studies and examples, this is essential reading for all those studying the CIPD Level 7 Advanced Organisation Design and Organisation Development module and everyone wanting to make a difference to the development of their people and their organisation. Online supporting resources include additional case studies and practical tools.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Helen Francis is Director of the Edinburgh Institute of Leadership and People Management (EILPM) and Reader within Edinburgh Napier Business School, UK. Linda Holbeche is Visiting Professor at both the University of Bedfordshire and Cass Business School and an Associate at Ashridge Business School, UK. Martin Reddington was formerly Global Programme Director, HR Transformation, at Cable & Wireless. Since leaving Cable & Wireless, he blends academic research with consultancy.

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12

188

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Organisational Effectiveness - A New Agenda for Organisational Development (OD) and Human Resource Management (HRM) (Helen Francis, Linda Holbeche and Martin Reddington) The Strategic Context for The New OE (Linda Holbeche) The Historical and Theoretical Background to Organisation Development (Naomi Stanford) Developing an Organisational Strategy from an HR Perspective (Mark Withers) Organisational Culture and Cultural Integration (Valerie Garrow and Graeme Martin) An ER Perspective on Organisational Effectiveness ( John Purcell) Transforming HR to Support Strategic Change (Peter Reilly) Technology as an Agent of Transformation (Martin Reddington) Critical HRD and Organisational Effectiveness (Allan Ramdhony) The Role of Line Managers in HRM, Learning and Innovation ( John Castledine and Douglas W. S. Renwick) Strategic Workforce Capability - Planning for a New Era (Roger Cooper and Melanie Wood) Performance Management and Reward (Roger Cooper and Adrian Furnham)

Organizations

13 Inclusive Talent Management and Diversity (Eddie Blass and Gillian Maxwell) 14 Employer Branding and Organisational Effectiveness (Helen Francis and Martin Reddington) 15 The OD Role of HRD in Ethics, Corporate Social Responsibility and Sustainability (Carole Parkes) 16 Emotion at Work (Chiara Amati and Chris Donnegan) 17 The New OE - Future Prospects and Possibilities (Helen Francis, Linda Holbeche and Martin Reddington)


Organizational Management Approaches and Solutions Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $44.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468361 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468378 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Organizations

This book

<< Covers essential management theory and key topics from people management to performance

metrics, as well as emerging specialist topics in management << Enables readers to understand the key issues involved in managing organizations and how to take a critical approach when planning, leading and executing the efforts of a workforce and its resources << Online Resources: summaries, diagrams and case study scenarios to help readers easily understand theories and contextualize experiences in the workplace << Supplemented by activities, revision questions and recommended reading to deepen learning and engagement, and includes online resources to support each chapter

Description Organizational Management is ideal for readers who need to understand modern organizations. This book enables students to understand the key issues of organizational behaviour and how to take a critical approach when planning, leading and engaging a workforce and its resources. The book provides fresh perspectives on known models and critical theories on leadership, teams, performance management, employee engagement and change. The authors also offer the reader innovative approaches to leading-edge issues such as trust, internet use, generational trends, the use of the arts in organizations and leadership from a systemic perspective. Organizational Management draws on examples from the authors’ international work across a range of business and industrial sectors, both public and private, and is supplemented by activities, revision questions, recommend reading and online resources to deepen learning. Rapid technological advances, constantly changing global environments and new kinds of workforce cultures mean that organizations are constantly being challenged. This book equips the reader with the ability to navigate this turbulent environment through both established and novel forms of organizational management. Online supporting resources for this book include summaries, diagrams and case study scenarios to help readers easily understand theories and contextualize experiences in the workplace

Author Information Peter Stokes is Professor of Business Management and Organization at Chester Business School. He has been visiting lecturer and academic advisor in businesses, universities and business schools in a range of contexts and countries, including France, Holland, Spain, Ireland, Germany, Senegal, Vietnam, Morocco, Hong Kong, China, India, Dubai and Japan. Neil Moore Neil Moore is Senior Lecturer and Postgraduate Coordinator at Chester Business School. Simon M Smith Simon M Smith is Senior Lecturer in Leadership and Management at the University of Winchester. Caroline Rowland Caroline Rowland is Professor of Leadership and Management and Associate Dean of Chester Business School. Peter Scott Peter Scott is Senior Lecturer in Marketing and Management at Liverpool John Moores University.

189

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Table of Contents 1

Management and organization: The 21st-century global and international context 2 Historical and contemporary contexts: The representation and character of ‘modern’ organizations 3 Using critical management approaches in managing people and organizations 4 Leadership and management: The challenge of performance 5 Employee engagement through effective communications 6 Leadership and trust – how to build a trustworthy company: The importance of communication 7 Effective team-working in contemporary organizations 8 Managing internet user behaviour within organizations: Inter- and intra-generational trends 9 Arts pedagogy in management development 10 Viewing leadership from a systemic perspective 11 Leading and managing people through change and resistance to change

Organizations


Organization Design A Guide to Building Effective Organizations Edition: 2 Date: 03/28/2014 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749470593 ISBN Ebook: 9780749470609 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Organizations

Author Information Patricia Cichocki leads Design to Change. She has over 25 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience working in and advising international organizations and clients on organization design and change. She holds degrees from HEC Paris, Oxford University and University College London and is a member of the Organization Design Forum. Patricia was a founding director of the Change Leaders. Christine Irwin retired in 2011 after a career that saw her become one of the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading practitioners in organization design and implementation. The first edition of Organization Design is just part of that legacy. She was an elected board member of the USbased Organization Design Forum from 2001 to 2010 and holds degrees from Manchester Business School and Leeds University.

190

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Provides complete coverage of Organization Design, from design to delivery and addresses all the

critical areas such as downsizing, outsourcing, job design, change management and re-structuring << Practical approach shows you how to effectively deliver design in a way that is fit for purpose in line with the organizationâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s goals << Enables HR and internal project staff to manage organization design independent of external consultants who are not embedded in the business, thereby saving costs and ensuring continuity

Description With the rate of change in organizations at an all-time high, the need for strong organization design has never been more pressing. Organization Design provides a complete road map to building successful organizations through good organization design. It presents a practical process; a robust, broad-based model and a set of tools and techniques that all link together. Part One and Two together provide you with the knowledge of how to establish and run an organization design programme. Part Three covers how to respond to three perennial challenges in designing organizations. This thoroughly revised edition of Organization Design includes an increased range of archetypes, a wide variety of international examples and coverage of additional ways to gain insight, such as through exploring metaphors and positive deviance. It is a practical toolkit to take organization designers from start to finish, outlining the basic theory, providing a step-by-step approach to implementation, and offering solutions to the recurring challenges that will inevitably be met along the way.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Understanding organization design 2.1 Putting organization design in context 2.2 Familiarize yourself with the Organization Design Compass and the OPTIMAL Way 2.3 Some essential building blocks 3 Designing your organization the OPTIMAL Way 3.1 Outlining your brief 3.2 Pulling together your programme 3.3 Taking stock of the change required 3.4 Identifying assessment criteria 3.5 Mapping the design options 3.6 Assessing the alternatives 3.7 Laying out the way forward 4 Dealing with recurring challenges 4.1 How to maintain design integrity over time 4.2 How to choose between design options when the environment is very uncertain 4.3 How to assess the level of capability maturity of an organization over time

Organizations


Organizational Behaviour People, Process, Work and Human Resource Management Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2013 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749463601 ISBN Ebook: 9780749463618 Pages: 352 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Organizations

Author Information Raisa Arvinen-Muondo works in HR management in Luanda, Angola. She has undertaken doctoral research at the University of Bedfordshire, on the career development of Angolan professionals within Western multinational organizations, focusing on the impact of experiences associated with international living. Stephen J Perkins is Dean of London Metropolitan Business School and a Visiting Research Fellow at Cass Business School. In addition to having served in several universities, he has held senior management posts in industry at times of transformational change and consulted with private and stateowned organizations internationally.

191

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Bridges the gap between OB and HRM and shows you how to put effective people management at

the heart of your organization << Examines the role of corporate governance in shaping the scope of managerial choices in organizations and what this means in practice << Looks at the ethical dimensions of OB that are increasingly important to understand in the context of ‘good employers’ and global employment standards

Description There is a large body of shared knowledge between the study of Organizational Behaviour and Human Resource Management but despite the crossover, they are often treated as very distinct disciplines. Written by a team of experts across both fields, Organizational Behaviour bridges the gap between OB and HRM, with an emphasis on inter-cultural and cross-cultural perspectives of organizational development, talent management, and leadership. Through a critical analysis of existing literature and case studies, the contributors cover topics such as corporate governance, ethical business practices, employee morale and motivation, performance management, corporate politics and conflict resolution, workplace diversity, creativity, and change management - all within the framework of current global employment standards and best practices.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 5 1.1 Introduction – Stephen Perkins 5.1 and Raisa Arvinen-Muondo 2 Individuals at work under an employment relationship 2.1 Managing diverse identities at work – Janice Johnson and Christina Schwabenland 2.2 Perception, making decisions and people management – Raisa Arvinen-Muondo 2.3 Motivation at work: engagement and facilitation – Nahid Rozalin 3 Employing human resources to work together for a purpose 3.1 Managing performance – Caroline Bolam and Sarah Jones 3.2 Leadership, communication and organizational effectiveness – Linda Holbeche 3.3 Talent management – Raisa Arvinen-Muondo and Qi Wei 4 Shifting contexts for organizational behaviour 4.1 Conflict, power and politics – Philip Davies and Rod Smith 4.2 Organizational culture – Eliot Lloyd 4.3 Managing organizational change – Faten Baddar Al-Husan and Konstantinos Kakavelakis 4.4 Creativity, innovation and the management of knowledge – Pauline Loewenberger

Organizations

Summation and reflection Coda: HRM and OB – accenting the social – Stephen Perkins and Raisa Arvinen-Muondo


Introduction to Organisational Behaviour Edition: 1 Date: 01/27/2011 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843982470 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984115 Pages: 536 Format (mm): 275x217 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Organizations

Author Information Michael Butler is a Senior Lecturer in Management in the Work and Organisational Psychology Group of Aston Business School, Aston University, UK. Ed Rose teaches Employment Relations and Organisational Behaviour in the Faculty of Business and Law at Liverpool John Moores University, UK

192

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Explores the organisational behaviour in relation to individuals including personality, motivation, satisfaction and learning << Includes crucial coverage of organisational structures including design, culture, change management and technological innovations << Online resources: practitioner interviews, video clips of key employability skills, additional case studies, activities, a test bank of multiple choice questions and PowerPoint slides for lecturers as well as web links for students

Description Ideal for anyone studying an introductory module in organisational behaviour, Introduction to Organisational Behaviour is a rigorous critique of all essential organisational behaviour topics. A comprehensive book with extensive accompanying online resources makes this a must-have package for anyone wanting to understand the theory and practice of organisational behaviour. Practitioner case studies, supporting video interviews where solutions and approaches are discussed, review questions at the end of every chapter make this an essential resource. Covering organisational behaviour in the context of individuals, groups and teams and managing organisations as well as the importance of organisational structures and emerging issues, Introduction to Organisational Behaviour gives understanding and guidance on the full spectrum of organisational behaviour issues. Supported by extensive online resources including video interviews, clips of key skills lecture slides, additional tutorial activities and a test bank of multiple choice questions make this a truly integrated print and electronic learning package.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction - A New Model of Learning, Blending Employability Skills, International Focus and Multimedia Elements (Michael Butler and Ed Rose) 1.1 Approaches to Organisational Behaviour (Emma Jeanes) 2 Individuals 2.1 Personality (Steve Woods and Claire Hardy) 2.2 Perception and Managing Emotions ( Jenna Ward and Robert McMurray) 2.3 Motivation and Satisfaction (Tricia Harrison) 2.4 Learning Theories and Practices (Crystal Zhang and Niki Kyriakidou) 3 Groups and Teams 3.1 Work Groups and Teams ( Joanne Richardson and Michael A. West) 3.2 Conflict and Stress in Organisations (Alf Crossman) 3.3 Communication (Markus C. Hasel) 4 Managing Organisations 4.1 Leading and Influencing in Organisations (Yves R. F. Guillaume and Nils-Torge Telle) 4.2 Decision-Making (Michael Butler, Keith Bezant-Niblett and Karen Caine) 4.3 Equality and Diversity in Organisations (Maureen Royce)

Organizations

4.4 Power in Organisations (Ed Rose) 5 Organisational Structure 5.1 Organisational Design, Structure and Work Organisation (Scott A. Hurrell and Cinzia Priola) 5.2 Organisational Culture and Change Management (Cinzia Priola and Scott A. Hurrell) 5.3 Technology in Work Organisations (Michel Ehrenhard, Tanya Bondarouk and Huub Ruel) 5.4 Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour (Rory Donnelly) 6 Emerging Issues 6.1 Ethics: Issues and Developments (Ed Rose) 6.2 Conclusion (Ed Rose and Michael Butler)


Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management An Evidence-Based Guide to Delivering High Performance

This book

<< Written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been

translated into twenty-one languages << New to this edition: case studies from Microsoft, IBM and Expedia which show how the latest developments in performance management are being implemented << Online resources: instructor’s manual, student’s manual, lecture slides for each chapter, a glossary of terms and a literature review

Description

Edition: 6 Date: 12/28/2017 Price: $49.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481209 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481216 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Performance Management

Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management addresses all areas of performance management, from performance pay and giving feedback to managing underperformers and having difficult conversations, so organizations can optimize staff performance. This fully updated and restructured 6th edition analyzes traditional as well as the latest developments in performance management including the shift from ratings and annual reviews. Veteran HR expert Michael Armstrong examines where these new approaches should be embraced and where traditional methods of performance management may be preferable. Packed with examples, exercises, checklists and new case studies from organizations such as Microsoft, IBM and Expedia, this book remains the most authoritative and engaging textbook on performance management. Supporting online resources for Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management include an instructor’s manual, a student’s manual, lecture slides, a glossary of terms and a literature review.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twentyone languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

193

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

1

The Ideal Approach to Performance Management 1.1 Performance Management as an Ideal 1.2 Performance Management Systems 1.3 Setting Objectives 1.4 Providing Feedback 1.5 Coaching 1.6 Reviewing Performance 1.7 Assessing Performance 2 Applications of Performance Management 2.1 Managing Organizational Performance 2.2 Managing Team Performance 2.3 Managing Under-Performance 2.4 Performance Management and Employee Engagement 2.5 Performance Management and Talent Management 2.6 Performance Management and Learning 2.7 Performance Management and Reward 2.8 International Performance Management 3 The Reality of Performance Management 3.1 The Impact of Performance Management 3.2 Views on Performance Management 3.3 What’s Wrong With Performance Management

Performance Management

4 Performance Management Reinvented 4.1 What’s Happening to Performance Management 4.2 The Approach to Reinvention 4.3 The Reinvention Programme 4.4 A Radical New Approach


Performance Management Theory and Practice

This book

<< Balances theory with practice to give students a full understanding of the subject << Maps to the CIPD advanced-level unit on Performance Management << Online resources: instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links for students

Edition: 1 Date: 08/29/2013 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983057 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983286 Pages: 344 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Performance Management

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Sue Hutchinson is an associate professor in HRM at the University of the West of England, where she is also Associate Head of the HRM teaching and research group. She teaches on a range of HRM postgraduate modules including Performance Management, and is actively involved in research. Her main research interests focus on the link between people management and performance, the role of line managers in HRM and involvement and consultation. Previous work experiences include research and teaching at Bath University, policy advisor for the CIPD and industrial relations advisor in the paper industry.

How do you systematically decide and communicate strategic performance aims, objectives, priorities and targets? How do you plan effective policies and practices? Which techniques, rewards and sanctions should you use to improve performance? How do you critically evaluate the effectiveness of performance management? Performance Management combines theory and practice to help students master these key concepts and apply their learning. Mapping to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced unit by the same name, the book is a core text for any student taking a performance management module at undergraduate or postgraduate level. Featuring examples from a range of sectors and organizations across the globe, Performance Management is packed with pedagogical features such as learning outcomes, case studies, activities, reflection questions and further reading to fully engage students with the subject. Online supporting resources include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links for students.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

194

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Setting the Scene - HRM and Performance Strategic Performance Management Motivation at Work The Role of Line Managers in Managing Performance Defining and Measuring Individual Work Performance Performance Appraisal and Feedback Integrating Learning and Performance Performance-Related Rewards Managing Under-Performance Absence Management International Performance Management Developing Performance Management

Performance Management


Performance Management Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2014 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469979 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469986 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Performance Management

Author Information Linda Ashdown is a Human Resource Management specialist. She spent many years working in the Advertising Industry and was HR Director for Leo Burnett Advertising Ltd. She has also worked as a lecturer delivering a range of HRM/Management courses at degree and postgraduate level. She currently enjoys a portfolio career working part-time at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) in the Assessment Department, lecturing at Portsmouth University and providing HRM services through her own company Ashdown-Jones HR Ltd.

195

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Offers a complete overview of the field and aligns performance management strongly with

strategic, organizational and HR objectives, equipping the reader with the skills required to implement a successful performance management strategy. << Includes a combination of practical tools, assessments, scenarios and case studies from best practice to build your knowledge of the key areas, including motivation, key competencies, types of assessment, performance reviews and dealing with underperformance. << Provides a practical approach by demonstrating theory in practice, with insights on planning, implementing and assessing relations in an organization in regard to performance.

Description In today’s competitive and challenging workplaces, it is more important than ever to get the best out of our people. Effective performance management is at the heart of organization success, delivering able, motivated workers, who are aligned to the organization’s values and goals. This book takes us on a journey from a broad, holistic exploration of performance management, into a deeper “how do we do this and add real value?” approach to managing the core activities of performance management, such as objective-setting and giving feedback. It takes a firmly practical stance, providing guidance and ideas both for human resource practitioners and line managers who want performance management to be valuable for the organization and its employees. Drawing on the author’s practical experience of working in HR, this book contains case studies, interviews and activities to support the reader in applying their learning in the workplace. Performance Management is part of the brand new HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD.

Table of Contents 1

What is performance management? 2 Why is it important? 3 How does it fit with organization and HRM strategy? 4 How does it work? 5 How do you do it? 6 Planning and action 7 Measurement 8 Conclusion

Performance Management


Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management Building a Culture of Continuous Improvement Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478117 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478124 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Performance Management

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twentyone languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

196

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been

translated into twenty-one languages << Provides insights into innovative approaches organizations such as Deloitte, Expedia and Google are taking to build organizational performance << Shows how to build a culture of managing performance throughout the year which delivers results and reduces bureaucracy << Empowers line managers to own the performance management process rather than HR, ensuring that the process is effectively cascaded across the business

Description Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management presents a holistic approach to performance management, drawing on Michael Armstrong’s vast research and experience. Most organizations have performance management processes in one form or another, but these are often based on formal annual reviews, forced rankings and directly linked to pay decisions. These traditional approaches are often at the expense of ongoing, continuous feedback and focus on looking back at what has or has not been achieved rather than looking forward. Direct links to pay decisions avert attention from people development, and managers often get lost in the bureaucracy of complex forms rather than fully engaging with their people. Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management details how to build a culture of ongoing feedback and coaching and provides case studies of how this approach to building performance has been effective in organizations including Deloitte, Gap, Expedia and Google. Filled with practical advice, including how to deal with underperformers, it enables organizations to remove overly bureaucratic and ineffective systems based on top-down judgments and ratings, and demonstrates how to get line managers’ support for the process focusing on actionable feedback and growth.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Performance Management – The Concept Performance Management – The Reality Effective Performance Management What’s Happening to Performance Management? Reinventing Performance Management - The Issues Improve Objective Setting Replace the Annual Performance Review Abolish Rating Enhance Personal Development Provide Training The Reinvention Programme Conclusions

Performance Management


Motivation and Performance A Guide to Motivating a Diverse Workforce Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2017 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478131 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478148 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Performance Management

Author Information Adrian Furnham is professor of psychology at UCL, and adjunct professor of management at the Norwegian School of Management. He has written over 1,000 scientific papers and 70 books and is among the most well-known psychologists in the world. Ian MacRae is Director of High Potential, an organizational consultancy providing customised psychological tests and reports for improving performance, predicting potential and developing people. He is a PhD candidate at Maastricht University.

This book

<< Explains the science behind motivation to unlock productivity and high performance, and reduce

staff turnover << Provides practical guidance on how to measure motivation, highlight areas for improvement, demonstrate which employee motivation programmes are working, and where costs can be reduced << Helps transform talent management and succession planning by explaining what motivates an employee to want to progress in an organization

Description Many organizations approach the issue of employee engagement and motivation by tapping into age, gender and other stereotypes. Motivation and Performance challenges these notions, bringing together evidence that group differences are often exaggerated and that getting to the heart of what really motivates individuals is whatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s most important. This book is a practical guide to ensuring that organizations consider all motivators - job security as well as the need for personal growth - to improve employee satisfaction, boost organizational productivity and reduce staff turnover. Underpinned by original research, Motivation and Performance features case studies from finance, retail, the public and other sectors to show how the principles of motivating employees apply at all levels of the organization, not just at the leadership level, and how values and motivation can be changed and developed. Complete with a framework for conducting effective visits to front-line locations, it will help HR professionals ask the right questions, choose whether to implement external motivation-building programmes and make a real impact on an employeeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s desire to progress in the company.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

197

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction A Model of Motivation Generational Differences The Biology of Stress and Wellbeing Measuring Motivation The Power of Communication and Conversations Intrinsic Motivation Work Engagement, Organizational Health and Culture Extrinsic Motivation and Rewards Culture and Values The Importance of Motivation Gaps Outsourcing Motivation The Dark Side and Derailed Motivation Best and Worst Practice from Real Companies

Performance Management


Understanding Project Management Skills and Insights for Successful Project Delivery Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2015 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749470555 ISBN Ebook: 9780749470562 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Project Management

Author Information Gary Straw has delivered project management modules on MBA and Master’s and management development schemes for business schools in the UK and Eastern Europe, including Aberystwyth School of Management and Business, The Management Centre at Bangor University and Kingston Business School. He has also delivered ILM and CMI project management courses. His professional experience and insights into project management have developed through working within a number of private- and public-sector organizations, delivering projects in a range of market sectors.

198

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Improves managers’ analytical skills and ability to recognise and manage projects << Supports independent and distance learners with online resources, activities and exercises similar to those on MBA courses << Fits into a range of business courses including MBAs and executive education schemes, allowing students to apply their practical experience in the workplace to their studies << Encourages managers’ understanding of specific contextual challenges that are increasingly common in the contemporary world of projects << Online resources: lecture slides and instructor’s manual

Description Understanding Project Management takes an applied approach to the study of project management, carefully balancing reflective practice and methodology necessary for successful deployment of tools and techniques in the real world. Including plenty of practical examples as well as contemporary realworld case studies, it takes a unique approach to the study of project management with an emphasis on international aspects and dilemmas that are increasingly common in the contemporary world. With a host of features to encourage reflection and reinforce learning, it is the ideal complement for independent or classroom study on a range of business courses. Understanding Project Management helps managers understand project management, develop perspectives in application, and, through reflection, enables them to develop a project management capability, at an individual, organization or project level. The content throughout is guided by practice, making this an essential read for anyone wishing to make a success of the project management role. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and an instructor’s manual.

Table of Contents 1 Projects in an ideal world 1.1 An introduction to projects and project management 1.2 Projects at the conceptual phase 1.3 Planning within projects 2 Projects in a real world 2.1 After the planning: delivering projects 2.2 Managing to completion 2.3 Reviewing and learning in projects 3 Projects in a challenging world 3.1 Projects – a way of thinking 3.2 Within and outside projects 3.3 A global stage 3.4 Managing and leading in project environments 4 Developing a capability 4.1 Managing and leading project enviornments 4.2 A spectrum of project management roles 4.3 Develop the capability

Project Management


Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice Improving Performance Through Reward Edition: 5 Date: 11/28/2015 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473891 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473907 Pages: 392 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Reward Management

Author Information Michael Armstrong is the UK’s bestselling author of Human Resource Management books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other titles published by Kogan Page. With over a million copies sold, his books have been translated into twentyone languages. He is managing partner of E-Reward as well as an independent management consultant. Prior to this he was a chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and an HR director of a publishing company.

199

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Takes a practical focus which makes it ideal for both practitioners and those studying reward as part of a professional qualification << Includes real-world examples from BT, GlaxoSmithKline, and Friends Provident << Written by the UK’s bestselling HRM author, whose books have sold over a million copies and been translated into twenty-one languages << Includes a new chapter on computerized reward management as well as completely updated chapters on job evaluation, pay structures, merit pay and executive pay << Online resources: lecture slides, an instructor’s manual and a student’s manual complete with a glossary, bibliography and literature review

Description Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice is the definitive guide to understanding, developing and implementing effective reward. It is closely aligned to the CIPD’s standard in reward management and is supported by online resources for both lecturers and students. Updated to reflect the practical implications of the most recent research and discussion on reward management, this new fifth edition includes a new chapter on computerized reward management, completely updated chapters on job evaluation, pay structures, merit pay and executive pay, and new case studies. As with all of Armstrong’s texts, Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice truly bridges the gap between academic and practitioner and is, therefore ideally suited to anyone studying for a professional qualification in HR, of which Reward is often a core part, in particular the CIPD’s intermediate and advanced level qualifications. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, an instructor’s manual and a student’s manual complete with a glossary, bibliography and literature review.

Table of Contents 1

AN OVERVIEW OF REWARD MANAGEMENT 1.1 Fundamentals of reward management 1.2 Reward systems 1.3 Strategic reward 1.4 Reward policies 1.5 Factors affecting reward 1.6 Motivation and reward 1.7 Engagement and reward 1.8 Performance and reward 1.9 Financial rewards 1.10 Non-financial rewards 1.11 Total rewards 1.12 The ethical approach to reward management 2 BASE PAY MANAGEMENT 2.1 Market pricing 2.2 Job evaluation 2.3 Grade and pay structures 2.4 Equal pay 3 REWARDING AND RECOGNIZING PERFORMANCE 3.1 Merit pay 3.2 Bonus schemes 3.3 Team pay 3.4 Rewarding for business performance 3.5 Recognition 4 REWARDING SPECIAL GROUPS 4.1 Executive Reward 4.2 Rewarding sales and customer service staff 4.3 Rewarding knowledge workers 4.4 Rewarding manual workers 4.5 International reward

Reward Management

5 5.1 5.2 6

EMPLOYEE BENEFITS Employee benefits provision Flexible benefits THE PRACTICE OF REWARD MANAGEMENT 6.1 Evidence-based reward management 6.2 Managing reward systems 6.3 Managing reward risk 6.4 Responsibility for reward


Reward Management Alternatives, Consequences and Contexts Edition: 3 Date: 05/15/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983774 ISBN Ebook: 9781843984443 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Reward Management

Author Information Stephen J. Perkins is Emeritus Professor at London Metropolitan University, UK and a Professional Research Fellow of the Global Policy Institute. Geoff White is Professor of Human Resource Management at the University of Greenwich Business School, UK. Sarah Jones is Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management and Organizational Behaviour at the Faculty of Business and Law, University of Northampton, UK.

This book

<< New to this edition: new material on reward management and gender; the Living Wage; Pay

Progression systems; evaluating reward systems; job insecurity and non-standard forms of employment << Includes extended and updated coverage of executive pay, pensions, evidence-based reward and Total Reward << Online resources: lecturer guides and PowerPoint slides

Description Reward Management is a comprehensive guide to all elements of reward in the workplace. From the theoretical frameworks and legal context of reward to pay structures, pay setting, progression and variable pay schemes, this book provides all the essential information for both students of reward management and practitioners involved in reward management in organizations. Reward Management also includes discussion of benefits, pensions and non-financial reward as well as essential information about rewarding directors and executives and how to manage international reward management. This includes guidance on how to reward multi-local talent, how to manage multinational contexts for employee reward management and how to account for expatriates in reward management. This third edition includes brand new coverage of reward management and gender, the Living Wage and non-standard forms of employment to ensure that readers are fully aware of the latest contemporary development in reward management. Accompanying online resources include lecturer guides and PowerPoint slides for instructors.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

HR, Organizational

200 Development and Coaching

Introducing the Reward Management System Conceptual and Theoretical Frameworks The Legal, Employment Relations and Market Context Base Pay Structures and Relationships Pay-Setting, Composition and Progression Variable Pay Schemes Benefits Pensions Non-Financial Reward Rewarding Directors and Executives International Reward Management Reward Management within HRM

Reward Management


Reward Management Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2014 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469801 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469818 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Reward Management

Author Information Michael Rose heads Rewards Consulting, a London-based management consultancy specializing in employee reward, recognition, engagement and motivation. He has worked in reward management for over 30 years and was previously the vice president of the CIPD. He is the author of â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;A Guide to Non-Cash Rewardâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; also published by Kogan Page.

201

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Michael Rose succinctly rationalises the huge range of reward components the reward practitioner

is faced with and explains how they fit together in an easily understandable and informative way << Summarizes the key issues that need to be considered when developing a reward strategy that gets results, including basic pay, variable pay and benefits << Includes brief examples of best practice, real-life case studies, short exercises and reflective questions to help you think through applying the principles effectively in your organization

Description Reward Management is a practical guide to understanding and implementing really effective reward strategies in your organization. It offers a complete overview of the field and how to align your approach to reward management with the HR and broader organizational strategy. Tailored to the needs of practitioners, it uses a combination of practical tools, scenarios and case studies to cover key areas including pay grades and structure, job evaluation, pay reviews, bonus plans, non-cash reward, benefits, tax issues and much more. Aligning reward with the strategic objectives of the organization it will equip you with the skills you need to plan, implement and assess a reward strategy. Reward Management is part of the brand new HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction The fundamentals of reward management 2.1 Reward and reward strategy 2.2 Why reward is important and how it can make an impact 2.3 Relationship between motivation and reward 2.4 How reward fits together 2.5 How to get started with a reward strategy 2.6 Communications 2.7 Tax and National Insurance 3 Reward in practice 3.1 Grades and pay structures 3.2 Managing pay data and pay reviews 3.3 Bonus plans 3.4 Recognition and non-cash reward 3.5 Long-term plans 3.6 Benefits

Reward Management


Resourcing and Talent Management Edition: 6 Date: 02/24/2014 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9781843983576 ISBN Ebook: 9781843983705 Pages: 456 Format (mm): 246x189 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Talent Management

Author Information Stephen Taylor, Chartered FCIPD, is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School in the UK. He is also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and the NHS. He is co-author of Armstrong’s Handbook of Resource Management Practice published by Kogan Page.

This book

<< Takes a comprehensive look at all areas of resourcing and talent management, from recruitment

and retention to retirement and redundancy << New to this edition: more international content and examples, content on technological developments including e-recruitment and resourcing through social media and increased coverage of ethics and CSR << Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides, case studies, articles, feedback on exercises in the book and web links for each chapter for students

Description Resourcing and Talent Management is the essential companion for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced Resourcing and Talent Management module. Mapped to the CIPD unit, this textbook offers broad and accessible coverage of topics such as employment markets, flexibility, fairness, diversity, human resource planning, recruitment, employer branding, retention and retirement. Dismissals and redundancy are also discussed in depth. This fully updated 6th edition of Resourcing and Talent Management includes more international content and examples, content on technological developments including e-recruitment and resourcing through social media and increased coverage of ethics and CSR. Its comprehensive scope makes it ideal for those studying any resourcing, talent management or recruitment and selection module. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and feedback on exercises in the book. Student resources include web links for each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

202

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction Employment Markets and Regulation Flexibility Fairness and Diversity Human Resource Planning Job Analysis and Job Design Recruitment Advertising Alternative Recruitment Methods Employer Branding Selection - The Classic Trio Advanced Methods of Employee Selection The New Employee Succession Planning Measuring and Analysing Employee Turnover Improving Employee Retention Retirement Dismissals Redundancy Resourcing and Talent Management Strategies The Future of Work

Talent Management


Inclusive Talent Management How Business can Thrive in an Age of Diversity Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2016 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475871 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475888 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Talent Management

Author Information Stephen Frost works with clients worldwide to embed inclusion into their decision making. He teaches at various business schools and was formerly Head of Diversity and Inclusion for the London Organizing Committee of the Olympic Games and Paralympic Games. Danny Kalman is a talent management consultant, executive coach and regular speaker on leadership development. He was Director of Global Talent at Panasonic Corporation from 2008-2013.

203

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

This book

<< Shows how to attract the best candidates and keep them by building cultures in which they feel

valued << Provides evidence for how better diversity and inclusion practices lead to increased creativity, openness to change, new ideas and understanding of new markets << Includes original research from globally recognised organizations including Goldman Sachs, NHS, Telefonica, Unilever, KPMG, Royal Mail, Hitachi, Oxfam, Novartis and the Rio 2016 Olympic Games on how diversity and inclusion activities can improve talent attraction, management and retention

Description Organizations traditionally have had a clear distinction between their policies on diversity and inclusion and their talent management. The main driving force behind diversity and inclusion has been being seen to be a good employer, to be able to make claims in the annual report and to feel as though a positive contribution is being made to society. On the other hand, talent management activities have been driven by a real business need to ensure that the organization has the right people with the right skills in the right place to drive operational success. Inclusive Talent Management aligns talent management and diversity and inclusion, offering a fresh perspective on why the current distinction between them needs to disappear. Featuring case studies from internationally recognised brands such as Goldman Sachs, Unilever, KPMG, Hitachi, Oxfam and the NHS, Inclusive Talent Management shows that to achieve business objectives and gain the competitive advantage, it is imperative that organizations take an inclusive approach to talent management. It puts forward a compelling and innovative case, raising questions not only for the HR community but also to those in senior management positions, providing the practical steps, global examples and models for incorporating diversity and inclusion activities into talent management strategy.

Table of Contents 1

Challenge - The Addiction to Likeness in an Age of Diversity = Sameness 2 The Fierce Urgency of Now 2.1 Homogenous Talent Management 2.2 History – How a Segregated Mindset Evolved 2.3 The Future – Diversity is Local, Inclusion is Global 2.4 The Case for Inclusive Talent Management 3 How to Meet the Challenge 3.1 ITM in Recruitment – Finding Diverse Talent 3.2 ITM in Development – Growing Diverse Talent 3.3 ITM in Retention – Keeping Diverse Talent 3.4 Leadership – How You Can Make a Difference 3.5 Resolution: Change the System (Unconscious Nudges) + Change Your Behaviour (Conscious Leadership) = Inclusion

Talent Management


Logistics, Operations & Supply Chain Management Innovation and Best Practice in Logistics Operations Management Transport Procurement Supply Chain Management

www.koganpage.com

204


The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management Understanding the Supply Chain Edition: 6 Date: 01/28/2017 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476779 ISBN Ebook: 9780749476786 Pages: 912 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

This book

<< Unique breadth and depth of coverage of supply chain strategy AND logistics/distribution including

step-by-step strategic accounts of setting up and operating supply chains for maximum value and the tactical elements of logistics and distribution

<< Worked examples using current real-world data (flow charts, tables, maps, equations) from the authorsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; firsthand industry experience bring the concepts to life

<< Online Resources: PowerPoint lecture slides (featuring tables, images and formulae from the text), glossary of terms, weblinks, blog articles, video interviews and infographics

<< Figures and flow charts show how the elements of supply chains are interdependent, and a dedicated chapter on supply chain integration brings them together

<< New to this edition: Updated with the latest key topics and developments in globalisation, technology,

digital/data and sustainability. Revised and re-ordered chapters, including Logistics Costs and Trade-Offs; Inventory Planning and Forecasting; Road Freight Transport: Vehicle Routeing & Scheduling; Logistics Outsourcing and Humanitarian Logistics. New material on reverse logistics and new warehouse equipment (e.g. robots in multi-level grid systems), environmental best practice and cool chain as well as a brand new chapter on International Freight Forwarding

Description The definitive guide to supply chain philosophy, strategy and the practicalities of logistics and distribution. The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management is a step-by-step guide to setting up and managing supply chains to add maximum value to the organizations they serve. Benefiting from the author teamâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s years of practical field-based experience in some of the most challenging environments across the world (from developed economies to third-world countries and war zones), this book will enthuse students and be an invaluable desk reference throughout the careers of practitioners. Packed with worked examples and real-world data, The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management offers complete coverage on all the key aspects of distribution, logistics and supply chain planning and management with clear and straight-forward explanations. This is not a compilation of work drawn from a disparate collection of research papers and miscellaneous projects, but a logical and complete holistic view of how supply chains fit together, including minute details of distribution and logistics. Globalisation, increased competition and new technologies have all changed the landscape in which supply chains operate. This fully revised 6th edition of The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management provides solutions to the key challenges. With new material on international freight forwarding, environmental best practice, cool chain, intermodal shipping and outsourcing and a new, detailed index of contents this is the ultimate study/ reference companion. New online resources include PowerPoint lecture slides (tables, images and formulae from the text), glossary of terms, weblinks, blog articles, video interviews and infographics.

Author Information Alan Rushton is a Director of Dialog Consultants, and was formerly the Director of Graduate Programmes at the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management at Cranfield University. He is also a Chartered Fellow of the CILT (UK). Phil Croucher is an independent supply chain consultant and lecturer, has an MSc in Logistics and Distribution Management from Cranfield University and is a Chartered Fellow of CILT (UK). Dr Peter Baker is an independent consultant and lecturer, a Visiting Fellow at Cranfield University and a Chartered Fellow of CILT (UK).

205

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents 1

Concepts of Logistics and Distribution 1.1 Introduction to Logistics and Distribution 1.2 Integrated Logistics and the Supply Chain Customer Service and Logistics 1.3 Channels of Distribution 1.4 Key Issues and Challenges for Logistics 2 Planning for Logistics 2.1 Planning Framework for Logistics 2.2 Logistics Processes 2.3 Supply Chain Segmentation 2.4 Logistics Costs and Trade-Offs 2.5 Logistics Network Planning 2.6 Logistics Management and Organisation 2.7 Omnichannel Fulfilment 2.8 Manufacturing Logistics 3 Procurement, Inventory and Demand Forecasting 3.1 Procurement and Supply 3.2 Inventory - The Basic Concepts 3.3 Inventory and the Supply Chain 3.4 Inventory Planning and Demand Forecasting 4 Warehousing and Storage 4.1 Principles of Warehousing 4.2 Storage and Handling Systems (Palletised) 4.3 Storage and Handling Systems (Non-Palletised) 4.4 Order Picking and Packing 4.5 Receiving and Despatch 4.6 Warehouse Design

Logistics

4.7 Warehouse Management and Information 5 Freight Transport 5.1 International Logistics - Modal Choice 5.2 Maritime Transport 5.3 Air Transport 5.4 Rail and Intermodal Transport 5.5 Road Freight Transport - Vehicle Selection 5.6 Road Freight Transport - Vehicle Costing 5.7 Road Freight Transport Planning and Resourcing 5.8 Road Freight Transport - Vehicle Routeing & Scheduling 5.9 International Freight Forwarding 6 Outsourcing Logistics 6.1 Outsourcing - Operations & Services 6.2 Outsourcing - Decision Criteria 6.3 Outsourcing - The Selection Process 6.4 Outsourcing Management 7 Operational Management 7.1 Cost and Performance Monitoring 7.2 Benchmarking 7.3 Information and Communication Technology in the Supply Chain 7.4 Security and Safety 7.5 Logistics and the Environment 7.6 Humanitarian Logistics


Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $190.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475956 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477493 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Reference Subject: Logistics

Author Information Professor David B. Grant is Professor of Logistics at Hull University Business School. He has over 175 publications and is on the editorial boards of numerous journals.

This book

<< In-depth case studies deliver insight and perspective on current and emerging issues, trends and

significant new areas of research in the fields of logistics, supply chain and operations << Cases cover a variety of topics including how to tackle technology-related issues, setting and reviewing budgets, managing economic performance and managing costs << Shares first-hand experiences and knowledge from subject matter experts in industry and academia regarding how to reach business objectives and overcome considerable obstacles << Imparts unique perspectives that demonstrate how leading organisations stay competitive across the globe in a variety of geographical contexts << Covers hot new topics and vital new areas of research which will guide future strategies << Foreword by Martin Christopher

Description The Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection contains reallife scenarios from leading companies including Volvo, Vortex, Honda of America, Green Cargo and Swedish Transport Administration. It includes a foreword by Martin Christopher. Comprehensive in scope and scrupulous in detail, this collection includes actual events experienced by businesses of every size, from SMB’s to some of the most successful corporations in manufacturing, transportation, hospitality and other industries. Readers will discover proven tactics and innovative solutions for handling uncertainties, solving problems and circumventing risk, plus a wealth of information to guide strategy and decision making. Readers involved in logistics and supply chain management will find the Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection full of: immediate application of strategies and tactics to situations and challenges; valuable tools for testing management proficiency in crisis mitigation and resolution; independent learning modules and professional training programmes; expanded questionand-answer sections designed to measure knowledge transfer and lessons learned; engaging, topical situations highly relevant to the fields of logistics, supply chain management and operations. Students and prospective managers will learn crucial skills to meet current challenges, qualify for professional advancement and achieve success. These case studies are also available for individual purchase. Please visit www.koganpage.com/ case-studies for more details.

Table of Contents 1

Foreword by Martin Christopher 1.1 Introduction by David B. Grant 1.2 Part 1 - Editor’s Introduction to the Operations Management Cases 1.3 The Nuclear Effect of Computer Malware by Lucian Tipi 1.4 Real World Effects of Cyber Attacks by Lucian Tipi 1.5 Jewelry Design and Manufacture Operations by Brian Lawrence 1.6 Sustainability in the Hotel Industry by Arvind Upadhyay, Francesco Pomponi and Céline Vadam 1.7 The Closure of a Bank Department by Brian Lawrence 1.8 Demand Covering and Service Level Estimation in Public Services Planning by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.9 Job Shop Layout at Jones Medical Laboratories by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.10 Monument Engineering Ltd by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.11 The Mortgage Advisor by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.12 SABE Tractors by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.13 Lawnmower Engines Ltd, Variable Costs, Break-even Points and Profit by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.14 Make or Buy Decisions at Sports

Logistics, Operations and Supply

206 Chain Management

Logistics

1.15 Co. Ltd by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.16 Using Operational Research to Calculate the Cost of Quality by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.17 The Use of Deseasonalisation Techniques in Demand Forecasting by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese 1.18 Part 2 - Editor’s Introduction to the Logistics and Supply Chain Management Cases The Maintenance Stores Dilemma by Gwynne Richards 1.19 Communication in Business Practice by Xia Zhu 1.20 Collaborative Distribution Considering Economic and Environmental Performance by Vahid Mirzabeiki 1.21 Data Sharing Between Supply Chain Actors by Vahid Mirzabeiki 1.22 Supply Chain Design for e-Retailing Companies by Vahid Mirzabeiki 1.23 Delays Entering a Container Port by Brian Lawrence 1.24 Drivers and Barriers in Implementing Information Management Systems in European Micro Enterprises by Francesco Pomponi, Lorenzo Coccia, Arvind Upadhyay 1.25 Growth Strategies of Logistics Service Providers by Nigel

Caldwell and Christian Konig 1.26 Managing Sustainability in the Fashion Supply Chain by Piyya Muhammad Rafi-UlShan, Patsy Perry and David Grant 1.27 Supply Chain Dreams and Nightmares by Gerard Chick 1.28 Uncertainty, Disruption and Resilience by Brian Lawrence 1.29 Supply Chain Management and Return on Total Net Assets by Simon Templar 1.30 Managing Workers’ Interests Across Global Supply Chain Networks by Patsy Perry and Mohamed Abdel-Wahab 1.31 Honda of America’s Emphasis on Strategic Cost Management by Gerard Chick 1.32 The Transportation Problem by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese


Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection Get access to dozens of real-life examples you can share with your students. Invaluable for students needing to understand key concepts and their real-life application, our case study collection brings operations management, supply chain management and logistics to life. You can access these resources in one of three ways: 1. Buy EPDF access to individual case studies for use in teaching. If youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re interested in licenses for multiple users, please contact kpinfo@koganpage.com 2. Ask your university library to buy a copy of the complete Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection in print or ebook format. Under the CLA (Copyright Licencing Agency) rules you can print/copy 10% of the book in teaching (which roughly equates to 3 cases) 3. Get your library to buy a print or ebook copy of the collection for reference

Access a free case study by visiting www.koganpage.com/free-case-study


Humanitarian Logistics Meeting the Challenge of Preparing For and Responding To Disasters Edition: 3 Date: 05/28/2018 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481445 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481452 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Author Information Professor Peter Tatham is a leading international researcher in the field of humanitarian logistics, and is the Deputy Head of the Department of International Business and Asian Studies at Griffith Business School, Queensland, Australia. Martin Christopher is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield University, UK. His work in the field of logistics and supply chain management has gained international recognition. He is a regular contributor to conferences and workshops around the world.

This book

<< Assesses the principal challenges faced by humanitarian logistics practitioners and offers

suggestions for best practice when supporting natural disasters and complex emergencies << Includes online resources for lecturers and students << New to this edition: contains new chapters on providing support for complex emergencies, waste management and reverse logistics, the application of value stream analysis and the potential of new technologies << Provides international perspectives through a series of multi-contributed essays written by practitioners and academics, including abstracts and references << Gives particular focus to pre-disaster preparation, rather than post-disaster assistance

Description Effective logistics play a critical role in disaster preparation and response, but how can those working in this field deliver in environments which are often dangerous and unstable? Humanitarian Logistics provides thought-provoking guidance and discussion of the core issues facing practitioners involved in managing the logistics of disaster relief. With insights from academics and practitioners who have worked in these situations, this multi-contributed book offers suggestions for best practice and international perspectives on the nature of the humanitarian logistics challenge. Now in its 3rd edition, Humanitarian Logistics is fully updated and contains new chapters on providing support for complex emergencies, waste management and reverse logistics, the application of value stream analysis and the potential of new technologies such as 3D printing, cash transfer programmes and drones. With a particular focus on pre-disaster preparation and inter-agency cooperation, this book is essential reading for anyone who needs to understand how to respond effectively during a disaster or crisis. Includes online resources for lecturers and students.

Table of Contents 1 1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5 1.6

1.7

1.8

Logistics, Operations and Supply

208 Chain Management

Introduction [Peter Tatham and Martin Christopher] Process Improvement – A Matter of Life or Death for NonGovernmental Organizations [Paul D. Larson] Impacts of Funding Systems on Humanitarian Operations [Tina Wakolbinger and Fuminori Toyasaki] Introducing Information Communication Technologies (ICTs) Into Humanitarian Programming [Laura Eldon and Anna Kondakhchyan] Technology Meets Humanitarian Logistics – A View on Benefits and Challenges [Peter Tatham, Graham Heaslip and Karen Spens] The Increasing Importance of Services in Humanitarian Logistics [Graham Heaslip] An Exploration of Horizontal Supply Chain Integration for Humanitarian and Disaster Relief [Jihee Kim, Stephen Pettit, Anthony Beresford and Irina Harris] Humanitarian logistics and supply chain management in Africa [Charles Mbohwa, Tatenda Chingono and Paul Buatsi] An Inquiry into Public Procurement for the Civil Preparedness Space – A Case

Logistics

Study in Finland [Hlekiwe Kachali and Isabell Storsjö] 1.9 Supply chain and logistics competencies for the humanitarian logistician [Graham Heaslip, Alain Vaillancourt, Peter Tatham and Gyöngyi Kovács] 1.10 Application of centre-of-gravity analysis in network design for pre-positioning of emergency relief items [Gerard de Villiers] 1.11 Humanitarian logistics – The Functional Challenges Facing Field Offices [Ira Haavisto, Peter Tatham, Hanna-Riitta Harilainen, Cécile L’Hermitte, Magnus Larsson and Alain Vaillancourt] Supply Chain Improvement at ShelterBox – A Case Study of the Application of Lean Principles and Techniques in a Disaster Relief Organisation [David Taylor and Darren Moss] 1.12 Emergency Management and Logistics Responsiveness – A Study of the Christchurch Earthquakes 2011 [Mark Wilson, Shaun Fogarty, Walter Glass and Paul Childerhouse] 1.13 What next for Humanitarian Logistics? A Practitioner’s Perspective [George Fenton and Rebecca Lewin] 1.14 Where next? A glimpse of the future of humanitarian logistics [Gyöngyi Kovács]


Introduction to Global Logistics Delivering the Goods Edition: 2 Date: 11/28/2016 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478254 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478261 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

Author Information John Manners-Bell is the founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is Honorary Visiting Professor at the London Metropolitan University, adviser to the World Economic Forum and a former Chairman of the Supply Chain Council of the World Economic Forum. Prior to establishing Transport Intelligence, he worked as an analyst in consultancies specializing in international trade, transport and logistics. John Manners-Bell is author of Logistics and Supply Chains in Emerging Markets and Supply Chain Risk.

This book

<< Offers a step-by-step guide to global logistics << Provides in-depth definitions, descriptions and explorations of the strategic principles and practices in transportation modes and supply chain verticals, including: freight forwarding, contract logistics, shipping, road freight, air cargo and express << Examines important trends and developments that are shaping the industry, including 3D printing, megacities, and post-harvest food losses << Online resources: Chapter-supporting lecturer slides

Description Introduction to Global Logistics offers a step-by-step guide to global logistics. Covering the breadth of logistics, this highly accessible text is illustrated by engaging case studies of market leaders. In this comprehensive second instalment of Global Logistics Strategies, John Manners-Bell provides an indepth definition, description and exploration of the strategic principles and practices in transportation modes and supply chain verticals, including: freight forwarding, contract logistics, shipping, road freight, air cargo and express. The book also examines major sectors, including automotive, chemical, pharmaceutical, retail, consumer, and high tech. Introduction to Global Logistics offers a detailed examination of key topics, including: how the logistics industry has developed, how it is influenced by macro-economic factors and demand-side trends, what the risks are to the industry, and how it will develop over the coming years. It examines important trends and developments that are shaping the industry, including 3D printing, megacities, and post-harvest food losses. Online resources available: Chapter-supporting lecturer slides.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Logistics, Operations and Supply

209 Chain Management

Introduction Whatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s shaping the global logistics market? An industry in transformation: towards consolidation Logistics market development by geography The emergence of logistics clusters International freight forwarding Contract logistics European road freight Express parcels Air cargo Container shipping The European rail and intermodal sectors Supply chain technologies Supply chain dynamics of vertical sectors Risks in global supply chains The e-commerce logistics phenomenon Supply chain innovation and disruption Ethical and sustainable supply chain strategies

Logistics


Green Logistics Improving the Environmental Sustainability of Logistics Edition: 3 Date: 02/28/2015 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471859 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471866 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Author Information Alan McKinnon is Professor and Head of Logistics at Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg. He has been researching and teaching in freight transport and logistics for 35 years and has published in journals and books. He’s been an adviser to several governments and international organisations on environmental aspects of logistics. Michael Browne is Professor of Logistics at the University of Westminster, London. He has worked on studies for Transport for London, the European Commission, the UK Department for Transport, Research Councils and commercial organizations. Maja Piecyk is Associate Professor in Logistics at Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh. Much of her research focuses on the optimisation of supply networks, carbon auditing of logistics and long-term trends in the energy requirements and environmental impacts of logistics. Anthony Whiteing is Senior Lecturer in the Institute for Transport Studies at the University of Leeds. An academic with 30 years’ experience, he’s been involved in various UK and European research projects primarily in the field of freight transport.

210

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Examines the most pressing issues and current trends in green logistics << Analyses the environmental consequences of logistics and how to deal with them << Examines ways of reducing these externalities and achieving a more sustainable balance between economic, environmental and social objectives

<< Provides insightful international case studies that illustrate the impact of green logistics in practice << Online resources: Graphics, tables, chapter summaries, and guidelines for lecturers Description Leading the way in current thinking on environmental logistics, Green Logistics provides a unique insight on the environmental impacts of logistics and the actions that companies and governments can take to deal with them. It is written by leading researchers in the field and provides a comprehensive view of the subject for students, managers and policy-makers. Fully updated, the 3rd edition of Green Logistics has a more global perspective than previous editions. It introduces new contributors and international case studies that illustrate the impact of green logistics in practice. There is a new chapter on the links between green logistics and corporate social responsibility and a series of postscripts examining the effects of new developments, such as 3D printing, distribution by drone, the physical internet and the concept of peak freight. Other key topics examined include: carbon auditing of supply chains; transferring freight to greener transport modes; reducing the environmental impact of warehousing; improving the energy efficiency of freight transport; making city logistics more environmentally sustainable; reverse logistics for the management of waste; role of government in promoting sustainable logistics. The 3rd edition of Green Logistics includes indispensable online supporting materials, including graphics, tables, chapter summaries, and guidelines for lecturers.

Table of Contents 1

Assessing the environmental effects of logistics 1.1 Environmental sustainability: A new priority for logistics managers – Alan McKinnon 1.2 Assessing the external impacts of freight transport – Maja Piecyk, Sharon Cullinane and Julia Edwards 1.3 Carbon auditing of companies, supply chains and products – Maja Piecyk 1.4 Evaluating and internalizing the environmental costs of logistics – Maja Piecyk, Alan McKinnon and Julian Allen 2 Strategic perspective 2.1 Green logistics, sustainable development and corporate social responsibility – Maja Piecyk and Maria Björklund 2.2 Restructuring road freight networks within supply chains – Irina Harris, Vasco SanchezRodrigues, Mohamed Naim and Christine Mumford 2.3 Transferring freight to ‘greener’ transport modes – Allan Woodburn and Anthony Whiteing 2.4 Development of greener vehicles, aircraft and ships – Alan McKinnon, Julian Allen and Allan Woodburn 2.5 Reducing the environmental impact of warehousing – Peter Baker and Clive Marchant

Logistics

3 Operational perspective 3.1 Optimizing the routeing of vehicles – Richard Eglese and Daniel Black 3.2 Opportunities for improving vehicle utilization – Alan McKinnon 3.3 Increasing fuel efficiency in the road freight sector – Alan McKinnon 3.4 Alternative fuels and freight vehicles: Status, costs and benefits, and growth – Jacques Leonardi, Sharon Cullinane and Julia Edwards 4 Key issues 4.1 Sustainability strategies for city logistics – Julian Allen, Michael Browne and José Holguín-Veras 4.2 E-business, e-logistics and the environment – Alan McKinnon, Yingli Wang, Andrew Potter and Julia Edwards 4.3 Reverse logistics for the management of waste – Tom Cherrett, Sarah Maynard, Fraser McLeod and Adrian Hickford 4.4 The food miles debate: Is shorter better? – Tara Garnett 5 Implications for public policy and the future of supply chains 5.1 The role of government in promoting green logistics – Alan McKinnon


Logistics and Retail Management Emerging Issues and New Challenges in the Retail Supply Chain Edition: 4 Date: 04/28/2014 Price: $75.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749468231 ISBN Ebook: 9780749468248 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Author Information John Fernie is Professor of Retail Marketing at Heriot-Watt University. He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport and a member of the Chartered Institute of Marketing. Leigh Sparks is Professor of Retail Studies at the Institute for Retail Studies, University of Stirling. He is a member of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport and Chair of the Academy of Marketing Research Committee.

211

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Brings together key thinking on issues in the retail supply chain << Includes brand new chapters on international fashion and CSR in the textile trade << Contributions from both academics and professionals Description The fourth edition of Logistics and Retail Management has been substantially updated to take account of recent developments in retail logistics. Retailers have recognised the need to have more involvement in supply chains and noted that benefits can be achieved in both service levels and cost reduction. Notwithstanding the major strides made, numerous challenges remain, and new issues are constantly emerging. This book brings together well-known academics and practitioners, who share their research, ideas and experience of current thinking on supply chain management in retail. Reflecting the changing needs of the global marketplace and responding to the challenges faced by retailers, this new book features a chapter on International Fashion Supply Chain Management and another on CSR and the textile supply chain.

Table of Contents 1

Retail logistics: changes and challenges – John Fernie and Leigh Sparks 2 Relationships in the supply chain – John Fernie 3 The internationalization of the retail supply chain – John Fernie 4 The international fashion supply chain and corporate social responsibility – Patsy Perry, John Fernie and Steve Wood 5 The footwear supply chain: the case of Schuh – John Fernie and Colin Temple 6 Supply chain strategy in the fashion and luxury industry – Alessandro Brun and Cecilia Castelli 7 Tesco’s supply chain management – Leigh Sparks 8 On-shelf availability in UK retailing – John Fernie and David B Grant 9 The development of e-tail logistics – John Fernie, Suzanne Fernie and Alan McKinnon 10 The greening of retail logistics – Alan McKinnon and Julia Edwards

Logistics


E-Logistics Managing Your Digital Supply Chains for Competitive Advantage Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472665 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472672 Pages: 536 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

Author Information Dr Yingli Wang is a lecturer in logistics and operations management at Cardiff Business School. Her research on e-logistics dates back to early 2000’s and has attracted funding from various funding bodies such as Engineering and Physical Sciences Research Council, European Regional Development Funding, Welsh Government, Highways England, and Department for Transport. Before embarking on her academic career, she worked for about 8.5 years at Nestlé China in various senior managerial roles. Dr Stephen Pettit is a member of the Transport and Shipping Research Group within the Logistics and Operations Management Section at Cardiff Business School. He has been involved in a wide range of transportrelated research projects, notably for the UK Department of Transport and the European Commission. His recent research has focused on international logistics, port operations and management, and the application of information and communication technology in the fields of transport, logistics and supply chain management.

This book

<< Examines the strategic role of e-logistics in managing information and information flows within and between organizations in today’s dynamic global environment. << Provides a clear and accessible guide to key technological and business developments. << Features contributions from leading practitioners and academics in the field.

Description E-logistics serves as the nerve system for the whole supply chain and enables smooth information flow within and between organizations. This contributed book focuses on the strategic role of e-logistics in today’s dynamic global environment. In E-Logistics international experts from both academia and industry examine how competitiveness and productivity in transport, logistics and supply chain management can be improved using e-logistics systems and technologies. A variety of successful e-logistics business approaches are discussed covering a range of commercial sectors and transport modes. Separate chapters consider e-logistics developments for air freight; rail freight; road freight; sea transport and port systems. Subsequent chapters address in depth support systems for B2C and B2B e-commerce and e-fulfilment, warehouse management, RFID, electronic marketplaces, global supply network visibility, and service chain automation. Industry case studies are used to support the discussion. The book also investigates emerging technologies in e-logistics and considers what the future might hold in this rapidly changing and developing field.

Table of Contents 1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17

212

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction 18 ICT in multimodal transport and Supporting ICT infrastructure technological trends: unleashing for future logistics: Intelligent potential for the future Transport Systems (ITS) and smart grid ICT for air freight management ICT for rail freight ICT for road transport B2C e-commerce and fulfilment The effects of e-commerce on warehousing Advanced warehouse management system deployment and technology innovations to streamline e-logistics processes RFID in logistics The role of GS1 in logistics and e-procurement Regional electronic marketplaces to improve logistics Port-centric ICT system: Building value in supply chains Trade and transport electronic single windows Single window systems for global supply chain management: A case of South Korea End-to-end global visibility management for integrated supply and demand chains Automating a logistics service chain – A telco’s perspective Electronic bills of lading: Sea carriage contracts

Logistics


Aviation Logistics The Dynamic Partnership of Air Freight and Supply Chain Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2016 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472702 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472719 Pages: 208 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

This book

<< Explains how the rapidly evolving global logistics industry works in close partnership with the

aviation operators to achieve fast and efficient facilitation << Looks at air freight and how carriers are responding to market demands with new and better methods and technologies << Reviews changes in manufacturing and production methods << Illustrates how different challenges are met in varied markets through insightful case studies << Features contributions from a team of experts, including: Oliver Evans, Chief Cargo Officer at Swiss International Airlines Ltd and Stan Wraight, who has over 40 years of industry experience gained through both senior management and board level positions at KLM Cargo, Atlas Air and AirBridge Cargo << Online resources: Air Cargo News’ Freighter Directory

Description Aviation Logistics looks at the function of the air cargo business and its role in global supply chains and logistics. As global economies are constantly evolving, the supply chain business with its transport partners must be proactive for the future. Technology and its resulting efficiency and transparency are therefore a central part of this book. Aviation Logistics examines how carriers are coming up with new methods and technologies to improve ground handling and road transport, traceability systems and barcoding, security and screening, and safe delivery of perishable items (such as in the pharmaceutical and medical sectors). Endorsed by The International Air Cargo Association (TIACA), Aviation Logistics is supplemented with case studies and contributions from a team of experts including Oliver Evans and Stan Wraight, both industry experts. Online resources available: Air Cargo News’ Freighter Directory.

Author Information Michael Sales specializes in press relations and consultancy for the transport industry. He has handled a number of prestigious clients, including Airports of Paris, Air France Express, Athens International Airport, Cologne Bonn Airport, ECS, Basque regional industrial promotion, Düsseldorf Airport, Budapest Airport and many more. He is also a freelance journalist.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

213

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Air cargo – trying harder The world of air cargo, Oliver Evans, former TIACA Air cargo history Airport connections Cargo handling agents – the impact of IT Road feeder service Freight forwarder Cool logistics Express and mail Special air cargoes Cargo security and risk Environment Innovation and trends in air logistics Views on the future The law – organizations and regulations governing international aviation Glossary of common air freight terms

Logistics


Fashion Logistics Insights into the Fashion Retail Supply Chain Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2015 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472986 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472979 Pages: 216 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Author Information John Fernie is Emeritus Professor of Retail Marketing at Heriot-Watt University. He has written and contributed to numerous textbooks and papers on retail management, especially in the field of retail logistics. He is editor of the International Journal of Retail and Distribution Management. David B. Grant is Professor of Logistics at Hull University Business School, UK and Distinguished Senior Fellow at Hanken School of Economics, Helsinki. He has over 175 publications in various refereed journals, books and conference proceedings, and is on the editorial board of many international journals.

214

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Combines insights into both fashion retailing and fashion logistics << Studies major forces driving change in the retail industry and how manufacturers can adapt their working practices accordingly << Considers fashion retailing and logistics as part of a wider global supply chain and production system << Features case studies of best practice that demonstrate successful fashion retail supply chains of leading companies, including Benetton, Burberry, Schuh and M&S << Provides valuable supporting online materials, including PowerPoint presentations and teaching notes

Description Fashion Logistics examines the principles and practices behind responsible fashion retailing and costeffective supply chain management in the fashion industry. Fashion Logistics assesses the early growth and changes in the industry as well as the drivers of change in the market. Important forces are driving tremendous changes in the retail industry, particularly in supply chain networks and operations. Manufacturers therefore need to re-think their supply chains so that they are resilient enough to withstand shocks, agile enough to respond quickly to sudden change, flexible enough to customise products, and efficient enough to protect margins. John Fernie and David Grant assess these forces and changes, and how manufacturers should adapt their working practices accordingly. Fashion Logistics integrates case studies of best practice that demonstrate successful fashion retail supply chains of leading companies such as Benetton, Burberry, Schuh and M&S. The book provides vital figures, tables and mini-cases in each chapter, along with a discussion question at the end of each mini-case, references and suggested readings.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction The changing nature of fashion retailing: implications for logistics 3 International fashion sourcing 4 Corporate and social responsibility 5 International logistics 6 In-store consumer service 7 Online consumer service 8 Luxury fashion and SCM 9 Sustainable fashion retailing and logistics

Logistics


Defence Logistics Enabling and Sustaining Successful Military Operations Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2018 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478032 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478049 Pages: 384 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Author Information Jeremy Smith manages modules on the Defence Acquisition Management and the Programme and Project Management MScs at Cranfield Defence and Security, UK. He developed and leads several logistics short courses and workshops pitched at strategic and practitioner levels. He served for 25 years in the British Army as a logistician and Ammunition Technical Officer.

215

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Covers the entire supply chain in a defence context through real-life case studies, examining issues

such as circular logistics in defence and contracting << Provides vital insights from international academics and professionals currently working in defence logistics areas such as distributive manufacturing and performance management << Includes coverage of recent developments and technologies affecting defence logistics, such as 3D printing and issues such as obsolescence, counterfeiting and sustainability

Description The management of logistics and supply chain operations is of vital importance in the defence sector. Defence Logistics looks at established theories and their practical utility, providing insights into current thinking for postgraduate and undergraduate students, lecturers, researchers, practitioners and professionals through real-life case studies. Defence Logistics focuses on key areas of logistics and supply chain management in context, such as sustainability, inventory management, resilience, procurement, information systems and crisis response. This comprehensive and up-to-the-minute collection includes contributions from international academics from a range of universities, academies and defence schools, along with practitioners who are currently working in the field of defence logistics.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Defence logistics definitions and frameworks 1.2 Defence logistics - an historical perspective 1.3 Defence logistics in context 1.4 Resilience in defence supply chains 1.5 Integrating mission and support systems through the life cycle Integrated logistics support and maintenance strategies 1.6 Supportability analysis for supportable and supported mission systems 1.7 Achieving dependability in defence systems 1.8 Planning and executing defence operational logistics 1.9 Procurement for defence logistics support 1.10 Managing performance in defence logistics 1.11 Optimizing the defence inventory 1.12 Accounting and finance in defence logistics 1.13 Decision support in defence logistics 1.14 Defence logistics and crisis response 1.15 Defence logistics information systems 1.16 A look to the future

Logistics


Maritime Logistics A Guide to Contemporary Shipping and Port Management Edition: 2 Date: 04/28/2015 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472689 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472696 Pages: 480 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Author Information Dong-Wook Song is Professor of Transport and Logistics at the Transport Research Institute, Edinburgh Napier University. His work is well-recognised in the field and he has received a number of The Best Paper Awards from academic associations and communities. He sits on the editorial board of established journals in transport and logistics. Dong has worked as a consultant for a number of private and public organisations including the UN, OECD, ADB and World Bank. He has served as an elected council member at IAME since 2012. Photis M Panayides is Professor in Shipping Economics, Department of Commerce, Finance and Shipping at Cyprus University of Technology. He reviews for several major journals in the field and has pioneered the development of academic and professional programmes in shipping and logistics. He sits on the editorial board of established journals in the field.

216

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Provides a comprehensive overview of maritime logistics << Examines latest logistical developments within the port and shipping industry << Shares the vast range of experience of its editors and contributors, who are all international experts in the field

Description Globalisation and the rapid increase in world trade in the past decade have contributed to greater demand for international transport and logistics and, consequently, the expansion of the maritime industry. The dramatic changes in the mode of world trade and cargo transportation make it more important than ever to have a clear understanding of the way in which freight is transported by sea and the role of ports in this exchange. At the cutting edge in its assessment of the industry, Maritime Logistics covers the whole scope of maritime logistics and examines latest logistical developments within the port and shipping industry. With a range of new international contributors, this new edition has been thoroughly revised and updated. There are new chapters on port centric logistics, hinterland logistics and global supply chains, maritime transport and logistics as a trade facilitator, and future trends and developments. Written by a team of international experts with over fifty years’ experience in the field, Maritime Logistics provides a truly global perspective. The book covers everything that students of logistics, as well as those working within the industry, need to know about maritime logistics, including shipping lines, containers, tankers, dry bulk, port-centric logistics, and much more.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Introduction to maritime logistics – Dong-Wook Song and Photis M Panayides 1.2 Maritime transport and logistics as a trade facilitator – Albert W Veenstra 1.3 International maritime trade and logistics – Funda Yercan and Turkay Yildiz 1.4 Defining maritime logistics and its value – Eon-Seong Lee, Hyung-Sik Nam and Dong-Wook Song 1.5 Hinterland logistics and global supply chains – Rickard Bergqvist 1.6 Human elements in maritime logistics – Cecilia Österman and Anna-Lisa Osvalder 2 Shipping logistics 2.1 Intermodal freight transport and logistics – Katsuhiko Hayashi and Toshinori Nemoto 2.2 Developing liner service networks in container shipping – César Ducruet and Theo Notteboom 2.3 Supply chain integration of shipping companies – Photis M Panayides, Robert Wiedmer, Panayiotis C Andreou and Christodoulos Louca 2.4 Logistics strategy in container shipping – Alfred J Baird 2.5 Tanker shipping logistics – Robert Desrosiers

Logistics

2.6 Dry bulk shipping logistics – Claude Comtois and Romuald Lacoste 3 Port logistics 3.1 Dry ports in concept and practice – Violeta Roso and Andrea Rosa 3.2 Port-centric logistics in concept and practice – Nikolaos Valantasis-Kanellos and DongWook Song 3.3 Container hub ports in concept and practice – Hyung-Sik Nam and Dong-Wook Song 3.4 Multinationalizing container ports: Business models and strategies – Francesco Parola 3.5 Public–private partnerships and port logistics performance – Jasmine Siu Lee Lam, Francesco Parola and Photis M Panayides 3.6 Port and logistics chains: Changes in organizational effectiveness – Cimen Karatas Cetin 3.7 Logistics performance of supply chain-oriented ports – Su Han Woo, Stephen Pettit and Anthony Beresford 4 Conclusion 4.1 Looking ahead – Photis M Panayides and Dong-Wook Song


Marine Insurance An Essential Guide to Liability, Insurance, Law, the Market and Claims in the Maritime Industry Edition: 1 Date: 09/28/2018 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482633 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482640 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Logistics

Author Information Sam Ignarski has held executive roles within the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading mutual insurance management company, the Thomas Miller Group, and more recently has run insurance start-up operations in association with CTC, BMM and Mitsui Sumitomo at Lloydâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s. The author runs large international, internetbased publishing activities aimed at shipping, transport insurance and finance professionals. He has held a wide variety of consulting roles in the marine insurance and transport fields.

This book

<< Looks at all the different roles within the marine insurance market, such as buyers, brokers, insurers and reinsurers << Gives guidance on advising clients and underwriters on points of principle and policy wordings << Includes fascinating case studies of real-life situations involving cargo, P&I and hull insurance << Provides online resources of sample terms of agreement illustrating best practice

Description One of the most necessary and fundamental forms of insurance within the insurance industry, marine insurance facilitates global trade and ensures economic property. About 50,000 blue water ships serve world trade, and there are, at any one time, some 1.3 million seafarers ashore or at sea. The specialist international marine and transport insurance industry takes in some $30 billion in premium each year, and some 15,000 individuals work in the international insurance markets. Marine Insurance is the indispensable guide to these and other intricacies of this important part of industry to help you protect your supply chain and preempt losses and damages. Marine Insurance covers the loss or damage of ships, cargo, terminals and any transport or cargo by which property is transferred, acquired or held between the points of origin and final destination. Cover provided includes hull insurance, war risk insurance, loss of profit/freight insurance, detention insurance, strike insurance or uninsured legal expenses (defence) cover. This essential guide will equip you with the knowledge to better understand the way marine insurance markets function and the terms of the standard covers available. Essential for both suppliers and specialist buyers of marine insurance, Marine Insurance covers types of insurance premiums; P&I insurance; cargo insurance; hull insurance; strikes, riots and political risks; war risks; reinsurance; claims handling, uncertainties, market trends and future directions. Each chapter includes real-life case studies to illustrate different issues that arise with marine insurance. There are also sample terms of agreement, showing best practice.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

217

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Origins and Function of Insurance in International Trade The Modern Marine Insurance Market of Buyers, Brokers, Insurers and Reinsurers Types of Marine Insurance Covers P&I Insurance Case Studies Cargo Insurance Case Studies Hull Insurance Case Studies Strikes, Riots and Political Risks Case Studies War Risks Case Studies Reinsurance General Average and Salvage, Limitation of Claims, Claims Handling and Case Studies Present Uncertainties of NonDisclosure, Market Trends, Consolidation and Distribution Future Directions, Electronic Bills of Lading and Electronic Distribution of Marine Insurance

Logistics


Port Management Cases in Port Geography, Operations and Policy Edition: 1 Date: 12/28/2017 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474324 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474331 Pages: 576 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Logistics

Author Information Dr Stephen Pettit is a researcher for the Transport and Shipping Research Group in Cardiff Business School, UK. He has been involved in a range of transport-related research including a groundbreaking project for the UK Department of Transport. Professor Anthony Beresford is Programme Director for the MSc International Transport at Cardiff University, UK and Director for the suite of Masters Programmes in Logistics and Operations Management. Professor Beresford has travelled widely in an advisory capacity within the ports and transport fields in Europe, Asia and North America.

218

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Edited by two leading academics who have conducted research for The Department of Transport

and the United Nations << Includes research-based findings from an international team of contributors as well as invaluable insights and international case studies << Focuses on the big picture, which differentiates it from other available texts which are regional (e.g. Europe, Asia) or focus on specific aspects (e.g. privatisation, competitiveness)

Description Port Management looks at the numerous types of business interactions that occur at active ports. These include cooperating with other ports, coordinating deliveries with ships, overseeing port development, advertising and promotion, and enforcing security and environmental protection initiatives. Including research, practical insights and case studies, this book looks at quantitative methods and market analysis, maritime logistics, port planning and pricing, and commercial law. Port Management covers all the main aspects of management, administration and policy, and fills existing gaps in the literature in this area. Edited by two leading academics who have conducted research for the Department of Transport and the United Nations, this text is international in scope and includes research-based findings from a global team of contributors. It provides fascinating insights into the geography, economics, politics and trade involved in port management.

Table of Contents 1

Global Challenges and Port Governance 1.1 Value Creation and Value Capture in the Ports’ Business System 1.2 The Governance of Ports under Global Challenges – What Next? 1.3 Effect of Global Supply Chain Developments on the Governance of Port Regulation 1.4 Port Governance Reform in Spain 2 Port Resilience, Transport Logistics and the Environment 2.1 Port Resilience – A Perspective from UK Ports 2.2 Quantifying Resilience in Seaports – An Application to Ports in the Hamburg-Le Havre Range 2.3 Understanding Australian Port Resilience and the Development of a Port Resilience Framework 2.4 Green Pricing Decision-Making – Tackling Uncertainty In The Case Of Port Infrastructure 2.5 The Implications of the SECA for Ports and Hinterland Transport in Sweden 2.6 The Role of Ports in the Offshore Wind Industry 3 Port Policies and Competition Strategies 3.1 Canadian Ports Policy – An Evolutionary Approach 3.2 Port Policies and Private Investments – Insights from

Logistics

Latin America and Caribbean Countries 3.3 The Operations Management and Governance of Cruise Terminals in Hong Kong 3.4 Competition Strategies in the Spanish Port System and Their Relationship with Port Authority Efficiency 3.5 Assessing the National Port System – The Case of Vietnam 4 Port Choice and Ports in Shipping Systems 4.1 Supply Chain Modelling for Container-Port Choice – Case Study of a West-Mediterranean Transhipment Port 4.2 Port-centric Logistics – The Seaport Versus Inland Location Dilemma 4.3 Port Management Implications from Economies of Scale in the Liner Container Shipping Industry


Container Logistics The Role of the Container in the Supply Chain Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2018 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481247 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481254 Pages: 448 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Logistics

This book

<< Examines container logistics from the shippers perspective, tackling issues that are central to the

role of organising and overseeing the transportation of goods and commodities, a unique angle which is not covered in other maritime transport books << Provides insights into ways of managing container logistics as an integrated part of a shipper’s global supply chain covering planning, procurement and execution and collaboration of logistics activities << Provides shared knowledge from a team of international contributors such as the CEO of Hamburg Port Authorities, the International Logistics Director of Michelin, the Senior Vice President of Global Customer Solutions, Kuehne + Nagel and the Global Procurement Director, Mondi << Features research and innovations from the supply chain and the maritime business perspective, covering topics such as empty container logistics, terminal & port optimisation and intermodal freight << Includes vital tools and case studies to help supply chain managers and shippers work more effectively in complex areas, such as design thinking and real-time data management

Description Whilst the maritime container business has been studied in depth, the impact on shippers and how shippers deal with the given challenges has not been fully examined. Container Logistics bridges this gap and looks at the maritime business from a customer’s perspective. The book examines the challenges, solutions and the latest developments in the container industry as well as the interaction between the different actors involved, such as freight forwarders, supply chain managers and shippers. Current hot topics from the supply chain and the maritime business perspective are included. From the supply chain perspective, Container Logistics covers areas such as the purchase of transportation services from ocean carriers and transport management, to effective and efficient logistics execution. From the maritime business perspective, the book covers topics such as intermodal freight optimisation and hinterland transportation, and terminal and port optimisation. With the inclusion of clear examples of best practice and bona fide case studies, as well as invaluable contributions from an international team of experts, Container Logistics is an essential guide for supply chain managers and shippers, as well as academics and industry professionals working in the maritime business.

Author Information Dr Rolf Neise was the Global Head of Logistics Operations at BAT (British American Tobacco plc.) responsible for defining Logistics Excellence in the End-to-End Supply Chain. Prior to BAT, Dr Neise worked in several consultancies where he collected in-depth experience in reorganization and optimisation projects in different industries (automotive, telecommunication, chemistry) and companies across the world. He currently works as a lecturer at the International School of Management (ISM) in Germany and as a senior consultant supporting multinational companies in optimising their supply chain management and logistics structures.

219

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Table of Contents 1

The Maritime Container Logistics Chain (MCLC) 1.1 Global Container Trade – The Past and the Future [Eyden Samunderu, International School of Management (ISM), Dortmund, Germany] 1.2 The Maritime Container Transportation Chain (MCTC) [Rolf Neise, International School of Management (ISM), Hamburg, Germany] 1.3 History and Usage of Containers in Logistics and Beyond [Hildegard Buschmann, Merle & Sheppard, Wuppertal, Germany / New Zealand] 2 The Effective Management of the MCLC 2.1 Empty Container Logistics – A Prospective Local Approach in the Port Of Hamburg [Marco Hofmann and Lillian Schmidt, Hamburg Port Authorities (HPA), Hamburg, Germany] 2.2 Port and Terminal Operations [Maik Ullrich and Michael Baumert, HPMPORT, Hamburg, Germany] 2.3 Multimodal Transport of Mining Equipment from Germany to Kazakhstan [Zhanat Abdugalimov, Anthony Beresford, and Stephen Pettit, Cardiff Business School, Cardiff, UK] 2.4 Cooperation and Collaboration

Logistics

2.5

3 3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

between Shipping Lines [Alan the Maritime Business [Qeis Robertson, Webster Robertson Kamran, International School of Ltd, London, UK] Management (ISM), Dortmund, Collaboration in the Germany] Container Shipping Industry 3.6 Industry Trends and – New Technologies Enabling Opportunities [Rolf Neise, Collaboration between Shipping International School of Lines and Terminals [Robert Management (ISM), Hamburg, Inchausti, XVELA, Oakland, Germany] California, USA] The Integration of the MCLC into Global Supply Chain Management Global SCM and Resulting Shippers’ Requirements [Rolf Neise, International School of Management (ISM), Hamburg, Germany] Advanced Benchmarking and Market Intelligence – A Key Instrument in Optimising Container Logistics Procurement [Björn Klippel, TIM Consult, Mannheim, Germany] Formation of a Shipper Council to Improve Data Quality and Share Best Practices [Gregory Kefer, Infor Corporation, San Francisco, USA] IoT Solutions in Maritime Logistics: Transports of Perishable Dairy Goods [Stefan Viehmann and Hans-Thoralf Bieber, Kuehne + Nagel (AG & Co. KG), Hamburg, Germany] The Service-Dominant Perspective to Create Value in


Packaging Logistics Strategies to Reduce Supply Chain Costs and the Environmental Impact of Packaging Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481704 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481711 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Logistics

Author Information Henrik PĂĽlsson is Associate Professor at Lund University, Sweden. He has conducted research and taught masterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s students within packaging logistics since 2004.

220

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Explores key characteristics of industrial and consumer packaging in a variety of companies, using examples and case studies from practice << Examines the different ways that packaging adds value to logistics and supply chain, such as costeffectiveness and packaging aesthetics << Provides concrete tools, methods and guidelines that help reduce the cost of materials handling, and increase safe and efficient storage << Looks at environmentally friendly and innovative packaging solutions which help promote sustainability and cut costs << Examines the track and trace capability of packaging through ICT, the technology included in packaging to enable tracking through the supply chain

Description Organizations now consider packaging as a critical issue. Effective and efficient packaging can improve the performance of companies and minimise their costs. Packaging Logistics examines all essential roles within an organization, from the purchasing of raw materials to the production and sale of finished products, as well as transport and distribution. It is important for practitioners and academics to understand the role of packaging along the supply chain and the different implications of an efficient product packaging system for successful management of operations. In Packaging Logistics, Henrik PĂĽlsson covers essential hot topics such as sustainability, innovation, returns, e-commerce, end-of-life and future trends and challenges. This practical book takes the reader through every stage of packaging and relates it to supply chain and logistics, illustrated by over 30 case studies.

Table of Contents 1 Defining Packaging Logistics 1.1 Packaging performance in supply chains 1.2 Packaging performance methodology 1.3 Environmental performance of packaging logistics 1.4 Managing packaging waste 1.5 Managing ICT features of packaging 1.6 Reusable packaging systems 1.7 Industrial packaging evaluation 1.8 Decision support for industrial packaging 1.9 Organising packaging development 1.10 Packaging innovation capability 1.11 Managing packaging logistics in e-commerce channels 1.12 Managing packaging logistics in developing countries 1.13 References

Logistics


Global Logistics New Directions in Supply Chain Management Edition: 7 Date: 09/28/2014 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471330 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471347 Pages: 512 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Logistics

Author Information Stephen Rinsler has extensive industrial experience covering the entire supply chain, including senior positions (SVP) in Unilever (UK and European procurement and supply chains), Exel (now DHL) Europe (Services Director with a brief that included procurement, risk, health and safety), Volt Europe (SVP Operations), and Procurement and Supply Chain Director for Storehouse (Bhs and Mothercare). He is currently Director of Bisham Consulting. Donald Waters has over thirty years’ experience of teaching and working in logistics and operations management. He is a visiting professor at various universities, including University of Calgary, Warsaw School of Economics, Czech Management Centre, University of Quebec at Montreal, University of Sheffield, Henley Management College and Edinburgh Business School. He is the author of several well-known logistics books.

This book

<< Examines important trends, key challenges, and latest developments in logistics and supply chain management << Assesses real-world developments across the globe << Shares insights from authoritative figures in the industry << Online resources: Student manual with key learning outcomes for each chapter

Description The field of logistics continues to develop at a remarkable pace. Until recently, logistics was barely considered in long-term plans, but its strategic role is now recognised and lies at the heart of long-term plans in almost every business. Reasons for this change include: communications and information technology offer new opportunities; world trade grows; competition forces operations to adopt new practices and become evermore efficient; and the concern for the environment increases. Add to this the increased emphasis on consumer satisfaction, flexible operations and time compression, and it’s clear that getting logistics right is important. This 7th edition of Global Logistics, edited by Stephen Rinsler and Donald Waters, has been thoroughly revised and updated to reflect the latest trends, best practices, and cutting-edge thinking on global logistics. It provides guidance on important topics, including agile supply chains, IT, sustainability and performance management, collaboration, outsourcing and humanitarian logistics. This edition of Global Logistics provides new chapters on supply chain trends and strategies, fulfilling customer needs, and supply chain vulnerability. There are also dedicated new chapters on China and Central and Eastern Europe to assess developments across the globe. This edition serves as a forum for acknowledged sector specialists to discuss key logistics issues and share their authoritative views. The new edition introduces new contributors, including leading thinkers from international universities and businesses. Global Logistics is an invaluable source of guidance and practical advice for students, managers and practitioners, who will find it an essential text that also includes online resources. Online resources available include a student manual with key learning outcomes for each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2

3

4

5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13

221

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

New directions in logistics – Martin Christopher Best practices in logistics and supply chain management: the case of Central and Eastern Europe – Krzysztof Rutkowski Trends and strategies in global logistics and supply chain management – Christian F Durach, Frank Straube and Andreas Wieland Incentives and the strategic management of suppliers – Glyn Watson, Chris Lonsdale and Joe Sanderson Time compression in the supply chain – Adrian Beesley Building more agile supply chains – Remko van Hoek Using marketing and logistics to fulfil customer needs – David B Grant People powering contemporary supply chains – John Gattorna Linking supply chain management to shareholder value – Heimo Losbichler and Farzad Mahmoodi Outsourcing: the result of global supply chains? – Stephen Rinsler Risk in the supply chain – Lars Stemmler Managing supply chain vulnerability – Alan Braithwaite Information systems and information technologies for supply chain management –

Logistics

Xinping Shi and Simon Chan 26 Logistics strategies for Central 14 Improving management of and Eastern Europe – Grzegorz supply chains by information M Augustyniak technology – Heikki Holma and 27 North American logistics – Jari Salo Jean-Paul Rodrigue and Markus 15 Delivering sustainability through Hesse supply chain management – Kirstie McIntyre 16 Performance measurement and management in the supply chain – Alan Braithwaite 17 Optimizing the movement of freight by road – Alan McKinnon 18 Retail logistics – John Fernie 19 Internet traders can increase profitability by reshaping their supply chains – Robert Duncan 20 Time as a trade barrier – Hildegunn Kyvik Nordås 21 Learning from humanitarian supply chains – Rolando Tomasini and Luk Van Wassenhove 22 Global sourcing and supply – Alan Braithwaite 23 International road and rail freight transport activity – Jacques Leonardi, Allan Woodburn, Julian Allen and Michael Browne 24 Developments in Western European strategies – Michael Browne, Julian Allen and Allan Woodburn 25 Recent development of e-tailing and its logistics in China – James J Wang


Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations Creating and Operating Customer Focused Supply Networks

This book

<< Looks at how marketing and logistics have to work together in order to optimise customer service << Shows how to deal with growing competition and digitalisation << Investigates the what, why and how through many examples across a range of sectors << Includes cases from Toyota, Tesco, Hoover, Ribena and many more international companies << Examines how to win commercially

Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2017 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478735 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478742 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Logistics

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Robert Mason has a business background, mainly in a variety of roles with M&S. He is now a Reader in Logistics and Operations Management (LOM) at Cardiff Business School and has led many business research projects with Tesco as a partner. Barry Evans’ early career involved roles in Logistics/Distribution with Watney Mann, Rank Hovis McDougall and Royal Mail. This was followed by roles in Tesco plc, including Lean Process Manager in Tesco Supply Chain Development. He joined the Lean Enterprise Research Centre at Cardiff Business School as a Senior Research Associate. Mr Evans is now retired.

222

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Logistics and marketing stand out as two disciplines which are connected, and both are critical to the provision of customer value. Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations looks at marketing-led logistics and logistics-led marketing. In the current business world, the idea of a single supply chain has been replaced by an integrated multi-channel approach. The authors therefore examine how to optimise profit and control costs through the coordination of these two functions. Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations takes an in-depth look at physical supply chains where manufacturing of a product occurs from groceries to pharmaceuticals, and from automotive to construction. The authors examine omni-channel, how this affects the customer experience and the need for a joined-up strategy which is operationalised across all channels. They also look at the challenges of digitalisation and the customer interface with the growth of the internet as well as the intensification of competition across all sectors.

1

An Introduction – Setting the Scene 2 Customer Value – What is it? 3 Organisations have to be More Capable Today than Ever Before – Why? 4 How Purpose is Achieved – A Marketing and Logistics Led Approach 5 What Great Operational Process Capability Looks Like 6 Marketing and Logistics in Harmony – Building and Sustaining Operational Excellence Integrated with a Marketing Orientation 7 Finding Logistics Solutions – How Logistics is Responding to Modern Challenges 8 Conclusions – Logistics is Business Critical

Logistics


Decarbonizing Logistics Distributing Goods in a Low Carbon World Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2018 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480479 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480486 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Logistics

Author Information Alan McKinnon is Professor of Logistics at Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg. He has researched and taught in freight transport and logistics for 35 years and has published extensively in journals and books. The author has undertaken studies for numerous public and private sector organizations and has been an adviser to several UK Government Departments and Parliamentary Committees, the European Commission, the International Transport Forum, International Energy Agency and OECD. He is a member of the European Commission’s High Level Group on Logistics and was Chairman of the World Economic Forum’s Logistics and Supply Chain Industry Council.

223

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Provides original research conducted by the Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg with the support of Unilever and Kuehne and Nagel, Switzerland, who co-sponsored the work << Presents vital insights into how different companies have tackled decarbonisation, through case studies from 13 countries, with a focus on transportation << Includes a new decarbonisation framework within which external factors can be classified and systematically assessed by companies << Explains the external factors likely to influence the carbon reduction in logistics, such as freight transport demand, truck fuel consumption and related CO2 emissions

Description The transport sector cannot be allowed to continue increasing its level of carbon emissions at an accelerating rate, while other sectors are actively decarbonizing. Decarbonising Logistics is based on original research conducted by the Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg with the support of Unilever and Kuehne and Nagel, Switzerland, who co-sponsored the work. The research focuses on decarbonisation, mainly in the transport sector, across 13 countries. This book is essential for governments and companies that need to find ways of achieving dramatic carbon reductions in the transport sector. Decarbonising Logistics presents cutting-edge findings based on original research, and provides focused results and discussion about the external factors of technology, infrastructure, market, behaviour, energy and regulation, and the carbon reduction strategies for logistics operations. It includes case studies from the UK, Germany, Italy, US, Mexico, China, India, Indonesia and South Africa. This guide provides practitioners and students with cutting-edge, top original research by a leading authority supported by key organizations in the field.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7

Climate change: the nature and scale of the challenge Developing a decarbonisation strategy for logistics Reducing freight transport intensity Shifting freight to lower carbon transport modes Improving asset utilisation in logistics Transforming energy use in road freight transport Transforming energy use in maritime, air cargo and rail freight sectors Decarbonising logistics at the national level: the case of the united kingdom

Logistics


Warehouse Management A Complete Guide to Improving Efficiency and Minimizing Costs in the Modern Warehouse Edition: 3 Date: 11/28/2017 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479770 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479787 Pages: 528 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Operations Management

Author Information Gwynne Richards has over 30 years of experience in warehouse management and logistics. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy, he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management and logistics outsourcing for practitioners. He is also the co-author of The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit with Susan Grinstead, also published by Kogan Page. He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport.

This book

<< Provides essential advice on how to tackle the challenges faced by today’s warehouse managers << Equips the reader with practical guidance on how to operate an efficient and cost-effective

warehouse << Delivers new case study initiatives directly relevant for application in the workplace << New to this edition: definitive updates on warehouse design, technology and robotics and the increasing challenges of e-commerce << Online resources: downloadable warehouse tools and audit checklists for analysis and application into own operational environment, along with PowerPoint slides as study aids for students

Description Offering comprehensive advice on all aspects of managing a warehouse, the third edition of Warehouse Management is an ideal guide and detailed reference book for anyone looking to gain a real insight into warehouse operations. It examines everything from the latest technological advances, operations and people management to current environmental issues. This third edition of Warehouse Management includes definitive updates across the industry, such as the vast expansion of warehouse technology and robotics, warehouse design and the increasing challenges posed by e-commerce. Gwynne Richards tackles the core challenges for today’s managers, offering experienced advice on how to reduce lead times, increase productivity and improve customer service. Revamped with more practical case studies and an array of downloadable warehouse tools, this new edition of Warehouse Management includes useful warehouse audit checklists and is firmly supported with insightful photographs, video links and projections.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Logistics, Operations and Supply

224 Chain Management

Introduction The Role of the Warehouse Role of the Warehouse Manager Warehouse Processes: Receiving and Put-away Warehouse Processes: Pick Preparation Picking Strategies and Equipment Order-picking Methods Warehouse Processes from Replenishment to Despatch and Beyond Warehouse Management Systems Warehouse Layout Storage and Handling Equipment Resourcing a Warehouse Warehouse Costs Performance Management Outsourcing Health and Safety The Warehouse and the Environment The Warehouse of the Future Appendix 1 – Warehouse Audit Checklists Appendix 2 – Barcodes Bibliography Websites of Companies That Have Contributed to This Book and Other Useful Websites Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations

Operations Management


The Operations Advantage A Practical Guide to Making Operations Work

This book

<< Shows how effective operations can have a huge strategic impact throughout the organization << Provides guidance on how to respond to the most important challenges facing the practice of operations management << Offers direction on how to set the agenda for developing operations capabilities

Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2017 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473549 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473556 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Operations Management

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Nigel Slack is Emeritus Professor of Operations Management and Strategy at Warwick Business School, Coventry, UK and the former head of its Operations Management Group. He acts as a consultant in many sectors, including Financial Services, Utilities, Retail, Professional Services, General Services, Aerospace, FMCG, and Engineering Manufacturing.

The study and practice of operations has shifted to reflect the new challenges and uncertainties of how to thrive in todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s ever-changing world. The Operations Advantage identifies the most significant challenges to the practice of operations management and gives guidance on how businesses can respond. Leaders need to link the strategic objectives of the business clearly and logically to its operations performance objectives. The book presents a series of ten activities that will help them to do this and therefore make operations work better, such as designing and configuring internal processes and resourcing the operations appropriately. Based on the global teaching, training and consultancy conducted by the author, The Operations Advantage looks at the application of operations management across a range of sectors, including finance, healthcare, professional services, oil and gas industries. Although these diverse sectors require operations practitioners to apply knowledge in different ways, they essentially deal with the same set of processes. The book is an indispensable and unique guide for anyone with an operational role in any organization, as well as operations management students and academics.

1 2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8

225

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Exploit the Power of Operations Establish an Operations Capability Culture Make Operations a Strategic Asset Set Your Performance Framework Resource Your Operation Appropriately Establish Internal Processes Networks Shape Your External Supply Networks Learn from Day-to-day Control Setting Improvement Priorities Position Your Improvement Process Master the Mechanics of Improvement

Operations Management


Inventory Management Advanced Methods for Managing Inventory within Business Systems Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2015 Price: $44.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473686 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473693 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Operations Management

Author Information Dr. Geoff Relph has 40 years’ experience in inventory and business systems management in the operational, consulting and academic sectors. With over 20 years’ experience in MRP operations and inventory management with IBM, since 2002 Geoff has worked as an inventory expert in operational, consulting and training roles. He’s led many projects to improve supply and demand performance. Geoff completed his doctorate in Inventory Management in Business Systems. He is an associate lecturer at the Warwick Manufacturing Group, University of Warwick, and delivers modules for the MSc Programme in the UK and internationally.

This book

<< Provides a step-by-step approach on how to achieve the critical linkage between the business

budget decisions and the detail level << Examines how inventory management should work and how to control and balance it << Focuses on KPIs that have been proven to significantly improve performance << Looks at the revolutionary k-curve methodology that has transformed business performance << Online resources: Appendix of figures, chapter breakdown of figures, and a bonus chapter about the supporting materials

Description Effective inventory management can increase revenue, reduce costs, and improve cash flows. Endorsed by Institute of Operations Management and CILT, Inventory Management shows managers how to take control of their inventory system and ensure operations run smoothly. Looking beyond the complexity and theory of inventory management, Geoff Relph and Catherine Milner focus on the most important decisions managers need to make when managing inventory. They examine how inventory management should work, how to control it, and how to balance it, through their use of revolutionary k-curve methodology. They include case studies from various industries, looking at inventory management in diverse areas such as supermarkets and aerospace. Online resources include an appendix of figures, a chapter breakdown of figures and a bonus chapter about the supporting materials.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Introduction to inventory management 3 Business systems and business 4 The complexity of inventory management within business systems 5 Traditional thinking in inventory optimization 6 k-curve methodology 7 The practical application of k-curve 8 Case study examples and what to do next

Catherine Milner is a chartered engineer and has nearly 20 years’ experience working in aerospace, petrochemicals and telecommunications. She’s managed many successful projects on electronic data exchange with customers, forecasting, MRP, supply chain management, and business process re-engineering. She is a visiting lecturer at the University of Warwick and Chairman of the Institute of Operations Management.

226

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Operations Management


Business Operations Models Becoming a Disruptive Competitor Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2015 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473310 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473327 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Operations Management

Author Information Alan Braithwaite is Visiting Professor at Cranfield University and specializes in supply chain strategy and operational excellence in the retail, manufacturing and service sectors. He is the founder of LCP Consulting, which collaborates with over 400 companies internationally. Martin Christopher has been at the forefront of the development of new thinking in logistics and supply chain management for over 30 years. He is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield University, where he helped build the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management into a leading centre of excellence. His published work is widely cited by other scholars and he has been invited to participate in academic and industry events around the world.

227

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Looks at common strands that can inform strategy from a practical operating perspective << Highlights the core fundamentals that business leaders should be guided by in order to achieve organizational success << Offers a framework for achieving super performance

Description Most successful companies have operations management at their heart. It enables strategy and should be part of boardroom discussions. However, Cranfield research has shown that business strategy barely recognises the world of operations management. Recognising that operations management needs to be more strategic, Business Operations Models is a revolutionary new title that looks at the interrelationship of operations management and strategy. In Business Operations Models, Martin Christopher and Alan Braithwaite identify the characteristics of market-leading businesses that have transformed their markets and delivered super performance for their stakeholders. It points to the theory gap between strategic thinking and operations and how many high-performing businesses arrive at their new operating models as much by chance as judgement. Unpacking those observations leads to some clearly defined features of winning competitors, including eliminating waste, leveraging technology, and utilising transformative business models. Business Operations Models offers a framework for achieving super performance and understanding when and how a company may be able to leverage its capabilities to outperform. The book provides detailed international case studies that illustrate how the principles work in practice, including Apple, Dell, Amazon, John Lewis, Southwest Airlines, Aldi, Toyota and many others.

Table of Contents 1

What we mean by business operations models – and why are they important? 2 The characteristics of superperforming businesses 3 The customer lens – understanding compelling value 4 The strategy operations gap 5 Unpacking the business operations model framework 6 The technology dimension to being a disruptor 7 Market-changing models – driving transformation 8 Competing through the basics 9 Optimization of the business operations model 10 Making it happen – becoming a disruptor 11 Guiding principles to building a competitive edge through business operations models

Operations Management


Strategic Sourcing Management Structural and Operational Decisionmaking Edition: 1 Date: 12/28/2016 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476991 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477004 Pages: 720 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Procurement

Author Information Olivier Bruel is Professor Emeritus of the Information Systems and Operations Management Department at HEC Paris. He has also been conducting many consulting activities and is Founder and and Honorary President of the ACA (Association Cesa Achats et Supply Chain).

228

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Shares wisdom from one of the most respected academics in the field and a team of contributors

who are both academics and industry experts << Covers purchasing concepts, frameworks and best practice from esteemed business school HEC Paris << Covers strategic and tactical standpoints, including strategic thinking and specific thought processes << Shows how to optimise specific aspects of purchasing

Description Strategic Sourcing Management examines procurement and supply management in detail, covering the three dimensions of competitiveness, effectiveness and efficiency. Written by Olivier Bruel, Professor Emeritus HEC Paris, and a team of contributing experts from academia, consulting and industry, the book is organised into four parts: strategic decisions; operational management of procurement and related supply chain; management of human resources and dedicated information systems; management of performance and change. This book has been written with a comprehensive global and coherent approach but the chapters are self-standing, enabling the reader to dip into different sections according to need. Strategic Sourcing Management considers both tactical and strategic perspectives that link with a corporate strategy and it includes dedicated chapters on how to set up a Strategic Sourcing function. The text is enriched with clear graphics and solid examples of best practice. Strategic Sourcing Management is a robust text based on both research and experience, so an essential reference for practitioners and academics working in or studying procurement and supply management. It is suitable for anyone involved in procurement and supply management at a senior level but also for general management enabling them to understand the mechanisms of value creation through Strategic Sourcing.

Table of Contents 1

Strategic decisions and supplier policies 2 Procurement: its integration in a companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s general strategy 2.1 Procurement marketing: segmentation and strategies 2.2 Definition of requirements and upstream procurement practices 2.3 Supplier policy: sourcing, panel and SRM 2.4 Globalization and international procurement 2.5 Sustainable procurement: stakes and implementation 2.6 Outsourcing, â&#x20AC;&#x153;make-orbuyâ&#x20AC;? decisions and simple subconctracting 3 Operational management of procurement 3.1 Quantitative forecasting and requirements planning 3.2 Economic optimization: tco minimization, service level for internal clients and shared cash management 3.3 Calls for tenders: major stages, selection process and postprocurement follow-up 3.4 Procurement of services CAPEX procurement 3.5 The financial stakes of procurement: mechanisms for protecting currency and energy and commodity purchases 3.6 Public procurement: French and European contexts

Procurement

3.7 The practice of international operations 3.8 International procurement: legal considerations 4 Organization and management of resources 4.1 Organization, structure and positioning of the procurement department 4.2 Procurement professions and human-resources management 4.3 Procurement information systems and dedicated web tools 5 Performance and change management 5.1 Procurement communication plan 5.2 Procurement performance: measurement indicators and reporting systems 5.3 Procurement performance: steering change management 5.4 The co-authors 5.5 Glossary


Strategic Sourcing and Category Management Lessons Learned at IKEA Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2015 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473976 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473983 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Procurement

Author Information Magnus Carlsson has twenty-five years’ experience as a strategic sourcing expert at IKEA. He developed and led the implementation of IKEA’s purchasing strategy, which included category-based sourcing. He was responsible for the strategic sourcing of IKEA’s global textile, metal and veneer businesses, as well as component and raw material procurement. He is currently a lecturer, trainer and adviser in strategic sourcing and category management.

This book

<< Examines how to drive efficient sourcing within organizations through applying methods used by IKEA << Examines how category management works in practice and how it was implemented in IKEA << Compares and contrasts experiences at IKEA with examples from other leading companies << Presents theories and methods that are applicable to a wide cross-section of international companies

Description Strategic Sourcing and Category Management examines how category management works in practice, drawing insight from IKEA. With over twenty-five years’ experience of purchasing at IKEA, Magnus Carlsson shares the wisdom gained from devising and executing IKEA’s highly successful purchasing strategies. The text is supported by insightful interviews and case studies, which are compared and contrasted with examples from other leading companies. Strategic Sourcing and Category Management answers three critical questions: -When is category management a profitable method and why? -How do category teams create real results? -How can category management be organized and implemented effectively? In answering these three questions, Magnus Carlsson not only presents the guiding principles behind category based sourcing, he also demonstrates how category based sourcing can effectively be implemented in practice and provides guidance on how to realise the benefits of this approach. Cleverly connecting theory and practice, the book draws upon existing and new tools, and applies them in a highly practical context. With application spanning far beyond IKEA, this book is an invaluable resource for procurement professionals in any industry. Strategic Sourcing and Category Management is the result of twenty five years’ experience of Strategic Sourcing within IKEA and collaboration with several companies and the Stockholm School of Economics.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9

229

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Lessons learned in IKEA How is it done? What shall the team achieve? Where is the business... and the money? Creating a situation where the results fall into place The moment of truth Leading the business and creating leverage Other industries and different perspectives Implementation of categorybased sourcing What makes the difference between success and failure?

Procurement


Strategic Procurement Organizing Suppliers and Supply Chains for Competitive Advantage Edition: 2 Date: 11/28/2014 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472283 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472290 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Procurement

Author Information Caroline Booth specializes in procurement transformation - helping organizations to recognize and exploit the real value of third party expenditure and suppliers’ expertise. She has enjoyed an international career in business and consultancy with Shell, Ernst & Young, Lloyds Banking Group and more recently, as Chief Procurement Officer for TD Bank Group.

This book

<< Explains the strategic value of procurement and why procurement is critical to successful business << Explores the potential for significant cost savings for senior management, Finance Directors, and CEO’s through maximising value from suppliers and third-party spend << Includes examples and real-life case studies from the author’s work in procurement for leading organisations << Explores the ‘why’ and ‘what’ of good procurement rather than the ‘how’

Description A company’s success is determined by its ability to utilize all its assets. Yet two assets often neglected by the boardroom are the amount it spends on goods and services and the expertise of the organisation’s key suppliers. This highly accessible book will help you understand how to tap into these assets to secure competitive advantage. With application to organisations in all industries internationally, Strategic Procurement details why procurement is critical to successful business performance. It explores the strategic value of procurement to business and the potential for significant cost savings through maximising value from suppliers and third-party spend. A lot has changed in the world of strategic procurement. While many developments have served to reinforce the business value of good procurement practices, there are many risks associated with poor procurement. On the upside, procurement’s role has increased in many recent mega-mergers. On the downside, there are glaring examples of supply continuity issues triggered by natural disasters; reputational issues related to supply chains of companies like BP and Apple; and the inadvertent role played by suppliers as the weakest link in cyber-crime. This second edition of Strategic Procurement has been thoroughly updated to reflect these developments. Besides real-life case studies, there is a new chapter on procurement’s role in delivering successful mergers and acquisitions as well as three new chapters exploring the mitigants to a variety of supplier-related risks. Additionally, there are expanded sections on corporate responsibility, procurement proficiency, good procurement across the organisation, and new ways of supplier collaboration.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

230

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

No company is an island Know what your customers value Right first time Know your core Handling the complexity What’s the issue? We can all do procurement Executive sponsorship and priorities Strategy in context Knowing what the business needs Picking the right suppliers Understanding your spend The secrets of sourcing Sharing the pain in hard times Avoiding the perils of outsourcing Corporate responsibility Good procurement across the company Becoming important to key suppliers Supply continuity Cyber crime and the weakest link Reputational risk Continuous improvement Reducing total cost Mergers and acquisitions Keeping procurement on the agenda

Procurement


Leading Procurement Strategy Driving Value Through the Supply Chain Edition: 2 Date: 06/28/2018 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481643 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481650 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Procurement

Author Information Carlos Mena is a Professor in the Department of Supply Chain Management at Michigan State University, US. He has worked with world leading organizations, such as WalMart, British Airways, Coca-Cola and Ford, helping them improve supply chain practices. Remko van Hoek is a Visiting Professor at Cranfield School of Management and previously held positions as Global Procurement Director at PwC and SVP Sourcing and Procurement at the Walt Disney Company. Martin Christopher is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield School of Management. He is a regular contributor to conferences and workshops around the world.

231

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Features real world case studies from leading organizations across the world, including Tesco, BAA,

Tata, Coca-Cola, P&G and IBM << New to this edition: updated cases and examples, and a new chapter on the procurement process << Covers key strategic considerations, including: global sourcing; cost and value evaluations and cost management; supplier relationship management; information technologies and procurement; sustainable procurement and future developments << Provides indispensable advice on mitigating risk, driving innovation, maintaining efficiency, leading procurement teams, and understanding key trends and changes affecting procurement << Offers powerful practical tools for managing procurement and supply, brought to you by the authors Martin Christopher, Remko van Hoek and Carlos Mena

Description Leading Procurement Strategy is a must-read for all senior procurement executives wishing to further enhance their skill set, master the latest developments in procurement strategy and really come into their own as procurement leaders. The expert author team explains how to effectively manage and mitigate risks in the supply chain, appreciate the key issues affecting the procurement function and develop best practice excellence in teams. Providing the latest thinking in procurement and supply management within the broad perspective of different industries, this second edition of Leading Procurement Strategy covers: global sourcing; supplier relationship management; cost management; information technologies and future developments. The book is underpinned by academic theory and supported by an extensive range of real world case studies drawn from the authors’ experiences, including Tesco, Tata, Coca-Cola, BAA, P&G and IBM. This new edition provides the skills, knowledge and tools needed to articulate an effective strategy and embrace a transformational role to lead procurement teams, showing how procurement can become an influential function that delivers sustainable competitive advantage.

Table of Contents 1 Procurement Strategy 1.1 Introduction – The Strategic Role of Procurement [Dr Carlos Mena] 1.2 Procurement and the Organization – Organizing for the Future [Dr Remko Van Hoek] 1.3 The Strategic Procurement Cycle [Dr Carlos Mena] 2 Procurement and the Supply Network 2.1 Supplier Relationship Management [Dr Remko Van Hoek] 2.2 Global Sourcing [Dr Martin Christopher] 3 Delivering Performance in Procurement 3.1 Strategic Cost Management [Dr Lisa M Ellram] 3.2 From Cost to Value in Procurement [Dr Remko Van Hoek] 3.3 Supply Chain Risk Management [Dr Martin Christopher] 3.4 Information Technology in Procurement [Dr Alan Smart] 4 Sustaining Procurement Performance 4.1 Sustainable Procurement [Dr Carlos Mena] 4.2 The Future of Procurement – A Wealth of Opportunities [Dr Soroosh Saghiri and Dr Carlos Mena]

Procurement


The Buyer’s Toolkit An Easy-to-Use Approach for Effective Buying Edition: 1 Date: 09/28/2017 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479817 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479824 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Procurement

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of the international purchasing consultancy and training provider, Positive Purchasing Ltd. With over 27 years’ experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of category management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Category Management in Purchasing, Supplier Relationship Management and Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, all published by Kogan Page.

232

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Provides an understanding of core principles from category management, SRM, negotiation,

contract management and supply chain management << Equips the reader with simple toolsets and frameworks, translated from complex models and concepts << Provides easily understood concepts that can be applied with no prior training or knowledge in this area << Uses tried and tested methods to transform your business and increase its profit and value gained from the supply base

Description In order to buy well it is important to understand a few basic principles and apply a series of tools and approaches in given situations. The Buyer’s Toolkit distills all the best practice tools for professional buying and negotiating into a simple, jargon-free framework that can be picked up and applied by anyone who buys. The book seeks to transform how individuals view and practise buying so they know when to influence a situation and what to do to buy well. The Buyer’s Toolkit has a simple chapter layout, contains graphics and models, and a simple flow of tools through the book with an overarching framework, that glues them together. Covering different buying scenarios, understanding and defining the requirements, choosing the right deal and supplier, negotiation, managing the contract and the suppliers, fixing problems and sustainable buying, this comprehensive guide will help you boost your advantage as a buyer.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

How to Buy Really Well The Size of the Prize What Stops Us Being Good The 5D Power Buying Process Step 1: Define the Need Step 2: Discover Our Position Step 3: Determine How to Buy Step 4: Securing the Best Deal Step 5: Delivery - Ensuring We Get What We Agreed 1.9 Getting Good at Power Buying

Procurement


Supplier Relationship Management Unlocking the Hidden Value in Your Supply Base Edition: 2 Date: 06/28/2018 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480134 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480141 Pages: 424 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Procurement

Author Information Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement consultancy and training provider. With over 27 years of experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training and education. He is also the author of Category Management in Purchasing, The Buyer’s Toolkit and his award-winning title Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, now in its third edition, all published by Kogan Page.

This book

<< Delivers a valuable toolkit and process framework for direct application in business << New to this edition: stand-alone model on supplier management; an additional section on

contract management; a useful rating table and methods for a single supplier determination; an enhanced section on segmentation << Explores links between procurement and supply chain management, and explains how to assemble the ‘Orchestra Model’ into a supply base and align aspects like contract management to meet all of the latest industry standards

Description Supplier Relationship Management enables organizations to manage their suppliers effectively and secure real, tangible benefits from the opportunities already available in their supply base. This second edition delivers a framework of resources for anyone who manages or interfaces across a supply base, orchestrating a productive flow between supply base segmentation, supplier relationship management and performance management. Written by an award-winning author and leading practitioner in the field, the fully revised second edition of Supplier Relationship Management clarifies links between procurement and supply chain management, explains how to assemble the ‘Orchestra Model’ into a supply base, and align aspects like contract management to meet all of the latest industry standards. This book is an ideal companion to Category Management in Purchasing and Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, also published by Kogan Page. Used together, these books provide a complete and powerful strategic purchasing toolkit.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

233

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction What We Need From Our Suppliers is... Five Good Reasons to Get Close to Our Suppliers Introducing the Orchestra of SRM Segmenting the Supply Base Supplier Performance Measurement Building a Supplier Performance Measurement System Acting Upon Measurement Supplier Improvement and Development Supplier Management Contract Management Relationship Management Supply Chain Management Strategic Collaborative Relationships Innovation from Suppliers The Orchestra of SRM is Ready to Play

Procurement


Managing the Retail Supply Chain Merchandising Strategies that Increase Sales and Improve Profitability Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480622 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480639 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information James Topps has worked in retail supply chain for Kraft (Formerly Cadbury), Ted Baker and Morrison’s. He currently heads up the merchandise planning (formerly supply chain) for Maplin Electronics, Rotherham. Glenn Taylor is currently Merchandise Planning Director at Maplin Electronics. He has been Merchandise and Supply Chain Director in companies such as Dreams, B&Q and BonMarche, developing best practice through periods of expansion and growth for business on and offline, in the UK and overseas.

This book

<< Explores retail supply chain and merchandising from the very basics, up to strategic and senior level challenges << Includes an academic presentation of theories and models used to aid practical understanding << Includes tools and case studies to help supply chain managers and merchant planners work more effectively << Explores the differences between industries in retail (i.e. the supply chain function in a supermarket is different to a merchandising function in a fashion retailer) << Bridges the gap between research-based texts and those aimed solely at managers

Description Buying, merchandising and the supply chain are inextricably linked. Product merchandisers play a key role within retail, as profits can be affected by how successfully they undertake their work. Merchandisers set prices to maximise profits and manage the performance of ranges, planning promotions and mark-downs as necessary. They also oversee delivery and distribution of stock and deal with suppliers. Their connection with and understanding of the supply chain is vital. Supported by theories, explanations and real-life examples, Managing the Retail Supply Chain looks at concepts and core themes that run across all sectors. Many businesses use a one-size-fits-all solution for any issues which arise, leading to big problems. Managing the Retail Supply Chain presents numerous examples of different business models adopted by a variety of companies. Covering basic principles of retail supply chain, KPIs, merchandise planning and demand planning as well as omnichannel, vertical integration, on-shelf availability and e-commerce, Managing the Retail Supply Chain is an essential guide for anyone involved in or studying retail supply chains and merchandising.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

234

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Basic Principles of Retail Supply Chain Linking Basic Supply Chain Theory to Retail KPIS Integration With Other Functions Different Supply Chain Structures (Merchandise Planning/Demand Planning etc) Job Roles Omni Channel Retailing “Single View of Stock” Vertical Integration Vs 3PL Inventory Management Modern Retail Supply Chain Professional Skill Set and Expectations The Retail Value Chain 1 Store Vs 1000 Store Operations Lean Vs Fat Supply Chains On Shelf Availability (OSA) E-commerce and Web Integration Basic Calculations and Mathematics Related to Retail Supply Chain Different Approaches to Different Industries

Supply Chain Management


E-Business and Supply Chain Integration Strategies and Case Studies from Industry

This book

<< Discusses trends, issues and challenges associated with integrating e-business with supply chain management << Provides an overview of the use of B2B and B2C technologies in supply chains in different industries, such as HE institutions, multinational automation corporations and healthcare << Uses bona fide case studies from industry and academia which highlight concerns and problems such as e-technology security and collaborative system use

Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2018 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478452 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478469 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Dr Ozlem Bak is Senior Lecturer at Huddersfield University, UK. She lectures on courses in operations management, purchasing, and supply chain management at undergraduate and postgraduate level. Before entering academia she worked in the automotive industry for companies such as Daimler Chrysler and Hyundai.

Using e-business technologies to manage supply chains increases the efficiency and performance of logistics, production, distribution and other related activities. E-Business and Supply Chain Integration explains how a number of tools can be integrated to produce an e-supply chain, with the overall aim of achieving higher productivity. This essential book examines supply chain theories along with real life cases and examples from industry to illustrate how e-business can enhance supply chain integration and highlights the negative outcomes when it is neglected and poorly managed. Dr Ozlem Bak and a team of expert contributors from practice and academia assess the impact of e-business on numerous different sectors, such as automotive, healthcare, logistics, higher education, and professional services. E-Business and Supply Chain Integration explains the strategic implications of new technologies and provides guidance on effective supply chains in e-businesses.

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6 1.7

235

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

E-Integrated Healthcare Arturo Garza-Reyes and Hieu Supply Chains – Tracking and Van Ngo] Monitoring Medical Devices 1.8 The Role of Business-Toin National Health Service Business (B2B) Platforms and (NHS) UK [Dr Ying Xie and Dr Their Implications on Supply Liz Breen] Chains – A Case from European Smart Technologies – Disruptive Automotive Industry [Dr Ozlem Technologies And The Agrifood Bak] Industry [Prof Kim P Bryceson 1.9 eFreight – Prospects and and Dr Asif Yaseen] Challenges of the Digitalisation Digital Technologies in the of the Air Cargo Supply Chain Professional Services Industry – [Alicja Gajewska and Dr Eric Aligning Human Capital Supply Tchouamou Njoya] with Market Demand [Georg 1.10 eLearning In Higher Education Juelke] – An Account of Student Implementation Of eHealth To Autonomy within the Context Improve Healthcare [Wenqi of UK Based eLearning Jacintha Hee, Dr Geoffrey Jalleh Environment [Dr Ozlem Bak] and Dr Chad Lin] E-Learning in Higher Education – A Case of Doctoral Dialogue in a Virtual Space [Dr Mark Readman] eGovernment – Assessing the Impact of E-Business Technologies on Government Service Supply Chains [Dr Ozlem Bak] Cloud Technology – China’s E-Business Approach to Market Development [David Cockayne] Supply Chain Integration through E-Business-Enabled Enterprise Systems – The Case of the UK Automobile Sector [Dr Vikas Kumar, Dr John Loonam, Archana Kumari, Prof Jose

Supply Chain Management


Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain Key Organizational and Human Dynamics Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477684 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477691 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Richard Lloyd is Partner in the supply chain transformation group at Tata Consultancy Services. They are a leader in the global marketplace and among the top 10 technology firms in the world. Previously the author worked for i2 technologies, managing interventions in supply chain planning in global companies including Continental tires, Carrefour and Nokia. He began his supply chain career in Unilever. He has also worked in development work on the global health supply chain in a number of African countries. He lectures at a number of universities on subjects related to the supply chain and change.

This book

<< Explains Integrated Business Planning frameworks and how they can be applied to supply chain

management << Encourages the application of academic theories to real-world problems, such as how to build an honest and open supply chain << Discusses change and how to implement it through learning from examples provided by a range of supply chain professionals: academics, practitioners, consultants and service providers << Includes numerous international case studies illustrating the successful and unsuccessful implementation of change

Description Managing changes to the supply chain comes with its unique challenges. Supply chain planning presents an especially complex challenge for the change practitioner as multiple stakeholders and functions are involved. Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain evaluates different approaches to change interventions and explores how Integrated Business Planning could be implemented in any organization to create sustainable improvements. Using frameworks based on extensive academic research, Richard Lloyd considers the potential blocks to an effective supply chain, and advises on how to deal with and identify uncertainties within an organization. Numerous international case studies included throughout show that every project has its own set of unique problems. Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain is an invaluable guide for anyone who needs to implement change in the supply chain.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

236

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction The Supply Chain Challenge An Outside-In View of an Organisation Who Works Here, and Why? Digging to Understand How We Got Here Incongruities and Uncertainties – A Look Behind the Scenes Theory of Action and Linking Behaviour to Assumptions The Politics of Information and Technology Wicked Problems – Understanding the Challenge Leadership Approaches to Change Realpolitik and Ideals – Projects Conclusions Platforms and Tools for Change Getting to Agility Faster Case Study Reimagined Next Steps

Supply Chain Management


Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics The Supply Chain Triangle Of Service, Cost And Cash Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2018 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482572 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482589 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Dr Bram DeSmet is the Managing Director of Solventure, where he helps global production and retail organizations with strategy, supply chain and operations. He is Adjunct Professor in Operations and Supply Chain Management at Vlerick Business School in Belgium.

237

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Examines the ‘inventory’ or ‘working capital’ angle, which is overlooked in many of the more

strategic supply chain management texts << Includes a practical road map on how to improve a business and facilitate an improved Return-onCapital-Employed << Online resources: Includes worksheets covering basic financial concepts such as cash flow and working capital, with example data sets and guidelines/exercises to make it interactive << Provides insightful case studies examining successful supply chain transformation programmes employed in a wide variety of international companies

Description Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics is a step-by-step guide to balancing the triangle of service, cost and cash which is the essence of supply chain management. Supply chains have become increasingly strategy-driven, and this Supply Chain Triangle approach puts the supply chain at the heart of the strategy discussion instead of seeing it as a result. Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics fully reflects the ‘inventory’ or ‘working capital’ angle and examines the optimisation of the supply chain and Return on Capital Employed. Including case studies of Barco, Casio and a selection of food retail companies, this book covers building a strategy-driven KPI dashboard, target setting and financial benchmarking. Regular examples and diagrams illustrate how different types of strategies lead to different trade-offs in the Supply Chain Triangle. This groundbreaking text links supply chain, strategy and finance through financial metrics, therefore creating value for the shareholder.

Table of Contents 1

The Supply Chain Triangle of Service, Cost and Cash 1.1 Strategy in the Supply Chain Triangle 1.2 Financial Benchmarking in Two Dimensions 2 Financial Target Setting in Two Dimensions 2.1 The Impact of Strategy on Financial Benchmarking and Target Setting 2.2 Redefining the Service Corner into a Value Corner 2.3 Building a Strategy Driven KPI Dashboard 2.4 Implementing a Strategy Driven Supply Chain 2.5 Appendix – Financial Templates – Inventory Management 2.6 Appendix – Financial Templates – The Cost of Inventory – Rent, Room, Risk

Supply Chain Management


Financing the Endto-end Supply Chain A Reference Guide to Supply Chain Finance

This book

<< Provides a clear introduction to the area of supply chain finance. << Tackles key issues in supply chain finance through combining theory and practice. << Considers initiatives to harmonize and develop cross-border financing. << Examines how finance and the supply chain fit together.

Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2016 Price: $70.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471415 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471422 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Simon Templar is a qualified accountant with 20 years’ industry experience as well as a lecturer on supply chain and procurement MSc’s in Cranfield. Erik Hofmann is Head of Supply Chain Finance-Lab at the University of St Gallen in Switzerland. He is also Chair of Logistics Management (LOG-HSG). Charles Findlay is an experienced Business Strategy, Supply Chain and Procurement consultant and Founder at International Supply Chain Finance Community.

Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain provides readers with a real insight into the increasingly important area of supply chain finance. It demonstrates the importance of the strategic relationship between the physical supply of goods and services and the associated financial flows. The book provides a clear introduction, demonstrating the importance of the strategic relationship between supply chain and financial communities within an organization. It contains vital information on how supply chain finance is operationalised and put into place. It is written in a user-friendly style, starting with the purchasing function, and linking together treasury, banking, supply chain, systems, IT, and key stakeholders. Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain will help senior supply chain and procurement practitioners to build collaboration, improve relationships and enhance trust between supply chain partners. With its combination of theory and practice it tackles vital issues including physical, information and financial flows, and tailoring supply chain finance to individual organisations’ circumstances. Recognising that supply chain finance means different things in different countries, the authors also consider various initiatives to harmonize and develop cross-border financing from the World Bank and other institutions, as well as including an agenda for national and international policy makers. Financing the End-to-End Supply Chain offers a mix of academic and industrial expertise and is written by three authors who are experts in the field. The book contains ground-breaking research and data from the Cranfield School of Management.

1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

238

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Supply chain management and financial performance The big issue: working capital management Supply chain management evolution The concept – a case for supply chain finance The ecosystem – organisations involved in supply chain finance The value proposition – options for supply chain finance Implementation – bringing SCF programmes to life The global setting – cross border issues for supply chain finance The next thing – new frontiers for supply chain finance

Supply Chain Management


Global Supply Chain Ecosystems Strategies for Competitive Advantage in a Complex, Connected World Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2015 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749471583 ISBN Ebook: 9780749471590 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Mark Millar is an internationally known industry expert who leverages over 30 years of global business experience to deliver practical knowledge and educated insights that help companies navigate the complex landscapes in Asia, develop new business opportunities, improve the efficiency of their supply chain ecosystems and make better informed business decisions. Acknowledged as an engaging and energetic presenter, the author has completed over 450 speaking engagements at corporate events, client functions and industry conferences across 26 countries. A Visiting Lecturer at Hong Kong Polytechnic University, the author is recognised in the ‘China Supply Chain Top 20’, as one of ‘Asia’s Top 50 Influencers in Supply Chain and Logistics’ and in the 2017 USA listing of ‘Top Pros-to-Know in Supply Chain’.

239

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Gives invaluable advice on how to address the volatility and vulnerability of global inter-connected

networks and build resilient, reliable and effective supply chains that drive competitive advantage << Provides practical examples, strategies and recommendations that you can implement immediately, improving short-term performance as you prepare for longer-term issues << Features real-life case-studies taken directly from the author’s industry projects and extensive experience << Presents a multi-dimensional geographic view, including opportunities and challenges in developing markets, multi-modal options of the New Silk Route, the diversity within Asia and developments in emerging Africa

Description Twenty-first-century supply chains have evolved into world-wide inter-connected supply-and-demand networks comprising vastly more complex operations, with profound inter-dependencies and exposure to greater volatility in our uncertain world. The linear concept of a chain is therefore no longer adequate to describe these complex international networks of suppliers, stakeholders, partners, regulators and customers that are involved in ensuring the efficient and effective movement of products, services, information and funds around the world we are firmly in the era of Global Supply Chain Ecosystems. Exploring the latest market trends and industry developments across emerging, developing and developed markets, in Global Supply Chain Ecosystems industry leader Mark Millar presents detailed and practical insights that will help you capitalise on market opportunities, overcome supply chain challenges and make better informed business decisions. In addition to highlighting key supply chain shifts such as the move beyond globalisation back towards regionalisation, this ground-breaking new publication explores several critical aspects of global supply chain ecosystems - including visibility, resilience, sustainability and collaboration.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Global supply chain ecosystems Supply chain visibility Sustainability and green supply chains Risk and supply chain resilience Free trade for all – navigating the FTA landscape The Asian Era The New Silk Road connecting Europe and Asia Integrated logistics hubs Human capital – the talent pool Omni-channel supply chains Africa – is it the next Asia? Supply chain innovation

Supply Chain Management


Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management Transformational Performance Improvement Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2017 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479978 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479985 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Simon Eagle is a senior supply chain planning and strategy consultant with over 20 years of international industry experience and significant expertise in S&OP and demand-driven supply chain management. He works with manufacturing and distribution companies that wish to make a transformational improvement in their E2E operations and supply chain performance and does so through helping them to adopt ‘demand-driven’ planning and execution.

This book

<< Explains how to transform your company’s operational performance by implementing demand-

driven supply chain management << Provides a very simple, but effective, way to segment your supply chain and achieve your planned service levels from up to half the average inventory while using significantly less capacity << Understand how to reduce capacity - delivering cost savings of approximately 20% << Online resources: Full-colour figures from the book

Description Many manufacturing and distribution companies are moving from the traditional ‘forecast push MRP’ to demand-driven supply chain management (SCM). Demand-driven SCM is an ‘end-to-end’ supply chain planning and replenishment process that enables companies to achieve their planned service levels from up to half the average level of inventory and requiring significantly less throughput capacity - irrespective of the level of demand volatility or lead-time length. Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management is the go-to source for industry supply chain/operations executives and students. It describes the ‘what, how and why’ of the demand-driven SCM process. The key themes in the book are: what is demand-driven? why is demand-driven so effective? how to operate a demand-driven supply chain? and how to adopt the demand-driven process in your company? Readers can quickly grasp the essential concepts from one of numerous self-contained sections that present the book’s key concepts from different perspectives. Online resources available include full-colour figures.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9

Logistics, Operations and Supply

240 Chain Management

Introduction and Summaries What is Demand-Driven SCM? Why Demand-Driven SCM? How to Operate a DemandDriven Supply Chain Demand-Driven SCM and Lean Why Aren’t We Already Using Demand-Driven SCM? The Demand Driven Institute, Demand-Driven MRP and SaaS What Next – Control Theory? From Supply Chain – An Apology to Our Commercial Colleagues Contribution by Chad Smith and Carol Ptak, Co-founders of the Demand Driven Institute

Supply Chain Management


Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management Principles and Practices for Sustainable Operations and Management Edition: 2 Date: 04/28/2017 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478278 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478285 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Professor David B. Grant is Professor of Logistics at Hull University Business School, UK and Professor of Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility at Hanken School of Economics, Finland. He has over 175 publications and participates in editorial boards for numerous journals. Dr Alexander Trautrims is a Lecturer in Supply Chain and Operations Management at Nottingham University Business School. His research focuses on sourcing, compliance and supply issues. Professor Chee Yew Wong is Chair of Supply Chain Management at Leeds University Business School. He has extensive consultancy experience in operations, purchasing, production, inventory and distribution management.

241

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< New to this edition: updated content on compliance and auditing, demand and inventory

planning, plus strategic, operational and public policy perspectives << Online resources: Include instructor manuals; compiled lists of tables and figures << Provides a comprehensive overview of sustainability science, as well as an understanding of sustainability as it affects the supply chain << Examines all the key areas in sustainable logistics and supply chain management << Provides carefully reviewed research-led applications and topical case studies based on extensive research by experts in the field

Description Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management is the essential guide to the principles and practices of sustainable logistics operations. Based on extensive research, this book covers the whole scope of sustainable logistics. The case studies, with particular attention for use in a teaching context, relate the theoretical concepts to practice and what is happening â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;on the groundâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;. Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management examines all the key areas in sustainable logistics and supply chain management, including: sustainable product design and packaging; sustainable purchasing and procurement; environmental impact of freight transport; sustainable warehousing and storage; and much more. Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management is a highly accessible guide to sustainable supply chain management. It provides an excellent insight into the topic that will help managers, students, and scholars grasp the fundamentals of green supply and logistics management. A vital teaching resource for courses on sustainable logistics, this revised edition includes valuable supporting online materials.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3 Science of Sustainability 4 Freight Transport 5 Sustainable Warehousing 6 Product Design, Cleaner Production and Packaging 7 Sustainable Purchasing and Procurement 8 Reverse Logistics and Recycling 9 Risk, Resilience and Corporate Social Responsibility 10 Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management Strategy

Supply Chain Management


A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains Repair, Remake, Redesign, Rethink Edition: 1 Date: 12/28/2016 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749476755 ISBN Ebook: 9780749476762 Pages: 432 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Catherine Weetman helps businesses develop ‘future proofed’, resilient strategies, assessing sustainability risks and value opportunities. She is a Visiting Fellow at the University of Huddersfield, a Vice-Chair of the Environment and Sustainability Forum at the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transportation and gained an MSc in Logistics from Cranfield University. Ms Weetman’s background includes Industrial Engineering in manufacturing and retail distribution, logistics solution design, project management, business intelligence, logistics product development and supply chain consulting. Her career covers food, fashion and logistics, including Tesco Distribution, Kellogg Company and DHL Supply Chain.

Logistics, Operations and Supply

242 Chain Management

This book

<< Discusses business models and supply chains that regenerate rather than waste and degrade << Explains how to create value instead of waste at every stage in the supply cycle, with real examples and case studies across a range of sectors << Provides valuable insights from leading businesses and start-ups who are rethinking their supply chains << Online Resources: PowerPoint slides of figures and tables from every chapter created by the author

Description A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains is an easily digestible and comprehensive handbook that provides a clear guide to the circular economy, helping the reader create future-fit, sustainable strategies. Real examples across a range of market sectors help businesses, students and policymakers understand the theory and fast-developing practice of the circular economy. To help the reader generate ideas, A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains provides a holistic framework for the design and supply chain and supporting business models, and includes tools the reader can use to get started. Whilst growing global consumption presents fantastic business opportunities, our current linear systems (take some materials, make a product, use it and then throw it away) are not fit for purpose. The circular economy unlocks this problem by decoupling resources from consumption. Engaged businesses are re-thinking product design, material choices, business models and supply chains. A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains is a must-read for anyone who wants to apply the circular economy today. Online resources now available: PowerPoint slides of figures and tables from every chapter created by the author.

Table of Contents 1

An overview of the circular economy 1.1 The circular economy – What is it? The design and supply chain 1.2 Circular economy business models 1.3 Circular economy enablers and accelerators 2 How are businesses adopting circular economy models? 2.1 The ‘Great Acceleration’ 2.2 Food and agriculture 2.3 Fashion and textiles 2.4 Consumer electricals and electronics 2.5 Industrial manufacturing 3 What does this mean for supply chains? 3.1 Supply chain strategy and planning 3.2 Supply chain – upstream: Product design, sourcing and procurement 3.3 Supply chain – midstream: The manufacturing process 3.4 Supply chain – downstream: Distribution and reverse logistics 4 Implementation 4.1 Making the business case and starting the journey

Supply Chain Management


Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians Tools for Practice Edition: 1 Date: 08/28/2016 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474683 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474690 Pages: 416 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Dr Ira Haavisto is the Director of the HUMLOG Institute. She teaches Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility at Hanken School of Economics in Finland. Professor Karen Spens is the Dean of Education at Hanken School of Economics, and a professor in Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility. She is widely published in the logistics and supply chain industry. Dr Gyöngyi Kovács is the Erkko Professor in Humanitarian Logistics at the Hanken School of Economics, and the Director of the HUMLOG Institute. She also lectures in supply chain management and corporate geography. She is widely published in the logistics and supply chain industry.

243

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Offers vital insights on supply chain management from key practitioners and academics in the

humanitarian field. << Provides highly practical cases and examples, written by practitioners from international companies and associations. << Shows how to integrate collaboration and coordination into working practices, one of the current biggest challenges in the humanitarian community.

Description Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians provides an in-depth insight into the management of supply chains in the context of humanitarian logistics. This accessible and practical book considers humanitarian logistics from a strategic and operational perspective. The overarching theme is collaboration and coordination, one of the biggest challenges in the humanitarian community. Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians takes a problem-based learning approach, featuring real cases and examples from leading organizations including Oxfam, Unicef, and The Red Cross. Each chapter is self-standing, relating the content in each chapter to the supply chain as a whole. This enables the reader to easily dip into different sections. At the end of each chapter, there is a case study written by a leading practitioner currently working in the humanitarian field. Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians fills a much needed gap in the market and is essential reading for humanitarians worldwide.

Table of Contents 1

Logistics and supply chain management in the humanitarian context 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Exploring logistics competences and capabilities in not-for-profit environments: the case of Médecins Sans Frontières 2 Setting up a supply chain network 2.1 Setting up a humanitarian supply network 2.2 Service triad case study 2.3 Setting up a supply chain network in the Kenyan nutrition sector 3 Supply chain strategy 3.1 Supply chain strategy 3.2 Case study: partnerships – supply chain strategy 4 Decision making in the supply chain 4.1 Decision making in humanitarian logistics 4.2 Forecasts, financing and acceleration of humanitarian logistics: from supply chain to value chain 5 Procurement 5.1 Procurement in humanitarian supply chains 5.2 Joint tender for freightforwarding services: promises and pitfalls 5.3 A procurement project in the Philippines 5.4 Partnerships and innovative

Supply Chain Management

procurement as enablers for sustainable development goals 6 Transportation, fleet management, delivery and distribution 6.1 Transport in humanitarian supply chains 6.2 Humanitarian aid supply corridors: Europe–Iraq 7 Warehouse and inventory management 7.1 Warehousing in humanitarian logistics 7.2 The ABC analysis 8 Information technology 8.1 Information systems for humanitarian logistics: concepts and design principles 8.2 GDACSmobile: an IT tool supporting assessments for humanitarian logistics 9 Sustainability, performance measurement, monitoring/ evaluation and exit strategy 9.1 Logistics competency for humanitarian relief: the case of Médecins Sans Frontières 9.2 Community-managed rural water supply in Ethiopia 9.3 Managing supply chain sustainability risks 9.4 Using three-dimensional printing in a humanitarian context: challenges and solutions 9.5 Making performance measurement work in

humanitarian logistics: the case of an IT-supported balanced scorecard 9.6 Boko Haram: the security and supply chain management challenges of providing relief 9.7 Measuring the supply chain performance of humanitarian organizations: the case of Thai Red Cross in Chiangmai


Supply Chain Ethics Using CSR and Sustainability to Create Competitive Advantage

This book

<< Outlines suitable and safe conditions in which to manufacture products Description

Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2017 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479459 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479466 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

It is increasingly clear that traditional supply chains which focus on sourcing products from the lowest possible cost suppliers are failing to exploit their full potential. Supply Chain Ethics, through case studies, surveys and unique research, identifies and outlines best practice employed by global manufacturers, retailers and logistics companies. It examines the so-called ‘triple advantage’ that accrues to businesses when strategies that combine bottom line profits, sustainable environmental practices and positive societal impact are employed. Narrow supply chain strategies which focus on only one of these three factors will inevitably fail. Supply Chain Ethics covers the following issues which affect senior supply chain, operations and manufacturing managers: ‘triple advantage’ best practice and how it can create value for global businesses; product design; sourcing and warehousing; transportation and recycling; environmental practices of logistics companies and suppliers; supply chain technologies. There is also an invaluable Ethical Supply Chains survey of top global companies.

Author Information

Table of Contents

John Manners-Bell is Founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence Ltd, Bath, UK, which since 2002 has developed a market-leading position in the provision of market research to a range of blue chip customers and governmental organisations. He is former Chair of the Logistics and Supply Chain Global Agenda Council of the World Economic Forum, attending meetings in the UAE, China and South Africa as well as speaking and moderating at the annual Davos meeting. He is regularly quoted in the trade and national press (FT, Bloomberg, Wall Street Journal, Economist) and has spoken at conferences worldwide.

1 2

Introduction New Thinking and Business Models 2.1 Profit, People and Planet – The Triple Advantage 2.2 Supply Chains in the ‘Circular Economy’ 2.3 The Role of Supply Chain Technologies 2.4 Sustainable Supply Chains Survey 3 Public Policy and Industry Response 3.1 Government Policy and Industry Response to Climate Change 3.2 Implementing a CSR Strategy 3.3 Sustainable Warehousing and Distribution 3.4 Sustainable Packaging Initiatives 3.5 Global or Local? The Ethical Debate 4 Ethical Issues in the Supply Chain 4.1 Societal and Environmental Supply Chain Responsibility 4.2 Ethics in the Supply Chain – Societal Impact 4.3 Ethical Supplier Relationships 4.4 Treatment of Workers in the Modern Logistics Sector

Logistics, Operations and Supply

244 Chain Management

Supply Chain Management


Understanding Planned Obsolescence Unsustainability Through Production, Consumption and Waste Generation Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2017 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478056 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478063 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Kamila Pope is an Environmental Law and Bio-law lecturer, researcher and lawyer. She has published a plethora of articles, chapters and papers covering Environmental Law, Sustainability, Planned Obsolescence and Waste Management. She holds a Masterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s in Law, Environment and Political Ecology and is studying a PhD in Law, Politics and Society.

This book

<< Examines the ethical, social and economic causes and their negative consequences << Clarifies how the sustainability ideal aligns with Economics and Law, and how manufacturers and supply chain practices can integrate it into their processes << Outlines theoretical frameworks for tackling planned obsolescence << Presents real-life case studies which give insights into production, consumption patterns and planned obsolescence << Online resources: Chapter-by-chapter lecturer slides

Description Planned obsolescence is a strategy used to make products obsolete, leading to their premature replacement. The result is the over-exploitation of natural resources, increased waste and detrimental social impacts. It is a known practice in consumer electronics and affects other industries as they put profit before consequence. A ground-breaking new book, Understanding Planned Obsolescence looks at the causes, cost and impact of planned obsolescence. It considers the legal and economic frameworks to overcome the practice and how to mitigate its effects. It also unearths new patterns of production and consumption highlighting more sustainable development models. Including a wide range of case studies from Europe, USA and South America, Understanding Planned Obsolescence is a vital step forward for the future of business and academia alike. Online resources now available include chapter-by-chapter lecturer slides.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2

3 3.1 3.2 3.3

Logistics, Operations and Supply

245 Chain Management

Introduction Identifying the causes, consequences and history of planned obsolescence Consumer society: A product of the growthist economy Planned obsolescence as an instrument of the growthist economy and its socioenvironmental consequences How to overcome planned obsolescence: from theory to practice Sustainability in Economics and Law: The greening of sciences in the search for a new paradigm The sustainability paradigm as the foundation to tackle planned obsolescence: New perspectives Final considerations

Supply Chain Management


The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit Over 100 Tools and Guides for Supply Chain, Transport, Warehousing and Inventory Management

This book

<< Covers all the techniques and processes needed to operate efficient logistics operations << Explains each tool and gives examples of how it is used in practice << Covers every aspect of warehousing, transporting, and inventory management << Combines established management and leadership tools with the critical information required in logistics

Edition: 2 Date: 07/28/2016 Price: $65.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475574 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475581 Pages: 400 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Gwynne Richards has over thirty yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience in warehouse management and logistics. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management for practitioners. He is Module Tutor for TTM full time Masters course at Warwick and Hong Kong Polytechnic University. He is also the author of Warehouse Management. Susan Grinsted is an independent educator, trainer and consultant, who works with a number of educational institutions in Britain, France and Finland, as well as with multinational companies all over the world. Her work focuses on transferring knowledge and skills to enable companies to improve their performance.

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit provides practical, take-away tools for warehouse, inventory and transport managers to apply to the day-to-day challenges of logistics and supply chain management. This book offers applicable solutions to some of the most frequently encountered problems of the industry. The 2nd edition has been thoroughly revised to ensure that all research is updated to reflect the latest innovations in technology and processes. The tools have been revised to ensure the utmost relevance, and a collection of new tools has been added to ensure that the book is relevant and applicable in light of the most recent changes to the sector. The aim of The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit is to provide todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s managers with a toolbox of practical ideas and information to help them in their day-to-day work. It explains a number of the major management tools and suggests areas within supply chain and logistics where they can be applied. The tools have been put into chapters, including supply chains, warehousing, transport and inventory. Electronic versions of many of the tools are available for download, once the book has been purchased.

1 2

Introduction Warehouse management tools and guides 3 Transport management tools 4 Inventory management tools 5 Supply chain management tools 6 Outsourcing tools 7 General management tools 8 Performance management tools 9 Financial management tools and ratios 10 Problem-solving tools

Logistics, Operations and Supply

246 Chain Management

Supply Chain Management


The Lean Supply Chain Managing the Challenge at Tesco Edition: 1 Date: 09/28/2015 Price: $55.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472078 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472085 Pages: 312 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Barry Evans’ early career involved a variety of roles in Logistics/Distribution with Watney Mann, Rank Hovis McDougall and Royal Mail. This was followed by roles in Tesco plc including Lean Process Manager in Tesco Supply Chain Development. He joined the Lean Enterprise Research Centre at Cardiff Business School as a Senior Research Associate. Robert Mason is a senior lecturer in Logistics and Operations Management section (LOM) at Cardiff Business School and has led many business research projects with Tesco as a partner. He has also held a variety of roles with M&S.

This book

<< Examines the supply chain management techniques of Tesco, the second-largest retailer in the

world << Demonstrates how Tesco increased customer loyalty by focusing on delivering customer value instead of competing with their competitors << Explores not just the 'what' and 'why' but 'how' Tesco built one of the world's most successful supply chains << Examines how Tesco became the world's largest online grocer through their revolutionary Home Delivery and Click and Collect service << Investigates how Tesco anticipated the rising demand for convenience stores, and superseded the competition in the growth of the format globally << Reviews current challenges facing Tesco and how they are attempting to address them

Description The Lean Supply Chain: Managing the Challenge at Tesco explores how UK multinational grocery and general merchandise retailer Tesco addresses the challenge of managing its supply chains. The book examines how Tesco has used lean thinking, loyalty and simplicity to achieve its dominant position. It shows how Tesco’s senior leadership made a simple but game-changing decision to focus the business on its customers rather than the conventional approach of ‘competing with our competitors’ and asks whether the approach to managing the supply chain needs to be adapted to deal with current challenges that Tesco faces. The authors look at how the retailer developed and maintains one of the most effective supply chains in the world. The Lean Supply Chain demonstrates Tesco’s most successful strategies through real life examples, drawing upon the authors’ deep knowledge of how Tesco has developed and succeeded from both an academic and practitioner perspective. It includes an assessment of how Tesco is dealing with current challenges and market changes, including its successful rollout of online shopping and convenience stores as well as how it is attempting to maintain its position as the UK’s largest retailer.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

Introduction Tesco Past and Present Tesco and Strategy: Managing The What, Why and How! 4 Customer Insight: To Drive The Tesco Supply Chain 5 Lean and The Tesco Supply Chain: ‘Mastering The Supply Chain’ 6 Tesco and Continuous Improvement: Debunking Seven Myths of Conventional Business Thinking 7 Current Challenges: Aligning Corporate and Supply Chain Strategies to a Changing Macro Environment 8 Conclusions

Logistics, Operations and Supply

247 Chain Management

Supply Chain Management


Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction Delivering Tomorrow’s Built Environment

This book

<< Provides real-world insights and guidance from experts in the construction industry, such as Brian Moone, Supply Chain Director of Mace, who were responsible for The Shard in London << Features topical and up-to-date case studies from leading companies and huge construction programmes << Examines the supply chain outside of the immediate construction site << Gives insight into different perspectives of various actors in the supply chain, including main contractors, different suppliers, logistics providers and consultants

Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2015 Price: $75.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749472429 ISBN Ebook: 9780749472436 Pages: 288 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Greger Lundesjö is the owner of Lundesjo Consulting. He has spent over 20 years in logistics related businesses and has extensive international experience both in operative business roles and as a consultant. He has supported clients by applying logistics principles to construction projects, improving resource efficiency and reducing cost and environmental impact.

The construction logistics manager plays an increasingly central role in the construction process. In fact, their decisions can crucially affect the success or failure of a project. Recognition of the critical role they play has spurred evermore interest in this budding field amongst both researchers and practitioners. An accessible text on construction logistics, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction provides essential guidance and expert advice for construction managers, as well as researchers and students in the field. This important new title looks at arrangements with suppliers, the use of returnable packaging and off-site manufacture and assembly, IT systems used to manage the supply chain and logistics operations, such as delivery management systems, warehouse management systems and material planning and forecasting systems. It also considers aspects of the contractual relationships between client, developer, main contractor and lower-tier contractors, all of which have an impact on how the supply chain is managed. In addition to providing a range of fresh ground-breaking case studies, the book features contributions from leading experts in the field who have been involved in projects with companies such as TFL, BAA, The Red Cross, as well as big construction programmes such as the Olympics and Cross Rail.

1

Introduction – Greger Lundesjö 2 Strategic perspectives 2.1 The challenge of construction logistics – Michael Browne 2.2 Aggregating global products for just-in-time delivery to construction sites – Mark Franklin 2.3 Construction logistics – supply of bulk materials – Matthew Woodcock 2.4 Effective management of a construction project supply chain – Stephen Robbins 2.5 Construction supply chain management strategy – Brian Moone 3 The impact of BIM and new data management capabilities on supply chain management in construction 3.1 Data management for integrated supply chains in construction – Wes Beaumont and Jason Underwood 4 Construction logistics and sustainability 4.1 The role of logistics in achieving sustainable construction: a Swedish perspective – Monika Bubholz, Camilla Einarsson and Lars-Göran Sporre 4.2 Resource efficiency benefits of effective construction logistics – Malcolm Waddell 5 Logistics operations

Logistics, Operations and Supply

248 Chain Management

Supply Chain Management

5.1 The role of the construction logistics manager – Andy Brown 5.2 Third-party logistics operators in construction: the role they play and the role they could play – Pete Flinders 5.3 Managing construction logistics for confined sites in urban areas – Ruvinde Kooragamage 5.4 Consolidation centres in construction logistics – Greger Lundesjö 5.5 Delivery management systems – Rick Ballard and Nick Hoare


Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics From Farm to Fork Edition: 1 Date: 06/28/2015 Price: $60.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749473648 ISBN Ebook: 9780749473655 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information Samir Dani is Professor of Logistics and Supply Chain Management and Head of Logistics, Operations and Hospitality Management at the University of Huddersfield. He has experience of leading and working on various research projects in a diverse range of management and supply chain related topics. He has experience of working on projects related to food supply chain risks, food sustainability and food value chains. Professor Dani has published widely and has presented to both academic and practitioner audiences. He has also worked in the manufacturing sector.

This book

<< Covers the design and governance of the food supply chain << Looks at innovations and future trends in food supply chains << Assesses various challenges and supporting mechanisms to make sure the food that reaches our plates is safe

<< Provides international case studies, with a focus on India, China, South East Asia and Brazil Description With the growth of the food industry come unique logistics challenges, new supply routes, demand dynamics and investment re-shaping the future of the food logistics industry. It is therefore important for the food industry to innovate both with regards to demand management and sustainability of food sources for a growing population. Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics provides an accessible and essential guide to food supply chain management, considering the food supply chain from â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;farm to forkâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;. Samir Dani shows the reader how to stay ahead of the game by keeping abreast of global best practice, harnessing the very latest technology and squeezing efficiency and profit from increasingly complex supply chains. Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics covers essential topics in food supply chain management, including: food supply chain production and manufacturing; food logistics; food regulation, safety and quality; food sourcing; food retailing; risk management; food innovation; technology trends; food sector and economic regeneration; challenges in International food supply chains; triple bottom-line trends in the food sector; food security and future challenges. Samir Dani was awarded the 2015 Prix des Associations for writing this book which has been commended for its comprehensive coverage of the design, governance, supporting mechanisms and future challenges in the food supply chain.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction to food supply chains 2 Food production 2.1 Food production 2.2 Food manufacturing 3 Operational challenges 3.1 Food retailing 3.2 Food logistics 3.3 Challenges in international food supply chains 3.4 Collaboration and relationships 3.5 Food sourcing and procurement 3.6 Risk management 3.7 Technology trends in food supply chains 4 Sustainability and future challenges 4.1 Food regulation, safety and quality 4.2 Food innovation 4.3 Sustainability challenges in food supply chains 4.4 Food sector and economic regeneration 4.5 Food security and future challenges

Logistics, Operations and Supply

249 Chain Management

Supply Chain Management


Supply Chain Risk Management Understanding Emerging Threats to Global Supply Chains Edition: 2 Date: 11/28/2017 Price: $80.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480158 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480165 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Supply Chain Management

Author Information John Manners-Bell is founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is former Chair of the Logistics and Supply Chain Global Agenda Council at the World Economic Forum, and adviser to the UN and the European Commission. He is Visiting Professor at the London Guildhall Faculty of Business and Law, London Metropolitan University. He is also author of Supply Chain Ethics, Introduction to Global Logistics and Logistics and Supply Chains in Emerging Markets, all published by Kogan Page.

250

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< The first edition, Supply Chain Risk, won the ACA Bruel Special Mention prize in Paris for its

contribution to the purchasing and supply chain industry << Includes comprehensive resources, for both academics and practitioners, such as business surveys and tools for teaching, such as summaries and questions at the end of each chapter << Uses case studies to underpin real-world relevance and practical application << Provides insights into different supply chain risk strategies used by multinational corporations

Description With increased outsourcing, globalisation, and just-in-time production, the ability to effectively identify, assess and manage risks in the supply chain is more important than ever. Supply Chain Risk Management is a practical learning resource which explores a wide range of external threats to the supply chain such as natural disasters, economic risk, terrorism and piracy. An ideal companion to academic and professional training courses, it presents a robust set of strategies which can minimise and mitigate supply chain risk. Supply Chain Risk Management includes numerous best practice case studies, with each case documenting the companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s supply chain or production strategy and outlining the catastrophic event which occurred. This comprehensive second instalment of Supply Chain Risk, which won the 2014 ACA-Bruel Special Mention prize, analyses the supply chain consequences, material losses, management response, and resultant changes to a companyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s supply chain strategy. With a new chapter on cyber threats to supply chains, Supply Chain Risk Management also includes academic pedagogy such as objectives, summaries and a key point checklist in each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 A Framework for Understanding Risk 1.2 Engineering Supply Chain Resilience 1.3 Industry Sector Resilience to Supply Chain Threats 1.4 Natural Disasters and Pandemics 1.5 Climate Change and Emissions Policy 1.6 Economic Risks to the Supply Chain 1.7 Societal Risks to Supply Chains 1.8 Corruption in the Logistics Industry 1.9 Cargo Crime and Piracy 1.10 Political Risks in Supply Chains 1.11 Illicit Supply Chains 1.12 Terrorism and Security 1.13 Conclusion

Supply Chain Management


Warehousing and Transportation Logistics Systems, Planning, Application and Cost Effectiveness Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2018 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482206 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482213 Pages: 672 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Transport

Author Information Professor Heinrich Martin was a lecturer at the University of Applied Science in Hamburg for over 30 years, and has been a visiting lecturer in universities around the world. He received his Ph.D. in logistics and business management from the Technical University of Berlin, and his areas of expertise include transportation systems, warehousing systems, order picking systems, material flow systems and factory planning. Dr Martin has lead multiple projects with numerous organizations and more than 350 students.

This book

<< Is a comprehensive guide to the planning and implementation of transport and warehouse logistics << Provides valuable tools for planning and making economic efficiency calculations << Provides more than 200 examples with worked solutions and gives the reader targeted practice with 250 questions and answers

<< Covers virtually all aspects of managing a warehouse from the high-level strategic view down to floor-level processes

Description Warehousing and Transportation Logistics examines professional transport and warehousing logistics, and offers an overview of all logistics functions for the area of internal business logistics, so-called intra-logistics, with a particular focus on transport, warehousing and assembly logistics. It includes interfaces such as unit creation, material flow or goods storage as well as systems and management for planning or information to identify objects, control and processing of orders. This book does not just contain specialist knowledge for students of technical subjects, but it also serves as a practice-oriented book for the planning of bachelor and master degree theses, with a multitude of useful information and ideas. It is also a workbook for professional practitioners, production, planning and industrial engineers, who are specifically concerned with the planning side of this specialist area. Warehousing and Transport Logistics covers transportation, information systems, procurement, finance, performance metrics as well as warehousing and distribution. There are more than 200 examples with solutions outlining the disadvantages of depending, and about 250 questions to encourage independent learning.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

251

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Logistics Structures Within Companies Material Flow Logistics Transporting Goods â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Packaging, Loading Unit Basic Transport Logistics Continuous Conveyor Discontinuous Conveyor Switching Handling Basic Warehouse and Picking Logistics Warehouses and Shelves Picking Systems Planning System and Project Management Information Logistics

Transport


International Freight Transport Cases, Structures and Prospects Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2017 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474348 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474355 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Transport

Author Information Professor Anthony Beresford is Programme Director for the MSc International Transport at Cardiff University and Director for the suite of Masters Programmes within Logistics and Operations Management. Professor Beresford has travelled widely in an advisory capacity within the ports and transport fields in Europe, Asia and North America. Dr Stephen Pettit is a researcher for the Transport and Shipping Research Group in Cardiff Business School. He has been involved in a range of transport related research including a ground-breaking project for the Department of Transport.

252

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Overviews global container transport, including shipping networks and inland/multi-modal aspects << Focuses on operational models and cost structures, including multimodal << Discusses key origins and destinations, main routes and service types, and key players in the sector << Written by industry experts and respected academics who have advised the Department of Transport and the United Nations

Description International Freight Transport presents the key changes and issues in the fast-moving industries of trade and transport. It includes regional trade groupings, emergence of new large economies (i.e. BRIC countries), and pivotal regions such as the Middle East and Central America where major projects, such as new and widened canals, are underway or planned. These changes could redraw the trade map with major implications for transport patterns and solutions. Blending geography, economics, politics and trade, International Freight Transport provides insight into a wide range of topics, including: globalisation; demand versus supply; buyers and sellers; transport regulation, geography, modes and methods; transport ownership; alliances; and safety and security. The book is the only comprehensive and accessible book on international transport available.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction – Cases, Structures and Prospects 2 Trade and the Transport Environment 2.1 Demand, Supply and Freight Rates – The Shipping of Global Trade [Hassiba Benamara, Jan Hoffmann and Frida Youssef] 2.2 Trade and Customs Procedures in International Freight Transport – Requirements, Issues and Trends [Andrew Grainger] 3 International Freight Transport in Practice 3.1 Multimodal Transport Solutions for Grain Exports from Kazakhstan [Timur Bimaganbetov, Anthony Beresford and Stephen Pettit] 3.2 The Transport of Oil and Gas [Hance D Smith and Azmath Jaleel] 3.3 Global Container Transport [Rolf Neise] 3.4 Car Shipping [Paul Nieuwenhuis] 4 Trading Regions 4.1 International Freight Logistics in South East Asia – The Indonesia–Malaysia–Thailand Growth Triangle (IMT-GT) [Ruth Banomyong] 4.2 North America’s Evolving International Freight Transport – Challenges and Responses [Michael Ircha] 4.3 International Freight Transport

Transport

in South America – The Case of Colombia [David B Grant, Rodrigo Britto, Juan Pablo Soto, Marcus Thiell] 4.4 International Freight Transport in Southern Africa [Christopher Savage] 4.5 Freight Transport in Korea and Taiwan [Su-Han Woo, Po-Lin Lai, Doori Kim and Jungeun Kim] 5 Challenging Environments and Transport Futures 5.1 Overcoming International Freight Transport Challenges in a Disaster Response Context [Peter Tatham and Gyöngyi Kovács] 5.2 Transport Futures – Reconciling the On-Demand Economy with Global Production Chains [Peter Wells]


Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018 Edition: 48 Date: 02/28/2018 Price: $85.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483159 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483166 Pages: 768 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Transport

Author Information David Lowe has been involved in the road haulage industry for many years, and is an experienced consultant and freelance writer. His many books on transport include The Professional LGV Driver’s Handbook and The Pocket Guide to LGV Drivers’ Hours and Tachograph Law. Clive Pidgeon is Examination Database Manager for CILT Level 5 qualifications, CILT Distance Learning Advisor, an examiner and verifier for CILT and author of various CILT textbooks and training materials. He is also the author of A Study Guide for the Operator Certificate of Professional Competence.

253

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Provides essential information on professional competence, technical standards and goods vehicle

operations << Offers a definitive one-stop reference source for the haulage industry << New to this edition: fully revised to include the latest developments in legislation and regulations << Includes information on driving test changes, the new Vehicle Operator Licensing System (VOL), penalties for mobile phone use, vehicle maintenance plans, and the introduction of the Ultra Low Emission Zone (ULEZ) and ‘T’ charges in central London

Description Now in its 48th edition, Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018 is the most comprehensive guide available to the operational rules and guidelines governing the UK, Ireland and the EU’s road transport operators. This best-selling, exclusive handbook is an essential reference and explores in detail the most pressing issues in today’s road transport industry. It includes details on professional competence, rules on working times and driving hours, licensing and penalties, insurance, road traffic law, maintenance advice and the international road haulage market. This manual includes guidance for drivers in the Republic of Ireland and mainland Europe, along with the rules and penalties governing these regions. Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018 is the essential reference source for any transport manager, fleet operator, owner-driver haulier or student with an involvement in the industry. This new edition has been thoroughly updated and revised to reflect the latest developments in legislation and regulations, including information on driving test changes, the new Vehicle Operator Licensing System (VOL), new penalties for mobile phone use, vehicle maintenance plans, and the introduction of the Ultra Low Emission Zone (ULEZ) and T-Charge in central London.

Table of Contents 1

Goods Vehicle Operator 1.24 Quality Assessment and Licensing Accreditation 1.1 Professional Competence 1.25 Entry to the International Road 1.2 Goods Vehicle Drivers’ Hours Haulage Market and Working Time 1.26 Unit Loads and Loading Units 1.3 Goods Vehicle Drivers’ Records 1.4 Tachographs – Fitment and Use Requirements 1.5 Driver Licensing and Licence Penalties 1.6 Driver Testing and Training 1.7 Vehicle Registration, HGV Road User Levy, Excise Duty and Trade Licences 1.8 Insurance (Vehicles and Goods in Transit) and Conditions of Carriage 1.9 Road Traffic Law 1.10 Goods Vehicle Dimensions and Weights 1.11 Construction and Use of Vehicles 1.12 Vehicle Lighting and Marking 1.13 Goods Vehicle Plating, Annual Testing and Vehicle Inspections 1.14 Light Vehicle (MoT) Testing 1.15 Maintenance Advice 1.16 The Safety of Loads on Vehicles 1.17 Carriage of Livestock 1.18 Special Types Vehicles 1.19 UK Carriage by Road Regulations 1.20 Insurance 1.21 Fuel Economy Aids 1.22 Safety 1.23 Energy Savings Opportunity Scheme (ESOS)

Transport


Employability, Careers & Entrepreneurship Innovation and Best Practice in Business Skills Business Stories Education Entrepreneurship Finance & Investment for Entrepreneurs General Careers Information Innovation Job Seeking Skills for Entrepreneurs Small Business Specific Careers Testing Work/Life Balance Workplace Skills

www.koganpage.com

254


How to Write Effective Business English Excel at E-mail, Social Media and All Your Professional Communications Edition: 2 Date: 02/28/2016 Price: $22.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475550 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475567 Pages: 168 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

Author Information Fiona Talbot originally co-founded a communication consultancy in Rotterdam that helped multi-nationals improve their use of English as an international business language. She now runs TQI Word Power Skills, a business writing skills consultancy that helps both native and non-native English speakers, both in the UK and internationally. She delivers workshops and e-coaching at all levels. Fiona has featured in major publications such as Personnel Today, British Airwaysâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; business magazine, The Sunday Times and Accounting Technician, amongst many others.

255

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Gives you a solid grounding in how to use effective English in writing a CV, letter, job application or business plan << With international real-life case studies to illustrate examples in context << Includes checklists to monitor your progress and take you to the next level in your career << Will support you in improving your punctuation and grammar, with a section focused on frequently confused words to help you avoid common pitfalls

Description How to Write Effective Business English gives guidance to both native and non-native English speakers on how to express yourself clearly and concisely. With case studies and real-life examples that demonstrate how English is used internationally in business, and full of ideas to help you get your communications right first time, this book sets the scene for describing the benefits of good Business English, ideal for multinational companies where communication is a priority. For native English speakers, it may mean un-learning things you were taught at school and learning how to save time by getting to the point more quickly in emails; for elementary to immediate English speakers, it focuses on the areas that are easy to get wrong. How to Write Effective Business English uses real-life international business scenarios to develop your skills and provide you with some answers that even your boss might not know. You will learn a system to help you quickly and easily write emails, letters, CVs and more. Featuring sections on punctuation and grammar, checklists to help assess progress and now with a new chapter on how to write effectively for social media, How to Write Effective Business English has been praised by both native and non-native writers of English as an indispensable resource.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

Why Are You Writing? Business Writing for Today Quality Matters Telling Your Story Through Social Media 5 Defining Business English 6 Writing English for Global Business 7 E-mail and Instant Messaging 8 Punctuation and Grammar Tips 9 Writing Tips for Everyday Business 10 Common Confusions and How to Avoid Them 11 Letter Writing

Business Skills


Improve Your Global Business English The Essential Toolkit for Writing and Communicating Across Borders Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2012 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749466138 ISBN Ebook: 9780749466152 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

Author Information Fiona Talbot runs TQI Word Power Skills, a Business Writing Skills consultancy. In addition to writing articles for Personnel Today, British Airways and CCF magazine, she is the author of the Better Business English series, published by Kogan Page. Sudakshina Bhattarcharjee is a lecturer at the Institute of Leadership in Kolkata, where she teaches journalism and mass communications for both undergraduate and postgraduate courses. Previous posts include Lecturing for Kingston College of Further Education and The London College. She lives both in India and the UK. www. sudakshinakina.com

This book

<< Allows you not only to master the basics, but to customize business English according to your own and your company’s values and culture << Grows your confidence in expressing yourself clearly and with tact, understanding and finesse << Includes quizzes, activities and worksheets for practical self-study and monitoring progress << Provides insights and examples from the authors’ international experience and their combined understanding of working in different cultures << Reflects modern business realities, with chapters dedicated to mastering communication on social media << Online Resources: supplementary video, self-test questions and answers, templates and a case study on going global

Description In a business world that spans several continents, it is no longer common for everyone to speak English as a first language. Whether you speak English as a first, second or even third language, intercultural business communication means that getting it right first time has never been more important for you and your organization. English can never be standardized in the global and digital marketplace; instead, we can learn how to customize business English according to our own values and culture and communicate successfully across borders. Improve Your Global Business English creates an awareness in the reader of what to avoid and how to ensure that communications are correctly understood. Very readable and hugely instructive, Improve Your Global Business English provides practical selfstudy with quizzes, activities and worksheets, helping you to fine-tune your written communication. By mastering the basics, defining your readers and tailoring your message to them, understanding the conventions of different media and understanding cultures, you can enhance your reputation as a truly global, modern player in today’s marketplace. If you want your messages to be perceived as you intended, to retain customers or to win new ones, Improve Your Global Business English gives you the background you need. Online supporting resources for this book include supplementary video, self-test questions and answers, templates and a case study on going global

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

256

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Introduction Writing English for global business Why do we write in business? Deciding your business writing objectives in the digital age Common challenges in business English in a global workplace How does writing in a global economy affect us all? Writing e-mails Making an impact Using the global word power skills guide Report writing Writing agendas, notes and minutes of meetings Personal and company promotion in the digital age Using word power skills with social networking media Quality matters Writing tips for everyday business The kaleidoscope effect – further perspectives for global business English

Business Skills


Decision Making and Problem Solving Edition: 3 Date: 07/28/2016 Price: $14.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475611 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475628 Pages: 96 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

Author Information John Adair is the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading authority on leadership and leadership development. Over a million managers worldwide have taken part in the Action-Centred Leadership programmes he pioneered. John was also the only British National Serviceman to serve in the Arab Legion, where he became adjutant of a Bedouin regiment. He is the author of over 50 books, many of which are published by Kogan Page, including the classics, Not Bosses but Leaders, The John Adair Lexicon of Leadershipand TheLeadership of Muhammad.

257

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Provides readers with tried and tested methods to evaluate their own decision-making processes and facilitates the implementation of decisions << Includes practical exercises to encourage a creative approach to problem solving << Written by the leadership guru and best-selling author John Adair, with over 500 << 000 books sold and translations into 25 languages

Description In Decision Making and Problem Solving, leadership guru John Adair provides the techniques and insights you need to find solutions, spark creativity and confidently make the right decisions. Being able to take innovative and creative approaches to new challenges is crucial for leadership success. Decision Making and Problem Solving will help you to learn key techniques and models to confidently make the best decisions and solve the hardest problems. Using checklists, exercises, case studies and tried-and-tested methods, Adair provides a clear framework that can generate ideas and inspire confidence in your team - so you can spot the solution in every problem, and create ideas to rival even the best strategists. The creating success series of books... With over one million copies sold, the hugely popular Creating Success series covers a wide variety of topics and is written by an expert team of internationally best-selling authors and business experts. This indispensable business skills collection is packed with new features, practical content and inspiring guidance for readers across all stages of their careers.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Your mind at work 1.2 The art of effective decision making 1.3 Sharing decisions with others 1.4 Key problem-solving strategies 1.5 How to generate ideas 1.6 Thinking outside the box 1.7 Developing your thinking skills

Business Skills


How to Organize Yourself Edition: 5 Date: 10/28/2016 Price: $14.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475772 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475789 Pages: 184 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

Author Information John Caunt is a freelance writer, life coach and trainer. His previous experience includes fifteen years as a senior manager in further education

258

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Offers very practical tips that are easy to implement and will guarantee to overhaul how the reader

runs their work and home life << Includes information on dealing with e-mail overload, organizing digital files as well as the latest software of note that will have an immediate impact on how organised the reader is << New content covers technological and software advances, the ubiquitous presence of smartphones and tablets and the ever increasing scope for distraction in readers 24/7 lives

Description How to Organize Yourself will help you to dramatically improve the way you work. With great tips on how to determine your goals, prioritize your tasks and manage your time, it also includes practical advice on how to: focus on the things that produce results; overcome distractions; build positive work habits; avoid information overload and make effective use of technology. Now in its fifth edition, new content covers the latest software advances that can help you get organized, how to deal with the ubiquitous presence of smartphones and how to adapt to the ever increasing scope for interruption and procrastination in our 24/7 lives. How to Organize Yourself will enable you to take control of your workload, reduce stress and fatigue, and free up time for the things that really matter. The creating success series of books... With over one million copies sold, the hugely popular Creating Success series covers a wide variety of topics and is written by an expert team of internationally best-selling authors and business experts. This indispensable business skills collection is packed with new features, practical content and inspiring guidance for readers across all stages of their careers.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

Introduction Know where you are going Organize your time Understand the way you work Organize information Organize the way you work with others 1.6 Organize your space 1.7 Organize filing systems 1.8 Use technology to assist 1.9 Organize yourself at home and away 1.10 Keep up the good work

Business Skills


Develop Your Presentation Skills Edition: 3 Date: 07/28/2016 Price: $14.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475659 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475666 Pages: 200 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

Author Information Theo Theobald is a seasoned presenter, freelance writer and business consultant with a track record that includes positions in senior sales and marketing positions with the BBC and a creative writing career embracing major internet and audio production. He is the author of On Message, also published by Kogan Page.

259

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Helps the reader face their performance demons, improve their skills and enhance their career prospects << Provides advanced, in-depth advice on how to cultivate successful interaction with audience members, find an authentic voice and judge what people expect from a presenter << Includes a new chapter on presentations in action, or when asked to present at short notice

Description Develop Your Presentation Skills offers step-by-step realistic advice to improve your confidence, prepare effectively and nail that presentation. Going beyond just handling nerves and presenting PowerPoint slides, Develop Your Presentation Skills provides you with a practical toolkit for developing a belting presentation and improving your confidence along the way. It includes practical help with unpicking the original brief, understanding just what the audience wants, facing your performance demons and constructing compelling content that will keep your audience rapt with attention. Complete with anecdotes and expert input to help you avoid disaster, this new edition also includes two brand new chapters, which help you to deliver a presentation ‘stripped bare’ and to use new media to engage with your audience. Develop Your Presentation Skills will help you find your voice and use it with style; to inform, to persuade, to impress. The creating success series of books... With over one million copies sold, the hugely popular Creating Success series covers a wide variety of topics and is written by an expert team of internationally best-selling authors and business experts. This indispensable business skills collection is packed with new features, practical content and inspiring guidance for readers across all stages of their careers.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3

Introduction What’s your motivation? Where do you begin? What on earth are you going to say? 1.4 It’s time to write...now! 1.5 The power of storytelling 1.6 Using humour 1.7 What’s the point of PowerPoint? 1.8 Other visual aids 1.9 Rehearsal 1.10 Finding your voice 1.11 Openings 1.12 Endings 1.13 Handling your nerves 1.14 Handling your audience 1.15 Question and answer sessions 1.16 Getting ready - some practical aspects 1.17 As the moment approaches 1.18 Stripped bare 1.19 Advanced interactivity 1.20 Progress report 1.21 Presentations in action 1.22 What next?

Business Skills


Essay Writing Skills Essential Techniques to Gain Top Marks Edition: 1 Date: 04/28/2012 Price: $17.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749463915 ISBN Ebook: 9780749463922 Pages: 152 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

Author Information Jacqueline Connelly has a wealth of experience of universities, including holding senior managerial posts at both Lancaster and Kent Universities. Patrick Forsyth is a consultant, trainer and writer. Mark Connelly, who wrote the foreword and contributed to the book is an author and a lecturer in Modern History at Kent University.

This book

<< Covers a range of different types of essay assignments, including exam essays and dissertations << Supported throughout by examples of real essays from The Open University, with accompanying

analysis << Helps you to correctly interpret your brief, research the content and improve the speed of your writing as well as the quality << Provides guidance and advice on good research techniques, spelling, grammar and accuracy, creating an essay plan and citing your sources << Includes â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;action boxesâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; throughout the text to point the way and help you to monitor your progress, along with space to make notes

Description Writing essays is a major part of many further education courses. In coursework assignments, dissertations and exams, a well-written essay can make the difference between a pass and a fail, and these essays provide you with the stepping stones that take you towards the degree, qualification and career that you desire. Nothing will expose your uncertainty or lack of knowledge more than a poorly written essay; what Essay Writing Skills does is let you know what is expected of you and how best to go about your research, thus allowing you to get on top of your workload quickly. Essay Writing Skills offers practical and proven ways to maximise your success in all aspects of essay writing. From planning your first essay to assessing primary and secondary sources, it will help you to write in a systematic way that presents a convincing and academically sound argument. A comprehensive guide, it provides guidance and advice on good research techniques, grammar and accuracy, creating an essay plan and correctly citing your sources. It also includes a range of real life example essays and insider knowledge on how your essays are assessed, Essay Writing Skills is an indispensible source of advice, making the writing process clear and manageable to help you improve the quality of your written work.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction: destination graduation 1.1 New realities 1.2 Future realities 1.3 How to use this book 2 The academic essay: its nature and role 2.1 What is an essay? 2.2 Essay conventions 2.3 The essay as assessed coursework 2.4 Developing your academic skills through essay writing 3 The foundation for success 3.1 Using clear language 3.2 Detail that makes for good writing 3.3 If your first language is not English 4 Researching the content 4.1 Deciding which topic to write on 4.2 Understanding the essay title 4.3 Gathering material and using bibliographies 4.4 Developing your academic skills 4.5 Making notes 4.6 Using essay banks 5 Preparing and writing 5.1 A systematic approach 5.2 When it all goes wrong 6 The structure and detail of an essay 6.1 The introduction: making a good start 6.2 The central content 6.3 Referencing 6.4 An appropriate conclusion

Employability, Careers and

260 Entrepreneurship

Business Skills

6.5 Writing essays in examinations 6.6 The purpose and form of a dissertation 7 Example essays and the art of learning from experience 7.1 What your lecturer wants 7.2 A checklist 7.3 The nature of the examples 7.4 An example of guidelines 7.5 Examples 7.6 Dealing with criticism 7.7 A helping hand 7.8 Top tips 8 Looking ahead 8.1 The immediate benefits 8.2 The wider world 8.3 Areas of change 8.4 Skills with ongoing benefit 8.5 Applications in finding work and beyond 8.6 Written communication in the workplace 8.7 Ongoing development


Confident Coding Master the Fundamentals of Code and Supercharge Your Career Edition: 1 Date: 05/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749479633 ISBN Ebook: 9780749479640 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

This book

<< Gives the reader insightful and practical guidance on how to make themselves more employable,

and enhance their career, through coding skills << Teaches the reader how to code using the programming languages of HTML, CSS, JavaScript and Python in a concise, straight-forward, step-by-step format << Endows the reader with the core knowledge to create their own digital product and a foundation for further, advanced learning << Provides the reader with the professionally valuable skills of being able to debug and problem solve, as well as create their own websites and apps for both iPhone and Android. << Online Resources: coding exercises and activities where readers can practice and hone their new skills

Description If you want to master the fundamentals of coding and kick start your career, Confident Coding is the book for you. Everyone has a digital life, but too few truly understand how the software that dominates the world actually works. Coding is one of the most in demand skills on the job market and grasping the basics can advance your creative potential and make you stand out from the crowd. Rob Percival gives you a step-by-step learning guide to HTML, CSS, JavaScript, Python, building iPhone apps, building Android apps and debugging. On reading this book and honing your skills through practice, you will be able to code in each of these languages, build your own website, build your own app and have the confidence to supercharge your employability. Confident Coding provides you with the roadmap you need to enhance your professional life through coding, with insightful and inspirational guidance, including real life success stories, on how to use your new skills. The ability to code can give your CV the edge on the competition, give you greater autonomy and improve your work performance. If you are a self-employed entrepreneur, being able to create your own website or app can grant you valuable freedom and revolutionize your business. If you are an aspiring developer, this book will give you the building blocks to embark on this career path. Online resources include coding exercises and activities where readers can practice and hone their new skills.

Author Information Rob Percival is a web-developer and entrepreneur who has taught over 500,000 students how to code through his online courses on Udemy. His courses have been translated into over five different languages and have taught people all around the world to become proficient and confident webdevelopers.

261

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Why Coding 2.1 Why Coding is Important and What it Can Do For You 2.2 What Coding Is 3 Languages 3.1 HTML 3.2 CSS 3.3 JavaScript 3.4 Python 4 In Practice 4.1 Website Development 4.2 Building an Android App 4.3 Building an iPhone/iPad App 4.4 Debugging 5 Futureproofing Your Career With Coding 5.1 Using Coding to Enhance Your Career Prospects 5.2 Coding and Entrepreneurship: Creating Your Own Business or Product 5.3 Pursuing Coding Further: Becoming a Developer 5.4 Conclusion

Business Skills


Confident Data Skills Master the Fundamentals of Working with Data and Supercharge Your Career Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481544 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481551 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

This book

<< Covers the most important techniques of working with data including visualization, modelling,

preparation, presentation and communication << Contains several inspiring case studies that enable the reader to see how data skills are applied in real companies from around the world, including Netflix, LinkedIn, Goodreads, Deep Blue, AlphaGo and Mike’s Hard Lemonade Co. << Demystifies the seemingly difficult world of data and makes complicated techniques easy to understand through clear language and step-by-step instructions << Gives insightful guidance on how the readers’ new skills can boost their employability, enhance their careers and make a difference to their chosen industry << Provides readers with the opportunity to learn how to innovate with the integral, game-changing knowledge of data science

Description Data science is the most exciting skill you can master. Data has dramatically changed how our world works. From entertainment to politics, from technology to advertising and from science to the business world, data is integral and its only limit is our imagination. If you want to have a vibrant and valuable professional life, being skilled with data is the key to a cutting-edge career. Learning how to work with data may seem intimidating or difficult but with Confident Data Skills you will be able to master the fundamentals and supercharge your professional abilities. This essential book covers data mining, preparing data, analysing data, communicating data, financial modelling, visualizing insights and presenting data through film making and dynamic simulations. In-depth international case studies from a wide range of organizations, including Netflix, LinkedIn, Goodreads, Deep Blue, Alpha Go and Mike’s Hard Lemonade Co. show successful data techniques in practice and inspire you to turn knowledge into innovation. Confident Data Skills also provides insightful guidance on how you can use data skills to enhance your employability and improve how your industry or company works through your data skills. Expert author and instructor, Kirill Eremenko, is committed to making the complex simple and inspiring you to have the confidence to develop an understanding, adeptness and love of data.

Author Information Kirill Eremenko is a data science entrepreneur, instructor and consultant. He is the Founder and CEO of SuperDataScience, an online educational portal for data scientists. He is an expert in leveraging big data to drive business strategy, revamp customer experience and revolutionize business processes. Eremenko is also passionate about delivering high-quality accessible digital education and runs over 20 online courses, taken by over 100,000 students worldwide.

262

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3

Introduction “What is It?” Key Principles Defining Data How Data Fulfils Our Needs The Data Science Mind-Set “When and Where Can I Get It?” Data Gathering and Analysis 3.1 Identify the Problem 3.2 Data Preparation 3.3 Data Analysis (Part I) 3.4 Data Analysis (Part II) 4 “How Can I Present It?” Communicating Data 4.1 Data Visualization 4.2 Data Presentation 4.3 Your Career in Data Science

Business Skills


Confident Digital Content Master the Fundamentals of Online Video, Design, Writing and Social Media to Supercharge Your Career Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480943 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480950 Pages: 200 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

This book

<< Contains inspiring interviews with content experts from Mumsnet, CNN International, HuffPost UK,

Bunsterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Hot Sauce, the UK Government Communication Service, and Crocstar Media << Is relevant to and can empower all career paths, from the creative industries, media and marketing, to technology, education and science << Offers a full guide to the basics of video creation, graphic design skills, photography skills, digital journalism and writing skills specialized to the digital world << Gives insightful soft skills guidance through advice on boosting creativity, career prospects, entrepreneurship and leadership skills in the world of digital << Includes end-of-chapter exercises to help readers put their knowledge into practice and provide an interactive experience

Description Confident Digital Content gives you the opportunity to become digitally multi-skilled and learn the fundamentals of the most important types of digital creativity. Whatever your career path, being able to produce exciting and creative content online, whether through video, design, digital journalism or social media, can supercharge your professional career and empower your entrepreneurial pursuits. Confident Digital Content teaches you valuable hard skills, including how to create and upload great video content, graphic design, photography for social media, community management, digital strategy and metrics, and helps you learn them through practical exercises in every chapter. It also provides insightful guidance on how to boost your career and employability by honing your leadership, creativity and entrepreneurial skills in the world of digital. Case studies from inspiring individuals at organizations including CNN International, Mumsnet, Bunsterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Hot Sauce, HuffPost UK, and Crocstar Media show you real world examples of excellent digital content in practice. This book is your ultimate guide to achieving the technical proficiency and confidence to start an inspiring digital career path, whether your ambition is to rise to the top of your chosen industry, be a successful freelancer or become an entrepreneur.

Author Information

Table of Contents

Adam Waters has been producing digital content for over ten years at a number of production companies and TV channels. He currently works for the British Forces Broadcasting Service, which he joined as their first Head of Digital. He has advised Government departments, charities, ambassadors and senior military personnel. Adam has acted as a juror for the Royal Television Society Journalism Awards, and he mentors young people in creative careers.

1 Introduction 1.1 Why Digital Content Skills are Essential for Your Career 1.2 How to Write for Digital 1.3 Making Great Video 1.4 Graphic Design, Photography and Audio 1.5 Digital Community Building 1.6 Evaluation 1.7 Social Media 1.8 People 1.9 Conclusion

263

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Business Skills


Confident Web Design Master the Fundamentals of Website Creation and Supercharge Your Career Edition: 1 Date: 01/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481001 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481018 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Business Skills

Author Information Kenny Wood has over 12 years of experience in web design and is the founder and director of IndigoMelody, a digital agency that specializes in creating websites, web apps, visual branding and social media strategies for a wide range of businesses. Based between London and Leamington Spa, Kenny has created websites and apps for organizations including SkillPill, Globelynx, the University of Warwick, Crenshaw Associates, Lennon Wright, Gadfly Media and the British Forces Broadcasting Service. He is a regular blogger and created IndigoMelody’s ‘How we Made It’ web design blog and is passionate about digital education.

This book

<< Covers the essential skills and concepts that readers need to understand the end-to-end process

of web design, including coding languages, tools, creating the website, enhancing the website and publishing the website << Provides a step-by-step guide which enables the reader to have built their own basic website by the end of the book << Contains helpful tables, figures and boxed features, and is written in an accessible language to make the complex world of web design easy for the reader to understand << Online Resources: practical exercises online for readers to test out their new skills and consolidate their learning

Description This is your ultimate beginner’s guide to the skills of web design. Confident Web Design takes you on a practical journey during which you will discover the techniques to allow you to publish a basic website from scratch. Whether you want to develop web design skills to set yourself apart in a competitive job market, power your entrepreneurial pursuits by creating a new website to showcase your product or business idea, or simply boost your professional performance in your current job, Confident Web Design is the perfect beginner’s resource. In Confident Web Design, each chapter is supported by exclusive online exercises to allow you to put your knowledge into practice and perfect the techniques. The book’s structure is designed to break down each skill into manageable chunks, aided by helpful examples, technical term glossaries, tables and images to support you as you learn. Written in accessible and engaging language, author Kenny Wood shares his passion and enthusiasm for modern web design through this essential guide. Online resources include practical exercises for readers to test out their new skills and consolidate their learning.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 How the Web Works and the Tools and Languages of Web Design 2 HTML 2.1 HTML Part 1 2.2 HTML Part 2 3 CSS 3.1 CSS Part 1 3.2 CSS Part 2 3.3 CSS Part 3 4 JavaScript 4.1 JavaScript Part 1 4.2 JavaScript Part 2 4.3 JavaScript Part 3 4.4 JavaScript Part 4 5 Putting Everything Into Practice 5.1 Creating the Website 5.2 Getting Your Website Online 5.3 Conclusion

Employability, Careers and

264 Entrepreneurship

Business Skills


The A-Z of Careers and Jobs

This book

<< Contains brand new content for 2018 on digital and technology careers << Provides job-seekers with crucial and concise information: what qualifications are required, what

Edition: 25 Date: 05/28/2018 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482305 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482312 Pages: 368 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

does the job entail, what are the starting salaries and what are the opportunities in the industry << Functions as an easy-to read and non-intimidating guide that is perfect for young people considering their career options << Covers over 300 different career paths available today << Gives careers advisers a one-stop reference guide to a huge range of career options, allowing them to easily direct students to the choices that best suit their ambitions and capabilities

Author Information

Table of Contents

265

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Description From accountant to zoologist, this new edition of The A-Z of Careers and Jobs is your one-stop guide for insightful guidance on more than 300 different career areas in the UK. This book is a quick and informative way to find out about what jobs and careers are out there, from traditional roles to brand new opportunities in the digital world. For those looking for their first job after school or university, or for anyone considering a change of career, this book provides reliable and up-to-date advice on a wide range of professions to help you choose the right path for you. The A-Z of Careers and Jobs covers the practical issues you need to understand, such as the extent of job opportunities in each industry, what personal skills are needed, what experience is required, entry qualifications, training, as well as typical earnings and starting salaries. In an ever more competitive and changing job market, information will help maximize your chances of success. This book is designed to help identify what personal strengths fit to what kinds of work, what skills you should highlight on a CV and what you need to know about each job. The A-Z of Careers and Jobs is also a valuable resource for careers advisers working in schools, colleges and universities who need to keep track of new developments - such as new roles and routes of entry, professional associations and exams - to offer the very best guidance to todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s job hunters.

Employability


Ultimate Cover Letters The Definitive Guide to Job Search Letters and Follow-up Strategies Edition: Date: Price:

4

This book

<< This is the companion title to the highly successful Ultimate CV by best-selling author Martin John

Yate. << Includes a wide selection of letters that can be adapted for individual use across a variety of industries. << Contains a wealth of key phrases for creating a compelling letter that differentiates you from other letters.

Not available in the US and Canada ISBN Paperback: 9780749474539 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477479 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Martin John Yate is an internationally bestselling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies. His best-selling book Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is now in its 8th edition and has sold over 5 million copies. He is also the author of the highly successful Ultimate CV (both published by Kogan Page).

In the competitive world of job-hunting everything rests in the balance of first impressions, so it is of vital importance to know how to write a compelling opening letter when you apply for a position. Ultimate Cover Letters, from best-selling author and careers expert Martin John Yate, describes how to do just that, helping you to open doors to job interviews and offers of employment, and outshine all other candidates. From the very popular Ultimate series, the book offers, as well as sound advice on assembling letters and how to use key â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;power phrasesâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; to get results, over 100 sample letters to cover a variety of situations. These include e-mail responses to on-line applications, speculative letters, letters to answer advertised vacancies, follow-up letters, networking letters and even acceptance and resignation letters. Now including a chapter on how to develop your professional image and integrate it into your job search letter, Ultimate Cover Letters covers all aspects of this crucial part of the jobhunting process in an engaging and approachable way, ensuring you put every chance of success by your side.

1

Cover letters: the secret weapon in your job search 2 The six types of job search letters 3 Know the job, know your customer 4 Develop your professional identity 5 Elements of a great cover letter 6 Assembling your job search letter 7 How to polish and edit your letters for maximum impact 8 The plan of attack 9 Sample letters

Employability, Careers and

266 Entrepreneurship

Employability


Ultimate CV Over 100 Winning CVs to Help You Get the Interview and the Job Edition: Date: Price:

4

Not available in the US and Canada ISBN Paperback: 9780749474546 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477462 Pages: 328 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Martin John Yate is an internationally best selling author and renowned expert on career matters. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies. His top selling title Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions, published by Kogan Page, is now in its 8th edition.

267

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< From renowned careers expert Martin John Yate, author of the best-selling careers title Great

Answers to Tough Interview Questions. << Contains everything you need to know to produce the perfect CV that will differentiate you from the competition. << Includes 100 samples of winning CVs, tailor-made for different job descriptions and special situations.

Description With the current job market overcome with competition, it can feel daunting and inadequate to reduce your whole career experience and ambitions to a single document for Human Resources representatives to review. Ultimate CV, now in its fourth edition and part of the successful Ultimate series, provides you with the key guidance you need to create an irresistible CV that will grab the recruiter’s attention, help you to stand out from other candidates, opening doors to job interviews and maximising the potential for offers of employment. Covering all aspects of this crucial part of the jobhunting process, and with hundreds of sample CVs tailored to specific jobs and industry specifications, careers and CV guru Martin John Yate shows you how to position plain facts into a powerful sales pitch that will get you the job you want. With advice on hunting for jobs, this indispensable book will give you all the guidance you need to create a distinctive, professional CV that will help you get that dream job you have been going after.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

How to make your CV shine Get inside your customer’s head The basic ingredients Building your professional identity 5 Choose your format 6 The simplest, smartest, fastest way to write your CV 7 How to give your CV impact 8 Getting the most from your CV 9 Ready to launch 10 The CVs…

Employability


Ultimate New Job The Definitive Guide to Surviving and Thriving As A New Starter Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2012 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749464097 ISBN Ebook: 9780749464844 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information James Innes is an accomplished author and the Founder and Managing Director of The CV Centre - the UK’s leading CV consultancy. Following more than a decade of experience heading up The CV Centre, James is widely considered to be one of the UK’s leading careers experts. Visit his website at: http:// www.ineedacv.co.uk/.

This book

<< New in the successful Ultimate series and written by career expert and leading author James Innes, a regular contributor to the Guardian’s ‘CV Clinic’ << Extra material available on The CV Centre’s website, offering interactivity, forums and a video blog. << Includes essential advice, such as managing a difficult new boss and managing your image.

Description How long do you stay in each job? Millions of us change roles on average every three years. A nation of job-hoppers, every promotion or change presents the same issues and worries and there’s no getting away from those first day nerves. Ultimate New Job will prepare you for the toughest few months of your life, when fitting in is everything and first impressions count. Covering every aspect of starting a new job or internship, it tackles the top fifteen questions that people ask when starting a new position, from handling the offer and resigning from your current post, to researching the organisation, networking and finding your place within the team. With realistic, practical advice, Ultimate New Job tackles all of your concerns head on, making your first weeks and months as smooth a transition as possible - for you and your new employer.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 A new job 2.1 Handling the offer 2.2 Leaving your last job 2.3 Being prepared 3 The first week 3.1 D-Day – your first day 3.2 Understanding your purpose 3.3 Knowledge is power 4 The people 4.1 Managing your new boss 4.2 Finding your place within the team 4.3 Handling your subordinates 4.4 Networking and socialising 5 The learning curve 5.1 Planning and organisation 5.2 Time management 5.3 Communication 5.4 Writing skills 5.5 Presentations 5.6 Meetings 5.7 Remote working 5.8 Working abroad 6 Coping with problems 6.1 Dealing with difficult people 6.2 Handling office politics 6.3 Pressure and stress 6.4 Coping with change at work 6.5 Imposing change at work 6.6 Feel like jumping ship? 7 Onwards and upwards 7.1 Training 7.2 Performance appraisals 7.3 Time for a pay rise? 7.4 Getting promoted 7.5 Moving on

Employability, Careers and

268 Entrepreneurship

Employability

8 My five top tips to survive and thrive in your new job 8.1 Survive and thrive


Ultimate Job Search Master the Art of Finding Your Ideal Job, Getting an Interview and Networking Edition: 5 Date: 07/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481407 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481414 Pages: 256 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques, and writes regularly on job search and career issues. She is the author of the best-selling Ultimate Interview, Readymade CV and Readymade Job Search Letters (all Kogan Page).

This book

<< Provides everything job hunters need to know in one book on how to maximise their chances of securing a new role << Includes insightful comments from industry experts giving a real-life view of the job market << Contains sample CVs for different types of jobs and sector specific interview questions << Prepares candidates to deal with difficult interview questions and tough job market conditions, reducing anxiety and boosting confidence << Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Description Do you want to find your ideal job? Do you need to be able to prepare an excellent CV, answer tough interview questions and impress prospective employers? A ‘one-stop shop’ for all job hunters, this 5th edition of Ultimate Job Search takes the stress out of job hunting and provides advice on every stage of the job hunting process, from preparing a powerful CV that will get you noticed; sample cover letters and emails that come across as genuine; making a great impression at interviews; to dealing with offers and rejections in a positive manner. From the best-selling Ultimate series, the guidance in this book will help you shine and will demonstrate to future employers that you’re the person for the job. With an exhaustive breadth of detail and real-life up-to-date comments from employers and recruitment professionals, Ultimate Job Search is invaluable to anyone looking to get their dream job at any stage of their career. About the series: The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Introduction First Things First The Highly Employable Candidate Making a Start The Skills they Want from Everyone Your CV CV Problems CVs with Special Considerations CVs for Specific Jobs Application Forms Covering Letters Telephone Calls The Job Search Your Online Job Search Job Search Strategies Interviews – Making a Great Impression Answering Interview Questions Questions for Specific Jobs Questions for School and College Leavers Interviews and More Offers and Rejections

Employability, Careers and

269 Entrepreneurship

Employability


Ultimate Interview Master the Art of Interview Success with 100s of Typical, Unusual and Industry-specific Questions and Answers Edition: 5 Date: 07/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481384 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481391 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques. She writes regularly for a wide range of publications on job search and career issues and is also the author of Ultimate Job Search, Readymade CVs and Readymade Job Search Letters (all published by Kogan Page).

This book

<< Contains 100s of sample interview questions, as well as sample answers, from a diverse range of

job types including management, sales and marketing, administration, customer relations, technical jobs, creative jobs and practical jobs << Helps you to prove yourself as an ideal candidate and covers the soft skills that will help you succeed at interview such as rapport building, communication and confidence << Gives insightful guidance on how best to impress employers through giving the best answers to common, difficult and unusual interview questions << Includes guidance on alternative forms of interviewing, including panel interviews, telephone interviews and video interviews << Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Description Are you preparing for an upcoming interview? Are you nervous about making a good impression or want to practice for difficult questions? From the bestselling Ultimate series, Ultimate Interview will give you all the guidance you need when preparing to ace the interview for your dream job. Renowned careers expert, Lynn Williams, will give you the edge on: understanding your interviewer and what they are looking for, highlighting the evidence that you are the perfect candidate through skills and industry knowledge, standing out from the competition, answering questions professionally, navigating the beginning of the interview, coping with difficult questions, dealing with off-the-wall questions, looking the part and knowing how to behave in telephone, video, panel and assessment center interviews. Ultimate Interview, now in its 5th edition, is a must-have for all serious job-seekers. It contains 100s of sample interview questions, with answer examples, tailored by industry experts to give you a personalized resource. It covers jobs in management, sales and marketing, administration, customer relations, technical industries, practical industries and creative industries. About the series: The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or rĂŠsumĂŠ and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

270

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Introduction Know Your Enemy Prepare Yourself Standing Out Answering Questions Starting in the Interview Questions they Ask Everybody Questions for Practical Jobs Questions for Creative Jobs Questions for Clerical and Administrative Jobs Questions for Sales and Marketing Jobs Questions for Technical Jobs Questions for Management Jobs Questions for Customer Relations Jobs Questions for School and College Leavers Tackling the Difficult Questions Dealing with Tricky Questions Answering Off-the-Wall Questions Your Questions for the Interviewer Variations on the Theme Interview Extras Looking the Part What Happens Next?

Employability


Ultimate IQ Tests 1000 Practice Test Questions to Boost Your Brainpower Edition: 3 Date: 08/28/2015 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749474300 ISBN Ebook: 9780749474317 Pages: 320 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Ken Russell and Philip Carter are IQ test experts who are continually devising new IQ tests and puzzles. They have produced over 60 books covering all aspects of testing, crosswords, puzzles and reasoning. These include the best-selling Test your IQ published by Kogan Page. Philip Carter is also the author of IQ & Psychometric Tests, The IQ & Psychometric Test Workbook, Test and Assess Your IQ, Advanced IQ Tests, IQ and Aptitude Tests, IQ and Personality Tests, Succeed at IQ Tests, all published by Kogan Page.

271

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Is the biggest book of IQ practice tests available with 1000 psychometric

test questions substantially more than the nearest competitor << Is perfect for those facing an IQ test or for puzzle enthusiasts << Covers every aspect of IQ testing, including verbal reasoning, diagrammatic reasoning and lateral thinking << Is written by two of the undisputed masters of IQ testing, Philip Carter and Ken Russell who have created over 60 books on the subject

Description IQ tests are routinely encountered in recruitment for various industries, including for jobs in the government, armed forces, and education as well as industry and commerce. Competition is fierce and employers are determined to cut the weak from the strong so it is essential for candidates to be prepared. Ultimate IQ Tests is the biggest book of IQ practice tests available. Written and compiled by experts in IQ testing and brain puzzles, it contains 1000 practice questions organized into 25 tests, with a simple guide to assessing individual performance. With a brand new test in this edition, designed to be more challenging than the others so you can track progress, this is the best one-stop resource to mind puzzles. Working through the questions will help you to improve your vocabulary and develop powers of calculation and logical reasoning. From the best-selling Ultimate series, Ultimate IQ Tests is an invaluable resource if you have to take an IQ test, but itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s also great fun if you like to stretch your mind for your own entertainment - and boost your brain power.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Test 1 - Questions Test 2 - Questions Test 3 - Questions Test 4 - Questions Test 5 - Questions Test 6 - Questions Test 7 - Questions Test 8 - Questions Test 9 - Questions Test 10 - Questions Test 11 - Questions Test 12 - Questions Test 13 - Questions Test 14 - Questions Test 15 - Questions Test 16 - Questions Test 17 - Questions Test 18 - Questions Test 19 - Questions Test 20 - Questions Test 21 - Questions Test 22 - Questions Test 23 - Questions Test 24 - Questions Test 25 - Questions

Employability


Ultimate Aptitude Tests Over 1000 Practice Questions for Abstract Visual, Numerical, Verbal, Physical, Spatial and Systems Tests Edition: 4 Date: 07/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482084 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482091 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Jim Barrett is a chartered psychologist with years of experience in advising organizations on their selection procedures. He is a bestselling author and has written many testing books, including The Complete Personality Assessment, How to Pass Advanced Aptitude Tests, The Aptitude Test Workbook and he is co-author of Test Your Own Aptitude, all published by Kogan Page. Tom Barrett runs a online software development consultancy. He specialises in web software architecture, web standards, usability and content management. Tom is a psychology graduate and has developed the software for the online psychometric tests available at insight-tests.com.

272

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Contains 1000 questions of essential practice for recruitment tests and aptitude assessment

procedures << Includes detailed explanations of answers to aid learning and test scoring abilities << Comes with a free suite of online tests which allow the reader to practice and score themselves against others << Gives readers the technical skills and practice opportunities so that they can impress prospective employers and get hired << Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Description Do you need to prepare for an aptitude test for an interview or selection process? Do you want to practice and improve your scores? Ultimate Aptitude Tests, now in its fourth edition and part of the best-selling Ultimate series, is the largest and most comprehensive book of its kind, boasting over 1000 varied practice aptitude questions with accompanying answers and explanations. In such a competitive job market, it’s the perfect book to ensure you’re entirely prepared to get those high scores and impress potential employers. Businesses use aptitude tests when recruiting; sometimes even to fast-track potential leaders. Providing essential practice, Ultimate Aptitude Tests includes tests like those you are likely to encounter, including abstract visual tests, verbal and numerical reasoning tests, practical skills and understanding tests, spatial and systems potential tests and logic and intuition tests of different types. This new edition also now includes a brand new section on online testing environments as well as free access to a separate full online test to evaluate your abilities. Ultimate Aptitude Tests is brilliant preparation for candidates wishing to outshine their competition and secure their dream job. About the series: The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you from your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Abstract Visual Tests 2.1 Constructs 2.2 Sequences 2.3 Perceptual 3 Abstract Numerical Tests 3.1 Reasoning 3.2 Interpolation 4 Abstract Verbal Tests 4.1 Deduction 4.2 Analysis 5 Physical Tests 5.1 Dynamics 5.2 Tracing 6 Spatial Tests 6.1 Formation 6.2 3D Tests 7 Practical Numerical Tests 7.1 Reckoning 7.2 Arithmetic 7.3 Figure Work 7.4 Number Skills 7.5 Calculations 8 System Tests 8.1 Systems 8.2 Coding 9 Practical Verbal Tests 9.1 Word Usage 9.2 Vocabulary 9.3 Verbal Precision 10 Online Testing 10.1 Core Intelligence Test

Employability


Ultimate Psychometric Tests Over 1000 Practical Questions for Verbal, Numerical, Diagrammatic and Personality Tests Edition: 4 Date: 08/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481636 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481629 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Mike Bryon is an expert in psychometrics and training solutions. He is the author of many testing books, including How to Pass Graduate Psychometric Tests, The Graduate Psychometric Test Workbook, How to Pass Advanced Numeracy Tests, The Advanced Numeracy Test Workbookand How to Pass the Civil Service Qualifying Tests all published by Kogan Page.

273

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Is the biggest ever psychometric test book boasting over 1000 practice questions << Is designed to be an ideal companion to self study and practice of psychometric tests to help you land your dream job << Offers sample questions from every major type of test including verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning, personality questionnaires, non-verbal and diagrammatic reasoning tests, spatial and recognition tests, situational awareness questions, quantities and conversions << Is written by best-selling author Mike Bryon, a recruitment consultant and psychometric testing guru << Is part of the successful Ultimate series, containing practical advice on essential job search skills and offering the best chance at getting the job you want

Description Are you faced with an upcoming psychometric test as part of a job application? Do you want to practice your technique and perfect your score? The best-selling Ultimate Psychometric Tests, now in its fourth edition, is the biggest book of its kind, containing over 1000 practice test questions of a multitude of different types of tests with accompanying answers and explanations. Providing sample questions from all the major types of test, including verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning, personality questionnaires, non-verbal and diagrammatic reasoning, new tests also now include spatial recognition and visual estimation, situational awareness tests as well as quantities and conversion tests. Ultimate Psychometric Tests also includes an overview of which companies employ which tests, including L’Oreal, Sony, HMV, Toyota and IKEA among others and it has plenty of advice on how to get test-wise and seriously improve scoring. The use of psychometric tests in job selection procedures is more prominent than ever and for unprepared candidates they represent a considerable challenge that can get in the way of them successfully landing a new job. This is your definitive guide to acing any type of psychometric testing you encounter as well as keeping your mind sharp and active. About the series: The Ultimate series contains practical advice on essential job search skills to give you the best chance of getting the job you want. Taking you all the way from starting your job search to completing an interview, it includes guidance on CV or résumé and cover letter writing, practice questions for passing aptitude, psychometric and other employment tests, and reliable advice for interviewing.

Table of Contents 1

Psychometric Tests – What Are They? 2 How to Pass Psychometric Tests and How to Use this Book 3 Verbal Reasoning 4 Numerical Reasoning 5 Personality Questionnaires 6 Non-Verbal Reasoning, Mechanical Comprehension and Data Interpretation 7 Answers and Explanations

Employability


Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions Edition: Date: Price:

9

Not available in the US and Canada ISBN Paperback: 9780749471453 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477486 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Martin John Yate is an internationally bestselling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies and is widely respected as the expert on all career matters. He is also the author of The Ultimate CV and The Ultimate Cover Letters, both published by Kogan Page.

274

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< The original and still the best guide to preparing for interviews and interview techniques << Over 5 million copies sold of previous editions << Includes updated information on how to highlight your useful transferable skills along with teamworking and manageability skills.

Description Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is the best-selling job-hunting book of all time and the essential companion for all jobseekers. It takes you through the whole process, from composing your CV and preparing for interviews to interview techniques, answering tough questions and even negotiating your new salary. This fully revised new edition includes valuable advice on highlighting your transferable skills and tips for using the internet and social networking as part of your job search. Full of examples of difficult questions that interviewers like to throw at you, Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is suitable for anyone at any stage of their career, providing all the guidance needed to land that dream job. An indispensable guide that blows the competition away, no serious job-hunter can afford to ignore it.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3

Introduction The Well-Stocked Briefcase The realities of job hunting The productive CV Networking and the successful job search 2.4 Network-integrated job search tactics 3 Getting to Square One 3.1 Making contact 3.2 The telephone interview 3.3 Dressing for interview success 3.4 Body language 3.5 The curtain goes up on the job interview 4 Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 4.1 The five secrets of securing a job offer 4.2 Why interviewers do the things they do 4.3 How to knock â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;em dead 4.4 Questions of manageability and team spirit 4.5 The stress interview and illegal questions 4.6 Welcome to the real world 4.7 The graceful exit 5 Finishing Touches 5.1 Out of sight, out of mind? 5.2 Snatching victory from the jaws of defeat 5.3 Negotiating the offer 5.4 Multiple interviews, multiple offers 5.5 Conclusion: the glittering prizes

Employability


Readymade CVs Winning CVs and Cover Letters for Every Type of Job Edition: 5 Date: 04/28/2012 Price: $12.99 ISBN Paperback: 9780749465056 ISBN Ebook: 9780749465063 Pages: 248 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques. She writes regularly for a wide range of publications on job search and career issues and is also the author of Readymade Job Search Letters, Ultimate Interview and Ultimate Job Search.

This book

<< Fully revised best-selling guide with over 100 << 000 copies sold. << Now includes a guide to writing the perfect covering letter to showcase your CV, with advice on style, presentation, wording and common mistakes to avoid.

<< Online Resources: downloadable sample CVs Description

This best-selling guide sets out the ground rules for preparing a CV by showing how to select which details go in and which stay out, how to lay out and present a CV and how to make a great first impression. It includes sample CVs for a wide variety of jobs: practical, creative, administrative, sales and marketing, technical and management, with online template CVs and covering letters ready for you to download and customise. Readymade CVs also looks at specific â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;trickyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; situations such as getting your first job, returning to work after a career break, continuing in work as a mature employee or after retirement. With the addition of action words and positive phrases to help you put together the perfect CV for any job or situation, this is a truly comprehensive and indispensable resource.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

275

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

The basic CV Your CV section by section The tailor-made CV Covering letters Your online CV Problems, problems Starting out Starting again Keeping going CVs for practical jobs CVs for creative jobs CVs for clerical and administrative jobs CVs for sales and marketing jobs CVs for technical jobs CVs for management jobs Never be lost for words

Employability


Superconductors Revolutionize Your Career and Make Big Things Happen Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749482367 ISBN Ebook: 9780749482374 Pages: 232 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Derek Loudermilk is a serial US entrepreneur, business coach and international speaker. A dedicated professional adventurer and digital nomad, he is also the host of the Art of Adventure Podcast and the Uncharted Family Podcast.

276

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Pushes the reader to triumph over increasingly disrupted career paths by fully developing

themselves with the original, practical and hands-on exercises at the end of every chapter << Shows the reader how they can become irreplaceable, get an edge on the competition and stay valuable in a context of growing automation, AI, and increased outsourcing << Covers crucial skills that help the reader be the best they can be at creativity, charisma, relationship building, getting ahead, learning, story telling, and making their ideas reality << Contains inspiring interviews with cutting-edge experts, including entrepreneurs, podcasters, venture capital experts, digital storytellers and human behaviour specialists

Description The steady career path is a thing of the past: disruption is here to stay. You need to be able to keep learning, growing and reinventing yourself to stay valuable in the midst of this change. Those who succeed in this new world will be the ones who have skills that are always in demand and cannot be replaced. Creativity, charisma, confidence, constant learning, storytelling, adaptability and tribe building are the keys to having a thriving professional life and turning ideas into reality. Superconductors is your treasure trove of exclusive interviews and hands-on self-development exercises to inspire you and push you into action. Derek Loudermilk brings together some of the best minds to coach you on every skill, including entrepreneurs, podcasters, venture capitalist experts, human behaviour hackers, journalists and digital storytellers. Michael Margolis, Vanessa Van Edwards, Derek Muller, Jason Zook, Linda Rottenburg are just some of the people giving you original insights and advice to help you form your own path. If youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re ambitious and you want to carve your place in this chaotic, but exciting, new world of work then you need to be a superconductor: you need to have the creative energy, the ability to build great networks and the charisma to make big things happen. Whether you want to live as a digital nomad, an entrepreneur or be a formidable force in your chosen industry, Superconductors gives you the unique insight and hands-on tools to be the best you can be.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction - How to Be Valuable in a World Where Value is Constantly Changing 2 Harnessing the Value of Your Relationships and Networks 3 Achieving Big Things in Shorter Time Frames 4 Optimizing Your Creativity 5 Doing Your Best Work 6 Accelerating How You Learn 7 Telling Your Story 8 Portraying Your Best Self the Science of Charisma and Confidence 9 Building Extraordinary Relationships 10 Dreaming Big 11 Finding the Fun in Innovation and the Healthiness in Competition

Employability


Knockout Job Interview Presentations How to Present with Confidence Beat the Competition and Impress Your Way into a Top Job Edition: 1 Date: 02/28/2010 Price: $14.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749457150 ISBN Ebook: 9780749459253 Pages: 144 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Rebecca Corfield is an expert in career management, presentation skills and organizational development. A former President of the National Institute of Career Guidance in the UK, she advises individuals and companies on career issues and personal change and her interview advice for students regularly appears on Times Online. She is the author of the bestselling titles Preparing the Perfect CV, Successful Interview Skills, Preparing the Perfect Job Application and The Redundancy Survival Guide all published by Kogan Page.

277

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< From the bestselling author of Preparing the Perfect CV << Practical tips on how to make your job interview presentation stand out from the crowd << Vital tips on difficult situations and how to rise above them and impress the panel Description Presenting in a job interview can be incredibly daunting. Candidates often lack the confidence and skills so they fail to do themselves justice and impress the panel. Knockout Job Interview Presentations takes you through the whole process of planning and making a presentation as part of a job interview and helps you to understand what employers are looking for and learn how to provide it. It will help you to have a positive outlook, plan so that you know what to include and how, cope with seen and unseen briefs, make all of the practical preparations, then get it right on the day, handling nerves and making an impact. Rebecca Corfield also looks into difficult situations that may occur and gives advice on how to rise above them and continue with your presentation unscathed. This practical, inspiring book will give you the advantage over other job candidates so that you make a presentation with ease and confidence and trump the competition.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Introduction The basics Planning your presentation Preparation Presentation Learning and improving Facing tricky situations

Employability


Preparing the Perfect Job Application Application Forms and Letters Made Easy

This book

<< From the bestselling author of Preparing the Perfect CV << Practical tips on how to make job applications stand out from the crowd << Sample questions and answers and downloadable application forms and letter templates << Rebecca Corfieldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s step-by-step guide will make you feel more in control of the process. << Online Resources: downloadable sample application forms

Edition: 5 Date: 10/28/2009 Price: $14.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749456535 ISBN Ebook: 9780749458546 Pages: 176 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Description

Author Information

Table of Contents

Rebecca Corfield is an expert in career management, presentation skills and organizational development. A former President of the National Institute of Career Guidance in the UK, she advises individuals and companies on career issues and personal change and her interview advice for students regularly appears on Times Online. She is the author of the bestselling titles Preparing the Perfect CV, and Successful Interview Skills, both published by Kogan Page.

278

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Application forms are designed to filter out unsuitable applicants and to ensure candidates for interview can be assessed objectively. How do you make sure that you pitch yourself properly and ensure your job application is more successful than those of others in the candidate pool? This book holds the answer. Preparing the Perfect Job Application is written for todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s candidate, seeking success in an evercompetitive and more unforgiving jobs market. The book brims with focused, pertinent and insightful advice designed to help you highlight your real talents and demonstrate how they would be useful to your prospective employer on your application form or letter. Online supporting resources for this book include downloadable sample application forms.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Introduction The process of applying for jobs Using the internet What are employers looking for? What to put in your application Presentation Guidelines and examples Letters of application How to get that job!

Employability


Assessment Centre Success Your Ultimate Resource of Practice Exercises and Sample Questions to Help you Ace the Activities, Beat the Competition and Impress Employers Edition: 1 Date: 07/28/2018 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749483135 ISBN Ebook: 9780749483142 Pages: 240 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: General Subject: Employability

Author Information Tony Weightman has over 30 years’ experience as a HR consultant for major organizations including GSK, Nestle, Virgin Atlantic and Transport for London. He has developed and run assessment centres for some of the UK’s largest organizations across several industries including food, engineering, hospitality and the charity sector, as well as for MBA candidate development.

This book

<< Contains one of the highest numbers of practice exercises and questions on the market, developed and sourced by an expert Assessment Centre planner << Is full of insider tips and tricks from author Tony Weightman who has run Assessment Centres for major clients including GSK, Nestle, Virgin Atlantic and Transport for London << Helps job seekers gain confidence by giving them the tools to practice showcasing the kinds of skills that top employers are looking for - from leadership and team work, to decision making and keeping calm under pressure << Provides essential practice for all aspects of the Assessment Centre, including individual exercises, interviews, group exercises, presentations and psychometric testing

Description Assessment Centre Success is your road map to mastering the skills, exercises and challenges that you’ll be faced with when trying to secure that prized job offer. An Assessment Centre can be daunting: you are likely to face a full day of challenging exercises, tests and skilled competitors. However, with the right level of practice and preparation, you will be able to confidently tackle whatever employers may throw at you. Written by experienced Assessment Centre planner, Tony Weightman, Assessment Centre Success contains a bank of practice exercises and insider tips to help you succeed. Individual exercises are covered, including how to deliver good presentations, reports, interviews and analysis under pressure as well as group exercises such as problem solving and team presentations. Expert guidance on how to demonstrate the key skills employers are looking for helps you understand how to show yourself in the best possible light under challenging circumstances: including leadership, team work, industry knowledge, keeping calm under pressure, decision making, analytical skills, confidence and communication skills.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

279

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Introduction What is an Assessment Centre? What Employers are Looking For How Will it Work? How to Prepare for an Assessment Centre Individual Exercises – Communication Individual Exercises – Analysis Group Exercises Psychometric Tests The Interview Dealing with Difficulties and How to Perform on the Day Gaining Feedback After the Event Conclusion

Employability


Developing Employability and Enterprise Coaching Strategies for Success in the Workplace Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2016 Price: $44.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749478476 ISBN Ebook: 9780749478483 Pages: 296 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Professional/Reading List Subject: Employability NOTE: NOT available on inspection

Author Information Doug Strycharczyk is Managing Director of AQR, a consultancy and provider of psychometric tests, tools and development programmes. Doug has held a variety of HR and consultancy roles in the private and public sectors. He is the co-author of Developing Mental Toughness, co-author of Developing Resilient Organizations and a contributor to Psychometrics in Coaching, all published by Kogan Page. Charlotte Bosworth is Director of Skills and Employment at OCR, which develops employability and enterprise programmes for schools and colleges around the world.

This book

<< Shows how to support clients in developing resilience, confidence, motivation, interpersonal skills

and entrepreneurial skills - important outcomes missed by traditional career support which focuses on how to find a job << Enables you to help clients develop attributes and behaviours that are valued by employers as well as useful in developing opportunities and managing careers << Provides credible psychometric measures and tools, CARRUS and MTQ48, for assessing and developing employability << Includes guidance on how to work with people of all needs and backgrounds, with sections on social mobility and disadvantage

Description Developing Employability and Enterprise shows how to help others develop the behaviours and attributes needed to thrive in the modern workplace. It offers coaches, career advisors and educators a complete guide to what employability looks like in the 21st century, both for new entrants to the world of work and those finding themselves in situations where they need to secure a new job or even career. The book shows how employability can be measured and how skills and attributes such as resilience, confidence, motivation, dealing with others, overcoming challenges and entrepreneurship can be developed through coaching and mentoring. Supported by the latest research from academia, government bodies, and practitioners, Developing Employability and Enterprise brings together some of the most influential thinkers around the world to offer a new approach to career management that looks beyond simply offering advice on résumés and CVs, job applications, job searches and interviews. It offers practical guidance on what attributes to develop and tools for how to do this including assessment options, sample exercises, notes on how to use the concepts in practice and global case studies.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Why employability employability and economic The growing importance of vitality employability 18 Employability and enterprise Models of employability 19 Employability training and Developing employability coaching to clients with mental and enterprise: Tackling health problems the challenge of youth 20 The role of sport in developing unemployment and social life skills, employability and mobility enterprise Developing mental readiness for the world of work – building confidence and understanding employment journeys Giving young people a clear line of sight to work Helping individuals develop selfconfidence and interpersonal skills Making the best choices for jobs, careers and study Presenting personal information for employers Selection – Interviews and assessments centres/tests Work placements and internships Delivering effective work experience Enterprise – More than being Richard Branson Coaching for employability and enterprise Developing mindset and mental toughness Global perspectives – China and the Far East Lifelong learning is the key to

Employability, Careers and

280 Entrepreneurship

Employability


Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation International Case Studies and Practice Edition: 1 Date: 03/28/2016 Price: $34.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749475918 ISBN Ebook: 9780749475925 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Entrepreneurship

Author Information Ken Banks, founder of global non-profit organization kiwanja.net, devotes himself to the application of mobile technology for positive social and environmental change in the developing world. He is a PopTech Fellow, a Tech Awards Laureate, an Ashoka Fellow and a National Geographic Emerging Explorer. He was appointed Entrepreneur in Residence at CARE International in 2015, elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts in 2012, and in 2013 he was nominated for the prestigious TED Prize.

This book

<< Showcases innovative solutions to social problems through case studies from Africa, India, the

United States and Europe << Draws out the lessons learned by each innovator, enabling the reader to learn from their successes and mistakes << Bridges the gap between business and social entrepreneurship by exploring new business models to support social innovation << Provides inspiration and practical guidance for social entrepreneurs and those studying social entrepreneurship

Description Social innovation and social entrepreneurship look for creative and affordable solutions to specific societal problems. Fuelled by the spread of the internet and the ubiquity of mobile phones, there are more people working to solve pressing social and environmental problems in the world today than ever before. Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation presents the journeys of pioneering - and often accidental - social innovators who, faced with a problem, used their courage, tenacity and creative thinking to find a solution. Using their own words to reflect upon their experiences, these cases do not gloss over the setbacks and the dead-ends social entrepreneurs can face. Instead, readers will gain a realistic insight into the challenges and an engaging look at the problem-solving mindset needed to overcome them. From a life-saving project to bring solar-powered lighting to midwives in Nigeria, to a news dissemination service that’s grown from small beginnings to have a global impact, each case study draws out the lessons learnt by the innovators, providing guidance and advice for those looking to follow in their footsteps. Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation is an invaluable resource for social entrepreneurs and innovators looking for new ideas and insight into what really works - and what doesn’t.

Table of Contents 1 1.1

1.2 1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7 1.8

1.9

281

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Introduction, by Ken Banks of kiwanja.net ‘Wonders of the Solar System: Reducing Maternal Mortality in Developing Regions’, by Laura Stachel of We Care Solar ‘Closing Latin America’s Digital Divide’, by Rodrigo Baggio of Centre for Digital Inclusion (CDI) ‘Patent Wars: Fighting Big Pharma to Enable Access to Drugs for All’ by Priti Radhakrishnan of I-MAK ‘Data Science, Technology and Design for Social Justice’ by Jessica Anderson and Joumana al Jabri of Visualizing Impact ‘Bringing the Silicon Valley Revolution in Technology and Business to Global Health’ by Joel Selanikio of Magpi ‘Food Waste Meets Food Poverty: Closing the Loop’ by Kelvin Cheung and Michael Norton of Foodcycle ‘Innovation in Africa’s Silicon Savannah’ by Erik Hersman of Ushahidi ‘Touch-Based Treatment for Autism’ by Louisa Silva of Qigong Sensory Training Institute (QSTI) ‘Reconnecting the Disconnected: A Story of Technology, Refugees and Finding Lost Family’ by David and Christopher Mikkelsen of Refugees United

Entrepreneurship

1.10 ‘Let a Billion Readers Bloom’ by Brij Kothari of Planet Read 1.11 ‘Keep Calm and Dream in Tunisia: Supporting Sustainable Development in Tunisia and North Africa Through Empowering Youth, Women and Farmers’ by Sarah Toumi of Dream in Tunisia 1.12 ‘The Reluctant Geneticist’ by Sharon Terry of Genetic Alliance 1.13 ‘Power to the People: Reengineering Democracy’ by Tarik Nesh Nash of Govright


A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship How to Turn an Idea into a Profitable Business Edition: 1 Date: 11/28/2012 Price: $39.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749466886 ISBN Ebook: 9780749466893 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: Textbook Subject: Entrepreneurship

Author Information Michael J Morris has tutored on various university business school programmes and has extensive experience consulting to small businesses. He is also the author of The First Time Manager, Successful Expansion for the Small Business and Starting a Successful Business, all published by Kogan Page.

282

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Accessible, light weight but prescriptive guide to setting up a business << Can be used as a core or supplementary text on any course which includes entrepreneurial

modules/electives << Includes online study materials for students and lecturers << Online Resources: a business plan template, instructors manual, budget figures and lecture slides for each chapter

Description A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship is a comprehensive framework for the study of entrepreneurship. More than just another book on enterprise, this is a step-by-step guide through the main issues faced by all new entrepreneurs, including: customers, profits, financial management, raising finance, law, operations, taxation, employing staff, managing risk, developing the firm, leadership and a systematic approach to growth. The book is complemented by insightful practical features, such as case studies, exercises, academic model summaries and tips, to help students apply their understanding to the real world. Developed from Kogan Page’s successful and long-running title, Starting a Successful Business, A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship is intended for those taking courses in entrepreneurship who wish to study the subject academically whilst preparing a business plan for their own enterprise, whether for academic or real-world use, or both. A range of support materials for students and lecturers is available, including over 350 PowerPoint slides covering the each chapter, a business plan template, instructors’ manual and budget figures.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2

Introduction Entrepreneurship Entrepreneurship today Becoming and being an entrepreneur 2.3 Not-for-profit (NFP) entrepreneurship 3 Evaluations 3.1 Business ideas – creation and evaluation 3.2 Running a business yourself 3.3 IT strategy 4 Customers and profits 4.1 Markets, market research and forecasting 4.2 Your proposition and pricing 4.3 Channels of distribution 4.4 Marketing communications 5 Financial management, raising finance 5.1 Costing 5.2 Controlling cash 5.3 Further financial planning 5.4 Credit control 5.5 Sources of finance 6 The law and the firm 6.1 Business legal entities and business names 6.2 Criminal and civil law as they affect business 6.3 The law of contract 7 Premises, operations, records and taxation 7.1 Premises – options and implications 7.2 Planning, control and purchasing

Entrepreneurship

7.3 7.4 8 8.1

Safety and quality Financial records and taxation Employing staff Why employ, planning to employ and employment law 8.2 Executing the recruitment plan 9 Managing risk, developing the firm 9.1 Risk management and insurance 9.2 Expansion and culture 9.3 Leadership and management 10 A systematic approach to growth 10.1 The PLG© Programme


Growing Business Handbook Inspiration and Advice from Successful Entrepreneurs and Fast Growing UK Companies Edition: 17 Date: 07/28/2016 Price: $90.00 ISBN Paperback: 9780749477905 ISBN Ebook: 9780749477899 Pages: 272 Format (mm): 240x170 Product Category: ADVERTISING Subject: Entrepreneurship

Author Information Adam Jolly is a business writer and editor specializing in the management of growth, innovation, technology and risk. He is Consultant Editor on a number of Kogan Page titles including The Handbook of European Intellectual Property Management; Clean Tech Clean Profits and The Innovation Handbook.

283

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Endorsed by the Institute of Directors. << Highlights the latest ideas, techniques and solutions for maximising growth and controlling risk. << Fully updated with new case studies and latest fiscal developments. << Gives a comprehensive insight in to the challenges involved in building a high growth venture in 2016 and beyond.

<< Includes case studies and contributions from well-known companies and associations such as

Companies House, Yorktel, Forget About it, Proteus Consultancy, Aberdeen Business School and many more.

Description The Growing Business Handbook, now in its 17th Edition, provides a comprehensive account of the underlying challenges for growing companies, offering insight into techniques and solutions for maximising growth and controlling risks during the course of 2016/17. The Growing Business Handbook will highlight challenges that are likely to be making an impact on SMEs, including the implications of the UK governmentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s new Enterprise Bill, the development of alternative sources of finance and the recommendation that business schools become more engaged in actively supporting SMEs. High growth and high performing businesses of the year ahead will depend less on their type of business and more on their ability to manage the growth process. In markets of all kinds, there will be scope to spot an opening, make a plan, create a compelling offer, find a route to market, develop a financial strategy, become more professional and inspire everyone within a team. The Growing Business Handbook will bring readers up to speed on how best to lead and manage the growth process. By offering an insight into the techniques and solutions for maximizing growth and controlling risks within an enterprise, this must-have offers practical advice and concrete suggestions to help an enterprise reach maximum potential.

Table of Contents 1 Planning for growth 1.1 Disruptive models 1.2 Leadership for performance 1.3 Growth capability 2 Ideas and innovation 2.1 Innovate to compete 2.2 What makes a digital innovator? 2.3 Inspiration from the experts 2.4 IP: a force for growth 3 Building the brand 3.1 How enterprises can market themselves across multiple platforms 3.2 Build your brand to build your business 3.3 How to sell online 3.4 Social media attacks 3.5 The power of purpose 4 People and performance 4.1 Exciting teams 4.2 Recruitment 4.3 Employment policies and compliance 4.4 Changing employee attitudes 4.5 Maximizing human performance 5 Cashflow and working capital 5.1 Cash flow and working capital 5.2 Trade finance 5.3 Credit controls 5.4 Keeping the cash flowing 6 Digital technology and systems 6.1 Next generation workplace 6.2 The push for business automation 6.3 Web hosting 6.4 Data risks

Entrepreneurship

7 Leading growth 7.1 Great leaders 7.2 A leadership team fit for your future 7.3 Authentic leadership for growth 7.4 Collaborative leadership for growth 8 Risk and compliance 8.1 Risky business 8.2 New requirements on companies 9 Growth models 9.1 Acquisitions 9.2 Licence to grow 9.3 How to franchise your business 10 International expansion 10.1 The export plan 10.2 The export process 11 Growth capital 11.1 Raising capital and access to finance 11.2 Raising finance 11.3 When to list


Innovation How Innovators Think, Act and Change Our World Edition: 1 Date: 10/28/2013 Price: $24.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749469665 ISBN Ebook: 9780749469672 Pages: 264 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: TRADE/Professional HYBRID Subject: Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Draws on the author’s interviews with 100 of the world’s greatest innovators << Provides insights into what drives successful innovators and what makes innovations take off, with advice on how to apply them yourself << Supported by analysis of ground-breaking innovations in a range of fields from computer games, food and drink, and technology, to fashion and healthcare << Keyword imagination exercises throughout the text encourage you to find space to think and be inspired by the insights shared in these interviews << Places the author’s findings in the context of today’s global digital economy, with practical advice on how to make the most of its opportunities and avoid the pitfalls << Online Resources: a bonus chapter on the key to innovation

Description Any organisation looking to succeed in the global digital economy of today - and tomorrow - must innovate. Innovation introduces the global pioneers whose ideas and products have driven the changes that have revolutionised our world in every field. It showcases the pioneers who have broken the mould and led the pack in every field from business and technology to food, fashion, culture and healthcare. Drawing on exclusive interviews with more than 100 leading innovators from around the world, Innovation highlights the common denominators linking these highly creative people. It presents the inside track on who’s done what, how they did it, what drives them on, and why innovation is so critical to individuals, businesses and to society as a whole. This book is a fascinating, fast-paced read and more importantly, it will empower you and your business to be more innovative too. Online supporting resources for this book include a bonus chapter on the key to innovation.

Author Information Kim Chandler McDonald is the Co Founder and EVP of KimmiC, a company specializing in lateral thinking and international innovation implementation. A former writer/editor for national and international newspapers and magazines and host/producer of an award winning radio/TV program, Kim is a sought after speaker, columnist and advisory board member. She currently sits on Griffith University’s Enterprise Advisory Board, the Advisory Board of Frost and Sullivan’s - Global Innovation and Leadership Community and is an Academy Fellow of the International Entrepreneurship Academy.

Employability, Careers and

284 Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents 1 2

The me-conomics of the GDE The state of the nation addressed 3 Flat world navigators connecting the dots 4 Me-health 5 Innovating educating 6 The power of the me-dia 7 Being grounded when the sky’s the limit

Entrepreneurship


The Business Plan Workbook A Step-By-Step Guide to Creating and Developing a Successful Business Edition: 9 Date: 02/28/2018 Price: $29.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481797 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481803 Pages: 376 Format (mm): 234x156 Product Category: Textbook/Professional Subject: Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Arms the reader with the tools required to create a successful business plan by taking them step-

by-step through each phase of its development, using 29 actively engaging assignments, which comprise case studies from companies such as Hotmail, Amazon, Honest Burgers and BrewDog, examples, and questions that can be applied to their own plan << New to this edition: Includes fresh case studies and a brand new assignment focusing on competing online: covering creating online content, key words, SEO, Social Media, traffic tracking, affiliate marketing and online advertising << Online Resources: Provides a comprehensive guide to online courses, lectures and case studies, supporting lecture slides, test questions and answers << Showcases a vast range of international case studies including Hotmail, Cobra Beer, IKEA and Amazon, as well as new and updated studies, including BrewDog, Chilango, Honest Burgers and Simply Cook

Description One of the most important steps in launching or expanding a venture is the creation of a business plan. The absence of a written business plan can lead to failure for new businesses, and inhibit growth and development. Based on methodology developed at Cranfield School of Management, The Business Plan Workbook takes a practical approach to the topic of business planning. Perfect for those growing businesses, as well as a range of academic and professional courses, this title takes the reader step-bystep through each phase of the development of a business plan, from creating a competitive business strategy to its writing and presentation. With 29 corresponding assignments that each includes case studies such as Hotmail, Cobra Beer, IKEA and Amazon, actively engaging questions and worksheets, it will enable you to validate your business idea, brand your business, research your market, and raise finance. This new edition includes an additional assignment covering online content, key words, SEO, Social Media, traffic tracking, affiliate marketing and online advertising. With a range of fresh case studies including BrewDog, Chilango and Honest Burgers, this fully updated ninth edition of The Business Plan Workbook is an invaluable and comprehensive guide to all aspects of business planning. Online supporting resources for this book include lecture slides, test questions and answers, and a new guide to online courses, lectures and case studies.

Author Information Colin Barrow has lectured in business schools in the UK, America, Australia, the Far East and throughout Europe and is currently a visiting fellow at Cranfield University. He is also the author of The 30 Day MBA series, Financial Management for the Small Business and Starting a Business from Home (published by Kogan Page). Paul Barrow is a Visiting Fellow at Cranfield, and also a consultant advising SMEs on growth strategies. Robert Brown is a Visiting Fellow at Cranfield and directed the Graduate Enterprise Programme there, where he led a course on entrepreneurship.

285

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Table of Contents 1 Strategy and Purpose 1.1 Coming Up with a Winning Idea For Your Business Plan 1.2 Strategy â&#x20AC;&#x201C; the Big Picture 1.3 You and Your Team 2 Market Research 2.1 Researching Customers 2.2 Researching Competitors 2.3 A Plan For Market Research 3 Competitive Marketing Strategies 3.1 Products and/or Services 3.2 Pricing 3.3 Advertising and Promotion 3.4 Place and Distribution 3.5 People, Process and Physical Environment 3.6 Competing Online 4 Operations and Staffing 4.1 The Selling Methods Plan 4.2 Making, Outsourcing and Supplies 4.3 People and Related Matters 4.4 Legal and Regulatory Factors 4.5 Office Systems 5 Forecasting Results 5.1 The Sales Forecast 5.2 Cash-Flow Projections 5.3 The Profit and Loss Account 5.4 The Balance Sheet 5.5 Break-Even Analysis 5.6 Reviewing Financing Requirements and Options 5.7 Stress Testing Your Business Projections 6 Business Controls 6.1 Financial Controls

Entrepreneurship

6.2 Sales and Marketing Controls 6.3 Other Business Controls 6.4 Planning For Growth 7 Writing Up and Presenting Your Business Plan 7.1 Writing Up and Presenting Your Business Plan


Starting a Successful Business Your Guide to Setting Up Your Dream Start-up, Controlling its Finances and Managing its Operations Edition: 8 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480868 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480875 Pages: 280 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurship

Author Information Michael J Morris has tutored on various university business school programmes and has extensive experience consulting to small businesses. He is also the author of The First Time Manager, Successful Expansion for the Small Business and A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship, all published by Kogan Page.

This book

<< New to this edition: modern and cutting edge case studies from around the world and updated

content on digital businesses and environmental sustainability << Is part of the Business Success series which offers ambitious entrepreneurs the practical advice they need to succeed << Covers all the crucial information needed to make a new business stable and profitable, from guidance on business planning and marketing, to financials and people management << Includes international case studies to ensure that this is a resource grounded in real-life business with a diverse range of inspirational examples

Description The first 18 months of your business is crucial. This is when the majority of new businesses fail and where a lack of proper preparation and forward planning can be your downfall. This eighth edition of Starting a Successful Business is your definitive guide to setting up a business that will thrive. Starting a Successful Business contains the crucial, practical information needed to turn your exciting new idea into a stable and profitable business. It covers each important step in the start-up process in a clear and accessible way. The major problems facing any new business are discussed, potential pitfalls are highlighted and practical advice is offered on key topics such as: ideas for new start-ups, business planning, marketing, franchising, selling and advertising, finances and financial control, taxation, business law and employing staff. Case studies from around the world provide inspiration and real-world guidance to support you as an entrepreneur. Brand new content on cloud computing, digital developments and making your business environmentally sustainable makes this Starting a Successful Business a cutting-edge and modern resource to show you how to make your business a success.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Preface First Thoughts and Foundations Getting Orders, Making Profits Controlling the Money Raising the Money Your Business Name and Legal Status Business and the Law Premises Managing Operations Financial Housekeeping, VAT and Tax Employing People Risk Management and Insurance Sources Of Help After a Successful Launch... Developing Your Firm The PLG Programme For Growth

Employability, Careers and

286 Entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship


Starting a Business From Home Your Guide to Planning Your Home Start-up, Reaching a Market and Creating a Profit Edition: 3 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749480844 ISBN Ebook: 9780749480851 Pages: 304 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurship

Author Information Colin Barrow has spent 15 years applying the principles and knowledge acquired through his own MBA to successfully running companies. He has lectured, researched and collaborated with colleagues in business schools in the UK, America, Australia, the Far East and throughout Europe and is currently a visiting fellow at Cranfield University and teaches there regularly. He is also the author of The 30 Day MBA series, The Business Plan Workbook and Financial Management for the Small Business (all published by Kogan Page).

This book

<< New to this edition: updated content on social media, crowdfunding and digital businesses with

case studies including Moonpig and Not On The High Street << Is part of the Business Success series which offers ambitious entrepreneurs the practical advice they need to succeed << Offers hundreds of innovative ideas for setting up a profitable and successful home-based business and reveals how to find and exploit lucrative business opportunities to help readers grow their businesses << Contains valuable guidance on building business-winning websites and expertly handling social media and digital communications << Provides global case studies of home business success to inspire readers and give the book a solid grounding in real life entrepreneurship

Description For aspiring entrepreneurs and business owners, the possibilities are limitless. The flexibility, freedom and cost-effectiveness that starting-up in the home offers means that more and more entrepreneurs are choosing this as the best location to agilely launch their business. Starting a Business from Home gives you the valuable advice you need on how to run a successful business from your own desk and, crucially, how to rise to the challenge of business expansion. Packed with practical advice, Starting a Business from Home covers how to research your market, business ownership and titles issues, raising money and managing your finances, building and operating a website, writing a business plan, preparing your accounts, taking your product to market and expanding overseas - all from your home. Exercises, end of chapter actions and technical resources in the appendices mean that this is the ultimate practical guide for home-based entrepreneurs. Case studies from around the world showcase best practice and provide inspirational stories from successful businesses that began in the home.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

287

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

Introduction Finding the Right Business Opportunity Picking the Right Business for You Researching the Market Business Ownership and Title Issues Operating from Home Keeping the Communication Lines Open Bringing Your Product or Service to Market Building and Using Your Website Doing the Numbers Raising the Money Preparing a Business Plan Taking on Employees Growing Profitably Starting Up Overseas

Entrepreneurship


How to Prepare a Business Plan Your Guide to Creating an Excellent Strategy, Forecasting Your Finances and Producing a Persuasive Plan Edition: 6 Date: 08/28/2017 Price: $19.95 ISBN Paperback: 9780749481100 ISBN Ebook: 9780749481117 Pages: 224 Format (mm): 216x138 Product Category: General Subject: Entrepreneurship

Author Information Edward Blackwell was a consultant on small business affairs and, as a former accountant, ran his own business for many years. He was the author of several Kogan Page books.

This book

<< New to this edition: guidance on creating business plans for digital-only and digital-first

businesses, the gig economy and presenting your digital strategy in your business plan << Includes in-depth real life examples and analysis of business plans to show readers the process of creating a successful business plan in action << Helps readers to create business plans to appeal to potential financial backers and obtain the investment they need to successfully launch their business << Is part of the Business Success series which offers ambitious entrepreneurs the practical advice they need to succeed

Description An excellent business plan impresses financial backers, provides a clear blueprint for the future of your company and functions as a benchmark against which to measure future growth. How to Prepare a Business Plan explains the process of creating an excellent business plan in an engaging and accessible way. It includes essential coverage of producing cash flow forecasts, planning a business expansion, planning your borrowing and monitoring business progress. Global case studies containing real business plans provide inspiration and real-life practical insight by analyzing the plans, monitoring the businessâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; progress and discussing their problems. Sample business plans also show you the process in action and provide useful examples for creating your own. How to Prepare a Business Plan helps new business owners to consider what they really want out of their business, and to map their own journey and gain a new understanding of their productâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s place in the market, as well as writing a business plan with the clarity, brevity and logic to keep bank managers interested and convinced. Whether looking to start up or expand, this practical advice will help anyone to prepare a plan that is tailored to the requirements of their business - one that will get the financial backing they need.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Introduction Writing a Business Plan Simple Cash Flow Forecasts The Very Small Business Retail and Catering Manufacturing The Digital Business Expanding a Business The Market Planning the Borrowing How Not to Write a Business Plan 12 Maintaining the Plan 13 Small Business and the Trade Cycle 14 Monitoring Progress

Employability, Careers and

288 Entrepreneurship

Entrepreneurship


Do your students need to develop key workplace skills?

creating success OV

ER

CO P I

MILLIO

N

ES SOLD

Help prepare your students to succeed in life after their studies. From taking minutes of meetings and successful time management, to writing a marketing plan and dealing with difficult people, our bestselling Creating Success Series covers topics that no professional can be without.

To learn more visit www.koganpage.com/ creatingsuccess


Index of titles

50 Top Tools for Coaching 132 50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement 136 50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing 143 Accounting and Finance for Managers 79 Accounting for Non-Accountants 80 A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains 242 Anti-Money Laundering 89 A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship 282 A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing 41 Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management 196 Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice 144 Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR 167 Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management 193 Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice 199 Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management 153 Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice 60 Assessment Centre Success 279 Audio Branding 16 Aviation Logistics 213 B2B Customer Experience 13 B2B Marketing Strategy 12 Branded Beauty 27 Branding Inside Out 18 Brand Psychology 25 Brands with a Conscience 21 Business Ethics in Practice 100 Business Operations Models 227 Business Research 96 Business Research Methods 97 Category Management in Purchasing 74 Chartered Public Relations 69 Coaching and Mentoring 134 Commercial Lending 88 Confident Coding 261 Confident Data Skills 262 Confident Digital Content 263 Confident Web Design 264 Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change 186 Container Logistics 219 Content - The Atomic Particle of Marketing 53 Continuing Professional Development 94 Contract Management 93 Corporate Governance Ethics and CSR 99 Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management 72 Cross-Cultural Management in Work Organisations 104 Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking 90 Customer-Centric Marketing 55 Cyber Risk Management 116 Data-Driven HR 159 Data-driven Organization Design 158 Decarbonizing Logistics 223 Decision Making and Problem Solving 257 Decoding the Irrational Consumer 28 Defence Logistics 215 Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management 240 Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions 180 Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D 179 Design Management 64 Developing and Using Consultancy Skills 182 Developing Employability and Enterprise 280 Developing Leadership and Management Skills 171 Developing People and Organisations 178 Developing Skills for Business Leadership 169 Develop Your Presentation Skills 259 Digital Branding 15 Digital Marketing Strategy 29 E-Business and Supply Chain Integration 235 Economics for Business 83 Effective HR Communication 155 E-Logistics 212 Emerging Markets 105 Employee Engagement 135 Employee Relations 142 Employment Law 137 Employment Law 139 Employment Relations 141 Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process 181 Essay Writing Skills 260 Essential Leadership 107 Essentials of Advertising 8 Ethics in Public Relations 67 Evaluating Public Relations 70 Event Planning and Management 37 Excellence in Coaching 131 Experiential Marketing 52 Facilitating Collective and Social Learning 183 Fashion Brands 26 Fashion Logistics 214 Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups 84 Financing the End-to-end Supply Chain 238

290

www.koganpage.com

Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics 249 Forensic Accounting and Finance 81 Fundamentals of Risk Management 114 Geodemographics for Marketers 58 Global Business Ethics 102 Global Logistics 221 Global Supply Chain Ecosystems 239 Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 274 Green Logistics 210 Growing Business Handbook 283 How Cool Brands Stay Hot 19 How to Organize Yourself 258 How to Prepare a Business Plan 288 How to Write a Marketing Plan 63 How to Write Effective Business English 255 Humanitarian Logistics 208 Human Resource Management 151 Human Resource Management at Work 146 Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters 148 Human Resource Management in a Business Context 149 Human Resource Management in Context 152 Human Resource Practice 147 Implementing Key Account Management 40 Improve Your Global Business English 256 Inclusive Talent Management 203 Innovation 284 Innovative B2B Marketing 11 Internal Communications 156 International Finance 77 International Freight Transport 252 International Human Resource Development 166 International Human Resource Management 163 International Human Resource Management 164 International Human Resource Management 165 International Management 106 Introduction To Employment Law 138 Introduction to Global Logistics 209 Introduction to Human Resource Management 145 Introduction to Organisational Behaviour 192 Inventory Management 226 Investment and Portfolio Management 85 IT Governance 103 Kapferer on Luxury 44 Key Account Management 39 Knockout Job Interview Presentations 277 Leadership and Management Development 170 Leadership Team Coaching 133 Leading Change 130 Leading Cultural Change 128 Leading Digital Strategy 31 Leading, Managing and Developing People 168 Leading Procurement Strategy 231 Learning and Development 177 Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace 172 Learning and Talent Development 174 Learning for Organizational Development 176 Logistics and Retail Management 211 Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection 206 Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018 253 Making Sense of Change Management 123 Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management 38 Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning 62 Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change 127 Managing Change 124 Managing Employment Relations 140 Managing the Retail Supply Chain 234 Marine Insurance 217 Maritime Logistics 216 Marketing Analytics 56 Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations 222 Marketing Communications 51 Marketing Value Metrics 57 Market Research in Practice 47 Media Interview Techniques 68 Mobile Marketing 32 Motivation and Performance 197 Myths of Leadership 108 Myths of Management 92 Myths of PR 66 Myths of Work 161 Native Advertising 9 Neuro Design 50 Neuroscience for Organizational Change 126 On Purpose 22 Organizational Behaviour 191 Organizational Change Explained 125 Organizational Management 189 Organization Design 190 Organization Development 184 Packaging Logistics 220 Paid Attention 23

People and Organisational Development 188 People Risk Management 119 Performance Management 194 Performance Management 195 Persuasive Copywriting 10 Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns 65 Port Management 218 Practical Consultancy Ethics 112 Practical Statistics 98 Practical Text Analytics 61 Predictive Analytics for Marketers 59 Predictive HR Analytics 157 Preparing the Perfect Job Application 278 Professional Practice in Learning and Development 175 Professional Services Leadership Handbook 109 Questionnaire Design 48 Radical Business Model Transformation 121 Readymade CVs 275 Relationship Management in Banking 86 Researching and Writing Dissertations 95 Research Methods in Human Resource Management 162 Resourcing and Talent Management 202 Responsible Business 101 Retail and Digital Banking 87 Retail Marketing Strategy 73 Rethinking Prestige Branding 45 Rethinking Reputational Risk 117 Reward Management 200 Reward Management 201 Risk Management 115 Sales and Marketing Channels 75 Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation 281 Social Media Risk and Governance 36 Starting a Business From Home 287 Starting a Successful Business 286 Strategic Decision Making 120 Strategic Internal Communication 154 Strategic Procurement 230 Strategic Sourcing and Category Management 229 Strategic Sourcing Management 228 Strategic Tendering for Professional Services 113 Studying Human Resource Management 150 Studying Learning and Development 173 Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain 236 Superconductors 276 Supplier Relationship Management 233 Supply Chain Ethics 244 Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction 248 Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians 243 Supply Chain Risk Management 250 Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics 237 Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management 241 The Agile Organization 187 The A-Z of Careers and Jobs 265 The Business Plan Workbook 285 The Business Skills Handbook 91 The Buyer’s Toolkit 232 The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing 33 The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook 129 The Escape Industry 17 The Handbook of International Trade and Finance 78 The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management 205 The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills 110 The Leadership Skills Handbook 111 The Lean Supply Chain 247 The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit 246 The Luxury Strategy 42 The Management of Luxury 43 The New Strategic Brand Management 14 The Operations Advantage 225 The PR Professional’s Handbook 71 The Psychology of Work 160 The Risk Management Handbook 118 The TV Brand Builders 20 Ultimate Aptitude Tests 272 Ultimate Cover Letters 266 Ultimate CV 267 Ultimate Interview 270 Ultimate IQ Tests 271 Ultimate Job Search 269 Ultimate New Job 268 Ultimate Psychometric Tests 273 Understanding Digital Marketing 30 Understanding Islamic Financial Services 82 Understanding Organisation Development 185 Understanding Planned Obsolescence 245 Understanding Project Management 198 Understanding Social Media 35 User Research 49 Valuable Content Marketing 54 Video Marketing Strategy 34 Warehouse Management 224 Warehousing and Transportation Logistics 251 What is a 21st Century Brand? 24


Index of titles by author Abley, Richard Adair, John Al-Karaghouli, Wafi Anderson, Lisa Anderson, Valerie APMG Armstrong, Michael

Relationship Management in Banking Decision Making and Problem Solving Understanding Islamic Financial Services Developing Leadership and Management Skills Research Methods in Human Resource Management The Effective Change Manager's Handbook Armstrong's Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice Armstrong, Michael Armstrong's Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management Armstrong, Michael Armstrong's Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR Armstrong, Michael Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management Armstrong, Michael Armstrong's Handbook of Performance Management Armstrong, Michael Armstrong's Handbook of Reward Management Practice Arney, Eileen Learning for Organizational Development Arvinen-Muondo, Raisa Organizational Behaviour Ashdown, Linda Performance Management Atkins, Derek Rethinking Reputational Risk Aylott, Elizabeth Employee Relations Aylott, Elizabeth Employment Law B.Grant, David Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection Bak, Ozlem E-Business and Supply Chain Integration Baker, Peter The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management Bamber, Matt Accounting and Finance for Managers Banks, Ken Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation Barrett, Jim Ultimate Aptitude Tests Barrett, Tom Ultimate Aptitude Tests Barrow, Colin Starting a Business From Home Barrow, Colin The Business Plan Workbook Barrow, Paul The Business Plan Workbook Bassett, David Event Planning and Management Bastien, Vincent The Luxury Strategy Beddow, Alastair Professional Services Leadership Handbook Beevers, Kathy Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace Bell, Fred Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking Bell, John Manners Supply Chain Risk Management Benham, Richard Cyber Risk Management Bennett, Anthony Managing Employment Relations Beresford, Anthony International Freight Transport Beresford, Anthony Port Management Berghaus, Benjamin The Management of Luxury Berkhout, Constant Retail Marketing Strategy Bhattacharjee, Sudakshina Improve Your Global Business English Bhimani, Alnoor Financial Management for Technology Start-Ups Black, Caroline The PR Professional's Handbook Blacker, Keith People Risk Management Blackwell, Edward How to Prepare a Business Plan Bones, Christopher Leading Digital Strategy Booth, Caroline Strategic Procurement Bosworth, Charlotte Developing Employability and Enterprise Boulton, William Facilitating Collective and Social Learning Brace, Ian Questionnaire Design Braithwaite, Alan Business Operations Models Brewster, Chris International Human Resource Management Bridger, Darren Decoding the Irrational Consumer Bridger, Darren Neuro Design Bridger, Emma Employee Engagement Brown, Robert The Business Plan Workbook Browne, Michael Green Logistics Bruel, Olivier Strategic Sourcing Management Bryant, Andy The TV Brand Builders Bryon, Mike Ultimate Psychometric Tests Buglear, John Practical Statistics Burgess, Bev A Practitioner's Guide to Account-Based Marketing Butler, Michael Introduction to Organisational Behaviour Calder, Alan IT Governance Cameron, Esther Essential Leadership Cameron, Esther Making Sense of Change Management Cameron, Sheila Business Research Methods Carlsson, Magnus Strategic Sourcing and Category Management Carter, Philip Ultimate IQ Tests Caunt, John How to Organize Yourself Chapman, Rose Anti-Money Laundering Cheung-Judge, Mee-Yan Organization Development Cheverton, Peter Key Account Management Christopher, Elizabeth International Management Christopher, Martin Humanitarian Logistics Christopher, Martin Business Operations Models Christopher, Martin Leading Procurement Strategy Cichocki, Patricia Organization Design Clark, Nigel Professional Services Leadership Handbook Cluley, Robert Essentials of Advertising Coakes, Elayne Business Research Cohen, Ivan Economics for Business Coleman, Sarah Organizational Change Explained Connelly, Jacqueline Essay Writing Skills Cooper, Cary Myths of Management Corey, Debra Effective HR Communication Corfield, Rebecca Knockout Job Interview Presentations Corfield, Rebecca Preparing the Perfect Job Application Cowan, David Strategic Internal Communication Croucher, Phil The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management

291

www.koganpage.com

86 257 82 171 162 129 144 153 167 196 193 199 176 191 195 117 142 139 206 235 205 79 281 272 272 287 285 285 37 42 109 172 90 250 116 140 252 218 43 73 256 84 71 119 288 31 230 280 183 48 227 164 28 50 135 285 210 228 20 273 98 41 192 103 107 123 97 229 271 258 89 184 39 106 208 227 231 190 109 8 96 83 125 260 92 155 277 278 154 205

Cudby, Adrian Cupman, Julia Cureton, Peter Cureton, Peter John Dani, Samir Daniels, Kathy Davies, Mark Dent, Julian DeSmet, Bram Dibben, Pauline Doloriert, Clair Donnelly, Rory Dowson, Paul Dowson, Ruth Dzamic, Lazar Eagle, Simon Edwards, Dr Martin R. Edwards, Kirsten Eremenko, Kirill Evans, Barry Evans, Barry Fahey, Colleen Farnham, David Fernie, John Fernie, John Findlay, Charles FitzPatrick, Liam Fitzsimmons, Anthony Fletcher, Janet Forsyth, Patrick Francis, Helen Francis, Ronald D French, Ray French, Ray Frost, Stephen Fuller, Matthew Furner, Adrian Furnham, Adrian Furnham, Adrian Gabay, Jonathan Gautier, Chantal Gennard, John Gold, Jeff Gold, Jeff Gorell, Ro Goulding, Steve Grant, David B Grant, David B Grath, Anders Green, Mike Green, Mike Gregory, Anne Griffin, Andrew Grigsby, Mike Grinsted, Susan Grosse, Robert E Guesalaga, Rodrigo Haavisto, Ira Hague, Nick Hague, Paul Hague, Paul N Hall, Simon Hammersley, James Hancock, Dora Hands, David Hardy, Michelle Harrison, Matthew Haslam, Dr Simon Hawkins, Peter Henderson, Iain Henderson, John Hillson, David Hodges, Julie Hodges, Julie Hoek, Remko van Hofmann, Erik Holbeche, Linda Holbeche, Linda Holbeche, Linda Holt, Sue Hopkin, Paul Hopkin, Paul Horlings, Sandra Horn, Roy Horn, Roy Horner, David Houldsworth, Elizabeth Hughes, Mark Hutchinson, Sue Ignarski, Sam Iles, Paul Ind, Nicholas

Commercial Lending Market Research in Practice Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D Developing and Using Consultancy Skills Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics Introduction To Employment Law Implementing Key Account Management Sales and Marketing Channels Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics Employment Relations Facilitating Collective and Social Learning Human Resource Management at Work Business Ethics in Practice Event Planning and Management The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management Predictive HR Analytics Predictive HR Analytics Confident Data Skills The Lean Supply Chain Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations Audio Branding Human Resource Management in Context Fashion Logistics Logistics and Retail Management Financing the End-to-end Supply Chain Internal Communications Rethinking Reputational Risk Introduction to Human Resource Management Essay Writing Skills People and Organisational Development Global Business Ethics Cross-Cultural Management in Work Organisations Leading, Managing and Developing People Inclusive Talent Management Strategic Tendering for Professional Services Professional Services Leadership Handbook Motivation and Performance Myths of Work Brand Psychology The Psychology of Work Managing Employment Relations Leadership and Management Development Developing Leadership and Management Skills 50 Top Tools for Coaching Relationship Management in Banking Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management Fashion Logistics The Handbook of International Trade and Finance Essential Leadership Making Sense of Change Management Planning and Managing